The anatomy of an horse containing an exact and full description of the frame, situation and connexion of all his parts, (with their actions and uses) exprest in forty-nine copper-plates) : to which is added an appendix, containing two discourses, the one, of the generation of animals, and the other, of the motion of the chyle, and the circulation of the bloud / by Andrew Snape ...

THE ANATOMY OF AN HORSE.

BOOK I. Of the Lowest Belly or Paunch.

CHAP. I. Of the Parts investing the whole Body, and first of the Hair.

Whereof Hairs are ingendred. How nouri∣shed. How the Hair comes to fall off. Reasons for the different colour of the hairs. Their use.

BEFORE I take in pieces this Goodly Creature, It will not be amiss if I first give you an account of all these Parts as they lie in order, beginning with that which first appeareth to our View, and that is the Scarf-skin adorned with hairs, wherein (as in a Case) Nature hath wrapped this stately Beast; besides which there are other four, that, with this, are common to the whole bo∣dy, which are, first, the true skin, which lieth next under it; then the fleshy pannicle; under that the fat; and lastly the common membrane of the Muscles. Besides these five, there are other Investing parts, but they are onely proper to particular parts of the body, to which I will speak in their due place, and onely of the common ones here.

First then I will begin with the Hairs, because they meet first with the Sense. They are said to be ingendred of a clammy and earthy Excre∣ment of the third concoction, so that themselves are reputed not so pro∣perly to be called parts of the body, as Excrements. They are void of sense and of animal life, yet they have a vegetative life, such as Plants have, to which they owe their growth.

These Hairs are by some thought to have for their nourishment a pro∣portionable quantity of that juice of which they are generated, continu∣ally ministred unto them. Others think that the Hairs being hollow and porous are nourished as the Feathers of Fowl are, and that is by bloud; for if one pull off a Feather from a young Bird that is unfledged, a pretty deal of its stem will appear bloudy. But though we should grant that the matter of their nourishment were made of bloud, yet certainly it must be very much altered and degenerate from its own nature, before it can be adapted to the hair, seeing the hair of a Man's head (for exam∣ple) grows not onely in living persons, whose bloud runs briskly in their Arteries and Veins, whereby it is kept from corruption, but also in the dead, in whom the whole mass of bloud is devoid of all nutritive power, as has been often observed in bodies preserved unburied. But whatsoever the humour be that nourishes them, it is thrust through the skin by the pores thereof, the action and heat of the body assisting thereunto, where the purer part of it enters the roots of the hair, but the more earthy not being able to enter such almost unperceivable pores, is driven out amongst the hair where it becomes dust; which dust is that that is brought forth with the Curry-combe when a Horse is drest. From hence then it is, that a Horse, though he be never so well dressed one morning, and ne∣ver so clean kept till the next, he shall notwithstanding be as full of dust as he was the morning before; for the cleaner the skin of a Horse is kept, the more open are its pores to transmit a more plentifull nourish∣ment to the hair, whence also there is a greater collection of this ex∣crementitious dust.

And hence may be gathered a reason of the shedding of the hair, which is observed to happen in many Horses that have ill keeping, such as your Cart-horses that seldom have any labour bestowed upon them, for want of which dressing, to remove the dust which lieth upon the mouths of the pores or at the roots of the hairs, the passages, through which the juice should come that nourishes the hair, are obstructed or stopped, and so like dead Leaves from a Tree in Autumn they drop off, or as untime∣ly Fruit falls before the season of the year requireth it.

As for the Colours of the hairs, they are various, according as is the humour which doth predominate in the body: for such as the humour is which is driven forth towards the skin for their nourishment, such will the colour of the hair be. As for Instance:

If the cholerick humour doth most predominate, then are the hairs of a black, a Sorrel or a Chestnut colour; If bloud most predominate, then will the Horse be a bright Bay or Roan; If flegme, then the Horse will be of a milk-white or yellow-dun; If melancholy, then will the Horse be of an Iron-gray or Mouse-dun. Thus much for the colour of the hairs, next I come to the use of them.

The use of the hairs is, first, to cover the skin; secondly, to defend it; thirdly, to be an ornament to it; and lastly, as I have before shew∣ed, to suck up that excrementitious superfluous juice which through the pores of the skin is sent from all parts of the body to them.

CHAP. II. Of the Cuticle or Scarf-skin.

The Scarf-skin. Its use.

THE Hide on which the hairs already spoken of do grow, consists of two Skins, the outer of which is called the Scarf-skin, serving to defend the Body from outward Injuries, and for that intent is of it self Insensible, that it may the better indure the violence of the weather, or other harms which many times happen to it. And for that cause, Na∣ture hath so ordered it, that if at any time it happeneth to be rubb'd off, as often it is by an ill Saddle, and many other ways, it groweth again without a scar or blemish, provided the Parts under it (as particularly the true Skin) be not also violated; for they being spermatical Parts, or made of Seed, cannot easily be restored, which is the reason that most Wounds will not heal up without a scar. Now this Scarf-skin having its matter (of which it is made) from the true Skin and the Vessels that terminate in it, which are of all sorts, both Veins, Arteries and Nerves, none of which reach any farther than the true Skin, it is apparent that this Skin is without sense, it being their office alone to communicate both life, sense and motion to all parts of the Body. And that this Skin is void of sense, may be seen by the cutting of it; as thus, If you cut onely through this Skin, when you go to Rowel a Horse, you shall not find the Horse move for it, neither will it bleed; but if you cut so far as to touch the true Skin under it, you will find him both stir and bleed, for then you touch the little threads of the Vessels, and by violating them, you cause the Horse to feel pain, and also bloud to issue forth.

The use of this Skin, besides being a covering to the whole Body, is to cover the mouths of those small hairy Vessels already spoken of, that the bloud, spirits, or other ichorous or watery Matter do not issue from them, which otherwise they would. Yet its Pores are so large as to per∣mit the vapourous moisture that is thrust out of all parts of the Body to it, to pass through them, either in the form of sweat, or by insensible transpiration. These Pores being many times obstructed or constringed by a sudden cold taken after hard riding, by giving the Horse cold Wa∣ter too soon after it, or by washing him too high in cold Water when he is hot, the Vapours are thereby hindered from coming forth, and so are detained between the two Skins, and there generate evill Distempers, or at least fall from thence into the Limbs, and there cause Inflammations and breakings out, which we call Grease in the heels or Scratchets.

CHAP. III. Of the Cutis or true Skin.

The true Skin. Its substante. Vessels. Colour. Ʋse.

UNder this Scarf, lieth the true Skin, which the Latines call Cutis. Its substance, as I have before shewed, is said to be spermatical, such as being once lost, cannot be restored as formerly it was, but is reunited by a cicatrice or scar, that is bred of the dried and constringed flesh under it; which is the reason no hairs will grow upon that part of the Skin where the scar is, because it is callous and destitute of Pores in which they should grow. This Skin doth encompass the whole Body as well as the Scarf, and hath the same passages for the receiving in, and letting out, for the ease and relief of the Body, as that hath.

It hath for its nourishment, life, and sense, Vessels of all sorts, Veins, Arteries and Nerves, divaricated and branched through it in the smallest hair-like threads, all which terminate in it, none of them being inserted into the Cuticle.

As for its colour, it varieth as do the humours in the Body; for that humour which most abounds, coloureth it with its proper respective co∣lour; as for example, If bloud most abound, then is it most red; if choler do most predominate, then is it yellowish; and so for the other hu∣mours.

Its use is principally to invest and defend the Body, as I have said be∣fore of the Scarf-skin: for as that keeps it from the violent impression of either excessive heat, or cold; so doth this Skin restrain, and, as it were, wall in (as in a Castle) all the spirits and natural heat, which would otherwise in hot weather, or in violent exercise be so fast spent, that they would leave the vital parts destitute, which would occasion the loss of your Beast. But though Nature has made this provision to hinder the dissipation of the spirits, yet has she framed the Skin (as well as the Scarf-skin) full of small Pores, through which upon violent exercise do issue in great plenty hot and moist vapours, which are that we call sweat; yea though the Beast be at rest, if the Air be any whit mild or temperate, warm steams are continually a passing through them by insen∣sible transpiration.

It's also as serviceable in cold weather, for then the more fiercely it is besieged by the cold, the narrower do the aforesaid Pores purse up them∣selves, whereby the internal heat is detained within, and the external cold kept out.

CHAP. IV. Of the fleshy Pannicle.

The names of the fleshy Pannicle. Its situation, and extent. Its Vessels. Its Ʋse.

NEXT to the true Skin, lieth the fleshy Pannicle, called membrana Carnosa, or panniculus carnosus, because in most parts of the Body, it comes near to the nature of flesh, and is truly muscular.

In Man this Membrane is said to lie under the Fat, though some very curious Anatomists deny that Man has any such Membrane at all, save in the Forehead; and of this opinion is Dr. Glisson. I will not intermed∣dle in that Controversie, as being not proper for me; but in Horses it lies immediately under the Skin, above the Fat, and is more like to a Muscle than a Membrane. In fleying off the Skin, you must be very carefull and curious, or else you will take this Pannicle off along with it, it is so closely knit to it by Fibres and innumerable Vessels that go be∣tween. It is of the same extent and figure as the true Skin, investing the whole Body as that does; but in some Parts it is almost wholly fleshy, and in others altogether membranous.

It has Vessels of all sorts as the Skin has, for before they can reach the Skin, they must pierce through this Membrane; and as they pass through, they send forth many small twigs into it, both Veins, Arteries and Nerves, but especially Nerves to assist its motion, whence it is by some called the nervous Membrane.

The use of it is chiefly to serve for a Muscle to move the Skin, where∣by the Beast shakes off the Flies, or any other thing that offends him. It serves also to defend the neighbouring Parts, and to strengthen in their passage the Vessels which are disseminated into the true Skin. It also hinders the Fat from being melted and spent by the continual motion of the Muscles. And lastly, it helpeth to heal or close up the Skin when it is cut or otherwise hurt; for the Skin being a spermatick Part cannot be bred anew, and therefore this fleshy Membrane helps to glew as it were the sides of it together again, growing into one body with it, and ma∣king what we call a Scar.

CHAP. V. Of the Fat, and Common Membrane of the Muscles.

Fat, its dif∣ference and matter. How genera∣ted. The uses of Fat. The common membrane of the Muscles.

FAT is of two sorts, and is distinguished by two several Names as well in Latin as English. That which we are to speak of in this Chapter is called in Latin pinguedo, and in English Fat; but that which is within the Belly and makes up the Caul and Mesentery and covers the Kidneys, is named sevum, Suet or Tallow. The former will not congeal

so quickly or so hard as this latter will. Both the one and the other are made of an oily part of the bloud; and this we are to treat of here, is congealed between the Carnous Membrane described in the foregoing Chapter, and the Common Membrane of the Muscles.

This Fat is the fourth common covering of the whole Body, for there is no Part which has the rest of the common coverings, but has this also, if the Horse be not extreme lean; though the fattest have it not in any great plenty. Now as all Food that is eaten, consists of several parts or principles, which the Chymists can separate one from another, namely Salt, Spirit and Oyl; so the Food, that consists of these several princi∣ples, when it is taken into the Body, and concocted in the Stomach (which is natural Chymistry, as I may call it) has them so loosened one from another, that each principle passes into the nourishment and increase of that part that is of the same nature with it. Amongst the rest the oily part, (which is otherwise called the Sulphureous, because it will flame like Brimstone) sweating as it were through the pores of the Ves∣sels and subjacent parts towards the surface of the Body, is stopt by the closeness and compactness of the fleshy Membrane, and there congeals into Fat. Now this Fat is not one continued body as Butter or (what we call) tryed Suet is; but is included in innumerable membranous parti∣tions or cells, almost like Honey-combs, (which it is likely are borrowed from the fleshy Pannicle) which makes the Fat to appear somewhat spongy. It is not easie to give a reason of this oily humour's turning into Fat; for it cannot be by cold, seeing the Beast is always actually warm; much less can it be by heat, which is apter to melt Fat into Oyl, than to harden Oyl into Fat: therefore some make a moderate heat to be the efficient of it. 'Tis true indeed that the Beast is moderately hot, and we see by experience that Fat is generated; but that that is the cause of this, I dare not affirm. My apprehension of it is this: That when the oily Matter issues out of the Veins and Arteries, &c. there passes along with it much thin watry humour; And when they both come to the fleshy Membrane, this latter being thin, evaporates through it and is evacuated by sweat or insensible transpiration; but the other being thicker and more clammy, is forced to stay behind, and losing by degrees that wheyish humour that before kept it liquid, it curdles into Fat.

The use of the Fat is, like a Garment, to keep the Body warm, and cherish the natural heat, which by its clamminess it hinders from evapo∣rating too much; and on the other side by its thickness it stoppeth the Pores so, that the cold cannot enter in.

It also fills up the empty spaces between the Muscles, and the wrinkles of the Skin, by which the Horse is made plump, smooth and beautifull; and therefore old, lean and decrepit Horses are deformed for want of Fat.

It serves also as a pillow or bulwark against any violence, either from blows, bruises or heavy weights, and the like.

Finally, it relieveth such Creatures as abound with it, in time of scar∣city or want of sustenance, by being converted into nourishment; for it serves as aliment, and holdeth the parts of the Body in play, till the Creature attain its proper Food.

The fifth and last common Covering of the Body, is the Common Membrane of the Muscles. This is spread over all the Muscles (imme∣diately under the Fat) and is knit by Fibres to that Membrane which is proper to each Muscle, but somewhat loosely, that it might not hinder

their motion by investing them too closely. It is said to arise from the Back-bone, because it cleaves most firmly to the Spine thereof, and is stronger there, than in its other Parts. In an Horse it is as thick as Parchment, and very strong. And its use is to confirm and strengthen the Muscles in general in their proper situation, and to be as it were a Case for them to move glibly in, and to defend them from injuries.

CHAP. VI. Of the Investing Parts proper to the Lower Belly.

The Muscles of the Ab∣domen or Paunch. What a Mus∣cle is. Muscles are the instru∣ment of vo∣luntary mo∣tion. Involuntary or natural motion is per∣formed with∣out Muscles, properly so called. A Muscle is an organical and dissimilar part. Of what sim∣ple parts it consists. Why called a Muscle. Whence Mus∣cles have di∣stinct names. A Muscle di∣vided into parts. The Oblique descending external pair. The Oblique ascending in∣ternal pair. Their Action. The right or streight pair. Their Action. The pyrami∣dal Muscles. The trans∣verse or over∣thwart Mus∣cles. Their Action. The action of all these Mus∣cles together. The white Line what it is.

HAVING shewed you what are the common investing or containing parts of the whole Body, I come now to shew which are those that are proper to the Lower Belly in particular, and those are onely two, be∣sides those common ones already spoken of, namely the Muscles of the Paunch, and the Rim of the Belly.

Now by the Lower Belly we understand all that cavity (and onely that) which is below the Midriff, and is encompassed by the short Ribs, the point of the Breast-bone, Loins, Haunch-bones, and Share-bones, and is filled with the Guts and other Entrails.

The Muscles are in all Horses of a like number,which is on each side four. The first pair that shew themselves are called the External oblique pair; the next are the Internal oblique pair; the third are the two right or streight Muscles; and under these are the two transverse Muscles, so called from their going cross the Belly.

But before I proceed any further in describing these Muscles, I will first shew what a Muscle is, and whereof it is compounded, and also the several uses of the Muscles in general.

The Muscles, if you take them in a large signification, are all that which we call Flesh; which Flesh may be divided into many pieces or parcels without cutting or breaking any of them, if with care undertaken; and each piece so separable, is named a Muscle.

Now these pieces have each their several distinct Epithets, appellations or names from several considerations, as from their situation, shape, use, &c. but are all called Muscles, their office being to perform the voluntary motion: which motion is performed six several ways, namely, upwards, downwards, forwards, backwards, to the right hand and to the left. All which motions are performed in this manner.

You must know that all or most of the Muscles of the Body have each their Opposite or Antagonist, so that the one being contracted or drawn together, (which is its proper motion) the opposite at the same time is relaxed or loosned; and contrarily when that which upon the former mo∣tion was relaxed, does it self enter upon motion, it is contracted, whilst that which was before contracted, is now relaxed. As for example, when you stretch out either your Arm, or Leg, that motion is performed by one of these Muscles; and when you draw your Arm, or Leg back again, that is performed by the other.

But here let none so far misunderstand me as to think that either an Arm or Leg can be either stretcht forth or drawn back by the help of one Muscle alone; but as to either of the before mentioned Limbs there are several parts belonging, so do the distinct Muscles of every part perform (at the same time) the offices aforesaid.

Neither can this voluntary motion be performed without the help of a Sinew or Nerve, by which the Spirits are brought from the Brain which give the Muscles their moving faculty.

Now there are other motions of the Body which are not performed by the Muscles, such as is (according to some) the pulsation of the Heart and Arteries, the peristaltick motion of the Stomach and Guts, of the passage of the Gall, and of the Ureters, and several other Parts which have their continual motions whether the Horse be sleeping or waking, and will perform their several motions as well in Men as Beasts, whether we will or not. Wherefore these are called not Voluntary, or Natural.

I shall in the next place shew what parts the Muscles are compounded of, and those are agreed upon by all Authours of Anatomy to be these.

A Muscle being an organical Part is composed of Nerves, Flesh, Fibres, Veins and Arteries, all covered or invested with a proper Coat or Skin. It is called organical, because it is the instrument or organ of an action, to wit, motion. And that it is also dissimilar, the several kinds of parts whereof it is made, do evidently prove. The several uses of the parts that make up a Muscle are these: The Fibres and Tendon are the immediate instruments of its action; The Flesh properly so called filleth up the in∣terstices or distances between the Fibres; The Arteries by importing vital spirit and bloud do conserve the inbred heat, and help to nourish it; The Veins do convey back to the Heart all that bloud that remains from the nourishment of the Muscle; The Nerves convey animal Spirit to the Fi∣bres and Tendon, whereby they are enabled for their action; and the Membrane or Skin which incompasseth the Muscle, doth keep it to∣gether, and distinguishes one from another.

Having shewed what a Muscle is, and the several simple parts whereof it is made, I shall next shew you why it is so called. It is called mus, or musculus, by the Latins, for that it is like a fley'd Mouse, or a Fish which is called musculus; and by some Authours it is called by the name of la∣certus, from its similitude with a Creature called a Lizard. Yet there can be no one certain figure whereby to resemble it, by reason of its sundry shapes; but that it is like a fley'd Mouse in colour, cannot be denied.

Now the Muscles being many in number have accordingly many names, which names they take from either their Figure, their Situation, or their Action, and many times from their Use; also sometimes from their Insertion, and sometimes from their Magnitude.

And although there be such difference in the Muscles, in respect of their Figures, their Magnitude, their Situation, and the like, yet are they so united or conjoyned together through the whole Body, in so close a manner, that in many places they are hard to be separated, except at some times, when either wind, some wheyish humour or some other matter gets between them, and then many times they will gape, and are at some distance the one from the other.

Yet are they not so closely united neither, but that by a carefull and expert Dissector they may be separated, and one divided from another;

after which, to see the several parts of a Muscle severally, you must di∣vide it also, which is on this manner.

Some divide a Muscle into two parts, which are a fleshy and a tendi∣nous part; Again, they divide it into other three parts, namely, the Head, the Middle and the Tail. By the Head is to be understood the beginning or original of a Muscle, which is one while ligamentous and nervous, and otherwhiles fleshy: By the Middle is that part meant which is absolutely fleshy; and by the Tail, the Tendon, consisting of the nu∣merous Fibres that are extended through the Muscle, and the Membrane that invests it, which grow by little and little into one body, and com∣pose this Tendon, that is the tail of the Muscle. It is sometimes round, sometimes broad; other times long, and otherwhiles short, thicker or slenderer according to the part it appertains to, or according to the use it is put to; it being but necessary that those Parts which are moved most strongly or vehemently, should have thicker and stronger Tendons. Thus much for the Muscles in general.

Now I come to the particular Muscles, the first of which are the Mus∣cles of the Abdomen or Paunch, of which I have spoken something in the beginning of this Chapter, the which I shall now further prosecute, and let you know how they are situated. The pair that in dissec∣tion first offer themselves are called the Oblique (or slanting) Descending External pair, which pair are the broadest of all the rest,though it is by many Authours said that the oblique internal are equal in figure, magni∣tude, strength and action. The original or rise of these Muscles is from the side of the Breast-bone, the lower edge of five or six of the lowest Ribs, and from the tips of the cross or transverse processes of the Joints of the Rack-bone in the Loins. Their rise from the Ribs imitates the teeth of a Saw; for springing with a narrow point from the lower side of the Rib, every such point grows broader and broader, till it unite with the two next it on each side, so that there is a space of above an inch between every point, into which empty spaces the greater Saw-like Muscle of the Breast ends with like points. From their rise they run sloping downwards to∣ward the white line (so called) in the middle of the Belly; but before they reach half way thither, they lose their fleshy substance, and become tendinous, and their Tendon is so united to the common Membrane of the Muscles, described in the foregoing Chapter, that it seems to become one with it, and running over the streight Muscles is inserted into the foresaid white Line, down even to the very Share-bone, into which also it is inserted.

The next to these are the Oblique Ascending Internal pair, so called be∣cause of the contrary course of their Fibres to those of the External; for as those descend obliquely or aslant, so do these ascend in like manner. Their rise is from the Rib of the Haunch-bone, and from the processes of the vertebrae of the Loins and os sacrum; and their Tendon is extended to the short Ribs partly, and partly to the white line, above the Navel, ad∣hering to the common Membrane of the Muscles as was said before of the oblique descending, where it is not cover'd by the Tendon of that Muscle. These have a different action from the former; for whereas the External pair do draw the lower part of the Belly towards the Breast, where they have their original; these on the contrary draw down the Chest with a kind of slanting motion towards the Hips; it being the action of all Muscles to draw towards their original, and the original of these Muscles is (as was said) at the Rib of the Haunch-bone.

After these follow the Right or Streight Pair, so called because their Fibres run streight down the Belly as do the Muscles themselves: for their original is at the sides of the sword fashioned Gristle at the end of the Breast-bone, and from the gristly ends of the bastard Ribs, whence they go all along the eminentest part of the Belly streight to the Share-bone where they terminate. Now in these Muscles there are several In∣scriptions or tendinous Interstices, which are, according to the bigness of the Horse, more or fewer in number, but most commonly there are in each Muscle eight, not so fair indeed as in Humane Bodies, but yet so plain, that they do distinguish the Muscles into nine parts or more, as there are eight of these inscriptions or more; and besides, each part has a distinct Nerve: and yet notwithstanding, because they cannot be easily separated one from another, they do by most Anatomists go for onely one pair. On the inside of these Muscles are to be seen the Epigastrick Arteries and Veins ascending, and the Mammary Arteries and Veins des∣cending, which by an ancient Tradition have been held in Humane Bo∣dies to inosculate one with another, the Arteries with the Arteries, and the Veins with the Veins; but later and more inquisitively curious Ana∣tomists have discovered it to be a mere fancy, invented to support the er∣roneous Opinion, That whilst the Young was in the Womb, it was nou∣rished with bloud carried to it by the Hypogastrick Arteries and Veins; but after the birth, the bloud altering its course, regurgitated up from the Womb, by the Epigastrick Vessels, which inosculating with the Mam∣mary, conveyed it to the Breasts, where it was converted into Milk. This I say was the opinion as to Women, which has in several particu∣lars been detected of errour: and may receive a further confutation in Mares, from the different situation of their Udders from the Breasts in Women; whereas these Vessels have the same Course in both. The action of these Muscles is to shorten the Belly by drawing the Breast and Share-bone towards one another, whereby it is drawn as it were on a heap, to squeez forth the Excrements or Urine, whence Dogs that strain so hard to dung, have these Muscles arising as high up as the Channel-bones.

There are other two Muscles (sometimes to be found) which do rest upon the Tendons of the Right Muscles at the lower end of them, which I have not yet spoken of, and these are called the pyramidal Muscles. They are of a triangular figure, and their use is to assist the streight Muscles in their squeezing forth the Excrements, saith Fallopius. I believe these Mus∣cles are so seldom found, that they ought to be accounted lusus Naturoe, a sport of Nature; for I do not remember that ever I have observed any other here, but what ought to be accounted the lowest part or portion of the streight Muscles before described.

Under all these lie the transverse or overthwart Muscles, so called from their own and their Fibres running cross or overthwart the Belly. They are of a quadrangular or foursquare figure, and do stick so close to the Rim of the Belly (which is under them) that they cannot easily be sepa∣rated.

Their Original is from the one or two lowest bastard Ribs, the transverse processes of the Joints or vertebrae of the Loyns, and the Haunch-bones; and their Tendons reach to the white line, where they terminate.

Their Action is to press the Guts for the expulsion of Excrements.

Now as each Muscle has a peculiar action to it self, which is that already ascribed to each, so have all these ten Muscles two Actions gene∣ral to them all conjoinedly, which are these; The first is, that they serve for a defence or bulwark for all the Parts underneath them, and do by their flesh (which pretty much aboundeth in them) cherish their natural heat and assist concoction; The next is, that they do all assist together in the compressing of the Guts for the voiding of the excrements, the Midriff assisting thereunto, by whose help the excrements are thrust downwards, which otherwise would be onely squeezed together, and not thrust any more downward than upward.

I think it not amiss in this place to explain what it is I call the white Line, for fear the naming of it so often as I have done in this Chapter, without shewing what it is, should puzzle the Reader.

The white Line is nothing else, but the extremities or tendinous end∣ings of these Muscles of the Paunch, and is called white from its colour, becoming so, because it consists of Tendons and Fibres onely, wherewith no fleshy part or particle is interwoven, whereby to change or alter the colour. It distinguisheth the Belly into two parts, a right and a lest, and is placed all along the middle of the Belly both below and above the Na∣vel, running from the sword-pointed Gristle of the Breast as low as to the Share-bone.

Now the Ʋdder being an external part of the Belly in Mares, I might in this place (in order) treat of it; but because its Action, to wit the making of Milk, has so near relation to the Foal, for which it provides nourishment, I shall omit it in this place, and describe it at the latter end of this first Book, after I have done with the generative parts of Mares, and the breeding, nourishing, &c. of the Young in the Womb.

The Second Table representeth all the Investing parts of the Abdomen, as well proper as common. (Book 2)

• AA Shew the Skin and Scarf-skin turn'd back.
• BB The fleshy Membrane likewise turn'd back, with a little sprinkling of Fat on its inside.
• CC The Common Membrane that invests the Muscles, in like manner turn'd back.
• DD The obliquely descending Muscle expressed in situ on the right side.
• dd The Tendon of the same running to the white Line.
• δδ Its saw-like origine from the Ribs.
• EE The obliquely ascending Muscle, with its Tendon e e, on the same side, likewise in situ.
• FF The Streight exprest to the full on the left side, but onely in part on the right, because the Tendons of the obliquely descending, and ascending Muscles run over it.
• GG The transverse Muscle exprest to the full on the left side, but hid on the right by the two oblique.
• gg The white Line and outer Skin of the Rim of the Belly cut in sunder, that the Fat contained between the outer and inner Skin of the Rim may appear.
• HH The perforations in the obliquely ascending Muscles, by which the sper∣matick Vessels do pass out of the Abdomen into the Cod.
• II The Stones.
• K The Tard.
• L The Sternum or Breast-bone.

[illustration] ventral view of a horse's musculature

TAB II^d. fol:11^th

CHAP. VII. Of the Rim of the Belly, called the Peritonaeum.

What the Pe∣titonaeum is. Its original. Its perfora∣tions. The outmost Skins of all the parts of the Lower Belly, have their original from this. Its Composi∣tion. Its Ʋses.

THE Muscles of the Paunch being all removed, as also their Ten∣dons which make the white Line before spoken of, the Perito∣naeum or Rim of the Belly comes next into sight.

This Peritonaeum is of a spermatick substance (as are all other Mem∣branes or Skins) and is of an oval Figure, or like a long fashioned Egg, for it compasseth all the Lower Belly and ingirts all the Parts therein con∣tained, and also strengthneth them, from whence it hath its name, from its office of spreading and stretching about. It is thin and soft, that it might not be either heavy or burthensom; yet is it very strong and com∣pact, that it might be stretched without danger, when the Belly is full of Meat, or the Womb is full of the Burthen. Its inside is smooth, and by reason of the Guts is daubed with moisture; but its outside is rough, which makes it stick so close to the Muscles that lie above it, that they can hardly be separated, as I have before shewed.

It takes its original from the vertebrae or joints of the Loins, where it is very thick, and is therefore believed to proceed from the Membrane that invests the Marrow in the Back-bone, and is propagated from the double Membrane of the Brain. It is in all places double, and betwixt its Mem∣branes I have always observed good store of Fat, which Anatomists do not speak of in other Creatures. The Vessels run along this Fat between the Membranes, that they may be the better secured and defended, and may with more safety disperse their branches all over it; and for that pur∣pose it is perforated in several places, so wide as is proportionably neces∣sary to the largeness of the Vessels that are to go through, and no larger, lest in distentions or strains they should tear, as too apt they are to do, as Experience daily testifies in Men and Children, when vehement coughs or long and straining cries do, in some, open the orifice of the Navel, and in others the orifices in the Groin, where the spermatick or seminary Ves∣sels go forth to the Stones, so that the wideness gives liberty for the small Guts to fall out of their places into the outward parts, which causeth Ruptures and broken Bellies. The like I have seen in Horses.

From the inner Membrane of this Rim of the Belly, all the outmost Skins or Coats which cover every Part contained in the Lower Belly do proceed, and from it have their original, some thicker and some thinner, according to the necessity or use of the Part respectively. As for Exam∣ple, the Common Membrane of the Kidneys, the proper one of the Li∣ver and Spleen (each of which have but one) are but very thin, for see∣ing they are never (naturally) extended, there was no necessity for their being otherwise; but the Common Skin of the Stomach, the Guts, the Bladder and the Womb are somewhat thicker, but much stronger and more compact, because the uses they are put to require it, that they may without danger be stretched, when there is occasion. Now as the En∣trails are many and of divers kinds, and also situated in several places different from one another, so does their outward Investing Membrane

take its original from that part of this Peritonaeum or Rim of the Belly which is next to them; as the upper Entrails, which are the Stomach, the Liver, the Spleen, &c. borrow it from that part of the Rim which makes the under Membrane of the Midriff; so do the lower Entrails (as the Bladder, Womb, &c.) borrow it from that part of the Rim, which cleaveth to the Share-bone, it being the nearest to them.

From this Peritonaeum or Rim of the Belly do also proceed two double Membranes or Skins, which are those of the Caul and of the Mesentery; as also several Ligaments, of which the most remarkable are those of the Liver and Guts.

This Peritonaeum is composed of membranous and nervous Fibres which are very small. The Vessels that are dispersed through it are small branches of Veins and Arteries which it hath from the Midriff, and other neighbouring Parts, as the Seminary and Mammary; and for Nerves, it hath them from the branches which are carried to the Muscles of the Lower Belly.

Its Ʋses are several, the first of which is, to cover and contain all the Parts or Entrails of the Lower Belly; secondly, to further the expulsion of the Excrements by pressing the Stomach and Guts before and on the sides, as the Midriff doth above. Again, it binds with its Ligaments all the Guts in their proper places by mediation of the Mesentery, that no violent motion (such as running or leaping) should move them out: By Ligaments proceeding from it, is the Liver also suspended in its place. Its last use is to be a safeguard to the Vessels that run through it, which being but small and having a long course to run, would be in danger of breaking, were they not secured between its two Skins.

CHAP. VIII. Of the Omentum or Caul.

The Caul what it is. How far it spreads over the Guts. It is some∣times the cause of bar∣renness. Its connexion or origine. Figure. Its Vessels. Its Fat. The use of its Fat. The use of its Membranes or Skins.

HAVING according to the order of dissection, removed all the in∣vesting or containing Parts of the Lower Belly, and shewed which, and what they are; it now follows that I shew which are the parts invested or contained. And because the Caul appears first in dissection, I will first treat of it.

This Caul is in Latin called Omentum, from Omen, because the Roman Soothsayers pretended by it to foretell things. It is also called mappa ven∣tris, the Map or Dish-clout of the Belly, because it seemeth to lick up the superfluities thereof. It doth cover all or most of the Guts in many Creatures; but in a Horse it is most times removed from all the lower parts of the Belly, and lieth in wrinkles or folds near and about the Sto∣mach. The reason of its being removed, I do suppose, is the hard la∣bour and violent Exercise a Horse undergoeth; for whilst he is young, and before he comes to his labour, it is spread as far over his Entrails as in other Creatures, as hath been observed by the Learned Marcus Aurelius Severinus, who did in a She foal which he dissected at Naples, see the

Caul spread all over the Guts as far as to the bottom of the Womb, to which it was also joined with a strait connection.

It sometimes happeneth that the Caul falleth between the bottom of the Bladder and the neck of the Womb in Women, and then it so com∣presseth the mouth of the Womb, that it leaveth very little or no passage for the Man's seed to enter in, which when it so happeneth is a cause of barrenness. But I believe no such thing can happen in Mares.

It is composed of two Membranes, the uppermost or formost of which ariseth at the bottom of the Stomach to which it is fastned, as also to the hollow side of the Liver and Spleen: The inner or backer Membrane springs from the Peritonaeum, immediately under the Midriff towards the Back, and is tied to that part of the Gut Colon that passeth under the Stomach lengthways, as likewise to the Sweetbread and to the begin∣ning of the small Gut, next to the lower Orifice of the Stomach. These Membranes are larded with plentifull Fat.

It is in figure like a Purse net, or Faulkner's Bag, consisting as is said of a double Coat, separate at the top, but knit together at the bottom, where it is round sometimes, and sometimes unequal, but at its upper part or orifice it is orbicular.

It has Vessels of all sorts, which do run through the substance thereof. It hath its Veins and Arteries from the Coeliacal and Mesenterical bran∣ches, and Nerves from a double branch of the Intercostal pair.

In Horses it has much Fat, especially in those that are sound and have not wasted it by either sickness or long fasting, for in such it consists of little but the Membranes and Vessels, the Fat serving for a subsidiary nou∣rishment to the natural heat to feed upon when the Beast eats nothing. Now this Fat is not distributed equally to all the parts of the Caul, but runs here and there in streaks accordingly as the larger Bloud-vessels do, the spaces between being wholly membranous and seemingly transparent, so that it imitates a Net, whence in some Countries they call it so. Now the Fat adhering to and accompanying the Vessels in this manner, it seems to be bred of an unctuous or oily part of the Bloud that sweats through the Vessels, but is detained by the closeness or denseness of the Membrane, by whose respective coldness also it is curdled or congealed into Fat. But very unlikely it is that it should be made of I know not what Vapours steaming out of the Parts contained in the Lower Belly, and condensed by these Membranes; for not to mention the many absurdities of this Opinion, if it were so bred, then would all the Membranes be evenly and equally besmeared with it, which it is obvious to any Eye that they are not.

The use of this plentifull Fat is to cherish and heat the bottom of the Stomach, the upper part of which has no need of its warmth, it being covered with the Liver, whose Lobes hang over it and lie upon it. It serves also to moisten the Guts, which have great need of being kept slippery and glib, that they may the better perform their continual peri∣staltick motion.

The use of the Membranes or Skins besides their congealing and inclu∣ding the Fat, is to prop up and sustain all the branches of the Vessels which lie between and pass through them, to the Stomach, the Spleen, the beginning of the small Gut, and Colon, &c.

The Third Table representeth the Guts in sita, as they appear after the Caul is taken away. (Book 3)

• AAAA Sheweth the Gut Colon or Colick Gut with its Convolutions or Folds, as also what parts of the lower Belly it takes up.
• BB The streight or Arse-gut.
• CCC The Gut Caecum or blind Gut.
• DDD The Diaphragm or Midriff.
• EE The Horses Yard.

[illustration] ventral view of a horse's alimentary canal

TAB III fol. 15.

CHAP. IX. Of the Gullet and Stomach.

The Gullet. Its origine and descent. Its substance. Its Vessels. Its Kernels. Its Ʋse. The Stomach. Its figure, And magni∣tude. Its Orifices. The upper and left Ori∣fice of the Stomach. Its Ʋses. The lower Orifice, and its office. The composi∣tion of the Stomach. 1. Its Vessels. Veins. 2. Arteries. 3. Nerves. Its Action. How it con∣cocts.

AFTER the Caul is removed, the Intestins or Guts do appear in their natural situation, as is shewed in the foregoing Figure; but there is another Part that lies absconded under them, which must first be spoken of according to the order of dissection, and that is the Stomach. It is single in an Horse as it is in Man, though such Creatures as have Horns, as Beeves, Sheep, &c. and such as having no Horns yet chew the Cud, as Camels, Hinds, &c. have four. This is the Kitchin of the Body and receptacle of Meat and Drink; as also the seat of Appetite, by reason of the Nerves that are dispersed chiefly in its upper Orifice, but run in small twigs also through its whole substance. It is called in Latin ventriculus, which is as much as to say a little Belly; and is placed or seated just under the Midriff between the Liver and the Spleen, almost in the very middle of the Body, inclining a little towards the left Side that it might ballance the Body against the Liver, which is much bigger and heavier than the Spleen.

But before we enter upon the Stomach it is convenient first to describe the Gullet which is an Appendage to it, and serves as a Tunnel to convey the Food out of the Mouth into it, though the greatest part of it be con∣tained in the Neck and Breast.

It is an organical or dissimilar Part, hollow and round, beginning at the root of the Tongue, behind the head of the Windpipe, and passeth down from thence directly between the Windpipe and the Joints of the Neck and of the Chest, about the fifth or sixth Joint of which latter it turneth a little to the right side, to give way to the trunk of the great Artery, but about the ninth Joint it turns toward the left again and climbs upon the great Artery, and passing through the Midriff at an hole proper to it self it is inserted into the Stomach toward its left side, as you may see in the following Figure.

It consists of three Membranes or Skins. The outermost is common,which it hath from the Pleura or from the ligaments of the Joints of the Neck and Breast on which it resteth: This investeth the two proper. The middle or first proper one is thick and fleshy, consisting of two ranks of

fleshy Fibres, obliquely or slopingly ascending and descending, so that they cross one another like an X. The innermost or second proper is membranous, and hath onely streight Fibres.

It has Veins in the Neck from the Jugulars, in the Breast from the Vein without a fellow; and where it is joined to the Stomach, from the coro∣nary branch of the Porta. Arteries in the Neck it has from the Carotides, in the Breast from the Intercostals; and where it joins to the Stomach, from the coeliack coronary branch. It hath Nerves from that pair that is commonly called the sixth.

It has two notable Glands or Kernels at its beginning in the Throat,called Almonds from their shape, which separate a kind of slegmatick hu∣mour to keep the inside of the Gullet moist and glib, that the Food may easilier descend down by it.

Its use is, to convey Meat after it is chewed in the Mouth, as likewise Drink, down into the Stomach, there to be turned into chyle.

Having done with the Gullet, we now return to the Stomach.

Its figure is round and somewhat long, resembling a Bag-pipe; though on the left side and at the bottom it is bunching and more capacious than on the right side; for there it is by little and little narrowed that it might give place to the Liver.

Its magnitude is divers according to the largeness of the Horse, or ac∣cording to the quantity of Meat or Drink (be it little or much) that is in it; for it contracteth or distendeth it self as there is occasion. As for example, if there be a great quantity of Meat and Drink let into it, it doth extend it self to that largeness as to contain it; and as that Meat is by little and little concocted, and then let forth through the lower Ori∣fice into the small Guts to be there suckt up by the milky Veins, the Sto∣mach doth accordingly by little and little contract or draw it self up so close to that which remains, that it embraceth it on all sides, so that there is never any cavity or hollowness to speak of to be found in the Stomach; whence we see in Tripes, that the inside is by such contracting always rugged or in wrinkles, whereas the outside is smooth and plain. Onely this we may note as to its bigness, that in consideration of the bigness of an Horses Body or the largeness of his Guts, it is far less in him than in most Animals.

The Stomach hath two Orifices, a left and upper, which is to receive in Meat; and a right which is the lower, to let it out after concoction. The first being the uppermost I will first speak of, which is much wider and larger than the other, because it admits the Meat, many times not half chewed, into the Stomach (and for that cause is much thicker and also stronger than the other) whereas all is reduced into a fluid substance, before it pass out at the other.

This Orifice being a continuation of the Gullet is called the mouth of the Stomach, and hath an exquisite sense of feeling because of the Nerves which encompass it, and by which it the sooner perceives the emptiness and want of Meat, and therefore stirs up the Horse to seek Food to satisfy his want. It is near the middle of the Stomach, and not so near the left side of it as in Men.

It is furnished with fleshy and circular Fibres, that it may naturally shut up and straiten it self after the Meat is received in, and also may in∣tercept or hinder the Vapours from coming forth, which would by their ascent up to the Brain be very injurious, by breeding diseases and evil

distempers in the Head; which Vapours would be also wanted in the Stomach to further concoction: for as it is an usual custom when Meat is over the fire for the Pot-lid to be put on to keep the Vapours or Reek from coming forth; so likewise it is requisite in this case that the Va∣pours of the Stomach should be kept in, that Concoction should be thereby furthered, or the Food be sooner digested, the Vapours assisting thereunto.

The lower and right Orifice is called pylorus, which is to say, the Por∣ter,from its office, which is to open and shut as occasion serves; to open, when the chyle is let forth and sent into the Gut duodenum, and then to contract or draw it self close up again, that nothing may pass through it which is not fully concocted. Which contraction is performed by trans∣verse or overthwart Fibres, with which it is plentifully furnished for that purpose; as also a thick and compact circle doth encompass it round, which circle is in shape like the sphincter Muscle of the Fundament. By these Fibres and this Circle the action of the Porter, or lower Orifice, is performed, that is to say, it is either opened or shut, widened or straitned as there is occasion, as I have said before. And these are the offices of the Orifices of the Stomach.

Now I proceed to the composition of it, which is of three Membranes or Skins, the first or outmost of which it hath from the Peritonaeum, or Rim of the Belly. The second and middlemost is more fleshy than the for∣mer, consisting of fleshy Fibres, which do mightily strengthen the Sto∣mach and by their heat do further concoction. The third and inmost is nervous, into which all the Vessels do terminate or end. This Coat or Skin is continued with the Gullet up to the Mouth, that the Mouth should not admit or receive in any thing that is offensive to the Stomach.

The Stomach is furnished with Vessels of all sorts. Veins it hath first from the Splenick branch, as 1. The vas breve, or short Vein, which is inserted into the bottom of the Stomach, whence afterwards it creeps up between the Coats towards the upper Orifice, but is obliterated before it comes quite to it. 2. The two Gastrick Veins (the greater and less) which creep along the bottom of the Stomach, and in their course spread many branches into it; but the largest branch of the greater of these two is that which is called the Crown-vein, that encompasses the upper Ori∣fice of the Stomach. 3. A Vein that is common to the left side of the Stomach and the Caul. Secondly, it hath another common to its right side and the Caul, from the Mesenterick branch. And lastly, its lower or right Orifice has a small Vein from the trunk of the Porta it self, which is called pylorica or Porter-vein. Now before the circulation of the bloud was found out, it was believed that all these Veins brought bloud to the Stomach for its nourishment: but since that was discovered by Dr. Har∣vey, every one knows that they carry nothing to the Stomach, but bring back from it so much of the Arterial bloud as is not spent upon its nou∣rishment. But besides the bloud some learned Men have entertained an opinion that they suck out of the Stomach a thinner and more spirituous part of the chyle, which passes along with the bloud to the Heart by a far shorter passage than if it descended into the Guts and entred into the milky Veins, &c. (as shall afterwards be fullier declared.) And this they think it reasonable to suppose, because of the sudden and quick refresh∣ment that Creatures receive from Cordial Drinks, and the like. I shall

not pretend to decide the controversie betwixt those that affirm this, and others that deny it, but do think this opinion to be very probable, because of the very speedy revival of Horses (that I have observed) which being ready to faint away, have suddenly grown brisk upon the giving them some comfortable draught: unless we should think with some, that the Nerves of the Stomach do imbibe some spirituous parts of such potions, and so the refreshment should come that way.

The Stomachal Arteries are twigs from the Coeliacal branch of the Arteria magna or great Arterie, and these do accompany the Veins in all their course, and bestow nourishment and vital heat upon it. For the Stomach is not nourished with the Chyle, any more than any other part, but with arterial bloud which by these Arteries is brought from the Heart.

It hath two notable Nerves from the sixth pair (reckoned by Dr. Willis to be the eighth) propagated from those branches which make the recur∣rent Nerves. These do encompass the upper Orifice, and then are car∣ried, in oblique or slanting lines, cross one another over most part of it; the right branch compassing the foremost and left part, and the left branch compassing the hindermost and right part thereof.

The Stomach has several Actions, as first Hunger and Thirst, which are the sense that it has of the want of Meat and Drink, and an Appetite that is excited in it for the obtaining of them. Secondly, it has an action of retention, whereby it contracts it self close about the Food that is ta∣ken in, and detains it so long till it is throughly concocted or turned into a thin juice called Chyle. Thirdly, it has a motion that is called peristal∣tick, such as the Guts also have, resembling the motion of a Worm, whereby its parts contracting themselves successively from above down∣wards, thrust out the chyle into the Guts gently and by degrees. But the chief and most considerable action of the Stomach, is, fourthly, Chy∣lification, or turning the aliment into a whitish liquor commonly known by the name of Chyle, which being expelled out of the Stomach into the Guts, is, the thinner part of it, suckt up by a sort of Vessels called milky Veins, (so called from that colour which this liquor gives them) that are inserted every where into the Guts, and which carry it towards the Heart, by those ways that hereafter shall be described: but the thicker and more dreggy part is driven along the Guts and cast out at the Funda∣ment as excrement.

Now there are several things that concur to this last and principal action of the Stomach, viz. Concoction. As first, the very numerous Arteries that are dispersed through it which much foster and encrease its heat, which though it be not the main instrument of concoction, yet much furthers it. And this heat is also encreased by the Liver which co∣vers the upper and fore-part of its right side, as also by the Caul which by its two Membranes invests its bottom. But secondly, that to which concoction is mainly owing is a certain ferment in the Stomach, which is compounded partly of the slaver with which the Horses mouth always abounds for the moistening and softning of his Meat while he chews it, and part of which is continually swallow'd down into his Stomach toge∣ther with the Food; and partly of an acid or sharp and salt liquor bred in the Stomach, as is most likely, of salt and acid steams evaporating out of the stomachal Arteries, and condensed in it into this juice: And this liquor is that which dissolves and melts as it were the solid Meats that are

swallowed (something like as Aqua fortis dissolves Steel) and reduces the whole mass into fluid substance, which then passes down into the Guts, as abovesaid. This acid Juice was formerly thought to come from the Spleen by a Vein called the short Vessel; but later Anatomists have dis∣covered from the circulation of the Bloud, that that Vein brings nothing from the Spleen to the Stomach, but contrariwise carries the Bloud, that is superfluous to the nourishment of the Stomach, from it into the sple∣nick Vein, by which it goes to the Liver, and from thence to the Heart in its circulation. So that no such original or spring of this ferment is to be imagined.

The Fourth Table expresseth the second or middle, and the innermost Coats of the Stomach. (Book 4)

Fig. I. Sheweth the Stomach freed from its outmost nervous Coat, that the outer or convex surface of the middle Coat may appear with its fleshy Fibres.

• AA The Gullet.
• B The Mouth or upper Orifice of the Stomach.
• C Its lower Orifice called Pylorus.
• D A portion of the small Gut.
• EEE The circular Fibres encompassing the Stomach depthways.
• FFF The top or upper part of the Stomach, where these Fibres arise.
• GG The circular fleshy Fibres that encompass the upper Orifice or Mouth of the Stomach, which contracting themselves shut or purse it up as occasion serves.
• H The Gall-passage inserted into the small Gut.
• I The Pancreatick duct inserted into the small Gut.

Fig. II. Sheweth the Stomach turned inside out, that its woolly crust with its wrinkles and folds may appear.

• AA The left Orifice or Mouth of the Stomach.
• B The right or lower Orifice, to which the small Gut is knit.
• CC The top or summity of the Stomach between its two Orifices.
• EEEE The sides, ends and bottom of the inside of the Stomach, with its woolly crust and wrinkles or folds.
• F A portion of the small Gut.

Fig. III. Represents a piece of the inmost nervous Coat, wherein the woolly crust being taken off, the inner or concave surface with a ve∣ry thick ramification of Vessels doth appear.

Fig. IV. Shews a piece of the woolly crust, which looks like a fourth Coat, wherein its outer surface, whereby it sticks to the nervous Coat, appears very full of glands and the mouths of Vessels.

[illustration] the outer and inner coats of a horse's stomach

TAB. IV pag. 19.

[illustration]

Fig. 1.

[illustration]

Fig. 2.

[illustration]

Fig. 3.

[illustration]

Fig. 4.

CHAP. X. Of the Guts in general.

The Guts. Their Name, Figure and Length. How knit to∣gether. Their Coats. 1. Vessels. Veins. Viz. first, Bloud-veins. Secondly, milky Veins. 2. Arteries. 3. Nerves.

THE Guts are called in Latin Intestina, because they are placed in the inmost part of the Body, as you see them placed in the Third Figure, which shews their natural position or situation, they taking up the most part of the cavity or hollowness of the Lower Belly. They are oblong, round, hollow Bodies, in number six, and are bigger or lesser as is the bigness of the Horse. They are the Instruments of distribution of the Chyle and expulsion of the Ordure, being continued with the Pylo∣rus or Porter of the Stomach and reaching to the Fundament. They are in length about thirty six yards, a little under or over according to the largeness of the Horse; wherefore they are necessarily girded and wound into manifold convolutions or folds, that the cavity of the Lower Belly might be capable of containing them, which otherwise it could not do.

They are gathered up and entwisted in the folds of the Mesentery, by which coming between they are also knit to the Back: all which is to keep them from falling out of their places or rolling upon one another, which would have often hapned, had not Nature so well provided for the contrary, especially in violent exercise, as hunting, running, leaping and the like; and if it had hapned, the weight of the one lying upon the other would have obstructed the passage of the Excrements, and so caus'd ex∣cessive pains, as gripings, strainings to dung, and the like, and upon the continuance of such stoppage, death it self.

The Guts are on the outside most times fat, but on the inside they are covered with a slimy or snotty substance, for the more free and glib passage of the Dung.

They have three Coats, like as the Stomach hath. The outermost or common one is nervous, springing mediately from the Rim of the Belly, but immediately from the Membranes of the Mesentery; saving that of the beginning of the first Gut, and of that part of the Colon which run∣neth under the Stomach, where it immediately proceedeth from the Caul adhering to those Parts. The middle is thicker and fleshy, having two ranks of Fibres, the outer of them streight, and the inner transverse or overthwart. The innermost is also nervous like the outmost, but on its in∣side it is crusted over with a kind of spongy substance, that serves as a strainer for the Chyle to pass through out of the Guts into the milky Veins. This Coat has all forts of Fibres, and is very wrinkled, to pre∣vent the too quick gliding away of the Ghyle. The Fibres of this and the middle Coat serve to perform the peristaltick or worm-like motion of the Guts, by which whatsoever is contained in them is gently driven along downwards towards the Fundament.

The Guts have all sorts of Vessels. As 1. Veins. These they have from several branches of the Porta, but the most come from that branch of it that is called the Mesenterick. The use of which Veins was by the Ancients thought to be, both to carry Bloud to them from the Liver for their nourishment, and to bring back from them the Chyle to the Liver,

there to be turned into bloud. But as to the first, the circulation of the Bloud makes it evident, that they carry no bloud to the Guts, but all that is contained in them, is received from the Arteries that are in∣serted into the Intestins, and returns by them to the Liver, through which it passes into the Vein called Cava, and by it ascends to the Heart. And as to the latter use assigned to these Veins, namely the bringing of Chyle from the Guts to the Liver, there was another sort of Vessels found out by one Asellius about threescore years agoe, that per∣form this office, called by him (from their colour) milky Veins. But neither do these conveigh the Chyle to the Liver, as the first Inventor of them thought, but running from the circumference of the Mesentery they unite and discharge themselves into one common receptacle near its centre at the Back-bone, from whence the Chyle passes up along the side of the Back-bone as high as the Collar-bone by a proper pipe, where it is emptied into the subclavian Vein, in which being mixed with the Bloud it glides along with it immediately into the Heart. I say then the use of the Bloud-veins of the Guts, is onely to receive so much of the Arterial bloud as is superfluous from their nourishment.

A second sort of Vessel dispersed through the Guts are the Arteries, which spring partly from the Coeliack branch, and partly from the Me∣senterick. These afford both Vital heat and nourishment to the Guts, and besides upon administring a Drench to scour your Horse, they dis∣charge the impurities and bad humours flowing in the mass of bloud, in∣to the Guts, to be thrown out in the draught.

3. Their Nerves are from that pair that has commonly been called the sixth, but according to Dr. Willis's distinction is now generally re∣puted for the ninth pair, and otherwise called the Intercostal, because as it descends down the Chest, it sends out a small twig between every Rib. These contribute to the Guts their sense of feeling, and furnish their Fibres with animal Spirits, whereby they are enabled to perform their worm-like motion.

As for the milky Veins, we have mention'd them before, and shall treat further of them in the Chapter of the Mesentery.

CHAP. XI. Of the Guts in particular.

The Guts are in number six. 1. The small Gut. 2. The Cae∣cum or blind Gut. Three Colons. 6. The streight Gut.

NOW though the Guts be one continued Body from the lower Ori∣fice of the Stomach to the Fundament, yet they are wont to be distinguished into several; In Men they are divided into six, three small, and three thick: but in a Horse we cannot so well follow this division, there being not any difference in the small Guts so considerable as to ground a distinction upon. However, because the second of the thick Guts seems to have three partitions, we shall make three of it, and so will they answer to the number in Men, and be reckoned six.

The first we shall distinguish onely by the name of the small Gut. This is twenty six or twenty seven yards in length, something narrower at a foot and half distance from the Stomach than towards its ending, but through the whole it is wider than in an Oxe, being about two inches or two and an half over. Presently at its beginning it bends under the Stomach towards the Back-bone, streight along which it descends a pretty way, being an∣nexed firmly to it by a strong Membrane (that seems to be borrow'd of the Caul here knit to it) which is all the establishment it has. But by and by it leaves this hold, and beginning to wind about, is received into the folds of the Mesentery, whereby it is admirably kept from twisting and entanglement. Now there are far more of the milky Veins inserted into this Gut than into all that follow; and besides those Vessels which are common to it with the thick Guts, namely Veins, Arteries and Nerves, it has two other Vessels inserted into it, one from the Liver and another from the Sweet-bread. By the first is yellow Choler, and by the latter a peculiar Juice from the Sweet-bread (called the pancreatick Juice) dis∣charged into it. These two Liquors flowing into it from the aforesaid Bowels about a foot below the Stomach, within an inch or two one of another, make a notable ferment in it, which mixing with the Chyle that is passing down this way, causes it also to ferment, whereby it comes to work it self something clearer, as I may say, even as Ale or Beer in a Barrel does. For by this fermentation the impurer and more earthy or dreggy part of the Chyle, is separated and precipitated as it were from the more pure and spirituous, whereby this latter part is made capable of being received in at the small mouths of the milky Veins that gape in abun∣dance into this Gut, whilst the thicker and excrementitious part is thrust along the Guts by their worm-like motion, and makes the Dung. This Gut for about two hands breadth at its beginning from the Pylorus is wi∣der, and for the like space at its end before it is joined to the following, is a little narrower, than in its other parts.

Having done with the small Gut, we next come to the thick ones, in number five, of which the first is called Caecum or the blind Gut, because it has but one passage for the Excrements both into and out of it, which come into it out of the small Gut, and go out of it into the next thick Gut. It is not round in shape like the small Gut, but as it were four∣square, which figure it comes to have from four Ligaments that run along it, one on each side, which contain it in that shape; and these Ligaments being shorter than its Coats, make them bag out in many Cells as the Colon does in other Creatures. It is almost a yard long, and unequal in breadth: for though at its mouth, where it joyns to the small Gut and the Colon, it be near a quarter of a yard over, yet towards its close end it grows so by degrees narrower, that it is not above three inches. This Gut is very inconsiderable for its bigness in most Creatures, particularly in Man, in whom it is not ordinarily above four inches long, and hardly so thick as ones little Finger: onely in a Rabbit it bears much the same proportion with the rest of the Guts, as it does in an Horse. In such Creatures as have it so very small, its use is very obscure; but in an Horse where it is so very large, its use is apparent to be, to stay the too quick passage of the Excrements by receiving them into it self as it were into an Inn, whereas if they kept directly the streight Road of the rest of the Guts without turning in here, they would come too soon to their journeys end, namely the Fundament: I mean the Horse would be continually

a-scouring, and so fall from his flesh and languish, by reason that the mil∣ky Veins would not have time to suck up all the Chyle out of the Guts to turn into his nourishment; besides that it would be troublesome to the Horse, and offensive to his Rider to have him always a-dunging. Its con∣nexion to the small Gut and Colon you may better conceive of by the fol∣lowing Figure, in which it is well expressed, than by my description of it in words.

That which is the second thick Gut and in Man is called the Colon, seems in an Horse to be divided into three, to which I shall not take up∣on me to assign distinct names, but onely call them three Colons. The first of them is about a yard and a half in length, and for the most part of it a quarter of a yard over. The second is as wide as the first, but onely about a yard in length. These two are divided one from the other by a narrow neck about half a yard long, and four inches over. The first of these two wide Colons, is that which in its upper part joyns with the blind Gut above described, where it has a Valve, consisting of a loose Membrane or Skin that hangs round its mouth, which permits any thing to come into the Colon out of the Caecum or out of the small Gut, but when any thing would pass out of that into these, then the edges of this loose Skin flap close one against another and hinder it, whereby Nature has prevented the return of the Excrements back out of the Colon into the small Gut. And the lower end of the latter of these two wide Colons joins to the third, which is very narrow in comparison of them, but yet is more than twice as long as both of them, namely about six yards. Now all these three Colons are contracted into Cells by two Ligaments, one of which runs along the upper part, and the other on the lower side of them: and besides these two which are common to them all, the lar∣ger ones have somewhere other two that run along their sides, but espe∣cially so has the Neck that divides them whereby it is made foursquare like the blind Gut. The reason why these Colons (as well as they are in other Creatures, and the Caecum also in this) are contracted into Cells, is for the slower passage of the Excrements, that what of the Chyle was not drunk in by the milky Veins of the small Gut, might be leisurely suckt up by those that are inserted into these thick ones; for though we call their Contents Excrements, yet that is onely because the much greater part is so, for all the Chyle is not clear imbibed from them till they come towards the end of the last Colon, though the milky Veins are not a tenth part so numerous in these as in the small Gut.

To the lower end of the small Colon is joined the last Gut called Rectum or the streight Gut, because it runs streight along without any windings. It is also called the Arse-gut, because it reacheth to the Fundament. The Coats of this Gut, especially the middle, are much thicker than any of the other, and the whole seems fleshy and muscular. It is but about half a yard long, and betwixt three and four inches over. This is not gathe∣red in the foldings of the Mesentery, but instead of that, is from its be∣ginning at the lower end of the Loins, to its ending at the Arse-hole, fast tied by a Membrane to the Back and Rump-bones, which keep it from falling out upon straining to dung. At its lower end at the Arse∣hole it has a round Muscle that encompasses it, called the sphincter Muscle, whereby it is pursed up so, that nothing can pass out, except when the Beast loosens it of his own accord when he goes to dung, and then at the same time he squeezes the Guts by help of the Muscles that environ his

Paunch, which we described above in chap. 6. and so forces the Dung to issue out at the Fundament.

And thus we have finished the History of the Guts, not needing to add any thing of the use of them, because their use is all along interwoven in their description, and therefore we shall pass on to the other parts.

The Fifth Table representeth the Gullet, Stomach and Guts taken out of the Body. (Book 5)

• A The Gullet.
• B The upper Orifice of the Stomach.
• CC The two external Nerves of the sixth pair (otherwise reckon'd for the eighth) dispersed through the upper part of the Stomach.
• DDD The three different Coats of the Gullet, a little turned down, to shew them the plainer.
• E The lower Orifice of the Stomach called the Pylorus.
• F The outermost Coat of the Stomach turned back.
• G The entrance of the porus bilarius or Choler-passage into the beginning of the small Gut.
• H The entrance of the pancreatick duct or passage of the Sweet-bread into the same Gut.
• IIIIIIII The small Gut.
• K The Intestinum caecum or blind Gut.
• LL The first Colon.
• M The small neck that divides the first Colon from the second.
• NN The second or middle Colon.
• OO One of the Ligaments that contracts the blind Gut and Colons into Cells.
• PP The third and last Colon, far smaller than the two former, but longer.
• QQ The Intestinum rectum or Arse-gut.
• R The two Muscles called levatores Ani, or openers of the Fundament.
• S The sphincter Muscle that contracts or purses up the Arse-hole.
• T The middle Coat of the Stomach through which the two branches of Nerves are dispersed.
• U The third or inmost Coat of the Stomach.
• XX The branchings of the Bloud-vessels, as they appear on the outside of the Stomach.
• YY The several Gastrick Vessels inserted into the bottom of the Stomach.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's stomach, gullet, and guts

TAB V fol. 24.

The Mesen∣tery why so called. Its rise. Its Fat. Its Vessels. 1. Veins. 2. Arteries. 3. Nerves. 4. Milky Veins. 5. Lymphe∣ducts. Its Glands. Its Ʋse.

CHAP. XII. Of the Mesentery.

THE Mesenterium or Mesentery is so called from its being placed in the middle of the Guts, which it embraces round, gathering them together in form of a Globe, but is it self gathered into folds. This Me∣sentery is of a circular figure, composed of a double Coat, between which do run many Vessels and those of all sorts, and betwixt which also there is a collection of much fat. Dr. Wharton says that in Man there is a third Membrane betwixt the two commonly known, in which are seated the Glands or Kernels, and through which the Vessels run. If so, 'tis likely there is the same in an Horses Mesentery, which abounds with Glands. 'Tis a little above a quarter of a yard broad from its centre to its circumserence.

Now its centre or rise is at the first and third Rack-bone of the Loins, where membranous Fibres are produced from the Rim of the Belly, and spread into the two investing Coats or Skins of the Mesentery.

The fat with which these Membranes are stuft, is collected in the same manner as that of the Caul above-described in chap. 8. namely the oily part of the Bloud sweating out of the Arteries that run in abundance between these Membranes, is stopt by them, (they being more compact and close than the Coats of the Arteries) and by their respective coldness is congealed into fat.

There are almost innumerable Vessels running through it, but such as are rather sustained and conducted by it, than for its own use.

The first sort are the Veins, to which it gives the denomination of Me∣saraick. These are all branches of the Porta, and their office is to receive so much of the Arterial bloud as is not spent on the nourishment of the Guts and Mesentery, and to convey it to the Liver, and from thence to the Heart. Before the milky Veins were found out, it was believed they brought the Chyle to the Liver; but that opinion is now out of doors, as we have more fully shewn before in the tenth Chapter.

Its Arteries also from its name are called Mesaraick or Mesenterick; these run in great numbers through it to the Guts, to which what office they perform was likewise declar'd above, chap. 10. And besides the uses there ascribed to them, they continually supply new oily Vapours for the maintenance of the sat of the Mesentery.

Its Nerves are very numerous, and spring from that pair which is now (from Dr. Willis) commonly called the Intercostal, and reckoned for the ninth pair, but was formerly reputed the sixth.

All the venae lacteae or milky Veins run through it from the Guts towards its centre. These are very slender and almost transparent Vessels, having but one single Coat, and gaping with their mouths in the inmost Coat of the Guts do there suck up the Chyle, and take the nearest course thence to those Glands or Kernels of the Mesentery that are next to them, se∣veral smaller in their passage growing into one greater. From the several smaller Glands they proceed to the greatest that is placed at the Back at the centre of the Mesentery, and from thence to the common receptacle

that is seated betwixt the Kidneys. What course it takes from thence the Reader may see in the already twice mentioned tenth Chapter.

Besides all these sorts of Vessels there was a fifth sort found out by Tho∣mas Bartholin (a Dane) some thirty years ago, which indeed are to be found in most parts of the Body, but most abound in the Mesentery, and are called Lympheducts, as much as to say, Water-passages. Their Coat is single as that of the milky Veins, but more transparent; and the lympha or water that is contained in them, is very clear. This Liquor differs from the serum or wheyish watery part of the Bloud, which one may dis∣cover by this Experiment; If you take a little of this Liquor into a Spoon, it will soon thicken into a gelly of its own accord, which the serum of the Bloud will not do unless you heat it over the fire. It is supposed to be made of thin moist Vapours of the Bloud, which being condensed into water, are imbibed by these Vessels. All those that run through the Me∣sentery discharge their water into the common receptacle of the Chyle above-mentioned, so that it passes together with the Chyle up the passage that ascends by the Back towards the Shoulders, and there mixes with the Bloud in the subclavian Vein.

In the middle Membrane of the Mesentery (first found out by Doctor Wharton as abovesaid) there are a great many Glands or Kernels, into which the milky Veins as they pass through the Mesentery are inserted, and then rise out of them again, continuing their course to the one great Gland at its centre, in which they all meet together, and from it hold on their way to the common receptacle as was above-declared. By these Glands the said Veins are supported and strengthened in their passage.

Now the use of the Mesentery is to be as it were a tie or band to the Guts to bind or gather them together, and to fasten them to the Back, that their great weight do not cause them in violent motion either to break or twist or roll confusedly one over the other, whereby their gen∣tle worm-like motion would be hindred, if not perverted or abolished. And besides by its Membranes and Glands it does guard and sustain the several Vessels whose way lies through it.

CHAP. XIII. Of the Pancreas or Sweet-bread.

The Pancreas why so called. Its situation. Its substance. Its Vessels. Its proper passage. Its Ʋse. The Pancrea∣tick Juice.

THE Sweet-bread is an unshapely body, of a glandulous yet flesh∣like substance, from whence it hath its name Pancreas which signifies all flesh.

In dissection it is at the end of the Liver and bottom of the Stomach; but while the Horse is living, it is situated on the backside of the bottom of the Stomach, and lies cross the Belly lengthways as that does.

Its proper flesh is white and soft, but the little Kernels with which it is plentifully stored, are of a more reddish colour. It is covered with a single Membrane which it has from the Rim of the Belly, as all the Bowels of the Lower Belly have, of which it is almost the least.

It has Veins from that branch of the Porta that runs to the Spleen, and is called the Splenick. Its Arteries spring from the Coeliacal; and its Nerves from the Intercostal or ninth pair. This Bowel for its bigness has very many of those Lympheducts that we described in the foregoing Chapter running through the Mesentery.

Besides these Vessels which are common to it with other parts, it has a pipe or passage peculiar to it self, which was first found out at Padua in an humane Body about forty years ago. This passage is membranous, and though it be but one in its going out, yet within the Sweet-bread it is divided first into two, and those two into innumerable small branches which are dispersed all over its Body, but their extremities terminate in the abovesaid reddish Kernels with which the Sweet-bread abounds.

Before this passage was found out, some thought the use of the Sweet∣bread to be only to serve as a Cushion (being very soft) for the Stomach to bolster upon, and to sustain the Vessels that run through it; and others, that it sent a ferment to the Stomach to assist concoction. As to this latter use it must needs be onely imaginary, seeing there is no passage from it to the Stomach. And as to the former, though it doe those offi∣ces mentioned, yet from its proper passage (which opens into the be∣ginning of the small Gut very near the same place where the Gall-passage enters) it gives suspicion that it has a further use. Now some have been so curious as to open Dogs alive, and cutting off this passage where it is inserted into the Gut, to receive its end into a narrow-mouth'd Vessel, (you may see the manner of it in Barthol. Anat. l. 1. c. 13.) into which Vessel in a few hours time there has a Spoonfull of Juice destilled out of it. And this Juice, to distinguish it from all other Liquors in the Bo∣dy, they call the Pancreatick juice, from the name Pancreas whereby the Sweet-bread is otherwise called. So that it seems there is a pecu∣liar Liquor separated from the Arteries into this passage in the little Kernels or Glands above-spoken of, which those that have tasted it, say, is of a saltish and somewhat sowrish taste. Now this Juice passing by its Pipe into the beginning of the small Gut, meets there with the Gall, with which it ferments, and causes some fermentation in the Chyle as it descends that way, whereby its purer parts are separated from the more impure and earthy, as was discoursed more fully in the eleventh Chapter, when we were describing the small Gut, (to which the Reader may please to turn back.)

As for the figure of the Sweet-bread, you have it exprest in the next Table but one, namely in that wherein the Spleen is also described.

CHAP. XIV. Of the Liver.

Its substance, situation and figure. Its Liga∣ments and investing Membrane. Veins. Arteries. Nerves. Lympheducts. Its Ʋse.

HAVING now done with the Parts that minister to the first con∣coction, namely Chylification, we proceed to those other that in some measure, some more some less, assist Sanguification, of which the Liver was esteemed by the Ancients the principal, nay almost the onely instrument. Which errour of theirs was founded on this mistake in Ana∣tomy, That having not then found out the milky Veins which we have before described, they thought that the Chyle was received out of the Guts by the Mesaraick Veins, which being branches of the Porta, all run to the Liver; And the Cava or large hollow Vein that arises out of the Liver, and is the trunk whence all the branches of Veins in the whole Body spring, containing nothing in it but bloud, it necessarily follow'd that if the Chyle came to the Liver, it must by it be turned into bloud before it departed from it again. Yea so deep was this Opinion of the Liver's making bloud fixed in Mens Brains, that for some while after the milky Veins were found out, they would needs have them to convey the Chyle to the Liver, though they were forced to a thousand shifts to apo∣logize for their non-appearance between the great Gland of the Mesen∣tery, (whither they might be easily traced) and the Liver. But this prejudice was soon overcome when about thirty years ago the common Receptacle (described before in the tenth and twelfth Chapters) was found out, and a new office was invented for the Liver, which yet may in some sort be said to assist Sanguification: and what this office is, shall be shewn by and by in this and the next Chapters.

The substance of it is like concrete or congealed Bloud, for which cause it is called Parenchyma, which is to say an affusion or shedding forth of bloud. It is one in number, and situated in the Lower Belly in the upper part thereof on the right side under the short Ribs, near to the Diaphrag∣ma or Midriff, in its upper side, and its lower lies upon the right and foreside of the Stomach. It is divided into several Lobes or Flaps, in Horses, otherwise than in Men, in whom it is one continued body. These Lobes do cover the Stomach, grasping of it (as it were) as one should grasp any thing with their hand by spreading their fingers about it. This covering the Stomach stands in great need of, for thereby is the heat thereof much cherished for the furthering concoction. As for its shape, you cannot so well conceive it by any description, as by the figure of it annexed at the end of this Chapter, which you may please to take a view of.

It is tied in its place by three Ligaments: the strongest of which is that which is called its suspensory Ligament. This springs from the Peri∣tonaeum where it is spread over the under side of the Midriff. It is very strong and membranous, and arising from the Midriff somewhat towards its right side, it is inserted into the upper or bunching side of the Liver, into which it enters a little way; but in its entrance it loses one of its Membranes, which dilating or spreading it self makes the skin that en∣wraps

wraps the whole Liver; for the Liver is onely covered with one thin skin which it has from this Ligament. There is a second Ligament which seems to spring from this skin of the Liver, and is inserted into the sharp∣pointed Gristle at the bottom of the Breast-bone. By these two is the Liver kept from falling lower down into the Belly, or from slipping out of its place sideways. The third Ligament is not one originally, but when the Foal is in the Womb it supplies the place of a Vein, running from the Navel to the lower or hollow side of the Liver, and by it is nourishment brought from the Dam to the Foal. But as soon as it is foaled, and it begins to take its nourishment by the mouth onely, and not any longer at all this way, this Vein dries and closes up, and so degenerates into a Ligament, whereby the Liver is kept from ascending or bearing up against the Midriff, as it might have done in an Horses leaping or the like. This is just opposite to the Suspensory one, entring in at the lower side over against where that does on the upper.

It hath two sorts of Veins. The first are the roots of the Vena cava or large hollow Vein, which spreading themselves through all its parts, do receive into them the bloud that is brought into the Liver by the Porta; which having done, the smaller roots two or three of them grow into one, and this one uniting with two or three of the like kind into another larger root, they do at last all of them meet in one trunk and make the hollow Vein, which issuing out of the upper part of the Liver presently enters the Midriff, and so ascends up to the Heart. The second sort of Vein is the Porta, all whose branches coming from the Guts, Spleen, Stomach, &c. and uniting into one trunk enter the Liver on its lower or hollow side, into which it is no sooner entred, but presently it disperses it self into innumerable branches through all the Lobes of the Liver, af∣fording nourishment unto it, in that regard supplying the place of an Ar∣tery, which it resembles the more, because within the Liver it has two Coats, the outer whereof it receives from that skin that cloaths the Liver, in its entrance into it. Now so much of the bloud that is imported by the Porta, as is not spent on the nourishment of the Liver, is drunk in by the roots of the hollow Vein before-mentioned, and returned to the Heart. This Vein is called Porta or Vena portae, the Gate-vein, from two bunchings out, of the Liver, (called gates by Hippocrates) between which it enters it.

Yet is not the Liver, at least all the parts of it, onely nourished by the bloud that is brought in by the Porta; for there is a branch which comes from the Coeliack Artery that ascends to its hollow side just by the Porta, which sends forth twigs all over its Coat, as likewise through the Coats of the Porta and the Choler-Vessels: but whether any of them en∣ter into its parenchyma or substance, is not discovered. These twigs of Arteries bring vital heat and nourishment to those parts through which they run.

Its Nerves spring from the Intercostal pair, viz. partly from the stoma∣chick and partly from the mesenterick branch thereof. These onely are communicated to those parts to which the Arteries are dispersed, so that the substance of the Liver has very little sense.

We shew'd before how that for some while after the milky Veins were found out, they were believ'd to convey the Chyle to the Liver: and all the colour for this Opinion was a few small clear, limpid and almost transparent Vessels, that run between the Mesentery and it. But as on

the one hand they are too few in number for that office (especially being so slender) being scarce one for ten of the milky Veins in the Mesentery: so on the other, they are neither of the same colour (as being much clearer) nor does the Liquor they contain come from the Mesentery to the Liver, but runs from this to that, as has been observed in Live-dissections, in which having been tied they have swelled on that side of the Ligature toward the Liver, and grown empty toward the Mesentery. They are indeed then truly Lympheducts, which carry that water that is separated from the bloud in the Liver, towards the Mesentery, and from it to the com∣mon receptacle of the Chyle with which it mixes.

Besides these Vessels there are the numerous branches of the Gall-pas∣sage, of which we shall treat more fully in the next Chapter. And shall say no more here, but onely how one may distinguish betwixt the bran∣ches of the Cava, Porta and these of the Gall-passage, so as to know which are which. Those of the Cava are clad but with one Coat, are white, thin and of a large cavity. Those of the Porta have a double Coat, and so are thicker and stronger, and yet not so wide as those of the Cava. Lastly, the branches of the Gall-passage are of a duskish yellow, have a thicker Coat than either the Cava or Porta, and yet have the narrowest channel. These are included in a common case with those of the Porta, which makes their outer Coat.

Having in the beginning of this Chapter detected the errour of the Ancients in ascribing Sanguification to the Liver in so eminent and large a sense; we must however confess that it does something towards the pu∣rifying of the Bloud, and that is, by separating the Choler from it, as shall be fullier shewn in the next Chapter. In it also is a pretty quantity of serous or wheyish humour filtrated or strained from the Bloud, which is sent by the Lympheducts to the common receptacle of the Chyle as aforesaid. In the third and last place it furthers the concoction of the Stomach by its kind and cherishing heat.

The Sixth Table sheweth the Liver intire, and also its Vessels freed from the Parenchyma. (Book 6)

Fig. I. Expresses the Liver taken out of the Body, and placed with its hollow side uppermost.

• AAAA The hollow side of the Liver cloathed with its Coat.
• B The Vena portae or Gate-vein, and its egress out of the hollow side of the Liver.
• C The Trunk of Vena cava or hollow Vein also coming out of the Liver.
• D The Gall or Choler-passage cut off close to the Liver.
• E An Artery which is branched to the Liver from the ramus Coeliacus.
• F A Nerve of the sixth pair (as commonly reckoned) also branching to the Liver.
• GG The Edges of the Liver turned down and hanging over the hollow side of it.
• HHHH The four Lobes or Scollops of the Liver.

Fig. II. Represents the Vessels of the Liver freed from the Parenchyma, or fleshy substance thereof.

• AA A portion of Vena cava.
• BB The Trunk of Vena portae passing forth of the Liver.
• C The Gall-passage cut off close by the Liver.
• EEEE The Branches of Vena portae dispersed through the Liver.
• FFFF The Branches of the hollow Vein likewise distributed through the Liver.
• GGGG The most remarkable Anastomoses or joinings together of the mouths of the Cava and Porta.
• HH The Artery that is branched to the Liver from the Coeliack Artery.
• I The Extremities or ends of the Veins, which for their smallness are cal∣led Capillary, or hair-like.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's liver and its vessels

TAB VI fol. 30

[illustration]

Figure. I.

[illustration]

Figure II.

CHAP. XV. Of the Porus Bilarius, or Gall-passage.

Its branching in the Liver, and its ten∣dency with∣out it. Choler how separated from the Bloud, and its use.

IT is difficult to give a satisfactory account why most Creatures should have both a Gall-bladder, for the collection of the Choler, and besides, a Gall-passage; and yet a Horse and all whole-hoofed Beasts, as also Harts, Fallow-deer and some few others, should onely have the passage without the Bladder. It would be worth the while for our Virtuosi to invent a probable reason of it, but for my own part I dare not pretend to be so sa∣gacious. But much have those been mistaken that not finding any Blad∣der of Gall, have affirmed that an Horse hath no gall at all. And this, Dr. Brown reckons up amongst vulgar Errors.

Now the trunk of this Gall-passage enters the Liver very near the same place with the Porta, together with which it is enwrapped in one com∣mon Cover, which they both borrow from that skin wherewith the Li∣ver is cloathed. I mean they begin to be so invested just at their en∣trance into the Liver, for before they have but each one single Coat. Its branches run along with those of the Porta through all parts of the Liver, and it has the same Artery and Nerve running through its Mem∣brane. All these branches uniting into one trunk, it passes the directest way to the small Gut, into which it is inserted about a foot from the lower Orifice of the Stomach, where it discharges it self of the Choler.

Having described the Vessel, there remain two things to be enquired into, first how the Choler is separated in the Liver, and secondly of what use it is. As to the first, we must consider that there can be no such separa∣tion as this, without some sort of ferment to cause it. There comes indeed nothing to the Liver but under the form of bloud, but however it will be of use to examine from what parts that bloud comes: And amongst the rest we find that a considerable quantity comes from the Spleen by the splenick branch. Now every one that will taste it may discern that the

bloud that comes out of the Spleen by this branch has a kind of a sowrish harsh taste to what the rest of the mass of bloud has. This then mixing with the rest of the bloud and passing with it through the narrow Vessels in the Liver, causes it there to ferment (as a small piece of sowr Dough will I know not how much that is not leavened) and in that fermentation this yellow Choler is separated from the Bloud, much in the same man∣ner as Yest from Beer in a Barrel, (which it partly resembles in colour.) And this fermentation is assisted by the proper nature and faculty of the Liver given by Nature to it; who hath also framed this liquor of Particles so differing from those of the Bloud, that though the Bloud pass out of the Porta into the Cava, yet the Choler stays behind and is received by the small mouths of the Choler-passage. Some affirm this separation is performed by the help of some Glands or little Kernels into which the ends of the several Vessels are inserted, but I have not been able to discern them. The use of the Gall is, Together with the Juice that is sent from the Sweet-bread, to make a ferment in the first Gut for the uses that are fully enough delivered in the eleventh Chapter: to which we shall onely add, that it serves by its acrimony to exstimulate the Guts to expell the Excrements contained in them. And seeing there is no bag or repository to store it up in, it passes continually to the Guts, whereby Horses come to dung of∣tener than most other Creatures: which as Dr. Brown notes,

was pru∣dently contrived by Providence in this Animal, considering his plen∣tifull feeding, the largeness of his Guts, and their various circumvolu∣tion. For, says he, Choler is the natural Glyster, or one excretion whereby Nature excludes another, &c.

CHAP. XVI. Of the Spleen or Milt.

The substance of the Spleen. Its situation and con∣nexion. Its Figure. Its Colour. Whether an Horse can live without it. Its Mem∣brane. 1. Vessels. Veins. 2. Arteries. 3. Nerves. 4. Lymphe∣ducts. Its action and use.

THE Spleen or Milt is of a soft, spongious substance, like thick, black and congealed Bloud, from which it is said to be generated; though some that of late have examined it more curiously with Magni∣fying Glasses, declare the greatest part of its substance, besides the Bloud∣vessels, to consist of abundance of little Kernels inclosed in skinny Cells like Honey-combs, which in their own nature are of a white colour, and will appear such when the Bloud is washt from them. For my own part, I question whether there be any such Kernels in it, or if there be, they must be far different from those of any other part, and be of a much looser substance, seeing I have onely in River-water (after I had taken off the investing skin) washt off the parenchyma so clearly from the Vessels, that there has seem'd to be nothing else remaining. A figure of which Vessels so cleared of the parenchyma by washing, you have in the follow∣ing Table.

Its situation is under the short Ribs on the left side over against the Li∣ver, between the Stomach and the short or bastard Ribs. It cleaveth oft-times to the Midriff by a skin or coat, which it hath from the Rim of the Belly. It is also fastned by a skin to the Stomach.

It is of a triangular shape, yet long, and something sharp-pointed, as you may see in the Figure.

Its Colour is (in a sound Horse) reddish, inclining somewhat to black; but in an unsound Horse it is more inclining to black, or of a leaden or ashey colour: yet most times in an unsound Horse it is of the colour of the Humour which offends.

There are several Creatures that naturally have no Spleen, as all In∣sects; and therefore that Proverb is not literally true, That even a Fly has a Spleen; Such also as have no Piss-bladder, want the Milt, as the Chameleon, and many such like: But now it is a great question, whe∣ther such Creatures as by Nature have Spleens, can have them taken out, and yet live. It is true indeed that other Parts that seem to be as consi∣derable, have been taken even out of Humane Bodies, and yet the Parties have lived: So I have read of some Women that upon incurable distem∣pers in the Part, have had their Womb cut out, and yet have liv'd in to∣lerable health afterwards (Barthol. Epist.) And it is a common thing to geld any sort of Creature, though there be considerably large Vessels that run to the Stones. But it is to be confess'd that these parts instanc'd in, seem to be wholly framed for the propagation of the several kinds of li∣ving Creatures, and not for the necessary service of the Individual that has them. And therefore when they are taken away, though the end for which they were created, to wit generation, be frustrated by the loss of them; yet may the Creature it self that loses them, live well enough without them. But now as for the Spleen, it does not at all serve for procreation, but is of use onely to that Body that has it. (What its use is, we shall shew towards the latter end of this Chapter.) Yet se∣veral have boasted that they have taken it out of Dogs and Cats, and that they have lived in pretty good plight a considerable while after. The operation must needs be somewhat difficult, seeing the Spleen is seated on the inside of the short Ribs, nearer the Back than the Breast: nor can I believe that a Horse could live any while if it were taken out of him; but least of all could Man, in whom it is larger than in any other Crea∣ture, as Bartholin affirms. For the Vessels that are inserted into it are so many and large, that it would seem impossible to stanch the Bloud; besides the necessary use that it seems to be of to the Body, of which by and by.

The skin that it is covered with, is thicker than that of the Liver, both because of the loose and soft substance of the Spleen that required a stron∣ger covering to defend it; and also that it might the better sustain the strong beatings of its Arteries that are pretty large and many. This skin it has from the Peritonaeum or Rim of the Belly, to which it is common∣ly knit, as also to the left Kidney and the Midriff, and on its inside to the Caul. Some late Anatomists have affirmed it to be clad with two Coats, the outer that which we have mentioned, and the inner arising from the Vessels that enter the Spleen.

All the Veins that it has, are from that branch of the Porta that is cal∣led the Splenick branch. For the Porta as soon as it comes out of the lower or hollow side of the Liver, sends one notable Branch to the Spleen, which passing cross the Body from the right to the left side under the Li∣ver and Stomach, enters the Spleen and disperses it self into innumerable Twigs all over it. A Twig of the splenick Artery opens into this Vein a little before it enters the Spleen: And from the lower end of the Spleen

there go two or three Vessels to the Stomach, which are called Vasa brevia or short Vessels. The use of the splenick Vein is to bring from the Spleen all that arterial blood that is not spent on its nourishment; and besides, that proper and peculiar juice that is made in the Spleen, of which pre∣sently.

Its Arteries are three or four times more in number than the Veins, and all of them spring from the left Coeliack branch that has the name of Splenick, from the Spleen, into which it is inserted. Hereby it receives vital heat and nourishment, and matter out of which to make its proper juice. Before this Artery enter the Spleen, it sends forth one twig that unites with and opens into the splenick Vein, as was noted before.

Its Nerves are but small yet pretty numerous. They spring from a me∣senterick branch of the left Intercostal Nerve, and are dispersed principal∣ly through the skin that covers it, though some few enter its substance.

Lastly, it has several Lympheducts, or Water-passages, which creep∣ing all over its Coat, take their way along the Caul towards the com∣mon receptacle of the Chyle, into which they empty the liquor contain∣ed in them, as all those that arise from the several parts of the lower Bel∣ly do. What these Lympheducts are, and what that liquor is which they contain, I have shown above in the 12th Chapter, of the Me∣sentery.

There is no part of the Body concerning whose use there has been greater diversity of opinion. Some have made it the receptacle of black Choler (or of thick dreggy Bloud) separated in the Liver and brought hither by the splenick branch. Others that thought this too ignoble and base an use for so considerable a part, esteem'd it to be as it were a second Liver: For as they believed that the thinner and more spirituous part of the Chyle passed to the Liver; so, that a thicker and more dreggy part went to the Spleen, of which was made a blacker and more earthy sort of Bloud, partly for its own nourishment, and partly for the nourishment of the Stomach, Guts, Mesentery, &c. In answer to these two opinions it will be sufficient to say, That the first is contrary to the circulation of the Bloud, nothing passing from the Liver to the Spleen, but contrarily from the Spleen to the Liver: and the latter, besides that it is contrary to the said circulation, is repugnant also to the true motion of the Chyle, none of which either passes to the Liver or Spleen, as we have more than once shown already. A third opinion is, That of the bloud that the Ar∣teries bring to it in great plenty, is made a certain acid or sowr Juice, which is sent by the vasa brevia or short Veins to the Stomach, into which being discharged, it partly provokes appetite, and partly helps concoc∣tion: And this Opinion has had a great many Abettors, whereas its fal∣sity may be demonstrated by this, that if one open a Dog (or the like) alive, and tie these short Veins with a thred, they will fill and swell betwixt the Stomach and Ligature, but will grow empty on that side toward the Spleen; which is a plain evidence that the Bloud or whatever other Hu∣mour that runs in these short Veins, flows from the Stomach and not to it. However we will grant that the Spleen does indeed make such a sowr Juice, of part of the Arterial bloud that is imported into it by the sple∣nick Artery; but then it passes not from thence to the Stomach, but to the Liver by the splenick branch of the Porta: for if one tie the said branch, as was said above of the short veins, it will fill towards the Spleen and grow empty towards the Liver. And the use of this Juice seems to

be this, viz. That mixing in the trunk of the Porta with all the Bloud that is received by the branches thereof out of the several parts of the Lower Belly, especially from the Guts, it enters with it into the Liver, where it causes the Bloud to ferment, whereby the Choler is separated from it, for the uses mentioned in the foregoing Chapter, where we have treated more at large of this separation.

Another use of the Spleen is, by its warmth to cherish the left side of the Stomach, as the Liver does the right, to further the concoction thereof. And this it may be conceived to doe in a very considerable de∣gree; for seeing it has so very many Arteries, it must needs be very warm.

There are many more Opinions concerning the use of the Spleen than these I have mentioned: but as it would be tedious to recite them, so it would be but needless to refute them, the new Doctrines of the circula∣tion of the Bloud and the motion of the Chyle being improveable to a general confutation of them.

Table VII. Expresseth the Spleen intire with the Vessels going in and out, and the same Vessels alone freed from their parenchyma; as also the Sweet-bread intire with its Vessels. (Book 7)

Fig. I Representeth the Spleen intire, with the Vessels going in and out.

• A Shews the body of the Spleen on the concave or hollow side which re∣ceives the Vessels.
• B The splenick Vein.
• C The splenick Artery.
• D Its Nerves proceeding from a Mesenterick branch of the left Intercostal Nerve.

Fig. II. Representeth the Vessels of the Spleen devested of their paren∣chyma.

• A Shews the Arteria Coeliaca, cut close off at the great Artery.
• B Its ramus dexter superior, or right-hand upper branch, producing the gastrica dextra, or right-hand Stomach-artery: it makes also the cysticae gemellae that go to the Liver and Gall-passage.
• C Its ramus dexter inferior, or right-hand lower branch, which goes to the Mesentery and Guts.
• D Its ramus sinister, or left-hand branch, called Arteria Splenica or sple∣nick Artery, which brings the bloud to the Spleen.
• E The Nerves of the Spleen coming from a mesenterick branch of the left Intercostal Nerve.
• F The splenick branch of Vena portae cut off close by its trunk.
• G The splenick Vein cut open to shew its Valves, which permit the Bloud to pass from the Spleen to the Liver, but hinder any Bloud from re∣turning from the Liver to the Spleen.
• HH The Distribution of the Nerves through the substance of the Spleen, accompanying the Veins and Arteries.
• II &c. Several (seeming) Anastomoses or inosculations of the Veins and Arteries.
• KKK Vessels going from the lower end of the Spleen to the Stomach, called Vasa brevia, or short Vessels.

• LL &c. The capillary branches of Veins, Arteries and Nerves dispersed through the whole substance of the Spleen.

Fig. III. Representeth the Pancreas or Sweet-bread freed from its Mem∣brane and part of its substance, the better to shew the course of the Vessels in it, which come to it from the splenick Vein and Artery. It representeth also the new Wirtsungian passage, so called from the late Inventer of it.

• A Shews the body of the Pancreas dissected.
• B The new passage called ductus Wirtsungianus or pancreaticus.
• C The Orifice of the said passage where it opens into the beginning of the small Gut.
• D The Artery of the Sweet-bread dispersed through its substance.
• E The Vein of the Sweet-bread dispersed likewise through its substance.
• F Its Nerves, being a branch of the Intercostal pair.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's pancreas and spleen and its vessels

TAB. VII. fol. 35.

[illustration]

Figure I.

[illustration]

Figure. II.

[illustration]

Figure. III

CHAP. XVII. Of the Kidneys, and Deputy-kidneys.

Their name. Number, si∣tuation and connexion. Figure. Membranes. Substance. Vessels, viz. Emulgent Arteries, and Veins. The Papillary Caruncles. The pelvis or Bason. Their Action. Deputy-kid∣neys, their name, situa∣tion, bigness and shape. Their Vessels. Their Ʋse.

THE Kidneys are otherwise called Reins from their Latine name Renes, which is derived from a Greek word which signifieth to flow, because the watery or wheyish part of the Bloud doth continually flow through them, and maketh the Urine.

They are in number two, that when one is stopt with a stone or gra∣vel, or hurt by any accident, the Urine might be separated in the other, or otherwise the Beast would die. They are seated in the Loins behind the Stomach and Guts, the right under the Liver and the left under the Spleen, on each side of the hollow Vein and great Artery, opposite to one another. They rest upon the Muscles of the Loins, and are in∣cluded betwixt the Membranes of the Peritonaeum which keeps them firm in their place. They are knit to the hollow Vein and great Artery by the Emulgent Vessels, and to the Bladder by the Ureters which we shall de∣scribe in the next Chapter.

They are seldom like to one another in shape; for the Right is in figure like a Heart, but something flatter; whereas the left is like that of a Man, viz. of the shape of a Kidney-bean, as you may see them repre∣sented in the following Figure.

They are covered with two Membranes, an inner which is proper, and an outer which is common. The inner Skin seems to spring from the outer Coat of those Vessels that enter into them: this cleaves so close to them, that it can hardly be separated, being very thin, and having small threds of Nerves running along it from a twig of the Intercostal Nerve. The outer which is common, is borrowed from the Rim of the Belly, and is wrapped somewhat loosely about the Kidney. This Skin is bedaubed with fat, and is therefore called the fatty Coat; and into it are inserted an Ar∣tery

and Vein, which have also the title of fatty, and spring from the great Artery and hollow Vein.

As to their substance, it has been always till of late held to be hard and compact flesh; and indeed it handles pretty firm to the touch, and seems to be fleshy to the bare eye. But seeing there is no separation made of any thing from the Bloud in other Parts, but by the help of Glands or Kernels; (for so is the Slaver separated in the Mouth, the Cho∣ler in the Liver, bad Humours in the Guts upon taking a purge, &c.) I say, for that cause it is reasonable to give credit to those curious Ana∣tomists that by their Magnifying Glasses or Microscopes have discovered the substance of the Kidneys to be for the greatest part made up of such Glands, by means of which the Urine is separated from the Bloud, in such manner as we shall shew by and by.

Their Arteries and Veins are called Emulgents, because they do as it were milk out the Urine from the mass of Bloud. Each Kidney has for the most part but one Artery and one Vein; yet sometimes two or more of a sort. But whether the Trunk be one or more, each as it enters the Kidneys is branched into several, and those into more successively, till they become as small as hairs. The Emulgent Arteries spring from the Trunk of the great Artery, and the Veins from the hollow Vein: Both these as they enter the Kidney, are devested of their outer Coat, which makes the proper Coat of the Kidneys, as was observed above: but in∣stead of that loss they are invested in one common Case with the bran∣ches of the Ureter, even as we shewed in the fifteenth Chapter that the branches of the Gall-passage in the Liver are included in one common Coat or Case with those of the Porta. The Arteries bring bloud for their nourishment, and moreover the watery humour that is separated in them and makes the Urine. By the Veins the bloud circulates back again to the hollow Vein or Cava, and by it ascends up to the Heart.

Besides the innumerable little Kernels which we have shewn the sub∣stance of the Kidney to consist of, there are about ten of a more conside∣rable bigness in the middle or centre of it, placed at the entrance into the pelvis or Bason, which are in Latin called Carunculae Papillares, in En∣glish Papillary Caruncles, and by some they are called Teat-like Produc∣tions, both which names they have from the likeness they have to the Teats or Nipples of Women. They are something harder than the rest of the substance of the Kidney, and also of a fainter colour. They are in bigness as large as a small Horse-bean. They have each several small holes or pores, through which the Urine destills out of the slender Uri∣nary Pipes in the body of the Kidneys, into the cavity of the pelvis.

Now this pelvis or Bason is a membranous cell or cavity in the mid∣dle of the Kidney, and is nothing else but the head of the Ʋreter widened. There run out of it several large pipes to the aforesaid Teat-like Kernels, (one pipe to each Kernel) by which the Urine drils into this cavity, and out of it into the Ʋreter.

The action of the Kidneys, is to separate the wheyish Humour from the Bloud, which they do in this manner and order. We find that an Horse can no more live without drink than meat: Now the drink serves not onely to cool the Body, but much more is it of use to make the Chyle thin, that it may be able to pass through the narrow ways of the milky Veins; so that the water which the Horse drinks, passes along with the more oily Chyle into the mass of Bloud, whither having con∣ducted

it, the water is now of no more use, and therefore the Emulgent Arteries above-described conveigh it to the Kidneys together with the Bloud, to cast it out: But the Bloud, being of a thicker body than the water, cannot enter through those narrow passages which the other de∣stils through, and therefore what is more than serves for their nourish∣ment, returns back from the Kidneys by the Emulgent Veins into the Cava, and so returns to the Heart again in its circulation. But the wa∣tery or wheyish part running out of the larger into the smaller branches of the Emulgent Arteries successively, and the said branches so often divi∣ding themselves till at last they become as small as an hair and end in the little Kernels towards the outside of the Kidneys, this watery Humour is milked as it were through these Kernels into small urinary pipes, as slender almost as Fibres, by which it drills along to the Papillary Carun∣cles, and is again strained through them into the Bason, from whence it glides down the Ureters into the Bladder, where when it becomes trou∣blesome either by its quantity or sharpness, &c. it provokes the Horse to stale, and is called Urine. But seeing the Piss is not of the same colour with the water that was drunk, but generally a great deal yellower, it is likely it gains that colour from a little quantity of Choler mixed with it: And as the Choler either retains it natural colour, to wit yellow, or is preternaturally of some other, as black, greenish, &c. the Urine will be tinctured accordingly; as any Man may observe in Horses that are di∣stempered. So that in Horses as well as in Men, one may many times gain some knowledge of the Distemper from the Urine.

Over the Kidneys a little more outward, and about an inch from them, there stand two Kernels, which are known by several Names, from the several uses that Authors have ascribed to them. Some call them Deputy-kidneys, because of some resemblance they have to the true ones in their frame, and because they have been thought to assist them in sepa∣rating the Urine. Bartholine calls them Black-choler Cases, from an Opi∣nion that they receive black Choler from the Spleen. Others have impos'd other Names on them, which we shall not recite. It is not long since they were first found out. They are in an Horse about as big as a Gar∣den-bean, and of that shape as they are represented in the Figure. They are covered with a single thin skin, which commonly sticks to the fatty skin that invests the Kidneys. They have a small cavity in them.

Their Veins and Arteries generally come from the Emulgents, but sometimes immediately from the great Artery and hollow Vein. The Arteries bring them bloud for nourishment, from which what remains, returns back by the Veins, as also does that Humour whatever it be that is concocted and separated in them, for there is no other vessel to do it. They have indeed some Lympheducts, but those are common to them with other parts, and have no peculiar use here. Their Nerves spring from that branch of the Intercostal pair that goes to the Stomach, to the Spleen, and to the inner or proper skin that cloaths the Kidneys.

In their Cavity there is commonly found a blackish Humour, which is made of part of the Arterial bloud that flows to them; but of what na∣ture or use this Humour should be, is very uncertain. It has no way to go out of the Cavity but by the Veins, which deposite what is con∣tained in them into the Emulgent Veins, or into the Cava, and so it must needs pass with the Venal bloud to the Heart. If there could be

found out any way whereby it could probably pass to the Kidneys, then Bartholine's Opinion, that they make a ferment for the use of the Reins, for the better separating of the wheyish Humour from the Bloud, were very plausible; but till then, one must suspend their belief of it. As for mine own part, seeing so many learned Anatomists as have treated of them, are at a loss in discovering their true use, I will not be ashamed to confess my own ignorance and unsatisfiedness therein also.

CHAP. XVIII. Of the Ʋreters or Passages of Ʋrine.

The Ʋreters. Their sub∣stance, and Vessels. Their cavity and use.

THE Ʋreters or Urine-pipes or Chanels are in number two, seated on each side of the hollow Vein and great Artery, at some distance from them. Their head or beginning is the Bason of the Kidneys, at whose hollow side they come forth, and run in a crooked line like an s down to the Bladder, into whose back and lower part they are inserted not far from the Sphincter, running for an inch between its two proper Coats, to prevent the return of the Urine back this way. For when the Blad∣der is squeezed, its Coats clap close together, and so shut up the mouths of the Ureters.

They are in substance much like a Vein, onely whiter and thicker, and more nervous. They are commonly held to consist of two Coats, an inner which is proper, and an outer which is borrowed from the Rim of the Belly. They have small Veins and Arteries from the neighbouring Vessels, and slips of Nerves in a considerable number from the Intercostals, whence proceeds that intolerable sense of pain when a stone sticks in them.

They are indifferent large, having a hollowness through them which is so wide, that they will admit of a large straw in a dead Horse, and therefore may be conceived in a living Horse to be much wider. Through these passages or hollownesses, the Urine doth pass from the Kidneys to the Bladder, and that is their sole and true use.

CHAP. XIX. Of the Piss-bladder, or Bladder of Ʋrine.

The situation and substance of the Blad∣der. Its Figure. Membranes. Its perfora∣tions. Its parts and connexion. Its Vessels. Its Ʋse.

THE Bladder of Urine is seated at the bottom of the Belly, in that hollowness that is formed of the Os sacrum, Hips and the Os pubis, between the Coats of the Rim of the Belly; and is of a substance partly membranous, for strength, extension and contraction; and partly fleshy, for motion; for by its fleshy Fibres are its Membranes contracted: and these fleshy Fibres are wholly seated in its middle Coat, which is truly muscular, as shall be shewed by and by.

It is of a round globous figure, in shape like a Pear, having within it a large cavity or hollowness, wherein to contain the Urine.

It is composed of a treble Coat or Skin. The first and outwardmost of which it hath derived to it from the Rim of the Belly, which Skin is very strong and close. The innermost is thin, white and bright, of an exquisite sense, and is interwoven with all sorts of Fibres, that it may the better bear inlarging and drawing up together, as need requireth. Within I have often found it covered with a mucous crust, which I take to be an Excrement of the third concoction of the Bladder, and to serve to defend it from being too much grated upon by the acrimony of the Urine. The middle betwixt these two, is as thick or thicker than them both, and is stuff with fleshy Fibres, even as the same Coat of the Stomach and Womb are. Its Fibres run lengthways of the Bladder, and by contracting of themselves squeeze out the Urine, forcing open the sphincter Muscle that encompasseth the neck of the Bladder.

It hath three perforations or holes, two on the hinder part a little be∣low the neck to let in the Urine from the Ureters, and one in the neck to let the Urine out.

The parts of the Bladder are two, its bottom and its neck. The bottom is its wider, more capacious part, and its neck, its narrower and more con∣tracted. The bottom is fast tied by a Membrane to the Intestinum rectum or Arse-gut, and to the Aorta (a little before its division) by the Umbi∣lical Arteries, so that no violent motion can cause it to fall down upon its neck, which if it should happen, would hinder the outgate of the Urine. The neck is narrower but longer in Horses than in Mares, and in both it is fleshy, being incompassed with a sphincter Muscle, which is woven with very many Fibres, some of which are streight, and some overthwart, these last lying under the former. Now this sphincter Muscle seems to be nothing else but the middle Coat of the Bladder made thicker here than in any other part, by the accession of the circular or overthwart Fibres. And its use is to purse up the neck of the Bladder so, as no Urine can pass out, till by its quantity or sharpness it becomes so troublesome to the Beast, as provokes him to force open the Sphincter by contracting the Muscles of the Paunch, and the muscular Coat of the Bladder. If this Sphin∣cter happen to be overcooled, &c. the Horse loseth its use, and so for want of it his Water drops from him as fast as it comes into the Bladder.

Its Veins and Arteries proceed from the hypogastrick branches of the hollow Vein and great Artery, and are implanted into its neck, on which, part of them is spent, and the remainder runs through the bot∣tom. Its Nerves come partly from the Intercostals and partly from the Marrow of that Bone of the Back that is called Os sacrum, that is next to the Crupper.

The use of the Bladder is to receive the Urine from the Kidneys by the Ureters, and to contain it, like a Chamber-pot, till it is so full as to be∣come troublesome and uneasy to the Beast; for as soon as it becomes so, by the help of the Muscles of the Belly and the middle muscular Coat of the Bladder it is pressed out of it by pissing.

CHAP. XX. Of the Yard and Sheath.

The parts of the Yard. Its Nervous bodies. The Piss-pipe The Glans. The Muscles. The Vessels. Its Ʋse. The Sheath.

BEcause the Yard of ston'd Horses besides its principal use which is to copulate with the Mare, has also an inferiour use, viz. to discharge the Urine out of the Bladder; and because this latter is the sole use of it in Geldings, we will here treat of it next to the Bladder, in respect to the office it performs to it, and not defer it, as many Anatomists of Hu∣mane Bodies do, till we have discoursed of the parts that prepare, make and retain the Seed, to which it also ministers.

The Yard of an Horse lies hid for the most part within the Sheath, from which, when it is drawn, it borrows its covering, consisting of the Scarf-skin and true Skin, and the carnous Membrane, which are common to it with other parts of the Body: Its Glans has a proper Membrane that invests it, as the Glans of a Man's Yard has; and the whole consists of two Nervous bodies (which make up the greatest part of its bulk) a Partition-skin that goes betwixt them, the Ʋrethra or Piss-pipe, the Glans, four Muscles and the Vessels; of which in order.

The two Nervous bodies are encompassed with a thick, firm and white skin, but their inner substance is very spongy and flaggy unless distended and filled with bloud and spirit, consisting for the greatest part of nothing but Vessels, to wit, Veins, Arteries and Nervous threads, which are wonderfully interwoven one with another. They arise from the lower part of the Share-bone at a small distance one from the other, giving the Piss-pipe room to go betwixt them, but in a little while they meet toge∣ther, and so are extended one by the side of the other the whole length of the Yard to the Glans, onely a thin skin coming betwixt them. At their rise they resemble the letter Y.

The Piss-pipe is seated betwixt these, or rather below them, and is of a substance much like them. On its inside it is membranous and very sensible. It is continued from the neck of the Bladder, and is much of an equal width through its whole length. At its beginning where it is joined to the neck of the Bladder it has a membranous valve, that per∣mits the Urine to come out, but hinders the Seed or any thing squirted

into the Piss-pipe to go in, unless it be forced open with a Probe or Ca∣theter, or the like.

Before the ends of the Nervous bodies there is prefixed the Glans, which is distinguishable from the rest of the Yard by a round circle like a Crown going between them. This is of a more exquisite sense than the Nervous bodies, but of not much an unlike substance, though some say it is glandulous. When the Yard is drawn, it has no other covering, but one proper thin coat.

The Yard has two Muscles on each side at its root: The first pair are short and thick, springing from the knob of the Hip-bone, and are inserted into the Nervous bodies near their beginning: they are called Erectors, because they help the Yard to stand. The second are longer and smaller, arising from the sphincter Muscle of the Arse-hole, and passing along the sides of the Piss-pipe end about the middle of it, serving to open or widen it for the freer passage of the Seed and Urine, and are therefore called Dilaters.

Its Veins and Arteries spring from the Hypogastricks, and enter it at the meeting of the Nervous bodies. Its Nerves come from the lowest Vertebral.

The principal and primary use of the Yard is for copulation, to con∣vey the Seed into the Womb of the Female: but the secondary, and to such Creatures as are gelt, the onely use of it, is to serve as a Tap to the Bladder, to let out the Urine when it becomes troublesome; in which office the Ʋrethra or Piss-pipe is chiefly concerned.

Except when the Yard is distended with bloud and Spirits, (which is called its erection or standing) it lies hid in its Repository, the Sheath, of which little need to be said, seeing it is onely a duplicature of the common coverings of the Body, and consists onely of the scarf and true Skin, and the fleshy Membrane, which is here but thin. It seems to an∣swer to the prepuce or Fore-skin in Men: for as that in some Men, when the Yard is erect, turns back towards the root of the Penis and leaves the Glans wholly bare; so when a Horse's Yard is drawn out to the full length, the Sheath is also drawn out or unfolded, and appears to be knit to the Yard a little behind the Glans, even as the prepuce is to a Man's Pe∣nis at the same place. I shall not need therefore to speak any more of it.

Table VIII. Sheweth the descending Trunks of the hollow Vein and great Artery, the Emulgents, Kidneys, Deputy-kidneys, Ureters, Bladder, Yard, preparing Vessels, Stones, deferent Vessels, Seed-bladders and Prostates. (Book 8)

• A Sheweth the descending Trunk of the hollow Vein.
• B The descending Trunk of the great Artery.
• CC The emulgent Veins arising out of the hollow Vein.
• DD The emulgent Arteries springing out of the great Artery.
• EE The Kidneys.
• FF The Deputy-kidneys, otherwise called the black Choler Boxes.
• GGGG The Ʋreters.
• H The Bladder.
• I The Bladder cut open that its inside may appear.
• K The neck of the Bladder where it opens into the Piss-pipe of the Yard.
• kk The Ligaments of the Bladder.

• L The Nervous bodies of the Yard divided from its back down to the Piss-pipe.
• M The Urethra or Piss-pipe.
• m The end or thickest part of the Yard, called its Glans.
• NNNN The Seed-preparing Veins.
• OO The Seed-preparing Arteries.
• PP The Pyramidal bodies, otherwise called Corpora varicosa, or Pam∣piniformia.
• Q The right Testicle with its inmost Coat on.
• R The left Testicle divested of all its Coats.
• S The Epididymis or parastata of the left Testicle.
• TT The deferent Vessels.
• UU The Seed-bladders.
• XX The Prostates.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's kidneys, bladder, and surrounding organs and vessels

TAB VIII fol. 42.

CHAP. XXI. Of the Parts ministring to Generation in Horses, and First of the Preparing, Spermatick or Seed-vessels.

The preparing Vessels. Their use.

HAVING shewed the Parts appointed for and subservient to Chyli∣fication, and in some measure to Nutrition and Sanguification, I come in the next place to speak to those serving for Generation. And as the former, all except the Yard treated of in the last Chapter, are com∣mon to and alike in both Male and Female; so these latter differing con∣siderably in the different Sexes, we must treat of them apart: and shall begin with the Generative Parts of an Horse, and afterwards treat of those of a Mare.

The first in order are the preparing or spermatick Vessels, Arteries and Veins. The Arteries carry bloud and vital spirit to the Stones to make Seed of, and the Veins bring back from thence so much of the bloud as re∣mains superfluous or unfit for that purpose. The Arteries spring out of the descending Trunk of the great Artery, almost two hands breadth be∣low the Emulgents, one on each side: and the Veins out of the like Trunk of the hollow Vein, two on each side, a pretty deal higher up than the Arteries, as you may observe in the foregoing Figure. The lest of these Veins in Humane Bodies commonly springs from the left Emul∣gent Vein, (and is but one) the reason whereof Anatomists give to be, lest, if it should have sprung from the Cava, and thereby been necessita∣ted to have marched over the great Artery, the return of the bloud from the Stones by it should have been hindred by the continual beating of the Artery. But seeing Nature has not here made the like caution, where there was as great need of it, I cannot tell whether that be any satisfacto∣ry reason. Now these Arteries and Veins do at a little distance from their beginning meet with one another on their respective sides, to wit the right Artery with the right Veins, and the left with the left, and at their meeting they acquire one common covering from the Rim of the belly, between whose two Membranes they descend down the Loins,

running over the Ureters, as the figure shews. As they descend, they bestow little twigs upon the Rim of the Belly, and the Veins do divide themselves into several, and by and by unite again; but the Arteries pass along a great way by one Pipe onely, though variously twisted and in∣terwoven with the Veins, with which yet they do no where inosculate, or unite into one body, as was generally affirmed they did before the circulation of the bloud was found out. For till then it was believed, that the Veins carried bloud to the Stones, and the Arteries vital Spirits, and that the Arteries opened into the Veins, and contrarily the Veins into the Arteries, for the mixing the bloud and vital spirits together, and thereby preparing matter for the Stones to make Seed of. But since the circulation of the bloud was fully understood, and it became certain that bloud and spirit flowed to the Stones by the Arteries onely; upon a strict enquiry after these inosculations, they were no where to be found, nor is there any thing like them, saving that both Veins and Arteries pass along in one common Cover, which it is likely gave occasion to the mi∣stake. When these Vessels are arrived within little less than a quarter of a yard of the Stones, the Arteries then begin to branch themselves into several, but the Veins into far more. And both of them pass out of the Belly by the hole of the process of the Rim into the Cod. The space be∣twixt where these Vessels begin so much to divide themselves, and the Stones, is called the Pyramidal body, because from the Stones upwards, it grows smaller and smaller like a Pyramid, as is represented in the Fi∣gure. It is also called Corpus varicosum, because the Vessels so divided make a thicker body; and lastly plexus pampiniformis, the tendril-like plexus or interweaving, because the Veins and Arteries twine and clasp about one another like the tendrils of Vines. Both of these Vessels en∣ter the Stones by several branches, but the Veins by a far greater num∣ber than the Arteries, which was necessary, for that the bloud flows ve∣ry quick to the Stones by the Arteries, but returns but slowly back again by the Veins, and therefore it was convenient it should have more con∣ducts or chanels to run in.

The use of these Preparing Vessels may be sufficiently learned by what we have already discoursed of them, by which it is also clear that the name of Preparers belongs onely properly to the Arteries that carry bloud and spirits to the Stones to nourish them and to make Seed of, and not at all to the Veins, which onely bring back that bloud that is not converted to those uses.

As for the Nerves and Lympheducts that run with the aforesaid Vessels to the Testicles, because the Testicles are the parts for which they are designed, and they are onely in their passage thither while they accom∣pany these Veins and Arteries, we shall say nothing further of them here, but shall shew their origine and use in the following Chapter.

CHAP. XXII. Of the Testicles or Stones, and the Parastatae or Attenders.

Their name. Their shape and substance. Their Vessels. Their Coats. Their Mus∣cles. Parastatae. The use of the Stones and Parastatae.

THE Testicles or Stones are called in Latin Testes, which otherwise signifies Witnesses, because they witness the strength and courage of the Creature; or perhaps rather, as some think, because no Man a∣mongst the Romans was admitted to be a Witness that had lost his Stones. They are always according to Nature two, and therefore the Greeks call them by a word that signifies Twins.

They are of an oval figure, but somewhat flattish: and their substance has been formerly held to be glandulous, as if they were onely two great Kernels, not differing from other Kernels in other parts of the Body sa∣ving in bigness and use. But later Anatomists have discovered them to be of no such solid substance as Glands are, but wholly to consist of Vessels that twist and twine this way and that way, and are kept in their order close to one another by the inmost Skin that cloaths the Stones. When they are cut in two, they appear not red, but of that colour the Seed is of, because the bloud as soon as it enters them, begins to lose its colour and nature, and to be turned into Seed. And seeing I could never ob∣serve any bloud in the Stones, it is likely that the Veins reach no further than their Coats, seeing the Seed is not received into the Veins, but into peculiar Vessels called Deferent or back-carrying, of which in the next Chapter. I say, I believe the Veins onely run through the Coats of the Stones, and have the superfluous bloud transmitted into them from the Arteries, before ever they enter into the body of the Stones: And then those Vessels that the Testicles consist of, will onely be Arteries, run out into very fine and almost innumerable threads, for the elaborating of the Seed.

If this notion of mine be true, then I may say that both Veins and Ar∣teries run through all the Coats wherewith the Testicles are invested, but that they themselves have no Bloud-vessels but Arteries. And whether they have any other sort of Vessel, is uncertain. 'Tis true there are both Nerves and Lympheducts that come towards the Stones, as I ob∣served in the foregoing Chapter; but I question whether they reach any farther than their Coats any more than the Veins. As for the Nerves, they spring from a Vertebral pair according to some, from the Intercostal say others, and a third sort think from both. But be their original where it will, I think they are mostly if not altogether spent upon the suspending Muscles by which the Testicles are sustained, and upon the Coats so of∣ten mentioned. So far am I from thinking with some, that these Nerves contribute the greatest or any considerable share of matter for the making of the Seed. The Lympheducts spring manifestly from amongst the Coats of the Stones, and ascend up into the Belly by the same hole, by which the preparing Vessels came down, running so far till they reach and empty themselves into the common Receptacle of the Chyle, described above chap. 10. and 12.

The Testicles being sensible, tender and noble parts, are defended from the external cold or other Injuries by several Coats, of which some are

common to them with other parts of the Body, and some proper to themselves onely. The common incompass both the Stones within one cavity, as in a Bag, and make that which we call the Cod. And these are two. The outer of them is the Skin with its Scarf-skin, and the in∣ner the fleshy Membrane. The outer is not divided as it is in Man, by a line that runs along the middle of it lengthways. The inner, as it sticks pretty close to this on one side; so to the next proper one some∣what loosely, by many membranous Fibres, on the other or inner side. The proper are also two, though by some they are reckoned to be three. The outmost is called Vaginalis, or the Sheath-like Coat, because the Stone is included in it as in a Sheath. This is thick and strong; smooth on the inside, but rough on the outside, by reason of many Fibres or Threads by which it is knit to the inner of the common Coats. It is full of Veins, and is a production of the Rim of the Belly: for as the prepa∣ring Vessels descend over the Share-bone into the Cod, the Rim makes a Case for them for their defence and security, and reaches with them down to the Stone, encompassing it as well as them. Into this Coat is the Muscle inserted that suspends the Stone, (which we shall describe pre∣sently.) Some make two Coats of this, the outmost of which retains the name of sheath-like above-mentioned; and the inner they call the red Coat, from its colour; but indeed this latter is nothing else but the fore∣said Muscle spreading it self broad and thin on the Sheath-like Coat. The last and inmost, which immediately cloaths the Stone, (being the second proper one) is called the nervous, and otherwise the white, Membrane, being thick and strong, and of a whitish colour. It seems to arise from the outer Coat of the preparing Vessels, and is rough on its inside next the Stone, but smooth and slippery on its outside.

Each Stone is suspended or hangs by a Muscle called Cremaster, or the suspender. These Muscles arise from the Ligament of the Share-bone, and descending by the process of the Rim of the Belly (before spoken of) are inserted into the Sheath-like Coat, which they strengthen, the better to sustain the weight of the Stones; and in the act of Copulation are said to pull up the Stones, and thereby to shorten the ways the Seed has to pass.

On the top or back as it were of each Stone there lies a longish, whi∣tish and somewhat round body, distinguishable very easily from them, though not of much an unlike substance; onely they are not so firm and compact as the Stones are. They are named Parastatae or Attenders, because they wait as it were on the Stones; and also Epididymidae, be∣cause they are placed upon the didymi or Twins, by which name the Stones are otherwise called. They consist (as the Stones do) wholly of Vessels running this way and that way, all which are united into one Thread or Chord, which is continued into the deferent Vessel, of which in the next Chapter.

From what has been already discoursed of these Parts, their use appears to be, to make and elaborate the Seed, for the propagation of the kind. Now the Matter out of which the Seed is made, seems to be onely the Arterial bloud, unless one should admit some Animal spirits conveyed hi∣ther by the Nerves and mixed therewith. But seeing any inosculations of the Nerves with the Arteries is a thing not yet discovered either in these or any other parts, I incline to believe that the Nerves onely con∣tribute sense to these parts, that the Animal may have the greater pleasure

in Copulation. A secondary use or rather effect of the Stones, is to cause courage and generosity in the Horse; for we observe that our Ston'd Horses are generally much higher-spirited than Geldings.

CHAP. XXIII. Of the Deferent or Ejaculatory Vessels, the Seed-bladders and the Prostates.

Deferent Ves∣sels. Seed-blad∣ders. Their use. The Pro∣states. Their seat, bigness and shape. Their Vessels and Pores. Their use.

HAVING done with those Parts that prepare and elaborate the Seed, we come next to those that are the Store-houses or Repositories of it, from whence it is ejected in Copulation. And of these the first are the deferent or back-carrying vessels, otherwise called Ejaculatory or squirting, because in those Animals that have no Seed-bladders to store up the Seed in (such as Dogs and the like) it does immediately squirt through these Vessels from the Stones in Copulation: though in others that have Seed-bladders (as Horses have) it is continually a-passing by these Vessels from the Stones to the Bladders by little and little as it is prepared.

These deferent Vessels are two, one on each side; they begin at the smaller end of the parastatae (described in the former chapter) and are indeed but a continuation of them. They are whitish and pretty hard; not hollow like a Vein, but more like a Nerve, for their cavity is hardly discernable, unless the Seed-bladders be full of Seed, and so it regurgitate as it were into these Vessels, as I have sometimes observed. As soon as they are arisen from the Parastatae, they ascend streight out of the Cod into the Belly by the same process of the Rim of the Belly by which the preparing Vessels descended. Being entred the Belly, by and by they cross over the Ureters from the outside to the inside of them, and taking a little compass they turn back again under the Bladder till they arrive almost at its neck, (towards which they grow wider than before) and there their sides open into the Seed-bladders, into which they destill the Seed; notwithstanding themselves still keep on their course as far as the Piss-pipe between the Prostates, but are grown much smaller before they reach them. These Vessels serve as Conduit-pipes for the Seed to drill along from the Stones to the seminal Bladders; and through their necks, that reach from the Bladders to the Piss-pipe, does the Seed issue in the act of generation.

The place where the Seed is stored up and preserved, is the Seed-blad∣ders. Dr. Wharton affirms that in an Horse

they consist of two parts, of which one is a mere membranous or skinny Bladder, the other glan∣dulous. The Bladder, he says, he has found six inches long and near three broad, although it was empty and not opened; but it seem'd ca∣pable of being stretched out to a greater length and width, if it had been filled. If one opened the bottom of this Bladder, and put a Probe into it, the Probe passed obliquely towards the Piss-pipe, and entred into it through the same hole with the deferent Vessel of the same side.

The other part of these Bladders, which we called glandulous, was thicker, and broader on that side which joyned to the Piss-pipe; and where the deferent Vessels were inserted, without descending towards the bottom, it grew thinner and thinner like a wedge. The substance of this glandule was not much unlike to that of the Stones, but of a more clayie colour, and had holes within it so apparent that they would admit an indifferent Probe: all which holes were united into one com∣mon duct, namely before they reach the Ʋrethra. For putting a Probe into any one of the said holes, it was driven easily and without any lett into that common passage. But the passage it self did not quite pene∣trate the Piss-pipe, but was covered with the thin and spongie Mem∣brane of the Ʋrethra. Through this Membrane is the spermatick Mat∣ter strained in Copulation.

Thus far Dr. Wharton in his 30. chap. of the Glands. Now as for my self, I could never observe so great a diffe∣rence of one part of the seminal Bladders from another, as that one should appear membranous and the other glandulous. And I would not imagine that so skilfull an Anatomist should mistake the Prostates for a part of the said Bladders, though these are the onely Parts that to me appear glandu∣lous thereabouts. All the Seed-bladders that I have observed have been much of a like substance, though perhaps a little thicker in one place than another: they are whitish and very strong, being within all full of little Cells like Pomegranates. They have no communication the one with the other; for as their bottoms or thicker ends bunch out a little on each side of the Bladder (as you see in the Figure) so their smaller ends or mouths, that are nearest to one another, do each of them open apart into the deferent Vessel of their respective side, by whose neck they pour out their Seed in Copulation into the Piss-pipe. The Seed comes into them out of the deferent Vessels, and goes out of them again into the same Vessels, at one and the same passage or orifice. Dr. Wharton says, that the seminal Matter contained in them differs much from that which is made in the Stones: whence he concludes that the Seed-bladders receive not the matter which they contain, from the Testicles by the deferent Vessels, but do elaborate it in their own glandulous substance; and he calls it Seed of a peculiar kind. For my own part I have not discovered any difference, to speak of, betwixt this and that which I have some∣times seen in the deferent Vessels, when the Bladders have been very full; nor is it probable they can be of a different kind or nature, seeing there is that manifest communication between the deferent Vessels and the Bladders, that these latter seem to contain or receive nothing, but what the former bring into them. Nor do I think that any Part does elabo∣rate any Liquor that can with any propriety be called Seed, except the Testicles contained in the Cod, whose sole office and prerogative it is to make it.

The use of these Bladders (as hath been said) is to receive the Seed from the deferent Vessels, and to reserve it untill the time of Copulation. Now the Seed may (to satisfy the curiosity of the Ingenious Anatomist) be plainly seen, if you take the Bladders in your hand and squeeze them with your finger; for by such squeezing you shall force the seminal Mat∣ter into the Pipe of the Yard, where you may by dissecting the Yard or opening that Pipe plainly see it. Or if you think it too much to take that pains, you may by dissecting the Bladders themselves see it; but then you lose the sight of one of the curious contrivances of Nature,

which is a little Caruncle or Kernel that is placed at the mouth of the hole where the Seed distills into the Yard, which Caruncle is by Nature placed there, to prevent the issuing forth of the Seed when there was no need for it; for the continual gleeting of it, which would have happened but for this Caruncle, would be extremely prejudicial to the Creature. This Caruncle in Men being impaired or injured by the Venereal Distem∣per, or by their overstraining themselves in the act of Copulation, is ge∣nerally by Physicians believed to be the cause of the running of the Reins. And this Disease Horses are not exempted from, although it doth not happen to them on the like occasions as to men it doth; for this Disease, which in Horses we call the mattering of the Yard, happens to them upon their catching suddain colds after hard riding; Likewise over-hard riding it self will bring it; and very often it is caused by weak∣ness occasioned by great poverty and the like.

In the next place we come to the Prostates, which are so called from their standing before the Seed-bladders. They are Glandulous bodies, almost of the same nature and substance as other Glandules of the Body. They are situated at the root of the Yard above the sphincter Muscle of the Bladder, being in number two, on each side of the neck of the Blad∣der one; their quantity about the bigness of a small Burgamy Pear. They are of an oval figure, onely somewhat flat, and are covered with a very thick Coat to hinder the oily substance with which they are well stored, from issuing forth.

They have Veins, Arteries, Nerves and Lympheducts; and besides, many Pores that open into the Ʋrethra. In most Creatures, especially the lesser sort, these Pores are scarcely discernible in an healthfull state, but in an Horse they are very plain, and open into the upper part of the Piss-pipe about an inch distance from the insertion of the deferent Vessels into the same. Dr. Wharton has told twelve such little holes, before each of which as they open into the Piss-pipe, is placed a little Gland, about the bigness of a grain of Mustard-seed, which serve to hinder the entrance of the Urine into these holes, as it runs by them out of the Bladder.

The nature and use of the Liquor that is contained in these Prostates, and that issues out of them into the Piss-pipe, is somewhat difficult to de∣termine. Some take them to be a kind of Testicles, and think that they make a sort of Seed, which though it be not of so noble a nature as that which is made in the Testicles contained in the Cod, yet is as necessary for generation: seeing such Men as are cut for the Stone become incapa∣ble of generation, if the Stone be so big and ragged as much to tear the Prostates in pulling of it out. But it is likely, such barrenness happens not so much from the tearing of these, as that the ends of the deferent Vessels are torn likewise, or it may be the Seed-bladders also: and so when the Wound is healed up again, the sides of these Vessels grow toge∣ther, so that they can neither contain nor convey into the Piss-pipe any Seed. It is probable therefore that this oily clammy Humour that the Prostates discharge into the Piss-pipe, is of a nature far different from that of Seed, even as themselves are bodies of a far other nature than the Stones are. For, as was shewn above, the Stones are wholly vascular, that is, consist wholly of Vessels; whereas these are glandulous, or ker∣nelly. So that I believe this Humour serves onely to make the Ʋrethra supple and slippery, and to defend it from the acrimony or sharpness of the Urine.

And thus we have done with all the Parts that make or retain the Seed: as for the Yard, which some treat of in this place, because it serves for injecting the Seed into the Womb; we described the Parts thereof above chap. 20. next to the Bladder, because it serves as well for making water as for Copulation, and thither the Reader may please to turn back.

CHAP. XXIV. Of the Parts ministring to Generation in Mares, and First of the Preparing Vessels, so called.

Preparing Vessels. 1. Arteries. 2. Veins. Their use.

IT was Galen's opinion, and from his authority, of many others, that the Parts serving for generation in the Female differed not from those of the Male saving in situation; the Male's Genitals being without the Body, and the Females within. And this diversity of situation they at∣tributed to defect of heat in the Female, so that the Genitals could not be thrust out of the Body as in the Male they are. But the truth is, they differ not onely in situation, but in number, bigness, figure, office and use, as will be apparent as well from the description of them, as from their representation in the Figures.

The first in order are the preparing Vessels, Arteries and Veins. In these it was till of late believed that the bloud was prepared for the Stones the readilier to be turned by them into Seed. But as when we treated above of the preparing Vessels of the Horse, we shewed that the Veins could not properly be called preparing Vessels, because they carry no∣thing to the Stones, but bring bloud back again from them: so in Mares we cannot allow the name of preparers or spermatick to be proper even to the Arteries themselves, seeing neither Mares nor any other Females have any true Seed. For their Stones are but improperly so called, be∣ing more truly Ovaries or Egg-beds, as we shall shew by and by in the next Chapter. However we shall retain the old name for distinction's sake, and still call both Veins and Arteries preparing Vessels.

The preparing Arteries of the Horse we shewed to be onely two, one on each side; but in the Mare there are several, three or more on each side. All of them arise out of the great Artery, below the Emulgents, some higher, some lower. They pass down along with the Veins of their respective sides, with which they are very much interwoven, but no where open one into the other. Some branches of them go to the Te∣sticles, some to the Horns of the Womb, and some to its Sheath.

The preparing Veins in the Horse were two of each side, though the Arteries were but one; yet in the Mare where the Arteries are several, the Veins are but one of each side. The reason whereof seems to be, That the Arteries in the Mare being not so much intended for the nou∣rishment of her Genitals as of the Foal contained in her Womb, it was requisite there should be several Vessels for the bringing the greater plenty of nourishing juice for it; all or the greatest part of which being received by the Foal, there was not need of the like number of Veins to carry

back the bloud that came along with it, that being very inconsiderable for its quantity to what was imported by the Arteries. But now all the bloud brought by the preparing Arteries of the Horse, serving for no other use but for the nourishment of the Genitals, and for the making of Seed: As a less quantity of bloud will suffice for these two uses, and so there is no need of a plurality of Arteries; so the bloud that is brought to the Genitals, is but a very small part of it spent in performing these two offices, and therefore more Veins were necessary to carry the surplu∣sage back again, seeing the motion of the bloud in the Arteries is far quicker than of that in the Veins. These two preparing Veins then arise out of the Cava a little below the Emulgents, and neither of them from the Emulgent it self, any more than in the Horse, though in Men and Women the Left generally springs from the left Emulgent. They join in like manner with the Arteries as we shewed above that they did in Horses, and go to all those parts of the Genitals to which we just now shewed that the Arteries run.

When the Mare is not with Foal, the Arteries bring onely bloud for the nourishment of the several Parts into which they are inserted: but when she is with Foal, they bring besides the bloud a nutritious juice, (which is Chyle, impregnated with spirit, but not as yet perfectly chan∣ged into bloud) for its growth and nourishment, as we shall shew more af∣terwards when we come to speak how the Foal is nourished in the Womb. And whether she be with Foal or not, the Veins serve to carry back to the Cava and so to the Heart, the bloud that is superfluous.

CHAP. XXV. Of the Testicles or Stones in Mares, otherwise called Ova∣ries; and of the Trumpets of the Womb.

The Testicles. Their situa∣tion. Bigness, and figure. Coat. Substance, and use. The Trumpets of the Womb. Their sub∣stance, capa∣city and length. Their use.

THE Testicles in Mares do not agree in their description with those of Horses in any one particular thing, nor should I call them by that name, if the general mistake of so many Ages (in thinking the Fe∣male's Stones to have the same office with those of the Male) had not made it necessary to retain that appellation, if I would be understood by vulgar Readers of what part I am treating. For it has been an old Opi∣nion, that the Male and Female's Seed being mixed in the Womb, doth make the Conception; and there are many that will not yet be beaten out of it. Whereas the Female hath no Seed at all, but their Testicles (so called) are as it were knots of Eggs, which being impregnated by the Male's Seed, one or more at a time, do each make a Conception. But of this more by and by.

The Mare's Testicles differ from the Horse's in these Particulars.

First, The Horse's Stones hang without the Body in the Cod, but the Mare's lie within the cavity of the Belly, a little distance from the horns of the Womb, to which they are knit by a strong Ligament.

Secondly, The Mare's Testicles are hardly half as big as the Horse's, nor are they of the same shape, but more flat and thin, having no Para∣statae upon them. And besides, they are somewhat uneven in their sur∣face, whereas those of an Horse are smooth.

Thirdly, The Horses Testicles are covered with four Coats, two com∣mon, and two proper; but the Mare's are clad onely with one for about one half of them, and the other half with two; the outer of which they have immediately from the preparing Vessels that enter into them, but mediately from the Rim of the Belly.

Fourthly and lastly, They differ very much from one another in their substance and use. For we shewed above in chap. 22. that the Horse's Stones did wholly consist of Seed vessels turn'd and roll'd this way and that way: but the Mare's consist principally of numerous Membranes and small Fibres loosely united to one another; amongst which there are se∣veral little Bladders, about as big as a Pease, some bigger, some less, that are full of a very clear and thin liquor. Those that were of opinion that the Females made Seed as well as the Males, thought that these Bladders that are chiefly in the surface of the Testicle, answered to the Seed blad∣ders in the Male, and that the humour contained in them was true Seed. And whereas it might be objected that it is far more clear and watery than the Male's Seed, they thought it sufficient to answer, that that was from the colder and moister nature of the Female, that could not con∣coct it to that consistency as the Male's is of. But the truth is, it is not Seed; and if it were, there is no way whereby it could possibly arrive at the Womb. For that which was reputed to be the deferent Vessel, ap∣pears to be nothing else but a short and broad Ligament for fixing the Te∣sticle in its place; for it has no cavity at all, but is of a solid, firm and close substance. These Bladders therefore must be concluded to be Eggs, answering to those of Fowl and other Creatures: which will be the more manifest if you boil them, for then, as those that have tried it do affirm, they will have the same colour, taste and consistency with the whites of Hens-eggs. Whence these Testicles may more properly be called Ovaries or Egg-beds, whose Eggs are nourished by the Bloud-vessels described in the foregoing Chapter; and when upon Copulation one (or more) of them is made fruitfull by the Male's Seed, it separates from the rest, and being received by the mouth of the Trumpet of the Womb, it descends by it into the Horn, and so to the bottom of the Womb, and there be∣comes a Conception. And whereas it has been thought a strong argu∣ment for the Female's having true Seed, and that these Testicles made it, in that when they are cut out of the Body in Bitches, Hogs, or any other Creature, such Creatures are always barren afterwards; this new Opi∣nion shews that there is no strength or certainty at all in that argument. For granting, what is most certainly true, that Females that are gelt or spay'd, have never any Young after; yet it does not at all follow, that therefore their Stones make and conserve Seed; but onely that they con∣tain something that is absolutely necessary for generation and conception: but whether that be Seed or somewhat else, is indifferent. And there∣fore that Argument will be as strong for the Opinion that the Testicles are Ovaries, seeing without the Eggs it is so far from possible that there should be a conception, that they are the very conception it self.

Of the Bloud-vessels that run through the Testicles we treated in the foregoing Chapter under the name of Preparing Vessels: As for their

Nerves, they spring from the Intercostal pair, and from the Nerves of Os sacrum. Bartholin affirms that they have also Lympheducts.

There hath not been greater dispute about the matter of the Concep∣tion, than by what way any thing could go to the Womb or its Horns from the Testicles to make it. Some have pretended to the discovery of Vessels or Pipes for conveyance thereof, which others altogether as skil∣full Anatomists could find no footsteps of. At last Fallopius assigned this office to two Ducts, which from their shape he called Tubae or Trum∣pets; and from him (as being the first Inventer of them, or at least the first that ascribed this use to them) they are commonly known by the name of the Fallopian Trumpets. He says,

they are nervous and white, arising from the Horns of the Womb, where they are very slender, but at a small distance from it they grow wider, bending this way and that way, till near their end, where ceasing their winding they grow pretty large, and seem somewhat carnous.]

Their ends next the Testicles are torn and jagged, and lie loose, being freed from the Membrane that su∣stains them the greatest part of their length.

Their substance seems rather membranous than nervous, (as Fallopius would have it.) And they consist of two Membranes; the inner is pro∣pagated from the inmost Tunicle of the Womb, and the outer from the outmost of the same. Where they are widest they will admit ones little finger, but towards the Horn of the Womb, they are not so thick as an ordinary straw, but yet are pervious; and where they open into the in∣side of the Horn, their Orifice looks like a little Teat. As to their length, it is something difficult to determine it exactly, because they run so to and again in their course; but I believe they are very near a quarter of a yard long.

Their use is, both to serve as two Funnels whereby some subtile particles or steams may issue from the Seed, that is injected by the Male into the Womb, to the Testicles of the Female for the fecundating or making fruit∣full the Eggs thereof, one or more, according to the different species of living Creatures; (but it is very rare, that there is above one so impreg∣nated in a Mare, seeing it is so seldom that any brings forth twins:) and also when the Egg is fecundated by this means, and growing ripe as it were, drops off or separates from the Testicle, it is received by the jag∣ged mouth of the Trumpet, along which it passes till it arrive in the Horn of the Womb, into which (as was said above) the Trumpet is in∣serted; and on this consideration the old name of deferent Vessels may still be granted them, from their conducting the Eggs from the Testicle to the Womb. Now seeing the wide ends of the Trumpets that first re∣ceive the Eggs lie loose, and are not fastened to the Testicle, it is probable that in Copulation these become turgid as well as all the other parts of the Genital, and with their jagged mouths clasp hold upon the Testes (as a Lamprey's mouth fastens upon a stone) and so convey to them a seminal air, and afterwards receive from them a fecundated Egg.

CHAP. XXVI. Of the Womb and its Horns.

The shape and parts of the Womb. Its situation. Ligaments. Substance. Vessels. 1. Arteries. 2. Veins. 3. Nerves. 4. Lymphe∣ducts. Its Horns. Its use.

THE Womb of a Mare is shaped much like the Greek Letter Y, in which the single stroak that is streight, answers to the vagina or Sheath, which receives the Horse's Yard in Copulation, and the two crooked stroaks that turn one the one way, and the other the other, are called Horns, because they in some sort resemble them; and that part of the Sheath where the Horns begin to separate, being somewhat wider than the rest, is the fundus or bottom of the Womb, where the Foal lies. For though in Dogs, Rabbets, &c. that have many young ones at one time, their burthen is contained wholly in the Horns of the Womb, as well as the Conception is first made there; yet in a Mare that common∣ly brings forth but one at a time, it is otherwise; for there is little or no∣thing that belongs to the Foal, contained in them, except some part of the Skins wherein the Foal is covered while it is in the Womb.

The Womb is seated in the lowest part of the Lower Belly, in that wide Cavity that is formed out of and invironed with the Hip-bones, the Share-bone, and the os sacrum. It is placed betwixt the Piss-bladder and the Arse-gut, and is firmly tied in its place by two pair of Ligaments.

The first pair arise from the Rim of the Belly, being shorter by much than the other, but broader, being for their shape resembled to Bat's wings. They are of a membranous, loose and soft substance, and are inserted into the Horns of the Womb, taking hold also of the Testicles, and tying them both fast to the Hip-bones, from whence they spring.

The second pair of Ligaments spring from the bottom of the Womb, and are called the round or worm-like Ligaments. They ascend on each side between the two Coats of the Rim of the Belly, towards the Share-bone, over which they pass slantingly, and then parting into many jags as it were, they end near the clitoris. This also serves to fasten the Womb the more firmly in its place.

It is of a nervous or rather membranous substance, more compact and close in Mares that are not with Foal, but more spongie in such as are. It consists of two Membranes, and a certain fleshy or fibrous parenchy∣ma or substance between, unless one will make this a third Membrane. The outmost Membrane is borrowed from the Rim of the Belly, and therefore is truly double as that is, though we reckon it but for one. This is very strong. The inmost is not so strong nor firm as it, but seems to be somewhat porous. The middle substance betwixt these two is that which makes up the greatest part of its thickness at all times, but parti∣cularly when the Mare is with Foal, it imbibes so much of the nutritious Juice that flows plentifully hither at that time, that it is stuft up to al∣most an inch thickness.

Its Arteries are branches partly of the Preparing Arteries and partly of the hypogastrick. These do inosculate or communicate by open mouths one with another, but not so with the Veins. They run along the Womb bending and winding, and not in a streight course, lest they should be

broken when the Womb is extended to that vast bulk as it is when the Mare is with Foal.

Its Veins spring also from the preparing and hypogastrick Veins, but are much fewer in number than the Arteries. For Nature having formed these Parts not so much for the benefit of the Individual, as for propaga∣ting the Kind; and the Foal while it is in the Womb receiving no nou∣rishment but what is brought to it by the Arteries, it was necessary that they should be large and numerous for conveying the greater plenty of it: but seeing the greatest part of that which is brought by the Arteries is spent in the nourishment of the Young and the Parts in which it is con∣tained, a fewer number of Veins are sufficient to convey back again what is not so spent. The Veins do inosculate with one another like as the Arteries did.

It has Nerves from the Intercostal pair, and from the Nerves of os sacrum.

Some have also observed many Lympheducts creeping along its surface, which one after another meeting into one, empty themselves into the common receptacle of the Chyle and Lympha; and these Lympheducts some have mistaken for Milky-veins.

Thus much of the Womb properly so called: and what we have said hereof, may be all applied to its Horns likewise as to their substance and vessels. As for their figure, you may view it in the following Cut. These Horns are less in Mares than in any other Creature that has them, in proportion to the bigness of their Bodies. From their first rise from the Womb to their end, they grow by degrees narrower and narrower, and about their middle are the Trumpets of the Womb inserted into them. They have a worm-like or successive motion as the Guts have, by which the Egg being received from the Trumpet is driven gently along till it come to the bottom of the Womb in Mares, and there becomes a Con∣ception: but in such Creatures as bring forth many Young at one time, the Conceptions stay in the Horns till they are come to maturity, and never descend into the bottom of the Womb till they are about to be excluded.

By what has been said, it appears, that the use of the Womb is to re∣ceive the Seed of the Male, from which Seed a certain air or spirit steams through the Trumpets to the Testicles, where impregnating one or more Eggs, those that are so impregnated, are conveyed by the Trumpets in∣to the Horns, and by these into the bottom of the Womb, where they become Conceptions, and stay (according to Nature) so long till all their Parts are finished, and they are become perfect Animals of their proper kind; and then the Womb being irritated by the motion and bigness of the Young, does by the help of the Muscles of the Belly, and the assi∣stance of the Midriff exclude it. But having designed a particular dis∣course of the generation of Animals to be annexed to this Treatise, we shall pursue it no further here.

CHAP. XXVII. Of the Vagina or Sheath of the Womb, the Caruncles call'd myrtiformes, (of the shape of Myrtle-berries) the Cli∣toris and the external Privity.

The Vagina or Sheath. The myrti∣form Carun∣cles. The Clitoris. The outward Privity. The Lips. The Nymphs.

WE shall not need to enter upon the description of the Vessels run∣ning through the Sheath of the Womb, they being wholly the same that are dispersed through the Womb it self, and therefore the Rea∣der may have recourse to the former Chapter for them: nor is it necessa∣ry to speak much of its substance, that being also much like to that of the Womb, though not so thick and strong, but more soft, nervous and spongie. It is near half a yard long, being much of an equal width from one end to the other, but very uneven and wrinkled in its inner surface. In∣to its lower side (or that side next the Belly) a very little distance from the external Privity, is the neck of the Bladder inserted; opposite to which in its upper side it is strongly knit to the Sphincter Muscle of the Arse-gut. There is no such neck to distinguish or separate the Sheath from the bottom of the Womb, as Anatomists say there is in Women: but the Sheath it self seems to be widened into what I call the bottom of the Womb.

Whether there be any such Membrane that goes cross the Vagina in Mares that have never been cover'd, as Anatomists say there is in Maids, I never made any carefull examination, but believe there is none. But as for those Caruncles or little kernelly knobs that are called myrtiformes, from their resembling the Berries of the Myrtle in shape, they are to be found: yea they may be seen without dissection, if one look near the Privity of a Mare when she is lustfull and desires the Horse; for as she opens the Orifice of the Vagina, one may discern these Caruncles to strut out. They are said to be four in number, the largest of which stands just at the mouth of the Water-passage, which it helps, partly, to close up. Their use seems to be, by their roughness and unevenness to cause the greater pleasure to the Horse in Copulation.

On the same side of the Vagina with the Bladder is placed a long spon∣gie body called Clitoris, but lies a great deal farther within the Vagina than it is said to doe in Women. For, that end of it which is next to the outward Privity is seven or eight fingers breadth from it, whereas in Wo∣men it is described to be within an inch. Those that would make the generative Parts of the Male and Female exactly to resemble one the other, say that this body in the Female, answers to the Yard in the Male. And indeed it is of not an unlike substance, but is not the twentieth part so big. It is soft and spongie, but it is likely when the Mare is lustfull and desires the Horse, it plumps up and suffers a sort of erection, being the principal seat of pleasure in the Mare. It has two pair of Muscles be∣longing to it, as well as the Yard of the Horse. One pair is round, and springs from the Hip-bones: The other from the Sphincter of the Arse∣gut. Its Veins and Arteries spring from those that are called Pudendae (or belonging to the Privity) and its Nerves, (which are pretty large,

to make it the more sensible) arise from the same origine with those that are dispersed through the Sheath and Womb.

As to the outward Privity, the Labia or Lips are the first things that offer themselves. Besides the common Coverings, to wit the Skin and fleshy Membrane, they are stuft with a little spongy Fat. They serve to cover the outer orifice of the Sheath for comeliness sake, and to defend it from the cold, and Insects, or other injuries. The closing of these two makes that which is called the fissure or chink. If one draw the Lips a little aside, then appear the Nymphs, so called because they stand next to the Urine as it spouts out from the Bladder, and hinder it from wetting the Lips. They are two, on each side one, just within the Lips, begin∣ning at the jointing or middle of the Share-bone, at the lower side of the Privity, from whence they ascend close by each other to a little above half the breadth of the orifice of the Sheath, and end each in a blunt cor∣ner. Their substance is partly fleshy and partly membranous; they are soft and spongie and of a red colour, having the same Vessels with the Clitoris. Besides their use to keep off the Piss from wetting the Lips, they serve, as well as the Lips, for closing up and covering the mouth of the Vagina, at least so much of it as they reach unto.

And now we have done with all the Parts belonging to Generation, both in Male and Female.

Table IX. Representeth the Cava and Aorta, the Kidneys, &c. and all the Generative parts of a Mare. (Book 9)

• A Sheweth the hollow Vein.
• B The great Artery.
• CC The Emulgent Veins.
• DD The Emulgent Arteries.
• EE The Kidneys.
• FF The Deputy-kidneys.
• GG The Ʋreters cut off.
• HHH &c. The Spermatick Veins.
• II The Spermatick Arteries.
• ii The Hypogastrick Veins.
• •••• The Hypogastrick Arteries.
• KK The Testicles.
• LL The Trumpets of the Womb.
• ll Their jagged Orifices.
• MM The broad Ligament that sustains them, and also connects the Testi∣cles to the Horns, and both to the Hip-bones.
• NN The Horns of the Womb.
• OO The bottom of the Womb where the Foal lies.
• PP The Sheath of the Womb.
• QQ The Sheath cut open that the q Clitoris may appear.
• R The Bladder of Ʋrine turned aside.
• S Its insertion into the Sheath near its Orifice.
• TT The outward Orifice of the Sheath.

[illustration] anatomical view of a mare's reproductive system

TAB. IX. page. 57.

CHAP. XXVIII. How the Foal is nourished in the Womb; of the Membranes wherein it is wrapt, and the Liquors contained in them; and lastly of the Navel-string.

How the Young is nou∣rished. The first Opi∣nion. The second Opinion. The third and truest Opinion. The Mem∣branes that the Foal is wrapt in. The Amnios. The Chorion. Allantoides. The Navel-vessels. One Vein. Two Arte∣ries. The Ura∣chus.

HAVING described all the Parts in Mares that do any ways serve for generation, and shewn their several uses, I should put an end to this First Book, but that it may be convenient to speak somewhat of the Young contained in the Womb, for the conceiving and generating of which all these Parts were formed. But this I shall not do largely in this place, but onely summarily and in short, referring the Reader for his fuller information and satisfaction to the Treatise of the generation of Ani∣mals annexed to the latter end of this Volume; where by observing in what order and by what degrees the conceptions in other Creatures ar∣rive to perfect Animals of their kind, he may by the rule of proportion conceive how they proceed in Mares also.

Now before we come to speak of the Membranes that invest the Foal, &c. which will be the subject of this Chapter, it will be necessary to premise something concerning the ways or Vessels by which nourish∣ment is conveyed to it, whereby it grows from no bigger than a Bee to so vast a bulk.

It is not long ago till when it was the general opinion, that the Young was nourished by the Dam's Bloud; namely, that the hypogastrick and some of the spermatick Vessels of the Dam did inosculate with or open into the branches of the umbilical or Navel-vessels of the Young, and so the bloud run from one to the other in a ready course. And this Opinion had so far prevailed, and was taken for so certain a truth, that after the Young was excluded out of the Womb, and must needs receive its nou∣rishment by the mouth, they believed that it was nourished by Bloud still: For they thought that Milk was first Bloud, onely it changed its colour, and its taste partly, in the white Kernels of the Dugs. This was a strange fancy, that Nature should thus doe and undoe, first turn Chyle into Bloud, and then turn that Bloud again into a Liquor resembling Chyle, and in truth differing very little from it. But this by the way. I say, the Dam's Vessels were supposed to inosculate with the Navel-ves∣sels of the Young; whereby Bloud was carried to it for its nourishment: but they never troubled their heads about making it out how the Young should be nourished before it had ever a Navel-vessel, or before ever the Conception adhered to any part of the Womb. Now the Embryo or first draught (as I may call it) of the Young is formed in all Creatures before the Navel-vessels, and it is grown to a pretty bulk before they are so well perfected as to be capable of receiving any Liquor into them. And when they are perfectly formed, and can perform their office, whatever it be; in some Creatures, as particularly in a Sow, they never reach further than the Chorion or outmost Membrane wherein the Pig is included, and therefore have no contact or communication with those of the Sow, whose Veins and Arteries reach no further than the inmost Membrane of

the Womb. And in the Creature we have now under consideration, namely a Mare, it is near six months before the Chorion adhere to the in∣most Membrane of the Womb, (which how it does, we shall shew by and by.) Now these observations plainly demonstrate that the Young cannot be nourished by the Bloud of the Dam, seeing there is no way whereby the Bloud can be conveyed to it, in any Creature for a consi∣derable time, and in some Creatures, at all.

Others sufficiently discovering the errours of this Opinion, and incli∣ning to believe that the Young in the Womb was nourished with the same Liquor while it was there, as it is after it comes into the World, namely Chyle a little refined, and not finding any other convenient ways (as they thought) whereby the Chyle could be conveyed to the Womb, have fancied that they have found Lacteal or Milky-vessels going thither directly either from the great Kernel at the centre of the Mesentery, or from the common receptacle of the Chyle it self: but others that favour not this Opinion, suppose those Vessels that these have fancied to be Lac∣teals, to be onely Lympheducts, conveying the Lympha or superfluous Water from the Womb to the common Receptacle, whither the Lympha of all the other Parts contained in the Lower Belly is by the same Vessels likewise discharged. So that though this Opinion be very plausible for its inventing so ready a way for the Chyles coming to the Womb; yet it is very probable that these supposed Milky-veins are nothing but Lym∣pheducts, and then the whole Supposition falls to the ground.

But yet though this second Opinion be mistaken in the Vessels that bring the Liquor to the Womb whereby the Young is nourished, yet it seems to have hit right on the Liquor it self. For as it cannot be Bloud for the reasons I have before given, so there is no other Liquor in the Body but Chyle, that is capable of being turned into nourishment. For though they call that Juice, by which Bodies come to maturity are nourished, (and also the Young in the Womb) nutritious Juice, yet that name onely denotes its office, and does not suppose that a Liquor quite distinct in nature from Bloud or Chyle is understood by that denomina∣tion: but it does indeed partake of the nature both of the Bloud and Chyle; for it is Chyle a little exalted or impregnated with the spirit and life of the Bloud. Now this Juice arrives at the Womb by these ways. First the Chyle ascending from the common Receptacle by the tho∣racick Duct to the right Ventricle of the Heart, it is sent out from thence together with the Bloud into the Lungs, from whence they both return to the left ventricle of the Heart, out of which they are ejected into the Aorta or great Artery, by which means the Chyle runs con∣founded with the Bloud into all the Parts of the Body; but when the Dam is with Young we may conceive that a greater quantity of it may tend towards the Womb than to other parts: even as it is probable that more wheyish or watery Humour accompanies that Bloud that flows by the Emulgent Arteries to the Kidneys, than that which flows to other Parts, because Nature has appointed the Kidneys for the separating of it from the Bloud. I say it is also likely that more Chyle descends to the Womb by the spermatick and hypogastrick Arteries than to any other part, because a great quantity of it is to be separated from the Bloud here for the nourishment of the Young. Now these Arteries, as all others in the Body, do divide themselves so often, till they end in very small capillary or hair-like threads, which terminate in the inmost Membrane of the

Table X. Shews the Foetus or Young lying covered in the Womb; the Stomach, Guts, &c. being removed. (Book 10)

• AA &c. The body of the Matrix.
• BB The Horn of the Womb on the left side.
• DDD The Liver.
• E The Bladder.
• FF The Ligaments of the Bladder.
• GG The Ʋreters.
• HH The Iliack Vessels.
• II The Hypogastrick Vessels.
• MM The Share-bone cut asunder.
• N The Privity or Vulva.
• O The Dock.
• PP The Midriff.
• Q The neck of the Bladder joined with the sheath of the Matrix.
• SS The Vessels called pudendae, dispersed into and about the Lips of the Privity.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's womb

TAB. X. pag. 60.

Womb. But all the branches of these Arteries about the Womb are much larger when the Female is with Young than at other times, which is an argument that nourishment is indeed brought by them. The greatest difficulty is, how it can be discharged out of the Arteries into the Womb, and no Bloud go along with it. To solve this difficulty we must consi∣der, that the Particles of several Liquors are of different figures, as sup∣pose some round, some corner'd, &c. Now we know that if two bodies of the same bulk be one round, and another foursquare, the round will go through a hole which the foursquare body will not, and on the con∣trary the foursquare body will pass through a hole that the round will not; accordingly as the hole is round or foursquare. And this may be the reason that the Chyle can pass out of the small ends of the Arteries, and yet the Bloud cannot accompany it, but must return back by the Veins. And besides the difference of figure, it is probable the Particles of that Chyle that ouzes into the Womb, are of much smaller bulk than those of the Bloud, seeing it is a much thinner and watery body; and therefore may as easily be separated from the Bloud into the Womb, as the Urine is by the Kidneys into the Ureters. And to further and assist this separation some do believe there is a certain fermentation in the Womb, even as there is in other Parts of the Body, where other Juices are separated from the Bloud, as Choler in the Liver, and according to some, Urine in the Kidneys. But be the separation by what means it will, that there is such a thing is most certain, and how the Young comes to partake of it for its nourishment we shall next shew.

While it was believed that a Conception was made of the Male and Fe∣male's Seed mixed together, it was somewhat difficult to imagine how such a fluid substance should so speedily acquire so compact Membranes to in∣clude it, as we see it has in a few days. But now that it is believed that a Conception is nothing else but an Egg dropt off from the Testicle and received into the Womb, that difficulty vanishes, for those Membranes do originally invest the Egg, even as we see the like Membranes lie under the shells of the Eggs of Fowls, and encompassing the whole. These Membranes are at the first but two, called Amnios and Chorion; but after a while there is a third commonly called Allantoides, or the Pudding-like Membrane.

That Membrane or Skin that immediately infolds the Young is called Amnios. It is very thin, smooth and clear, and in it is contained that Liquor out of which the Young is first formed, and by which it is after∣wards nourished. That Liquor out of which the Young is formed, is originally in it, even while the Conception is under the form of an Egg: but that by which the Young is nourished and its Parts increased, sweats into this Membrane immediately out of the Chorion or outmost Mem∣brane for the first months, till the Navel-string is perfected, and that there grows a new Membrane betwixt these two, that contains a peculiar sort of Liquor, as we shall shew by and by. But the Juice that is in the Amnios from first to last (except that out of which the Embryo is formed) is Chyle, which at first sweats into it out of the Chorion, and afterwards is conveyed into it by the umbilical Arteries of the Young, who first re∣ceived it by its umbilical Veins. For these Arteries send many branches into the Amnios, which discharge themselves into it, even as the hypo∣gastrick and spermatick Arteries do into the Womb. Now this Liquor that is thus collected in this inmost Membrane, does at first nourish the Embryo or first rudiments of the Young by apposition, that is, those ru∣diments do attract to themselves such particles of the Liquor as are suita∣ble for them; and thereby their bulk comes to be encreased by degrees: but as soon as the Young has its Mouth and Stomach perfected, it then sucks it up and drinks it in by its Mouth, and it passes by the same ways to the Heart as it does after the birth.

The second Membrane, that is originally in the Egg, and that invests the Young from first to last, is called the Chorion. This is somewhat thicker than the Amnios; it is smooth on its inside, but rough and une∣qual on its outside. This Membrane drinks up that nutritious Juice that is emptied into the Womb from the hypogastrick and spermatick Arte∣ries, which Juice is again filtred as it were out of it into the Amnios for the nourishment of the Young. For the Liquor contained in this Mem∣brane is altogether the same with that of the Amnios. Now this Mem∣brane for several months (five or six) adheres not to the Womb in any part, but the Young that is clad with it, lies as loose in the Womb, as a Bladder in a Foot-ball that is not at all tied to the leather. (Thus I say it is in a Mare, though in most other Creatures this Membrane begin much sooner to be fasten'd to the Womb.) But at length first of all there begin to grow in the surface of it certain reddish specks or caruncles no bigger than a Vetch, and at the same time the Membrane grows thicker, and there appear innumerable Vessels in it. And these Caruncles as they become more in number, so they grow broader in dimension, in∣somuch as at last they are spread all over the Chorion, so that on its out∣side it seems to have lost the nature of a Membrane, and to have become a placenta or Womb-cake. At the same time that these Caruncles grow thus on this Membrane, the Navel-string penetrating the Amnios is inserted into it, and those numerous Vessels that are seen in the Chorion, are onely branches of the Navel-arteries and Veins dispersed through it. And now the Chorion by means of the Caruncles that grow upon it, adheres to the inner Mem∣brane of the Womb, from whence the Navel-veins imbibe nutritious Juice and carry it to the Young for its sustenance, (as shall be further shewed presently, when we come to speak of the Navel-string.) But the Caruncles do not stick so fast to the Womb, but that they may be sepa∣rated without tearing, much less are there any Anastomoses or Inoscula∣tions

of the Vessels that run through the Chorion with the hypogastrick or spermatick Vessels of the Dam, as the Ancients believed. Nor is there in a Mare any of those Glandules that are commonly called Cotyledons or Sawcers, sticking to the inner Membrane of the Womb, into which the Caruncles of the Chorion are inserted, like an Acorn into its cup, such as are in Sheep and Goats: but the so often mentioned Caruncles stick im∣mediately to the Membrane it self, and seem to serve as Sponges to imbibe the nutritious Juice that plentifully bedews it; which having done, the said Juice is suckt up by the mouths of the Navel-vein, as was said before. Part of this Membrane does on each side bag out into the Horns of the Womb.

As soon as the Navel-string has penetrated the Amnios, there begins to appear a third Membrane betwixt these two already described, which contains a Liquor wholly different from what swims in them; for that we have shewn to be Chyle, but this is the Ʋrine of the Young, which, while the Young is in the Womb, is not emptied out of the Bladder the common way, but there is a Pipe called Ʋrachus that passes from the bottom of the Bladder out at its Navel, and empties the Urine into this Membrane, in which it is collected to the quantity of many quarts. This Membrane is called Allantoides or Pudding-like, because in many Crea∣tures, as Cows, Sheep, &c. it is of that shape, and seems to be onely the Ʋrachus a little widened. But it is of another figure in Mares (as it is also in Women) and is of the same dimension with the other two already described, incompassing the whole Young. It is more dense than they, and may be easily distinguished from them by this, that they are full of Vessels, but this has not one, that one can discern. Although this Membrane appear not till the time aforesaid, yet 'tis like it was originally in the Egg; and at its appearance the Chorion becomes empty, because there is now no longer passage of any thing out of the Chorion into the Amnios, by reason of this Membrane and its Liquor interposing. Whence the Chorion claps pretty close to the Allantoides, so that they cannot be easily separated. In the Liquor contained in the Allantoides there swim several gobbets that look like as if they were fleshy, but being pulled to pieces they appear skinny. They are supposed to be concretions of some part of the nutritious Juice that may come along with the Urine into this Membrane, wherein by its long stay it curdles into these kind of bodies. But there is one more notable one, that is said to grow on the Forehead of the Colt, of the shape of a Tongue, and is called hippomanes, which, Tradition says, the Mare is wont to eat as soon as she has foal'd; which if she do not, she will never care for her Foal. This they were wont to dry and powder, and to put into drink for a Love-potion, as if there were some witchery in it. But such things I can say nothing to, having never experimented them. This Membrane sticking pretty close to the Chorion, bags out on each side into the Horns of the Womb as well as it. The Liquor contained in it, is Urine, as was said above, which daily in∣creases in quantity, being imported into it by the Ʋrachus from the Blad∣der of the Foal.

Table XI. Shews the Belly of the Foetus opened, the better to shew the Umbilical Vessels; as also two of the Membranes laid open, in which the Foetus is included in the Womb, with the Veins and Ar∣teries branching into them. (Book 11)

• AA The Liver.
• B The Sternum or Breast-bone.
• CCC The Gut Colon.
• D The Bladder of Ʋrine.
• E The Urachus cut off short, because the Allantoides, into which it is in∣serted, is not expressed.
• FF The Ʋmbilical Vein.
• GG The Ʋmbilical Arteries.
• HHH &c. The Membrane Amnios.
• II &c. The Membrane called Chorion, with the branches of the Ʋmbilical Veins and Arteries dispersed through it.
• MM &c. The like branches running through the Amnios.
• S The Caruncle called Hippomanes, which is said to grow on the Foal's Forehead, but is indeed found in the middle Membrane called Al∣lantoides.

[illustration] anatomical view the interior of a horse foetus' belly and its umbilical vessels

TAB. XI. pag. 63.

Lastly, We are come to the Vessels that make up the Navel-string, and those are four, one Vein, two Arteries, and the Ʋrachus. These are all infolded in a common Coat, and are wreathed one about another like a Rope. The greatest part of its length is contained in the Amnios, the rest in the Allantoides; for as soon as it has penetrated that, it is immedi∣ately and directly implanted into the Chorion.

The Vein is as big as both the Arteries, and arises out of the hollow or lower side of the Liver of the Young, and coming out single with the rest at the Navel, is immediately divided into two, which as they pass through the Amnios, send some twigs to it, and from thence continue their march through the Allantoides to the Chorion, in which and the Ca∣runcles that grow upon it they terminate, being divided into innumerable branches. Its use is to imbibe the nutritious Juice and also the Bloud that is superfluous to the nourishing of these Parts, and to convey them to the Young.

The Arteries being two, do arise on each side from the inner Iliacal Branches of the great Artery, (as is commonly held, but I have always observed them to spring from the Aorta it self before the division) and as∣cending by the sides of the Bladder, they meet the Vein at the Navel, and there begin to be wreathed with it. Their march and insertions are the same with those of the Vein, onely they send more twigs into the Am∣nios than the Vein doth. Their use is to carry vital heat and nourishment to the Parts that include the Young, to wit to the Amnios, Chorion and its Caruncles: and besides, its branches that are dispersed through the Amnios do distill into it some of that nutritious Juice which could not be turned into Bloud by once circulating through the Heart of the Young. Which Juice being collected in the cavity of the Amnios, is drunk in by the Young at its mouth, and so passes the same ways as it does after the birth.

The fourth Vessel included in the Navel-rope is called Ʋrachus, from its office of conveying the Urine. It springs from the bottom of the Bladder, and passing out of the Navel with the Vein and Arteries, as soon as it has pierced the Amnios it opens it self with a full mouth into the ca∣vity of the Allantoides, serving as a Pipe to rack the Urine as it were out of the Bladder of the Young into this Membrane. For though the Young void no Excrements at the Fundament, while it is in the Womb, nor has any Repository or Storehouse for them saving its own Guts, (amongst which the Gut Caecum seems fittest for that office:) yet seeing it is nou∣rished altogether with Liquor that has a good quantity of wheyish hu∣mour mixed with it for its better conveyance through those narrow ways by which it is to pass, I say for this reason it is necessary there should be some particular Repository for it, seeing it cannot return to the Dam again, and the Bladder of the Young is not capable of containing a fifth (may be a tenth) part of it; and this Repository is the Membrane Allan∣toides, into which it is poured out of the Bladder by the Ʋrachus.

These four Vessels after they come out of the Navel are included in one common Coat, which consists of a double Membrane, borrowed from the Rim of the Belly the inner of them, and the outer from the fleshy Membrane or Pannicle described above chap. 4. After the birth of the Foal, these Vessels losing their original use, the two Arteries serve for Li∣gaments to keep the Bladder in its place, and the Vein performs the same office to the Liver; but the Ʋrachus quite disappears.

And thus much of the Membranes and Navel-vessels, that are included in the Womb when the Mare is with Foal; and which at the Foaling make the After-birth or Cleaning as we call it: We might in this place further shew, what Parts of the Foal are first formed, and which soonest perfected; also in what particulars a Foal in the Womb differs from it self when foaled; and lastly we might have been more full in shewing how it is nourished in the Womb: but the discoursing of these things we purposely wave in this place, and refer the Reader to the Dis∣course of the generation of Animals annexed to this Treatise of Anatomy, wherein we will endeavour to satisfy his curiosity to the uttermost.

Table XII. Shews the Foal taken out of the Matrix, both wrapt in the Membranes with which it was covered, and also quite cleared of them; and lastly, the said Membranes cut open, the Foal as yet remaining in them. (Book 12)

Fig. I. Shews the Foetus taken out of the Matrix, remaining in the same posture as in the Womb, and wrapt in its Membranes.

• AA The Membranes.
• CC The hinder Legs of the Foal.

Fig. II. Shews the Foetus cleared of the Membranes, but continuing in the same posture.

• BBB The Body of the Foal.
• SS The common covering of the Ʋmbilical Vessels turned back, that the four Vessels contained in it may appear.
• TT The Ʋmbilical Arteries.

• U The Ʋmbilical Vein.
• X The Urachus.

Fig III. Shews the Foal, and two of its Membranes, as represented by Dr. Walt. Needham.

• A The Foal lying within the Membranes.
• B The Navel-rope whose production E passes through the cavity of the uri∣nary Membrane toward the Chorion.
• CCC The Amnios.
• DDDD The place of the Chorion which naturally grows to the urinary Membrane, but is here removed, that the Foetus may appear through the Amnios and urinary Membrane.
• E The production of the Rope which at this place is divided into two, and so is cut off with the Chorion.
• F The place in the Navel-rope, where the exit of the Urachus is design'd, between two blots. Which Urachus is not indeed a part of the Membrane GG or Ʋrinary, but of CC or Amnios, and seems a du∣plicature of it turned back even to the Bladder.
• GGG The urinary Membrane, (which here is not Allantoides, or of the shape of a Pudding) investing the whole Foetus as well as the Amnios; which is common to it with a Man, Dog, Cat, Coney, and perhaps others that have Womb-cakes; although they differ from one another in several circumstances.
• HH The progress of this Membrane as also of the Chorion into the Horns of the Womb. Whereas all the whole Foetus besides, &c. lies in the bottom of the Womb, as a Child does in a Woman's.
• aaaa The Bloud-vessels dispersed from the Rope into the Amnios, which the urinary Membrane wants wholly; for the rest of the Rope is all spent on the Chorion, and is cut off with it.

[illustration] anatomical view of foal within and outside its womb membranes

TAB. XII. pag. 64.

[illustration]

Fig. 1.

[illustration]

Fig. 2.

[illustration]

Fig. 3.

CHAP. XXIX. Of the Ʋdder.

Its substance. Number. Its Glands. The Paps. The Vessels belonging to the Ʋdder. The milk-pipes. The use of the Ʋdder.

THOUGH the Udder be an external Part of the Lower Belly, yet we have deferr'd the description of it till this place, because of the dependance that it has upon the Womb, and its office of yielding the same nourishment to the Foal when it is excluded out of the Womb, as it was nourish'd by while it remain'd in it.

It is seated at the bottom of the Paunch upon the lower ends of the streight Muscles; very small, if compar'd to the bigness of a Mare's Bo∣dy, and to its bulk in many other Creatures. When the Mare gives no suck, it almost disappears.

It consists of the common coverings, Fat, a multitude of Vessels, Glands or Kernels, and Pipes to convey the Milk to the Paps that is separated from the Vessels in the Glands.

Now though when the Mare gives suck it seems to be but one roundish body, like a Breast with two Nipples, yet it truly consists of two bodies, one being joined to the other onely by contiguity, for they have each their proper Vessels, Pipes and Pap; and do indeed appear to the eye to be distinct when the Mare is neither with Foal nor suckles one.

The greatest part of its bulk consists of Glands, which are many in number, though they be so united to one another as to appear one con∣tinued body to an unwary observer, which they come to do from that Fat that fills up the spaces between them, and is much of the same colour with the Glands. There is one Gland greater than the rest seated at the root of each Pap. By means of these Glands it is that the Milk is sepa∣rated from the Bloud, as shall be further shewn by and by.

The Paps are round in shape and of a spongie substance, cloathed with a thinner Skin than the rest of the Udder. At their head or end they have many little holes through which the Milk issues when the Foal sucks.

The Udder has all sorts of Vessels, Veins, Arteries, Nerves and Lym∣pheducts; and besides these it has peculiar Pipes for containing and con∣veying the Milk. The Veins and Arteries are branches of the Hypoga∣stricks, which proceed from the internal Iliack branches of the Cava and Aorta: 'tis likely there come some twigs to it also from the external branches, which are called the Epigastrick Vessels. Its Nerves I have not examin'd, but 'tis very probable they are the same with those disper∣sed into the Matrix and Sheath, which are twigs of the Intercostal pair and of some of the Os sacrum. Its Lympheducts are pretty numerous, and tend, as all those of the Lower Belly do, to the common Receptacle of the Chyle at the centre of the Mesentery.

It has also a peculiar sort of Vessels, which may be called Milk-pipes, being the Repositories or Store-houses of the Milk. At the root of each Pap they are but one on each side, but a great many smaller ones coming from every part of the Udder discharge themselves into this one, when the Pap is suckt by the Foal. But the Pipes belonging to one Pap have no communication with those that belong to the other, but in respect of

these Vessels the two sides of the Udder are as distinct Parts, as the Breasts of a Woman are distinct one from another, as was noted before. These Pipes have been mistaken by some to be true Milky-veins, as if some of the Milky-veins of the Mesentery reached hither. But seeing there are no footsteps of them in the track betwixt the Mesentery and Udder, we may well deny them to be found in the Udder it self.

The use of the Udder is to prepare and separate the Milk for the nou∣rishment of the Foal, which it does in this manner. The Chyle of the Mare being mixed with her Bloud in the Heart, flows from thence along with it by the Arteries into all Parts of the Body in the circulation, but most plentifully ('tis probable) towards the Udder, even as it does to the Womb while the Mare is with Foal. The Arteries that convey it immediately to the Udder are the hypogastrick Branches, which termi∣nating in its Glands do squirt or strain the Chyle through them into the Milk-pipes. And as for the Bloud that was mixed with the Chyle in the Arteries, that being of a thicker body, or consisting of Particles of ano∣ther form, cannot enter the narrow pores of the Glands, and therefore is received by the small mouths of the Veins that are likewise inser∣ted into them. So that it appears to be an erroneous Opinion, That Milk is made of Bloud, if we speak of Bloud properly so called; yet seeing the Chyle, when it is confusedly jumbled with the Bloud in the Arteries, is not easily distinguishable from it, but the whole Mass seems to be homogeneal or of the same nature, in a large and less proper sense we may affirm it to be so made. After that the Chyle is thus separated by the Glands, it drills along the Milk-pipes, out of the smaller into the larger, in which it is reserved for the use of the Foal.

The End of the First Book.

THE ANATOMY OF AN HORSE. BOOK II. Of the Middle Venter, or Chest.

CHAP. I. Of the investing and circumscribing Parts of the Chest.

By what parts the Thorax is bounded. Its common investing Parts. Its proper containing Parts. Its contained Parts.

HAVING finished the First Book, wherein I have absolved or explained all the Natural Parts contained within the Lower Venter, as well nutritive as generative, and annexed a Dis∣course of the Foal in the Matrix or Womb; order of dissec∣tion requires that in the next place I come to treat of the Middle Venter, the Thorax or Chest, and the Vital Parts contained therein.

Where, in this one step higher that I have climbed, I am methinks much delighted to see, how Nature in this place disports her self, having as in a curious Cabinet lockt up, as it were, her most exquisite pieces of Workmanship, the Vital Instruments, by whose motion the life of the Creature is continued. Which motion is performed by so just a counter∣poise, as no art of Man could ever with all their contrivances be able in the least to imitate. Nay Aristotle, that wise Philosopher, who was in his time thought to be the nearest of counsel to Nature, was not able

(notwithstanding his incomparable sagacity) to find out the true cause of the Vital motion, any more than he was, to find out the reciprocal Ebbing and Flowing of the Sea.

The Place wherein these Instruments are contained, is called the Tho∣rax or Chest, which is composed of or environed with these Parts fol∣lowing.

First it is bounded or circumscribed, above, by the Coller-bones, and below by the Diaphragm or Midriff; on the fore-part by the Breast-bone, and on the hinder part by the Spondyls or Back-bones; and on the two sides by the true and bastard Ribs and Intercostal Muscles. All which Parts are framed and composed by Nature for the benefit of the Crea∣ture, as well for the defence of the contained Parts from external Inju∣ries, as for the use of Respiration or breathing: both which are very needfull; for without them the Creature cannot be preserved. Now that it might serve for these ends, it was necessary it should consist of sun∣dry Parts; for should it have been made all bony, it could not have been contracted and dilated as occasion served, whereby the Lungs could not have had the liberty to play as now they have: And if it had been wholly fleshy, then would not the contained Parts have been sufficiently fenced. It is therefore made partly bony, partly gristly, and partly fleshy, that it might the better perform both the offices aforesaid.

In the next place I come to speak particularly to the Investing Parts of the Chest, some of which are Common, and others Proper.

The Common investing or containing Parts are the same as the Lower Belly hath, namely the Scarf-skin, the true Skin, the fleshy Pannicle, the Fat, and the common Membrane of the Muscles. Of all which ha∣ving discoursed at large in the First Book, we shall say nothing of them here.

The Proper containing Parts of the Chest are the Muscles, the Bones, the Pleura or Membrane that cloaths its inside, the Midriff and the Medi∣astinum, which is the Skin that goes across from the Breast to the Back, and parts the Lungs, called by some, the Partition-wall.

The contained or invested Parts, are the Heart with the Heart-bag called the Pericardium, and by some the Purse of the Heart, the Lungs and part of the Weazand or Wind-pipe, by Anatomists called Aspera Ar∣teria, or Rough-artery, and several Vessels, with the Trunks of Vena cava and Arteria magna, whose ascending branches are underpropped by the Thymus, or Kernel in the Throat.

CHAP. II. Of the Muscles of the Middle Venter or Chest, called the Intercostal Muscles.

Intercostal Muscles why so called. The External. The Internal. Their number. Their action.

THERE are several pairs of Muscles that lie upon the Chest on the outside of the Ribs; but because one may easily enough cut open the Chest for examining the Parts contained in it, without defacing any part of those Muscles, we shall omit to speak of them in this place, re∣ferring the Reader to the Book of the Muscles; and here onely describe the Intercostal, which in laying open the Breast, whiles one breaks the gristly ends of the Ribs, happen part of them to be defaced.

These Muscles are called Intercostal from their being placed between the Ribs, and filling up the spaces between them. Betwixt every two Ribs there are placed two of these Muscles, the one lying upon the other; the uppermost being called the External, and the undermost the In∣ternal one.

The External one takes his rise from the lower part of the upper Ribs, and ends in the upper part of the lower.

The Internal takes his rise contrary to the former; for it arises or takes its original from the upper part of the lower Rib, and ends in the lower part of the upper.

Now it is to be understood that those are called the upper Ribs that are next to the Head, and those the lower, that are next to the Paunch.

And as these Muscles do differ as to their original and insertion, so like∣wise in the course of their Fibres; for although they be both furnished with oblique or slanting Fibres, yet they run contrary ways, crossing one the other, and making as it were a St. Andrew's Cross, or the letter X.

These Muscles are in number sixty four, that is to say on each side thirty two, there being on each side of the Horse seventeen Ribs, and between every Rib two Muscles, as I have before intimated.

Now the action of these Muscles is to assist Respiration by widening, and contracting the Chest. First the external ones serve to raise the Ribs and draw them backward, whereby the Cavity of the Chest is enlarged, and thereby free room made for the Air to enter into the Lungs in Inspi∣ration, or taking in the breath. And on the contrary the internal pull in the Ribs by drawing them slanting downwards towards the Breast-bone, whereby the Chest is straitned, and thereby the Air, wherewith the Lungs are puff'd up, expelled, which action is called Expiration, or breathing forth. But these Muscles are not of themselves alone sufficient for these actions, but they assist towards them, being aided by the other that lie upon the Chest, by the Midriff, and by the Lungs themselves.

CHAP. III. Of the Pleura, or Coat which invests or lines the Ribs on the Inside.

The original of the Pleura or Rib-skin. Its Perfora∣tions. Its Vessels. Its use.

THIS Coat or Skin called the Pleura, is the Skin which covereth all the Ribs on the inside of the Chest, being of the same nature and use here, as the Peritonaeum or Rim of the Belly is in the Lower Belly. It is also of the same substance as the Rim of the Belly is, but much stronger and thicker, though Riolanus affirmeth the contrary as to Men.

It is as it were of a middle nature or temper, that is, neither too hard nor too soft; not too hard, lest it should not reach and yield in the act of Respiration, and so hinder the motion of the Chest; neither too soft, lest the motion of the Chest should violate it: but it is rather hard than soft, the better to defend the Vital Parts.

It is believed to take its original from the Coats of the Nerves of the Spinal Marrow, which come out of the Back-bones (or vertebrae of the Back) into the Chest, and is therefore thought to be continued with the Coats of the Brain: wherefore it is observed to be thicker upon the back part of the Chest than any where else, where it sticks so close to the Back∣bones, that it can hardly be separated.

It is all over double, that the Intercostal-vessels might run without danger between its Membranes, and by it be preserved from the hard∣ness of the Ribs, which would be apt to violate or break them.

The outward Skin of this Coat, namely that which is next to the Ca∣vity of the Chest, is harder and thicker; and the inward (which is fast∣ned to the Ribs) is softer and thinner. Now between these two Skins is bred that mortal Disease (in Men) called the Pleurisie, by which the ne∣ver to be forgotten Doctor Willis, (for being in his time the honour of his University and Country) was notwithstanding the great pains he took in the inquiry into and finding out remedies against this Disease, (as his learned Works make appear, by which great benefit hath accrued to others) was, I say, himself by the tyranny of it taken from amongst the Living.

This Pleura is perforated in many places, for the Ingate and Outgate of the Vessels. For above, it letteth out the Jugular and Axillary Arteries and Veins, and below, through the Midriff, the Trunks of the hollow Vein and great Artery. Besides where it receiveth in the Nerves of the wandring pair, the Windpipe, and both letteth in and out the Gullet.

Its proper Vessels are, Veins from the Vena sine pari, or Vein without a pair, and from the upper Intercostal Vein. Its Arteries spring also from the upper Intercostals (as those from the Subclavian) which des∣cend to about the seventh or eighth Rib: below which it receives twigs of Arteries from the back part of the descending great Artery. It has as many pairs of Nerves (wanting one) as there are Joints in the Back∣bone the whole length of the Chest: for betwixt each Joint there comes out a pair; but then the uppermost and lowest Joints being reckoned for

the two extremes, (and not a pair of Nerves for either extreme) there must be one pair of Nerves less than there are Joints. The Joints there∣fore (or vertebrae) being seventeen, there must onely sixteen pair of Nerves be reckoned to the Chest. Now these Nerves as soon as ever they come out of the Joint, are immediately divided into the fore and hinder-branches. Of which the fore-branches serve the Intercostal Mus∣cles and the Pleura; but the hinder are bestowed on the Muscles that lie upon the Back.

The use of it is much like that of the Rim of the Belly; for (as hath been said) as the Rim of the Belly is stretched about all the Lower Belly, and furnisheth all the Bowels therein contained with Coats or Skins, (every Bowel with a particular Coat) so doth this Pleura the Bowels of the Mid∣dle Venter: for it is stretched about all the Cavity of the Chest, and gi∣veth a Coat to every particular Part therein contained, (either medi∣ately or immediately.) It covers also the Intercostal Muscles, and makes the upper Membrane of the Midriff. Next to the Cavity of the Chest it is bedewed with a watery humour, that the Lungs which lie against it on their outside, may move the more glibly, and not be offended by its roughness.

CHAP. IV. Of the Midriff or Diaphragm.

The Dia∣phragm why so called. Its rise. Its substance. Its Perfora∣tions. Its Vessels. The several uses of the Midriff. 1. It assists Respiration. 2. Its motion helps the di∣stribution of the Chyle. 3 It helps to expel the Ex∣crements, and in Mares the Foal. 4. It serves to divide the Abdomen from the Chest.

THE Diaphragm (or Midriff) is so called from its office of distin∣guishing or separating; because it separateth or distinguisheth the Bowels of the lower, from the Instruments of Life and Respiration in the middle Belly.

It is a Muscle, long and round, seated at the lower part of the Chest, overthwart which it runs, sloping a little lower towards the Paunch back∣ward. It hath a figure and action different from all other Muscles.

It is as broad as the Chest is wide: for its edges are knit to the lower part of the Breast-bone, and all round on each side to the Ribs, and to the lowest vertebral Joint of the Chest.

It is said to arise from its two long and fleshy Productions, which springing from the vertebrae of the Loins (to the muscles whereof they are strongly knit) do, as they go upwards, grow wider and wider, till they come to the lowest vertebrae of the Chest, where they grow and unite together, and so spread themselves into this Muscle called the Mid∣riff. Others, though they grant that these are part of its original, yet think that it does equally arise from its whole fleshy circumference, by which it adheres to the ends of the lowest Ribs. And a third opinion is, that its original is from its centre or middle where its Nerve is inserted into it, from that common Maxim of Galen's, That whereever the Nerve is inserted, there is the head of the Muscle. But as that Maxim does not hold in all other Muscles, so this being a Muscle of a peculiar shape and use, it may well be excepted therefrom, especially seeing the centre of the Midriff is

tendinous, which the origine of a Muscle does not use to be, but onely its end.

As for its substance, it is partly fleshy, partly nervous and partly mem∣branous. For Membranes, because it requireth great strength (it being in continual motion) it is furnished with two, and those very strong ones, the uppermost of which it hath from the Pleura, and the lowermost from the Peritonaeum or Rim of the Belly. To the uppermost the lower part of the Mediastinum is knit, (and of the Heart-bag in Men, but not in Horses or other Brutes) and sometimes the lower tips or ends of the two great Lobes of the Lungs. Its circumference is fleshy, and its middle or centre nervous, in which part a wound is mortal, but one in the fleshy some∣times admits of cure.

It hath in it several perforations or holes, some of which are little, and others bigger. The little ones are the pores, through which the Vapours are said to ascend from the lower Parts into the Chest; but besides that such ascent of impure Vapours from the Guts, &c. into the Chest, where the Vital Parts are seated, would be very inconvenient and prejudicial, I think the Midriff is so compact a body, and its Membranes so close, that we may either deny any pores at all, or however that they admit not any such steams. The larger holes (being those that ought to be reckon'd alone for such) are, first, that which is very near its middle or centre, but something towards the right side, which gives passage for the Trunk of the hollow Vein ascending from the Liver. The second is on the left side of the centre, being bigger than the former, and somewhat back∣warder; and this serves for the letting forth of the Gullet and two Nerves which go to the Stomach. There is also a third hole more backwards by the vertebrae, for the through-fare of the great Artery, and the Vein without a fellow, and for the Nerve which Doctor Willis distinguishes from the wandring or eighth pair, by the name of the Intercostal.

The Midriff hath Vessels of all sorts; for it hath Veins arising from the Trunk of the hollow Vein, which are called Venae phrenicae, and also some twigs branching to it from the Vena adiposa, or Fat-vein, so called be∣cause it is mostly bestowed on the fat Membrane that invests the Kidneys.

It hath Arteries from the Trunk of the great Artery, called also Phrenicae.

Its Nerves are in number two, proceeding from the spinal Marrow at the third or fourth jointing of the Rack-bones or vertebrae of the Neck, from whence they descend through the cavity of the Chest, being in their course sustained and strengthened by the Mediastinum, lest by any violent motion they should be hurt. As soon as these Nerves reach the Midriff, they enter it in its centre, and thence disperse themselves into its whole substance, terminating in it. But besides these some have observed small twigs to be sent into it from the Nerves of the eighth pair, as they descend through it toward the Stomach.

Various are the Ʋses that might be ascribed unto the Midriff, the chief are these that follow. First, It is the principal Muscle that assists the action of Re∣spiration. Which action whether it be animal and voluntary, or natural and involuntary, has occasion'd great disputes. True it is, that it moves in breath∣ing as well while we sleep, as when we are awake, so that our Will, which in sleep is dormant as well as the Body, seems not to be necessary to its mo∣tion: and yet we can hinder it from moving when we please by holding in our breath. We may therefore call its motion, a mixt motion, to wit, partly

voluntary (or rather spontaneous in Beasts, because they have not proper∣ly any Will) and partly natural. Which motion is performed on this manner. In taking in ones breath it is stretched out and becomes plain and stiff, pressing down a little the Parts contained in the Lower Belly: but in letting out ones breath, it is relaxed and ascends somewhat up in∣to the Chest, being partly driven up thither by the ascent of the Bowels of the Lower Belly, which in expiration is a little straitned by its Mus∣cles, and therefore the Parts contained therein as they have less room breadthways, must have more lengthways. Now we must note, that onely one sort of motion agrees to one Muscle, to wit, that of contrac∣tion; for that of restitution or relaxation is owing to the opposite Muscle, as was shewed at large in the First Book, chap. 6. The proper motion of the Midriff therefore is onely in Inspiration or taking in ones breath, when all its Fibres being contracted quite round, it is stretched out plain, somewhat like the Parchment upon a Drum's head: but when it is relaxed and becomes flaggy in Expiration, that is onely a motion of restitution, and is not owing to it self, but to those Muscles that con∣stringe or straiten the Chest, which are that called sacrolumbus, and the triangularis or three-corner'd one, which two lie on the outside of the Ribs as shall be shewn in the Book of the Muscles; and lastly, the inter∣nal Intercostals, described before in the second Chapter, to which some of the Muscles of the Lower Belly perhaps yield some assistance.

Secondly, By its ascending and descending, and so occasioning the Sto∣mach, Guts, &c. to be always in a motion upwards and downwards, it assists them in driving forward the Liquors or whatever else contained in them, and so helps the distribution of the Chyle, which by the wormlike motion of the Guts alone could not so well be sent through those innumerable small Vessels through which it is to pass. And this I take to be a considerable use of it, though few Anatomists have taken any no∣tice of it.

A third use is to help forward the expulsion of the Excrements, and assist the Mare in the time of her foaling. For in both those offices the Midriff by holding in the breath is kept on the tenters as it were and pres∣sed down upon the Parts contained in the Lower Belly that are next it, and those do successively bear hard upon others that are next them, whereby every Part contained therein is somewhat straitned, and so whatsoever is contained in any of them, be it the Dung, Urine or Foal, is squeezed out and expelled.

The last use is what was mentioned at the beginning of this Chapter, namely, to distinguish the Lower Belly with its natural Parts, from the Chest and its vital Parts; lest from the inferiour ignoble Parts noisom Va∣pours should ascend up to the more noble, such as are those contained in the Chest.

Table XIII. Represents the External proper Parts of the Chest, as like∣wise the natural situation of the Midriff. (Book 13)

• A The Sternum.
• B The Midriff.
• C The hold by which the hollow Vein ascends from the Liver towards the Heart.
• D The hole whereby the Gullet passeth through the Midriff.

• E The hole whereby the descendent Trunk of the great Artery passes through the Midriff.
• FF The two Appendices or Productions of the Midriff.
• GG The Muscles termed Psoae in their natural situation.
• HH The Musculi Quadrati or square Muscles of the Loyns.
• II The Internal cavity of the Flank-bone.
• K The Muscle called Serratus major Anticus in its proper place.
• L The same Muscle removed out of its place and turned back, the better to shew the Serratus minor and other Parts underneath it.
• M The Serratus Anticus minor or lesser foreside Saw-muscle in its place.
• NNN Several of the External Intercostal Muscles.
• OOO The Cartilaginous or gristly Parts of the Ribs fastened to the ster∣num or Breast-bone.

[illustration] anatomical view of the interior of a horse's chest

TAB XIII page 75

CHAP. V. Of the Partition-membrane called Mediastinum.

The Media∣stinum why so called. Its rise and substance. Its Vessels. Its uses.

THIS Membrane is called by the Latins Mediastinum, from its of∣fice of partitioning or dividing, because it divides the Chest into two parts, standing across the middle of it.

It is derived or hath its original from the Pleura or Rib-coat, of which we have already spoken in the third Chapter. For the Pleura springing from the Back-bone, keeps its way on each side of the cavity of the Chest (cloathing the inside of the Ribs) till it comes to the Breast-bone, where the two Membranes join together, but do not unite into one. From the Breast-bone these two Membranes hold a direct course back again towards the Back-bone through the middle of the Chest, but before they have gone an Inch, they begin to separate again, and that so far from one ano∣ther by degrees, as to make a cavity wide enough for containing the Heart and the Heart-bag. But when they are arrived near the Back, they join together again. Note that the Mediastinum being composed of the doubling of the Pleura, must consist of four Membranes when uni∣ted, (though onely of two where divided) seeing the Pleura it self con∣sists of two. It is wholly membranous, as is the Pleura of which it is for∣med; smooth on the outside towards the Lungs, but rough on its inside towards the Heart, by reason that the Heart-bag adheres to it by se∣veral Fibres.

Between the duplicature of this Membrane there are many small Vessels of all sorts dispersed. For first there are Veins branching to it from the Phre∣nica or Midriff-vein and from the solitary Vein or Vena sine pari; it has likewise one proper Vein of its own from the subclavian branch, called af∣ter its own name, Mediastina. Secondly, its Arteries come from the Phre∣nica or Midriff-artery, which spring out of the descending Trunk of the great Artery. Thirdly, it hath Nerves from the Phrenick or Midriff twigs of those two branches of the eighth pair that descend through it to the up∣per orifice of the Stomach. Bartholin asoribes also Lympheducts unto it.

The use of the Mediastinum is first, to divide the Chest and Lungs into two parts, that if any hurtfull Accident should happen to one of the sides, the other notwithstanding might be preserved. And this hath been ob∣served by Anatomists, who have found in dissections the one side or Lobe of the Lungs wasted and almost dryed away in Phthisical and Consump∣tive Persons, and at the same time the other hath been perfectly fresh and sound. And it hath been likewise seen and observed in wounds of the Chest, that if therewith one Lobe of the Lungs should happen to be hurt so much as to occasion the loss of the use of that Lobe, yet the other by performing his part hath preserved life.

The next use of the Mediastinum is to permit the Heart in the Heart∣bag to hang dangling in a free posture, that in its motion it might not strike against the bony sides of the Chest.

Again, it serves to sustain and preserve the Vessels running through it; and by its being knit to the Midriff, preserves that also from being drawn too much downwards by the weight of the Bowels of the Lower Belly, especially by the Liver, whose suspensory Ligament hangs by it.

CHAP. VI. Of the Thymus or great Kernel at the Throat; and of the Purse of the Heart called Pericardium, together with the water contained therein.

What the Thymus is. Its use. The Vesseli which pass over it. What the Pe∣ricardium is. From whence it takes its original. The substance of the Peri∣cardium. Its Perfora∣tions. Its Vessels. Its use. Of the Water contained in the Pericar∣dium. The uses of the Water. Of the Hu∣mour contain∣ed in the Chest.

THE Thymus (named the Sweet-bread by some) is a glandulous or kernelly body, soft and spongie, placed in the upper part of the Chest near the hole of the Throat, lying upon the ends of the Clavicles or Collar-bones.

It hath its name Thymus from the leaf of Time, which it very much resembleth in shape.

Its use is to serve as a Boulster or Pillow for the Veins and Arteries to pass over or lie upon, to keep them from the hardness of the Collar-bones, the sharpness of which would else be apt to break them or fret them asunder.

Now the Vessels which do cross over this Thymus are the hollow Vein and the great Artery, with the many divisions and branches of the same, which are in number many, dispersed from thence into most of the ex∣treme Parts of the forepart of the Body, as some to the Shoulder-blades, and so down the Fore-legs; again, some to the Neck and Head, namely the internal and external Jugular Veins, and the Carotid Arteries; as also those branches which run all along the Belly, which are by us Farriers called the Liver-veins. This Kernel is bigger in Foals than it is in grown Horses in proportion to their Bodies; and in Calves it is pretty large, and is recko∣ned for a dainty delicate bit.

Next come we to treat of the Pericardium, or Purse of the Heart, or Heart-bag, for by these several nominations or names it goes. This is

that Coat or Skin which compasseth the Heart, and in which the Heart hangeth, it being for that purpose made in figure like it.

It takes its original at the basis or upper and broad end of the Heart, from the outer Coats which compass the Vessels that enter into the Heart, which Coats do spring from the Pleura.

Its substance is thick and something hard, though not so hard as to hurt the Lungs when it presseth against them, or they against it; neither is it too soft, lest it should it self be hurt by the hardness of the Ribs, which in strong pulsations of the Heart it beats against, the Mediastinum onely coming between: but being placed between two contraries, I mean, be∣tween the soft Lungs and hard Bones, it ought to have its substance of a middle nature between both. On the outside it is rough and fibrous, adhering in many places to the Mediastinum; but within, it is smooth and slippery, that the Heart might move more freely in it.

It is perforated in five places; namely on the right side by the ascen∣ding Trunk of the hollow Vein, which comes up from the Liver and en∣ters the right Ventricle of the Heart; and by the Subclavian Vein which descends from the Channel-bones into the same Ventricle; and thirdly by the Pulmonary Artery which goes out of the right Ventricle into the Lungs. On its left side it is perforated by the Pulmonary Vein which comes from the Lungs and enters the left Ventricle of the Heart; and lastly by the great Artery that passes out of the said Ventricle.

The Veins that it is furnished with, it receiveth at the lower part of it from the Phrenick or Midriff-vein, and at the upper part from the Axil∣laries; but the Vessels from each place are mighty small.

There are no Arteries derived to it from any place, that are visible; and the reason supposed is, because it is so near the Heart, that it is im∣mediately supplied from it with vital heat and spirit. But seeing the Heart it self is not without Arteries, though it be reckon'd the fountain of life, much less can any other part be supposed to be, and therefore neither this, though they are so slender as not to be discernible.

Those small Nerves it is furnished with, are branched to it from the left recurrent Nerves of the eighth or wandring pair.

To these Vessels Bartholin adds Lympheducts, which serve to drink up part of the Liquor contained in the Heart-bag, to hinder its two great encrease.

Next come we to the use of the Heart-bag, which is, to cover and preserve the Heart, and to contain a certain moisture or Humour in it for the uses after-mentioned. Now concerning this Humour there are vari∣ous discourses and different opinions of Authours, I mean, as to the foun∣tain from whence it proceeds; for some will have it, that it is fed by Li∣quors which we drink, of which opinion is the Learned Hippocrates, whence in his Book de Corde he saith, that the Heart dwelleth in a Blad∣der, because of the resemblance the Humour in the Heart-bag hath to that in the bladder of Urine; though at the same time he denies this Wa∣ter or Humour to have any acrimony or brackishness, as the Water con∣tained in the bladder of Urine hath.

And to confirm this Opinion of his, that this Humour contained in the Heart-bag doth proceed from Liquors taken in at the Mouth, he cites an Experiment to be tried on a Pigg, (though I suppose any other Crea∣ture may serve as well) which after it is kept fasting for some time should have given it to drink Water or Milk mingled with Vermillion, and after

it hath drunk it, should immediately be killed, and as soon after as pos∣sible have his Wind-pipe opened, and also all or most of its branches, in which, saith my Authour, you will find along all its inside, the colour of the Liquor which it drank, even to the extremities or ends of the smallest Pipes; out of which Pipes (saith he) part of it is distilled into the Heart-bag. I confess this is no very probable Opinion, but I men∣tion it for the great antiquity and fame of the Authour of it.

But other Authours are of opinions contrary to this, some saying that it proceeds from a moisture, slaver or spittle, which distils out of the Ker∣nels under the Tongue into the Weazand, and from thence into the Ar∣teries and Heart, and so into the Heart-bag. But this is as improbable as the former.

A late Learned Authour thinks that it issues out of certain Glands or Kernels seated at the basis of the Heart. And this is an Opinion that is somewhat likely, though I think the next is to be preferr'd before it.

Lastly, Others (amongst whom is Bartholin) * 13.1 conceive that it pro∣ceeds from moist Vapours and Exhalations forced out of the Humours of the Heart by the motion and heat thereof, which being stopt by the closeness of the Heart-bag, are by its respective coldness congealed into Water.

The use of this Water or Humour is, in the first place, to keep the Heart moist and cool; for the Heart being a very hot Part, requires something of this nature to cool it, especially if that be true which some report of the left Ventricle, that it hath been found in live Dissections so hot, as almost to scald the Dissector's finger which he put into it.

By this Humour the Heart also becometh more easy in its motion, for by it, it is as it were born or buoy'd up, so that it swimmeth in a man∣ner, whereby the sense or feeling of the weight of it is taken away.

Such a Humour as this before-spoken of is also found in the cavity of the Chest, onely something of a more ruddy colour, looking like Water and Bloud mingled together; and this I have never found wanting, but that there hath been some either little or much; with which moisture the Parts of the Chest are moistened and cooled, even as the Heart is by the moisture contained in the Heart-bag.

Table XIV. (Book 14)

Fig. I. Represents the Sternum or Breast-bone cut off, and lifted up or turned back, under which are to be seen the Mediastinum, Heart, Lungs and Midriff.

• AA Shew the inner surface or superficies of the Breast-bone, and the Gristles interwoven therein.
• BB The Lungs in their natural situation.
• CC A portion of the Midriff.
• DD The ends of the Ribs where the Breast-bone was cut off.
• E The glandulous body called the Sweet-bread or Thymus.
• F The sides of the Mediastinum plucked off from the Breast-bone.
• G The Heart in its natural situation.
• H A portion of the Heart-bag.

Fig. II. Represents the Diaphragm and its Processes.

• A The left Nerve.
• B The right Nerve.
• C The upper Coat or Skin of the Diaphragm.
• D The naked substance of the Midriff, or the Diaphragm laid bare.
• E A hole for the Gullet to pass through.
• F A hole for the hollow Vein to pass through.
• G The membranous or nervous part of the Midriff, being its centre.
• HHH The Processes or Appendices of the Midriff, betwixt which the Trunk of the great Artery doth descend.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's lung, heart, and midriff

TAB. XIV. pag. 79

[illustration]

Fig. 1.

[illustration]

Fig. 2^d

CHAP. VII. Of the Heart.

The Heart a principal Part. From whence it derives its name Cor. Its situation. Why the Pulse is felt on the left side and not the right. The motion of the Heart. The reason of the Pulse. The figure of the Heart. Its substance. Its connexion. Its External Parts. Its Coat. Its Fat. The diffe∣rence between the Fat of the Heart and other Fat. The External Vessels of the Heart. One Vein. Two Arte∣ries. Their Valves. Nerves.

THERE is none can be so ignorant of the Parts of the Body, as not to know that the Heart is one of the principal Parts thereof: for as it is the fountain of the Vital faculty and power, it ought to be so styled. It is also the place of natural heat, the root of the Arteries from whence they all spring. It is moreover the Authour of the Pulse, and the first Bowel living (as I shall more at large declare in the following Chapter) and the last dying.

It is called in Latine Cor, à currendo from running, because of its con∣tinual motion.

It is onely one in number, situated in the midst of the cavity of the Chest, as well for its security, as for the equal ballancing of that part of the Body; in which place it is incompassed by the Lobes of the Lungs.

Yet notwithstanding the situation of it in the middle part of the Chest, it is to be understood that not the whole Heart but onely the basis or root of it is directly in the middle; for the point of it leans toward the left side, by reason of the smallness of the compass it hath to perform its mo∣tion in; for it would be apt to strike against the Midriff, should it not be so drawn to one side, which would not onely hinder its own motion, but also indanger the violating of the Midriff and hinder its motion; for it also is known to have a perpetual motion as well as the Heart.

And it is from the point of the Heart's inclining to the left side, that the motion of the Heart or its pulse is so plain to be felt on that side: which not being equally to be felt on the right, many, who have not ta∣ken the pains of looking or inspecting into Bodies to see the contrary, do conclude, that the Heart is situated altogether on the left side, and that it is not the point alone which they feel beat, but the whole Heart.

Another reason there is why it should incline to the left side, namely, because the ascendent Trunk of Vena cava lieth on the right side, so that were the point not drawn something to the other side, it would be apt

to lie upon or strike against that Vessel, and so hinder the ascent of the Bloud which is brought from the Liver by that Vein to the Heart.

The Heart has a double motion, Contraction called its systole, and Relaxation called its diastole. (Though this latter may rather be deemed a ceasing from motion, than a motion.) While it is relaxed or becomes flaggy and loose, it receives the Bloud into its Ventricles out of the hol∣low Vein and Lung-vein; out of the former into its right Ventricle, and out of the latter into its left. And when it contracts it self, it expels or squirts out the Bloud out of its Ventricles into the Lung-artery and great Artery; out of the right Ventricle into the Lung-artery, and out of the left into the great Artery.

As to the pulsation or beating of the Heart, it is very difficult, if not impossible to give any satisfactory reason of it. Some impute it to the flowing in of the Animal Spirits by the Nerves; others to the boiling and rarefaction of the Bloud in its Ventricles. 'Tis most certain that the mus∣cular Fibres of the Heart are the immediate instruments of its motion, and that these receive their power to move, from the Animal Spirits conveyed by the Nerves: but what it is that puts these Fibres upon such a reciprocal motion of contraction and relaxation as the Heart observes, is the greatest difficulty to determine. The greatest Anatomists have con∣fest their ignorance in this point: I shall not therefore pretend to give a reason of it, but admire the wisedom of the great Creator in framing such an Engine, so necessary for the conveying life, heat and nourishment to all the Parts of the Body. Waving this then, I shall proceed to the fur∣ther description of the Heart.

The figure of the Heart is pyramidal or conick, that is, it is broad at the basis or bottom, and narrow at its summity or top. On the fore-side it is bossy or bunching, but on the hinder side more flat. It is sometimes longer and sometimes shorter, as thus: When in its motion it is con∣tracted (at which time it pours out the Bloud) then is it shorter, but broader; and again when it is dilated, at which time it receives in the Bloud, then is it longer and narrower.

Its substance is a solid, thick and compact flesh, that it might the bet∣ter indure the perpetuity of the motion, and with more force drive the Bloud into the extreme or farthest Parts of the Body. It consisteth most∣ly of musculary or fleshy Fibres, a few of which run streight and are out∣most, but the far greatest part run slanting or rather spiral-wise, especi∣ally towards its point, resembling somewhat the winding-rings of a Snail's shell.

It is tied by the mediation of the Heart-bag to the Mediastinum and by its own Vessels to several Parts of the Body.

Its Parts are some External and some Internal. Those which be Ex∣ternal or outward, are the Purse, the Coat, and the Fat; to which may be added some of its Vessels.

As to the Purse or Heart-bag, we have treated of it in the foregoing Chapter. As to the Vessels, some of them encompass the Heart, as the Coronary Vein and Arteries; others reach into its Entrances and into the Ventricles, and those are the Ascendent and Descendent Trunks of the hollow Vein and Great Artery, also the Pulmonary Vessels. Of the Coro∣naries we shall speak by and by in this Chapter; but of the rest, in the next.

It hath a Coat proper to it self, like the Coat of a Muscle, for its grea∣ter firmness, which Coat sticks so close to it, that it is hard to be sepa∣rated or removed from it. It is the same with the outer Coat of the Great Artery, as that Skin which cloaths the inside of its Ventricles is continued unto and constitutes the inmost Membrane of that Artery.

The Heart because of its continual motion and great heat, is plentiful∣ly stored with Fat, to keep it from being over-dried, which Fat is most of it placed at the basis or bottom of it; for its point hanging in the Hu∣mour contained in the Heart-bag is continually moistned with that, so that it stands not in need of being moistned or cooled any other way.

Yet thus much notice is to be taken, as to this Fat which grows to the Heart, that it differs in consistence from all or most of the other Fat of the whole Body, as being much harder: for should the Heart, which is a very hot Part, have any such soft Fat near it, it would certainly melt it. And as the Fat which grows or sticks to the remoter Parts of the Body differs from this in nature, so hath it also a name different from this; for the former is called pimele, which signifies a kind of greasie Fat; but the latter is called Adeps, which is to say Tallow, and is in∣deed as hard as Tallow, differing much from pimele or Grease.

Next come we to the Vessels of the Heart, and of these it is furnished with all sorts; some of which do compass it round about at its basis, like a Garland, which are one Vein and two Arteries.

The Vein, from its encompassing or encircling it round, is called Co∣ronaria, or the Crown-vein, which Vein arises from the Trunk of the hollow Vein a little before its entrance into the right Earlet of the Heart. Small branches do spring from this Coronary Vein, and are dispersed or sprinkled all down the surface or outside of the Heart from the basis to the point.

Its Arteries are in number two, which are also called Coronariae or Crown-arteries, from their encircling the Heart as the Vein does, where like it they disperse small branches about all the external surface of the Heart, furnishing it with arterial Bloud for its life and nourishment.

There is observed at the original of each of these Arteries, as is likewise in the Vein, a certain Valve which is to be seen if you dissect either Ves∣sel, opening it a little before it passeth out of the Heart-bag; which Valve or Floud-gate in the Vein lets the Bloud into the Heart, but suffers none to come out again that way; and in the Artery it permits the Bloud to issue out of the Heart, but will let none return back out of it into the Heart.

The Heart is also furnished with very many but very small Nerves, springing from branches of the eighth pair, which branches are those that are sent to the Heart-bag.

They branch into and enter the Heart in three several places; first, one enters into the Heart it self, another into the Earlets of the Heart, and a third into its Vessels.

Thus much of the Parts of the Heart which in some regard may be called External; in the next Chapter we shall proceed to those that are more Internal.

Table XV. Representeth the Heart and Lungs in their natural posture, but taken out of the Body. (Book 15)

• AA Shew the Heart in its Proper place.
• BB The several Lobes of the Lungs.
• CC The remaining part of the Pericardium or Heart-bag, a portion of it being cut off the better to shew the Heart.
• DD The Coronary Vessels.
• E The Arteria magna or Aorta going out of the Heart.
• F Its descending Trunk.
• G Its ascending Trunks.
• H The Vena cava descendens, or the descending Trunk of the hollow Vein.
• I The ascending Trunks of the same.
• K A portion of the Aspera Arteria or Wind-pipe.
• L Its division or branching into the Lungs.

[illustration] a horse's lungs and heart

TAB. XV. pag. 83.

CHAP. VIII. Of the Ventricles, internal Vessels, Valves and Earlets of the Heart.

The right Ventricle. Its figure. Its substance. Its use. Why Fish have but one Ventricle. The left Ven∣tricle. Its largeness. Its figure. Its sides are thicker, and harder than those of the right. Its use. The insides of the Ventri∣cles. The septum. Its pores. The internal Vessels of the Heart. Vena cava and vena Ar∣teriosa be∣long to the right Ventri∣cle; Arteria ve∣nosa and Aorta to the left. Three Valves to the Vena cava, called tricuspides. Three also to the vena Ar∣teriosa, cal∣led sigmoi∣deae. Two to the Arteria ve∣nosa, called mitrales. Three to the Aorta, called semilunares. The auriculae of the Heart. Their surface. Their sub∣stance. Their motion. Their use.

WE will first speak of the Ventricles or Sinus's of the Heart, be∣ing in number two, on each side one, distinguished or divided by a fleshy partition into a right and a left.

The right (called the right Sinus or Ventricle, and by some the Cave or Chamber) is somewhat bigger than the left, because it receives as well that Bloud which is spent upon the nourishment of the Lungs, through which the Bloud passes from this Ventricle to the left, as that which actually is conveyed into the left, and from thence sent forth by the Arteries into all parts of the Body. But its larger capacity is onely in respect of its width, for the left is rather longer than it, as reaching nearer the tip of the Heart.

It is in figure not exactly round, but rather semicircular, or half-moon fashioned.

The substance of its sides is not so hard and thick as is that of the left,nor is the surface of its inner cavity so uneven; nor has it so many and so strong fleshy Fibres reaching this way and that way, as the left hath. For it was not necessary it should be of so strong a composure as the left, seeing neither is the Bloud rarefied so much in it, nor does it send the Bloud out of it to any greater distance than the Lungs, whereas the left pours it into the remotest Parts of the Body, and therefore requires a stronger constitution to squirt it out.

The use of this Ventricle is first to receive the Bloud out of the hollow Vein returning from the circulation, as also the Chyle and Lympha min∣gled with the Bloud, out of the axillar Vein, and then to attenuate, con∣coct and inspirit them for the nourishment of the Lungs, to which they

are carried under the form of Bloud by the Pulmonary Artery, otherwise called the Arterial vein. But it is but a very small portion of the Bloud that is spent upon the Lungs, the greatest part of it passing by the Pul∣monary Vein to the left Ventricle, there to receive a greater per∣fection.

Now it is worth observation in this place, that such Creatures as live in the Water, as Fish in general, which have no Lungs, have but one Ventricle in their Heart. For the reason why Animals that live upon the Land have two Ventricles, being, that the Bloud as it passes from one to the other, should be conveyed through the Lungs, there to be ventilated and cooled by the Air drawn in in inspiration; and seeing Fish live in a cold Element, viz. the Water, which encompasses their whole Body, that, of it self, is sufficient to attemper the heat of the Bloud; therefore as it is impossible they should make any use of Lungs in the Wa∣ter, so there seems to be no need of them, nor consequently of two Ven∣tricles in the Heart, which are necessary for Land-animals that have Lungs, and breathe in the free Air. How far Water approaches to the nature of Air, or whether there be any truly airy particles contained in the pores of the Water; and if there be, whether there be any way ima∣ginable whereby they can insinuate themselves into the Bloud and Hearts of Fishes, are Points too nice and philosophical for me to intermeddle with. But seeing Fish can live so brisk for very many years without respiration (at least properly so called, or that we can conceive of) one would suspect that some of our late Anatomists attribute too much virtue to the Air that we breathe in, as if it were the All that continues the Vi∣tal flame as they speak, and that the Vital heat and spirit are no otherwise owing to the Heart, than as like an Engine it keeps the Bloud in motion, and distributes it with the Spirits into all Parts of the Body by the Ar∣teries. But this by the bye.

Next come we to the left Ventricle, which in magnitude doth not equal the former, it being much less, by reason it is to contain a less quantity of Bloud than the right Ventricle doth, part of that Bloud that comes out of the right, being spent upon the nourishment of the Lungs, before it reaches the left.

This left Ventricle differs also in figure from the right: for as the right is observed to be semicircular, the left is almost round and longer, reach∣ing almost down to the point of the Heart, which the other doth not.

Likewise the flesh or wall of the left is much thicker than that of the other, and that partly because of the smallness of the cavity, which the narrower it is, must needs leave the sides so much the thicker. Onely the left side of this Ventricle near the lower end or tip of the Heart, is thin∣ner than any part of the sides of the right.

Also it is harder and more compact than the other, that the Vital Spi∣rits might not exhale or evaporate, and that its constriction might be the stronger, so that the Bloud might with more force be thrown or pulst out and vented into the farthest parts of the Body.

Into this Ventricle is the Bloud received out of the Lungs by the Pul∣monary Vein (otherwise called the veinous Artery.) Which Bloud when it is squirted out of this Ventricle into the great Artery, differs very much in colour from that which issues out of the right Ventricle into the Pul∣monary Artery: for this latter is of a dark purple colour, but the former of a florid scarlet. But most think that this alteration of colour is not

so much owing to any supereminent virtue in this Ventricle above the right, as to the particles of Air that insinuate themselves into the Bloud in the Lungs whiles it passes out of the Pulmonary Artery into the Pul∣monary Vein; for Dr. Lower affirmeth, that if in Live-dissections one open the Pulmonary Vein in its passage from the Lungs to the left Ven∣tricle, the Bloud will appear to be of the same scarlet colour as when it comes out of the said Ventricle. Supposing this to be so (which I think we may do upon the testimony of so worthy and creditable an Authour) yet it cannot be denied but that the airy particles must be more intimate∣ly mixed with the Bloud by the great agitation it receives in the left Ven∣tricle, so that we may still consent to the Ancients, that Vital Spirits (in which, Air seems to be a main Ingredient) are perfected and rectified to their height (as it were) in it more than in the right. The use there∣fore of the left Ventricle is to perfect the Vital Spirits, and to transmit them, together with the Bloud, by the Arteries over all the Body, for the preservation of the Vital heat, and for the nourishment of each Part.

The insides of both the Ventricles are unequal or uneven and rugged,being hollowed into many furrows distinguished by fleshy Fibres, that the Bloud which comes into the Heart might be the more agitated in them, and thereby more intimately mixed with the Chyle and Air that come along with it, the first into the right Ventricle, and both into the left. From these fleshy Fibres are nervous ones extended to the Valves, of which we shall discourse by and by. They are more numerous and stronger in the left Ventricle than in the right, because a stronger con∣striction was necessary for the former than for the latter, seeing from the for∣mer Bloud is sent to all Parts of the Body, but from the latter to no greater distance than the Lungs, as was observed before. These Fibres, Furrows and Valves you may see very well exprest in the following Figure.

These Ventricles are divided by a Wall called the septum or partition,which is nothing else but the right wall of the left Ventricle; wherefore its right side is bunched, but the left hollow. On its left side it is furrowed and unequal as the rest of the Ventricle is, but on the right it is well nigh smooth. It is a very ancient opinion, that there are a great many large pores or holes in this septum, whereby the thinnest and most spirituous part of the Bloud passes out of the right Ventricle into the left immedi∣ately, without taking that circuit through the Lungs that the rest doth. They are said to be wider on its right side, and going slanting to grow narrower towards the left. There are many Modern as well as Ancient Vouchers of this opinion: amongst whom is Bartholin, who having enu∣merated several Anatomists that have affirmed to have seen them them∣selves, says that he himself has seen the septum of a Hog's Heart slantingly pervious in several places with great and manifest pores, so large as to ad∣mit a pretty big Pease, and lying open without a Probe, which being put into any one of them on the right side passed to the left Ventricle, where a thin Membrane did hang before the mouth of the Pore like an Anastomosis (as he calls it, I suppose he means a Valve) which hindred the putting in the Probe on that side, and consequently must have hindred the return of the Bloud out of the left Ventricle into the right when the Animal was living. And he thinks that the septum is nourished by the Bloud that passes through these Pores, seeing the Coronary Veins (above∣described) run onely through the surface or outside of the Heart. And

he will have not onely the more spirituous part of the Bloud, but the thinner part of the Chyle also to pass through them. It would be tedi∣ous to recite all those Authours that he quotes to second him, as also his Apology for their often not-appearing in many dead Bodies, seeing there are many passages besides these in Live-creatures, that there are no foot∣steps of after they are dead: for as it seems not likely that the septum should be nourished by bloud that passes so rapidly through these suppo∣sed holes; so by the carefullest examination of other skilfull Anatomists there have been no such holes to be found, unless they were first made by the Probe; though indeed there are several pits that look as if they went through, which I believe to be onely framed for the greater agitation of the bloud in the Ventricle.

In the foregoing Chapter we described those Vessels that may be called external from their running chiefly on the outside of the Heart,(com∣monly named the Coronary) by which it is nourished: but there are another sort that may be termed internal, which are such as open into and out of its Ventricles or inward Sinus's, but yield no nourishment to it. These are four, the Vena cava, and pulmonary Artery; the pulmo∣nary Vein, and great Artery.

Of these, the Vena cava or hollow Vein, and the Vena Arteriosa or pulmonary Artery do belong to the right Ventricle; the hollow Vein fil∣ling it with venal bloud returning from all Parts of the Body, which it receives in when the Heart is relaxed, which state is called its diastole; and the pulmonary Artery carrying forth the said bloud into the Lungs when the Heart is contracted, which state of the Heart is called its sy∣stole.

To the left Ventricle do also belong two Vessels, namely, Arteria ve∣nosa or the pulmonary Vein, and Aorta or the great Artery. The pulmo∣nary Vein within the substance of the Lungs doth receive the bloud from the pulmonary Artery, and pours it into the left Ventricle, there to kin∣dle and ventilate the vital flame, and to perfect the arterial bloud and spi∣rits. The great Artery is the trunk from which all other Arteries do branch, and through which the arterial bloud (after it is in this Ventri∣cle perfected as aforesaid) is dispersed or thrown into all the Parts of the Body, for the life and nourishment thereof.

Now to each of these four Vessels do belong Valves, for the better per∣formance of their offices before spoken of. And first to the hollow Vein do belong three, which are of a triangular figure, and are from that si∣gure called treble-pointed Valves. They are placed at the basis or bot∣tom of the Heart at the entrance of the said Vein into the Heart, and do look from without inward, that so they may admit of the bloud's pas∣sing through them into the Heart, but suffer none to pass out again that way.

To the pulmonary Artery do also belong three Valves, which, con∣trary to the former, look from within outward, and from the resem∣blance they have with the letter C, are called Sigma-fashioned, the old Greek Sigma being of that shape. These Valves as the former are placed at the basis of the Heart, and at the entrance or rather outlet of the Ventricle. And their use is, to let the bloud, brought into this Ven∣tricle by the hollow Vein, pass again out of the said Ventricle into the pulmonary Artery, to be carried by it into the Lungs; but they will not admit of any bloud to return from the Lungs into it.

To the pulmonary Vein do belong two Valves, which look from with∣out inward, as the treble-pointed Valves do, and their use is to admit of the bloud brought out of the Lungs by the pulmonary Vein, into the left Ventricle, but they will suffer none to pass by that Vein back to the Lungs again. These, from the resemblance they are said to have with a Bishop's Mitre, are called Mitre-shaped Valves.

To the Arteria magna or great Artery do also belong three Valves,which go by the name of Semilunary or Half-moon-fashioned Valves. Their use is to hinder any bloud from returning into the left Ventricle out of the great Artery; but they permit the Bloud to pass by them out of the Heart into the said Artery, from whence it is sent by its several bran∣ches into all the Parts of the Body.

Having spoken to the Ventricles, Vessels and Valves of the Heart, we are in the next place come to treat of the two Appendices or Processes which are placed at the bottom or basis of it, and are called the Ears or Earlets of the Heart, from some resemblance in shape which they have to the Ears of the Head. They are in number two, to each side of the Heart one, answerable to the number of the Ventricles. Of these, the right is larger, but softer; the left lesser, but harder. The right is larger, because the orifice of the hollow Vein belonging to the right Ventricle, is much bigger and larger than the orifice of the pulmonary Vein belonging to the left Ventricle. For it was not needfull that the Lung-vein should be so large as the hollow Vein, seeing the bloud that it conducts to the left Ventricle is neither so much as that which is brought by the cava to the right, and besides is thinner and more spirituous being impregnated with Air in the Lungs, and therefore passing more quickly needs the narrower channel.

The external part or surface of them, when full or extended, is smooth and bunching; but when empty, wrinkled.

Their substance is peculiar, such as is to be found in no other part,thin and soft that they might be the easilier contracted, and yet nervous and strong, that they might endure that continual motion to which they are destin'd. Of the two, the left is the more compact, thick and fleshy. On their inside they have Fibres running from their basis where they are joined to the Heart, towards their top where the Veins enter them, (such as the Ventricles of the Heart themselves have) by help whereof they contract themselves in their systole, and squeeze the bloud contained in them, into the Ventricles.

These Ears or Earlets have (as the Heart it self hath) two motions,first the systole or contractive, next the diastole or dilative motion. There is also betwixt these two motions (both in the Ears and Heart) a rest or pause, easy to be discerned in sick Horses, or Horses ready to die, but not so easy to be either discerned or felt in a sound or healthfull Horse; for in such, the motions are performed so swiftly, that there seems to be an immediate passage from one to the other, without any intermission or resting between. This pause or rest between the two motions, is called perisystole.

The systole and diastole of both Earlets do happen at one and the same time; for when the right undergoes its diastole, then and at the very same instant the left undergoes the same. And they do the like in the systole. But though the Heart hath the same motions as these Earlets have, yet it doth not perform them when these do; for the systole of the Earlets happens at the same time with the diastole of the Ventricles; and on

the contrary, the systole of the Ventricles, with the diastole of the Earlets.

Now the use of these Ears or Earlets is, to prevent the too violent rush∣ing in of the bloud out of the Cava and Lung-vein into the Ventricles of the Heart, whereby both the Valves might have been violated, and the Vital faculty suffocated. For these receiving the bloud out of the said Veins, do measure it as it were into the Heart, so much bloud distilling out of those Veins into these Earlets in each of their diastole's, as can be conve∣niently rarefied and elaborated at one time in the Ventricles.

Table XVI. Representeth the Earlets, Ventricles and Valves of the Heart. (Book 16)

Figure I.

Shews the Vena cava with the right Ventricle dissected, so as to shew the treble-pointed Valves.

• A Shews the orifice of the coronary Vein.
• B The treble-pointed Valves, which admit of the bloud into the right Ven∣tricle, but hinder its return back that way.
• CCC The little Fibres which fasten the ends of the Valves to the sub∣stance of the Heart.
• D The Ventricle cut long-ways, the better to shew the before-named Parts.

Figure II.

Shews the right Ventricle of the Heart laid farther open, to shew the Valves of the pulmonary Artery.

• A Shews the Ventricle opened.
• BBB The Sigma-fashioned Valves of the pulmonary Artery, that let the bloud out of this Ventricle into the Lungs.
• CC A Probe thrust through the pulmonary Artery cross the right Ventri∣cle of the Heart.

Figure III.

Shews the left Ventricle opened also long-ways to shew its Valves.

• AA The pulmonary Vein coming from the Lungs and bringing the bloud from thence, which it pours into the left Ventricle.
• BBB The three Mitre-shaped Valves of the said pulmonary Vein.

Figure IV.

Shews the great Artery cut asunder near the Heart to shew its Valves.

• AAA The said Valves of the Aorta or great Artery.
• BB A Probe thrust through the pulmonary Vein into the left Ventricle of the Heart.

[illustration] anatomical view of the earlets, ventricles, and valves of a horse's heart

TAB. XVI p. 88.

[illustration]

Fig. I.

[illustration]

Fig. II.

[illustration]

Fig. III.

[illustration]

Fig. IIII.

CHAP. IX. Of the Organs of Breathing, and their Ʋse; viz. of the Lungs, and Wind-pipe.

The names of the Lungs. Their situa∣tion and Lobes. Their sub∣stance. The Wind-pipe. The Parts of the Wind-pipe. Whether any part of the drink pass by the Wind-pipe into the Lungs. The coats of the Wind-pipe. The Gristles which make the Wind-pipe. Its Vessels. Its division. Its uses. The Bloud-vessels of the Lungs. Their Lym∣pheducts. Their Nerves. Their inve∣sting Mem∣brane. Their action and use.

THE Lungs, which are the chief Instruments of breathing or respi∣ration,are called in Latin Pulmones, in Greek Pneumones, from their office of drawing in and blowing out the Breath or Air.

Their situation is in the cavity or hollowness of the Chest, which cavity they almost fill up; especially when they are distended or filled with wind. They are divided into two equal parts called Lobes, one of which lies on the right side of the Mediastinum, or Partition-membrane of the Chest, and the other on the left.

Their substance hath hitherto been taken to be a parenchyma or fleshy substance; but by the diligent searching into Nature of some of our Mo∣dern Authors, especially of an Italian named Malpighius, they have been found of a contrary substance; for he affirms them to be excarnous or without flesh, and merely membranous, made up of the branches of the Wind-pipe and little bladders at the ends of them, likewise of the pul∣monary Vessels, and the Skin that cloaths them. But the greatest part of their substance consists of the little bladders.

This that worthy Man experienced by casting Water into the Lungs of some Creatures he dissected, while they were yet warm, so often till the whole frame of the Lungs appeared white; then squeezing the water clean out, he with a pair of Bellows or Pipe filled them by the Wind-pipe full of Air, and pent it in by tying the Windpipe; which done, he hung them up to dry; and when they were dried, he could discover (by hold∣ing them up to the light) the little bladders at the ends of each little branch of the Wind-pipe, as they are lively represented in Figures by that great Inquirer into Nature, the never to be forgotten Doctor Willis, * 16.1 just∣ly styled the honour of his University and Country, in the second Part of his Book called Pharmaceutice rationalis.

Again, saith the forementioned Malpighius, If you cut any part of the Lungs thus dried, you may very plainly see a great number of these bladders looking white. Moreover he affirms that by the help of a Microscope he could discern a certain wonderfull Net as it were, tying all these bladders to one another, which he conceived to be made up of the small branchings of the pulmonary Artery and Vein, which Vessels convey the bloud through

the slender and winding ducts, and through the manifold bendings of the Pipes. And besides these Vessels which make this Net, Doctor Willis saith that there are another sort to be perceived in living Dissections, which are called Lympheducts, and are dispersed all over the Lungs. Of what nature and use these Vessels are, we have shewn above in the First Book, chap. 12. and shall do further by and by. And lastly, he says there are abundance of twigs of Nerves distributed every-where through them. Onely one thing further is to be noted concerning the Vessels of the Lungs from the said Doctor's observation, that the Bloud-vessels there∣of are not onely branches of the pulmonary Artery and Vein, but also some proceed from the Aorta it self; which should seem to intimate that the Lungs are truly nourished by these last, as are all other Parts of the Body, and that the bloud that comes to the Lungs from the right Ventri∣cle of the Heart by the pulmonary Artery, and returns to the left by the pulmonary Vein, passes not this way for the nourishment of the Lungs, but onely that it may be impregnated with Air, without which as it wants of its perfection, so is it unfit and unable to preserve the vital heat of any Part, or to contribute any nourishment to it. But this onely by the bye.

Table XVII. (Book 17)

Representeth the Wind-pipe descending into the Lungs, as also the whole structure of the Lungs placed as they lie in the Body, to shew their several Lobes, as also the Lympheducts, after Doctor Willis.

Figure I.

• AA Shew the substance of the Lungs.
• BB The several Lobes.
• CC The Lympheducts.
• DD A portion of the Aspera Arteria or Wind-pipe.

Figure II.

• AA Shew the upper part of the Wind-pipe cut off.
• B The Cartilago scutiformis.
• C The Glottis.
• DDD The several Gristles that make the Wind-pipe.
• EEE The Membranes betwixt each Cartilage or Gristle, which make the other part of the Wind-pipe.

[illustration] a horse's windpipe and lungs

TAB. XVII. pag. 90.

[illustration]

Fig. 1.

[illustration]

Fig 2.

Now the several things here named, of which the Lungs are compo∣sed or framed, do plainly shew their substance is not carnous or fleshy, but merely fistulous, being compacted of Pipes of several kinds and mag∣nitude, and variously and intricately disposed; which Pipes we will par∣ticularly speak to in order, and first of the chief of them, which is the Wind-pipe, called Aspera Arteria the rough Artery.

The Aspera Arteria is a Pipe or Chanel which descends down the Neck beginning in the Throat at the root of the Tongue, and reaches as far as the Lungs, in which it disperses it self into innumerable branches great and small, which branches reach to all the extreme parts of their

substance, and at last end in little bladders, each of them in resemblance like a Grape, into which they conveigh the Air in inspiration. These Grape-like Bladders are lively represented by Doctor Willis * 17.1 in a Lobe of the Lungs of an Ox, as you may see in the first Figure of the third Table in his second Part of the operation of Medicines; of which bladders you may there reade more at large.

The fore-mentioned Wind-pipe is by Anatomists divided into three principal parts, viz. the Larynx or Throttle, which is the upper end of it (of which more afterwards.) The second part between the Larynx and the Lungs, being a long Pipe, is called particularly Trachea or aspe∣ra Arteria, the rough Artery; rough, to distinguish it from the smooth Arteries which contain the bloud and vital spirits; and an Artery, be∣cause it keeps or contains the Air in respiration. The last part of the Wind-pipe is distinguish'd by the name of bronchus or bronchia, which in∣cludes the ramifications or branchings of it in the Lungs; though the name bronchus is sometimes used to signify all of it.

Now before we pass on further to the description of this Wind-pipe, it will not be amiss to examine whether any part of the Liquors that an Horse drinks pass along it, or whether all go down the Gullet. That part of the drink glides down the Weazand was the opinion of the Ancient Physician Hippocrates, who experienced the same in an Hog newly kil∣led, in whose Lungs was found a quantity of Liquor of the same colour with that which the Hog had drunk a little before. And Bartholin thinks that the same thing may be proved from an observation of Julius Jasolin an Anatomist of the City of Naples, who seeking in the Body of a Noble Per∣son the cause of his death, found his Heart-bag so filled with humour, that it being squeezed, some of the said humour came out of his Mouth. But me∣thinks it is an odd inference to conclude from hence, that therefore some part of the drink usually passes down the Wind-pipe. For if one should suppose that it did so pass, it cannot easily be imagined by what ways it could pass from thence to the Heart-bag; seeing all the branches of the Wind-pipe end in the Lungs, which are covered with a Membrane that never adheres to the Heart-bag, and very rarely if ever to the Mediasti∣num that comes between the Heart-bag and the Lungs. 'Tis true it seems somewhat strange, that upon pressing the Heart-bag, the liquor contain∣ed in it should come up at the Mouth; but if the matter of fact be true, it must do so by some preternatural passage, seeing every one that is skil∣led in Anatomy knows, that there is no communication between the Pe∣ricardium and aspera Arteria. Indeed as to the great quantity of hu∣mour in the Heart-bag, I have observed the same in Horses, in which I have seen both it and the Chest extremely filled with liquor, but I dare not conclude from thence, that it came thither down the Wind-pipe; for seeing it has been onely in diseased Horses, that have been broken-winded and troubled with coughs, I am much rather inclined to think, that so great quantity of water proceeded from a Dropsie of the Chest, which is a disease not unfrequent in Mankind, in whom yet the best Anatomists deny that the least drop of drink does naturally pass down their Wind-pipe: of which any one may be pretty well satisfied, that has observed in him∣self or others, how when upon occasion of laughing or the like in drink∣ing, any of the drink passes down the wrong Throat as we say (which is down the Wind-pipe) the party falls presently into a most violent cough. And as to Hippocrates's observation, 'tis more likely the Hog's Lungs should

be tinctured by some preternatural and diseased humour lodged in them, of a like colour to which his drink happened to be, than that they were tinctured by the drink it self.

The Wind-pipe is covered with two coats or skins, one outward and the other inward.

The outwardmost is but of a reasonable thickness, neither so thick nor so strong as the other. It springs from the pleura or skin which invests the Ribs, and sticks close to the Ligaments of the Gristles, yea does it self serve to knit them more firmly one to another, and is a mean of con∣necting the whole Pipe more strongly to its neighbouring Parts. It also ushers along the Nerves of the Wind-pipe and Lungs.

The innermost is thicker and more solid than the former, in the Throttle especially, whose inside it covers, as also all the inside of the Wind-pipe and its branches from thence to the bottom of the Lungs. It has two rows of Muscular Fibres, the outer streight, the inner slanting; the first serving to shorten the Wind-pipe, the latter to straiten it. And one reason of the great strength of this Membrane seems to be, that it might the better endure the violent motion of coughing without being injured. It is very sensible, and has its inside besmear'd usually with a fattish or slimy humour, which likely is separated in the Kernels of the Throat, and this serves to keep it moist and glib, that respiration may be performed with the greater easiness and freedom.

Between these two coats or skins is the body or substance of the Wind-pipe,being partly of the nature of a Gristle and partly of a Ligament; for it is made up of many round Gristles like Rings, being pretty round on its fore-part, but on the back-part which is next to the Gullet a fourth part of the circle is wanting, in the room of which there is a thick, strong and membranous substance, more soft than the Gristles, that the Gullet which lies upon it on that side, might not be hurt by them.

These Ring-fashioned Gristles are joined together by strong Ligaments, which Ligaments do every-where keep the Gristles at an equal distance one from the other.

Table XVIII. (Book 18)

Fig. I. Shews the lower part of the Wind-pipe with all its branches as they were spread through the Lungs, clearly separated from all other Parts of the Lungs; to which branches are annexed all the bladders of Air, found out by Malpighius and here lively represented.

• AA Shew a portion of the aspera Arteria or Wind-pipe.
• BBBB Its division into branches which run into the several Lobes of the Lungs.
• CCCC The several extremities or ends of the said branches.
• DDDDDD The innumerable little bladders at the ends of those branches.
• E Shews where the Wind-pipe is cut off from the upper part of it.
• FFF The several circular Gristles which help to compose the Wind-pipe.
• GGG The membranes or skins betwixt each Gristle which are another part of the substance of the Wind-pipe.

Fig. II. Shews the upper part of the Wind-pipe cut off.

• A Shews the cartilago scutiformis, or Shield-fashioned Gristle.
• B The several Gristles and Membranes that make up the body of the Wind-pipe.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's wind-pipe and its branches

TAB XVIII page. 92

[illustration]

Fig. 1.

[illustration]

Fig. 2

The Wind-pipe like other Parts hath Vessels of all sorts; first it hath Veins from the external Jugulars; Arteries from the Carotides; and Nerves from the recurrent Nerves of the wandring or eighth pair, (com∣monly reckoned for the sixth.)

When it is descended about two hands-breadth into the Chest, it is di∣vided into two trunks, one whereof goes into the right Lobe of the Lungs, and the other into the left. Into which as soon as they are en∣tred, each is again subdivided, and those subdivisions still branch out into more, till they become very numerous and slender, and are dispersed among the pulmonary Bloud-vessels, but end into the little bladders above-described.

The use of the Wind-pipe is, first, to serve as a nozle to a pair of Bel∣lows,to wit, that the Lungs by the Air entring in by it may be heaved up. Whence when the inside of it is slabby with too much flegmatick humour, or there happens to be any obstruction in it, or any of its branches in the Lungs, there follows a wheazing and shortness of breath, because the Air has not a free ingress into the Lungs.

The next use of it is to let the Air out from the Lungs, and together with it smoaky vapours steaming through the pores of the Lungs out of the bloud. By help of it also, but especially of the Throttle or upper part, does the Horse neigh, or whinney as they call it in some Countrys, while the Air is driven forcibly out of it in expiration. And thus much as to the Wind-pipe.

A second sort of Vessel or Pipe dispersed through the Lungs, and com∣posing a considerable part of their bulk, are the Bloud-vessels, which are partly a branch from the great Artery, but principally the pulmona∣ry Artery and Vein, whose branches are spread to and fro in a great number through its whole substance, and there complicated and twisted with the branches of the Wind-pipe, the Artery running along the un∣der side and the Vein the upper side of it, both cleaving so close to it that they are not easily to be separated. These Arteries and Veins have com∣munication one with another in several places by anastomoses, the little twigs of the Arteries opening into those of the Veins, for the readier cir∣culation of the bloud through the Lungs. Most admirable is the con∣texture of these Vessels about the Air-bladders; for their small thred-like twigs are interwoven one with another with the most curious artifice (somewhat resembling a Net) round about all of them; which most probably is so done, to the end that all the particles of the bloud may be impregnated with Air, while it passes through these fine Vessels that twine about the Air-bladders on all hands.

Table XIX. (Book 19)

Representeth the pneumonick or pulmonary Artery and Vein cut off from the right and left Ventricles of the Heart, and also freed or separated from the branches of the bronchia or Wind-pipe.

• AA Shew the pneumonick Artery cut off close by the right Ventricle of the Heart.
• BB The pneumonick Vein cut off from the left Ventricle of the Heart.
• CCCC Their several branches accompanying the branches of the Wind-pipe from which they were pulled or torn, which are dispersed through the whole substance of the Lungs.
• DDDD The ends or extremities of all the said branches which do end in the extreme parts of the Lungs, and which for their smallness are called capillary or hairy.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's pulmonary artery and vein

TAB XIX pag. 94.

A third sort of Vessel branching in the Lungs are the Lympheducts, so called from their office, which is to hold and convey a certain kind of water or humour called Lympha. These Vessels we described more fully in Book I. chap. 12. Here they wait on the Veins and Arteries through the whole surface of the Lungs, and receive the humour or water that they contain from them, being first separated by the Glands; which hu∣mour seems to be a superfluity of the bloud and it may be the nervous juice, which after they have received, they discharge into the thoracick duct, into which the greater branches of them are inserted. Though these Vessels be but slender, yet they are of great use and necessity; for as Doctor Willis affirms, if at any time any of the branches of them hap∣pen to be obstructed or broken, there follows thereupon in Man a Dropsie of the Lungs and Breast, oft-times accompanied with Coughs or Phthi∣sicks: and this happens, because by their being obstructed or broken, the superfluous humour which they like so many chanels use to contain or let pass through them and carry off, is left behind, or distils into the Chest, which there breeds the sore-mentioned Distempers. Which opi∣nion of his confirms me in my belief of the original of that watery hu∣mour in a Horse, which I have very often in a plentifull manner found in his Thorax in dissection, as I have above in this Chapter already said.

To these three sorts of Vessels a fourth is also added, which are the Nerves, with which they are well stored, having innumerable branches of them dispersed through all their substance, accompanying the Bloud∣vessels and Pipes of the Wind-pipe; which Nerves do branch to them from the recurrent Nerves of the wandring pair.

Now the Lungs being thus interwoven with these four sorts of Vessels, are covered with a strong skin, or indeed two skins, for it is no hard matter to separate it into two.

These skins are furnished with very many pores or holes of an indiffe∣rent largeness, plain to be seen (saith Bartholin) if you blow up the Lungs with a pair of Bellows or Pipe. Which he doth not onely affirm that himself hath seen, but also quotes Johannes Waloeus, who (saith he) hath observed them to be in Live-anatomies as large as to contain a pret∣ty big Pease. Such pores, perhaps, there may be discernible in Live-anatomies, though whether so large as to receive a Pease I somewhat

question. Indeed I had never my self the opportunity of observing the Lungs in Creatures yet alive, but as soon as they have been dead, though I have made never so great haste to take the Lungs out before they should be any thing cold, yet I could never see any of them, although I have blown the wind through the Wind-pipe with such violence, that I have broke some of the small branches of it, and with the said wind have raised little bladders in the outer skin of the Lungs; I say notwithstanding, I could never see or discern any of these little pores, that did let any of the said wind out, but the wind hath continued in those little bladders seve∣ral days. Which experiment I alledge not with a design to disprove those worthy and learned Anatomists, that affirm to have seen them; but one∣ly to shew that if any such there be, nothing passes through them out of the Lungs into the Chest. But now on the other hand, that something may be received by them out of the cavity of the Chest into the Lungs, is not improbable; seeing one cannot imagine how corrupt purulent mat∣ter collected in the Chest from an Imposthume breaking in it, or the like, should by any other way get into the Wind-pipe, so as to be cough'd up, which it often is as well in Horses as in Men. If the investing skins be removed in any part of the Lungs, and afterwards one blow into them through the Wind-pipe, then will the Air issue pretty strongly out at the Breach. The outer of the skins is smooth and thin, but the inner is pretty thick, and on its inside rough, appearing like an Honey-comb, by reason of the extremities of the Vessels, and of the bladders ending at it. Both growing close together as they do, make a very strong Mem∣brane, which is very necessary; for otherwise in anhelation, or deep and violent inspiration, it would have been in danger of breaking when the Lungs are so much distended, to the great inconvenience if not certain death of the Creature to which it should so have happened.

Having finished the description of the several things of which the Lungs are compounded or framed, in the next place we proceed to speak of their action and use.

Their first use then is, (according to Galen) to serve as a soft Pillow or Bolster for the Heart to rest upon, that the hardness of the Parts be∣hind them should not offend it in its pulsation.

Secondly, They are the instruments of respiration or breathing, which is their proper action. Now respiration is performed by two motions of the Lungs, viz. dilatation and contraction. When they are dilated, they receive in Air, and this is termed inspiration; but when they are con∣tracted, they expel or drive forth the Air, which is called expiration.

While the Air is drawn in in inspiration, a double benefit accrews to the Beast: First his Heart and Bloud are thereby cooled; whence we see that the hotter he is, the more frequently he draws his breath, that the bloud may be the more fanned by the cool Air. Secondly, hereby the vital flame is continued; for as an ordinary Fire is extinguished by with∣drawing the Air from it, so does the Animal die when it is denied Air to breathe in. To these benefits of inspiration may be added, that when the Lungs are heaved up by the Air drawn in, their substance is rarefied, so that there is granted a freer circulation of the bloud through them.

The Air having performed these offices, by its stay in the Lungs it be∣comes hot, and so can be of no further use for cooling the Heart and Bloud; and its nitrous particles are consumed by the vital flame that feeds upon them, and therefore it becomes necessary to expel it, that there may

be room for new and fresh Air to be drawn in for the uses aforesaid. So that this drawing in and expelling the Air succeed one another by turns, and answer to the systole and diastole of the Heart; onely this motion of the Lungs is partly voluntary and partly natural, but that of the Heart wholly natural.

But neither is expiration or breathing forth without its particular uses; for by it are vented or voided the smoaky or sooty steams or excrements of the Heart and arterial Bloud, (which excrements are brought from the Heart through the pneumonick Artery with the bloud:) also the thin and thick excrements of the Lungs gathered in the branches of the Wind-pipe are by this motion of expiration, (heighten'd into a cough) brought into the one great trunk thereof, through which as through a Reed it is driven by the force of the Air up to the Mouth and Nose, to be by them voided.

Of what nature the motion of the Lungs is, and by what Muscles of the Breast it is assisted, the Reader may inform himself in the fourth Chapter of this Book that treats of the Midriff, whose motion corre∣sponds to this of the Lungs.

CHAP. X. Of the Neck.

The contained Parts of the Neck. Of the La∣rynx. Its figure. Its substance. Five Carti∣lages. Its Vessels. Its Kernels. The Pharynx.

HAVING now finished my Discourse of the two Lower Venters, or∣der of Dissection requires that I should ascend to the third and up∣permost Venter, and treat of the Head and Animal Faculty; but I will first speak to those Parts which lead me thither, and those are the Parts of the Neck.

The Neck is called in Latin Collum, à colle, from an hillock; for it ari∣seth out of the Body as an hill doth out of the rest of the Earth.

It comprehends the distance between the Head and Breast, and its Parts are containing, or contained: as for the former, they are such as are found in the other Parts of the Body; but

The Parts contained are peculiar to it self, and are these: the Gullet, the Wind-pipe, the Vertebrae, or Joints of the Neck, and its Muscles. Of these two latter we shall discourse in the Fourth and Fifth Books; and of the two former, we treated of one in the First Book, as belonging to the Stomach, and of the other in this as pertaining to the Lungs. But because the uppermost parts of both these next to the Throat are distin∣guish'd from the rest by peculiar names and have particular uses, we shall treat of them in this Chapter. Now the top of the Wind-pipe is called Larynx, and of the Gullet, Pharynx.

The Larynx or Throttle is situated, as hath been said, at the upper part of the Neck, adjoining to the root of the Tongue. It is in Humane Bodies the instrument of the Voice, and in whatsoever other Creatures, of that noise which they make, by what name soever it be distinguished, as particularly of the neighing of an Horse.

Its figure is round and almost circular, onely bunching a little out on the foreside, and depressed as much on the back-part next to the Gullet, for the Gullets better and more secure passage, and that the meat in swal∣lowing might not be hindred from descending by it.

It is framed of five Cartilages or Gristles, the first of which is called Scutiformis or Buckler-like, because it resembles a Shield or Buckler, be∣ing hollow within and bunching without. In Humane Bodies (in Men more especially, for Women have it not so far sticking out as Men) this bunching out is by some Anatomists termed Adam's Apple, from an old Tradition that a part of the fatal Apple abode sticking in Adam's Throat in that place.

The next or second Gristle of the Larynx is called Annularis from the resemblance it hath to a Turkish Ring, wherewith they arm their Thumb when they shoot. This Gristle is round, and incompasseth the whole Larynx.

The third and fourth, because as they are joined together they resem∣ble the neck of an Ewer, are called Guttales. These two Gristles many times pass for one, because they have but one skin proper to them both, and untill that skin be removed they are not to be parted. These two form the glottis or little tongue, being a chink of that shape.

The fifth is termed Epiglottis because it is placed above the glottis or chink. The substance of this is soft, and its shape like an Ivy-leaf. Its use is to hinder the falling down of any thing that may be offensive to the Wind-pipe, when the Creature doth swallow either his meat or drink.

These Cartilages are moved by several pairs of Muscles, which shall be described in the Fourth Book.

Table XX. (Book 20)

Representeth the upper part of the Wind-pipe fastned to the os Hyoides, as also to the root of the Tongue; likewise the os Hyoides it self se∣parated from all other parts; it containeth also two other figures of the upper part of the Wind-pipe, to shew its several Parts.

Figure I.

Shews the upper part of the Wind-pipe, and the Parts to which it is fasten'd.

• AAAA Shew the Cartilages or Gristles of the upper part of the Wind-pipe.
• BB The head of the said Wind-pipe fastned to the os Hyoides.
• C The Ligament that fastneth the head to the said bone.
• DDDD The os Hyoides.
• EE The bones that join with the os Hyoides at the bottom of the Head.
• FF The Tongue.

Figure II.

Shews the os Hyoides separated from the Wind-pipe and from the Tongue.

• AA Shew the two long bones joined to the os Hyoides, whose other ends are fastned (when in their places) to the bottom of the Head.
• BBB The several cartilaginous bones that make up the os Hyoides.

Figure III.

• A Shews the Epiglottis or Throat-flap turned more upon the upper side, the plainer to shew the back parts of it.
• B The backside of the Scutiformis.
• CCC The Cartilages or Gristles of the Wind-pipe.

Figure IV.

Shews the upper part of the Wind-pipe with the Shield-fashioned Gristle and Throat-flap turned on one side to shew the sides of those Parts.

• A The Epiglottis or Throat-flap.
• B The Shield-fashioned Gristle.
• C A portion of the Wind-pipe.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's tongue, wind-pipe, and hyoides bones

Table XX pag.97.

[illustration]

Fig. 1.

[illustration]

Fig. 2.

[illustration]

Fig. 3.

[illustration]

Fig. 4.

The Vessels of the Larynx are of all sorts. Veins are derived to it from the external Jugulars; Arteries from the large branch of the Ca∣rotides; Its Nerves it hath from the recurrent Nerves of the (eighth, commonly reckoned for the) sixth pair, which are called in those Crea∣tures which have voices, vocales.

There are also two sorts of Kernels belonging to it. One pair is called Tonsillae, which are placed at the sides of the Ʋvula, and at the upper part of the Larynx. These are those which in Humane Bodies are called the Almonds of the Ears, and are of this use, viz. to separate that fleg∣matick humour from the bloud that makes the slaver; which humour serves to moisten it, and also the Gullet, that by their glibness or slippe∣riness they may the better serve for their respective uses.

The other pair of Kernels are placed contrary to the former, namely at the lower end of the Larynx, in number two, one on each side of the Buckler-like Gristle. In Horses they are much larger than the former, and by them large branches of the external jugular Veins and Arte∣ries do run. These are those Kernels under the Throat or between the Jaws of an Horse that one may plainly feel at any time, but more espe∣cially when an Horse has the Glanders, for in such they are much swelled.

The Pharynx (or top of the Gullet) is so called from a Greek word that signifies to carry, because it conveys the meat and drink from the Mouth toward the Stomach. It is somewhat more fleshy than the rest of the Gullet, and reaches up, behind, to the Ʋvula, on the sides to the Tonsils, and on the fore-part to the Epiglottis. It has several Muscles by the help of which it performs its motion, of which we shall treat in the Fourth Book. Its use is to receive the meat when it is chewed, and gras∣ping it on every side by contracting it self, to squeeze it down the Gullet, by which it descends to the Stomach.

Thus much of the Parts of the Neck, which brings me to

The End of the Second Book.

THE ANATOMY OF AN HORSE. BOOK III. Of the Head.

CHAP. I. Of the Head and Animal Parts contained therein.

The common containing Parts of the Head. The proper containing Parts. The Muscles. The Pericra∣nium. The Perioste∣um. Dura me∣ninx. Its connexion The falx. Its Sinus's. Tenuis me∣ninx. Its Vessels. The use of the Meninges.

HAVING finished the description of the two Lower Venters, which are two of the principal Parts of the Body; I come now in the next place to betake my self to the last principal Part which is the Head, being the seat of the Animal Fa∣culty, as the two lower are of the Vital and Natural.

In dissecting of this Part I shall follow the same method as in the two former, examining its Parts in order, as they offer themselves to our sight in dissection, first dividing it into parts to that intent.

But before we begin to divide it, I think it will not be amiss to speak something of its supereminency over all the other Parts; for in respect that it is the seat of the Senses, it is lookt upon by Anatomists to be the chief Mansion-house of the Animal Soul; and Sense is so necessary to eve∣ry living Creature, that without it, it is not far from being without life. And as the Head in this regard is the most principal Part, so is it accor∣dingly situated in the uppermost place, above all the other Parts of the

Body, for this reason, viz. that the Animal spirits as from a fountain might spring from thence, and communicate sense and motion down to all Parts of the Body: but for the Eyes sake more especially has it this high situation, for thereby two conveniencies accrue to the sense of see∣ing; first, the Eyes being placed as in a Watch-tower, can discover things at the greater distance, and thereby prevent many dangers which might otherwise come unawares: and in the next place by being placed so near the fountain of Animal spirits, the optick Nerves, which are of a soft sub∣stance, and could not therefore endure a long passage, are secured from breaking.

As to the figure or shape of the Head, I will omit speaking of that, since it is so visible and so common to be seen. And though something might be spoken as to the true and most natural shape of an Horse's Head, yet that being already described by other Authours, and may by me (if God shall so long spare my life) be treated of more at large in another Book which I design to set forth of the several Cures performed by me, by such means and methods as I have experimented since I came to un∣derstand Anatomy; I shall wave it at this time, and speak no more of the Head in general, but proceed to treat of its Parts.

The Parts of the Head, (as of the other two Venters before discoursed of) may be distinguished into Parts containing and contained. The contain∣ing are either common or proper; of which in order.

First then of its common containing Parts; the first of which is the Cu∣ticle with its hairs, of which we have sufficiently treated in the first Chapter of the First Book; the next is the cutis or True skin, also the Fat and fleshy Pannicle, of all which we have treated at large in the five first Chapters of the First Book, whither the Reader may please to turn back for his better information.

The proper containing Parts of the Head are five, namely the Muscles, the Pericranium, the Periosteum, the Skull, and the Membranes or Me∣ninges contained within it.

To the Muscles we will speak in the next Book which is of the Muscles,as being the most proper place.

The fleshy Pannicle or membrana carnosa together with the other com∣mon investing Parts above it being removed, the Pericranium next appears, which is a thin, white and very sensible Membrane spread over the whole Skull, adhering immediately to the Periosteum every-where, saving where the temporal Muscles on each side come between them. There are ma∣ny slender Fibres that pass from this Membrane through the sutures or seams of the Skull, which are knit to the crassa meninx or outer skin, which cloaths the Brain on the inside of the Scull; whence some are of opinion that the Pericranium has its rise from it. Whether that be so or no, these Fibres however serve to stay the dura mater in its place, where∣by it hinders the Brain which it invests from being clash'd against the ruggid Skull in violent concussions of the Head.

The next investing Part is the Periosteum, which is a Skin of much alike substance with the Pericranium, onely thinner. It is of the same na∣ture with that Membrane that invests all the Bones in the whole Body, excepting the Teeth which are bare. From this Membrane it is that the Skull as well as all other bones are sensible, for of themselves they are sensless Parts. It sticks very close to the Skull, and it, as well as the Pe∣ricranium, has Arteries from the external Carotides, and Veins from the external Jugulars.

We should in the next place speak to the Bones of the Head, or the se∣veral Bones of the Skull distinguished by several sutures; but I omit them also here, and shall speak to them in their proper place, (viz. in the Fifth Book) and proceed to the Parts within the Skull, the first of which is the dura meninx, that is, the hard Skin or Membrane, called likewise crassa meninx, to distinguish it from the thinner that lies next under it, and immediately cloaths the Brain.

This hard or thick Membrane is called by many Authours dura mater or the hard mother, because they conceive that most of the Skins of the whole Body do spring from it, and therefore it is esteemed as their mother.

Its figure and amplitude answer to the Bones of the Skull, by reason it investeth all its cavities. It is knit, and that very strongly, to the bot∣tom of the Skull, to its processes, and to the circles of its holes, from whence it cannot easily be removed. It is suspended also by the Fibres above-spoken of that come through the sutures of the Skull from the Pe∣ricranium, as likewise by the Bloud-vessels that penetrate the Skull and are inserted into this Membrane. By which Vessels it is in like manner fastened to the Skin under it called the pia mater, and in several places to the Brain it self. It consists of two Skins, as the Peritonaeum of the Lowest Venter, and the Pleura of the middle do. In its upper part it is doubled, and its duplicature divides the Brain into two parts, the right and left. This duplicature being in the hinder part broad, and growing nar∣rower still as it inclines to the fore-part, I mean towards the Nose, is by Physicians called falx or the sickle, because in a Man's Head which is pretty round, it makes almost an half circle, as a sickle does. We may retain the same name for it in an Horse, though less properly, as differing somewhat in shape.

In this reduplication there are several cavities or hollownesses, com∣monly called by the Latin name sinus, which are accounted receptacles of abounding bloud and spirits; by Galen they are called the Ventricles of the dura mater, by others cisterns of bloud. The highest of these, and also the longest, doth run all along the top or upper part of the falx from the Nose length-ways of the Head towards the Noll, where it is divided into several branches, two of which descend downwards to the bottom of the occiput, and a third runs to the glandula pinealis.

Into these hollownesses or sinus's the mouths of the Veins and Arteries are said to open, the Arteries pouring bloud into them, and the Veins receiving it from them again, as hath been observed in the dissecting the Heads of living Creatures, for in the long or uppermost sinus hath been seen a strong beating or pulse occasioned by the bloud that is discharged into it by the Arteries.

The other Membrane or Skin which invests the Brain is called tenuis meninx from its thinness, and pia mater or tender mother from its imme∣diate covering or close sticking to the Brain, imbracing it as a Mother does her Infant. It is spread over all the cortical or outer part of the Brain, insinuating it self into all its windings, as also into those of the cerebellum and medulla oblongata, and ties all their processes and parts to one another, that they cannot be displaced or bear hard upon one ano∣ther. And whereever it goes, the Bloud-vessels run along it, and are dispersed out of it into the Parts that it cloaths.

This Skin is very thin, and of a most exquisite sense, yea this and the dura mater seem to be the instruments of all sensation. For as sense is

communicated to every part immediately by the Nerves, so the nervous Fibres are more probably propagated from these Membranes that cloath the Nerves, than from the medullar Part it self of the Nerve which is de∣rived from the medulla oblongata and spinal marrow, which of themselves have little or no sense, but onely by virtue of these Membranes that in∣vest them.

It is furnished with very many Arteries and Veins, most of which are exceeding small, but in number infinite, interwoven one with another in the manner of a Net. The Arteries do spring from the Carotides and Cervical Arteries, and the Veins from the jugular Veins.

The use of these two Membranes that invest the Brain is to sustain the Vessels that enter into it, to cloath and defend it from the hardness of the Parts that environ it, to keep it in its due form and situation (for of it self it would run all about, it is of so soft a consistency) and lastly to afford a coat to all the Nerves, not onely to those that spring within the Skull, but to all those also that arise out of the Back-bone, for these two Mem∣branes are propagated all along it, investing its pith, (called the spinal marrow) out of which those Nerves spring.

CHAP. II. Of the Brain in general.

The excellen∣cy of the Brain. That an Horse hath a Brain.

BEING come to treat of the Brain, it shall not be amiss, if before I speak of its several Parts, I say something as to its excellency, and the eminent offices it performs for the benefit of the Animal. All Au∣thours agree that it is one of the most noble Parts of the whole Body, ranked for its dignity even with the Heart it self. And indeed, as I have intimated in the foregoing Chapter, its situation sheweth plainly as much, it being placed in the highest part of all the Body, and there fenced about as it were with strong walls on every side, to secure it from outward in∣juries. In it are contained the Animal Faculties, viz. those of Sense and Motion. The former of these two Faculties sits in it as in a Throne of Majesty, beholding the forms of all things under her feet, having all the Organs and Instruments of the Senses attending Her, at her command. For first the Eyes are placed near her, that as Spies or Centinels watching day and night they may discover the Enemy. The Ears also are seated near her, at her command to be turned this way or that way, to listen to any dangers that are approaching, that so they may be avoided. Like∣wise the Instruments of Smelling and Tasting are near her, that at her command those Foods that are profitable and necessary may be received, and that unpleasant or hurtfull Food may be rejected. And as the Faculty of Sensation hath the forementioned Ministers or Instruments placed near her for the execution of her offices; so hath the motive Faculty a domi∣nion extended to the furthest limits of the Body, of which every Limb and Member is perfectly at her beck, to move this way or that way as she directs. I say, both these noble Faculties have their seat in the Brain;

for it is not a private or particular Organ of Sense, but an universal one; nor doth the motive Faculty exert it self in the Brain it self, which is in∣capable of voluntary motion; but that motion which it has, is natural, and that not owing to it self, but to the Arteries that are dispersed in it, for the beating of these makes it seem to widen, and contract it self, as hath been observed in Wounds of the Heads of both Men and Beasts. This motion, I say, is communicated to it from the Arteries, and in its dila∣tation it receives arterial bloud by the Carotid Arteries, and in its con∣traction it forces that Bloud into the Veins, and the Animal Spirits into the Nerves, by which they are carried into all Parts of the Body, and with them the moving power is imparted; for without such influence from the brain an Animal would be like a Log, it would be able neither to move nor feel, or rather it would cease to be an Animal, and become a dead Carcase.

How absurd and ridiculous a thing is it then for any Man that hath any Brain himself, to imagine a Horse to have none? yet such Men I have my self met withall, yea I know several which to this day will not be convinced of that erroneous opinion by any arguments whatever. Neither will they take the pains to inspect the Parts, to satisfy themselves of the contrary, but will still continue in their false received opinion, merely taken from a silly observation they have made when they have seen Horses and Oxen knocked on the Head, where they see the Skull broken and nothing under it, but a few hard and dry Bones, without any marrowy substance: I say from this observation they draw their conclusion, that a Horse hath no Brain. I much wonder how any such Dolt can have the confidence to take upon him the name of a Farrier, and pretend to cure he knows not what. Such Persons I would desire onely when they see another Horse knockt on the Head, that they pre∣vail with them that doe it, (or otherwise when any Horse is dead) to strike him a blow or two with the same force above the usual place be∣tween the Ears or a very little lower, and they shall then be soon convin∣ced that he hath a Brain, (though not so large by much as a Man hath, considering the different bulk of their Bodies.) And when they are con∣vinced of that, I hope they will take pains to be satisfied in the other Parts of the Body by searching into them, as by these my Labours they are di∣rected; so shall they improve themselves in their professions, and I have the wished end of my pains, which I have taken to advance them.

CHAP. III. Of the several Parts of the Brain, viz. that which is strict∣ly called the Brain, the Cerebellum or After-brain, and the Spinal Marrow.

The Parts of the Brain. The manner of sawing the Skull asun∣der. The substance and division of the Brain, (strictly so called.) Its action. The Cerebel∣lum. Its Parts.

IF we take the Brain in a large signification, it comprehends all that marrowy substance that is found in the cavity of the Skull: yet for distinction's sake it is by all Authours divided into three parts; first, the fore-part, being the largest, is called the Brain; secondly, the middle part is called Cerebellum, the Brainlet or After-brain; and lastly, the hindmost and lowermost is termed Medulla oblongata, being that part of the Spinal Marrow which is within the Skull.

Now to find out these several Parts we must divide the Skull with a Saw for that purpose, beginning almost as far back as the Noll-bone, or in∣deed quite as far, dividing the hole of the Noll-bone in the middle, and so go with your Saw first along one side of the Head a little above the auditory passage till you come to the Fore-head a little below the Eyes (or just even with them;) where being come, and having sawed onely just through the Skull, (for you must have a care that your Saw do not pierce the Brain, for that will hinder your seeing the Parts of it) then cross the Fore-head with your Saw and pass along the other side till you come to the hole of the Noll-bone again: by doing which you will loosen the up∣per part of the Skull, which with care you must take off, that you break not the dura mater or Skin next under it, for that Skin is fastened to it in several places. When you have removed that piece of the Skull, then remove the Skin also by parting it lengthways down the middle, where∣by you shall plainly see the Brain with its convolutions or folds, also the After-brain with its wormlike processes, &c. in such manner as they are represented in the following Table.

Table XXI. (Book 21)

Fig. I. Shews the Skull of an Horse sawed asunder in such a man∣ner as that the Parts of the Brain may be seen in their natural situation.

• FF Shew the substance of the Brain covered with the pia mater onely, the dura mater being removed for that purpose.
• HH The Cerebellum or After-brain also in its natural situation.
• LL The processus vermiformes or worm-like Processes.
• MM A portion of the medulla oblongata.
• NN The dura mater so far as it contains the medulla oblonatag, cut in sunder and turned back.
• OO The Noll-bone cut in sunder.

Fig. II. Shews the Brain removed and taken out, that the After-brain and its Worm-like Processes might be the plainer seen.

• CCCC The Cerebellum or After-brain turned a little downward, to shew its Parts more plain.
• B The Wormlike Processes.
• D The Spinal Marrow so much as is contained within the Skull.
• EE That part of the dura mater which invests the Spinal Marrow with∣in the Skull, opened and turned back.

[illustration] interior view of a horse's brain

TAI. XXB. pag.106.

[illustration]

I

[illustration]

II

Of these several Parts of the Brain we shall speak in their order, and first of that which is strictly so called. It is of a marrowy substance, but not equally so, for the upper part of it uses to be called its cortex or bark, being of a more dusky colour; whereas the inner or lower part is more white, and is particularly called the marrow or pith of the Brain. It is divided into two parts, a right and a left, by a Membrane that runs length-ways of the Head, from the Fore-head to the Noll; but this divi∣sion descends no deeper into the Brain than the Ash-coloured part of it reaches. The Skin which divides it, is called falx or the sickle, of which I have already spoken in the first Chapter.

The action of the Brain is to elaborate the Animal Spirits, which from it are transmitted to the Medulla oblongata, and from thence into the Nerves, for the sensation and motion of the whole Body, as has been more fully shewn in the two foregoing Chapters.

The second part of the Brain, called the After-brain, is situated in the back-part of the Skull next the Noll-bone, onely parted from the Brain on its upper part by the pia mater or undermost Skin.

This differeth not much from the Brain either in colour or substance, but onely in its convolutions or foldings: for the Brain observeth no or∣der in its winding, but the Brainlet doth, for all its folds are circular, be∣ing extended one over another like plates, and each is kept apart from other by the pia mater that invests each of them severally.

It is framed of four Parts, whereof two are lateral, (or on each side) the right and the left; and these are spherical, or round like a Globe: The other two are in the middle betwixt these, standing before and behind; and these are made up of several orbicular Portions in similitude like the Worms which are found in rotten Timber, and are from thence called Worm-like Processes.

The use of the Brainlet or After-brain is the same as of the Brain.

CHAP. IV. Of the Spinal Marrow contained within and without the Skull.

The Spinal Marrow. Its substance. Its rise. Its figure. Its Mem∣branes. Its use. The number of Nerves springing from it.

THAT part of the Spinal Marrow that is within the Brain, is ter∣med particularly medulla oblongata, and is the third part of the Brain, being of an uniform, white and compact substance, something harder than either the Brain or After-brain.

It arises out of the Brain and Brainlet, and that from six roots; two of which spring at the upper and fore-part of the Brain, and are called cor∣pora striata, the streaked or chamfered Bodies, being onely the ends of its two Thighs; the other four arise lower and more backward, by which it adheres to the Brainlet, and are those protuberances or jettings out that are called Nates and Testes, its Buttocks and Testicles.

Its figure (after its rise) is long and round, being thicker near its be∣ginning than afterwards. Its length within the Skull is about two inches, beginning towards the fore-part of the Head, and reaching to the Noll, whence it is lengthned and continued down the Chine as far as the Dock. That part of it which is contained in the Chine, we commonly call in Horses the pith of the Back.

Within the Skull it is clad onely with two Membranes; but without, it is covered with three. The first of which it hath from the inner Skin of the Brain or pia mater; this immediately covers it. The second it hath from the upper Skin of the Brain or dura mater; this is next to and co∣vereth the former. And the third is said to spring from a strong Liga∣ment which binds together the fore-part of the Rack-bones, covering both the former, and is very strong.

Now the use of the Spinal Marrow is to be the original of all the Nerves, which from it (as from a Fountain) like small Rivulets con∣vey to all Parts of the Body the Animal Spirits. For although the Brain in common speech be accounted the original of the Nerves; that is to be understood in a large sense, when all the three Parts of the Brain are included in that one general appellation: But when the Brain comes to be divided into Parts, which are distinguish'd by particular names, then are both the Brain and Brainlet thrown out of the office of being the original of the Nerves. For ocular Inspection doth testify, that it is from that part of the Spinal Marrow contained within the Skull, from which all the Nerves of the Brain do spring; as likewise from that part of the Spinal Marrow without the Skull, called the Pith or Marrow of the Back, that all the other Nerves of the whole Body do arise. Which large and far distant origination of the Nerves is very necessary; for it would not have been safe (in consideration of the length of the way) that all the Nerves should be carried from the Brain to the inferior or lower Parts; and therefore it is wisely provided by Nature, that from the Marrow or Pith of the back those Nerves should spring which furnish the Parts so remote from the Brain.

As for the number of Nerves which spring from the Spinal Marrow without the Skull, they are in a Horse thirty seven pair, according to the number of Joints or vertebrae from the Noll-bone or the going out of the Marrow from the head, to the setting on of the tail; for out of the holes or perforations in every Bone do pass a pair of Nerves. Therefore there being so many Bones, there are so many pair of Nerves that spring from the Spinal Marrow. And from the medulla oblongata or that part of the Spinal Marrow that is within the Skull, there spring nine pair, as shall be further shewed hereafter.

CHAP. V. Of the Parts of the Cerebrum, or Brain properly so called, viz. the Rete mirabile, Glandula pituitaria, Infundi∣bulum, the Ventricles of the Brain, the Corpus cal∣losum, plexus choroides, Nates, Testes, Penis or Glandula pinealis.

The Rete mi∣rabile. Why so called. Its use. The manner of taking out the Brain, and in what order the Parts appear. Glandula pi∣tuitaria. From whence the Snot is separated in the Glanders. No such Dis∣ease as the mourning of the Chine. The Infundi∣bulum or Funnel. Corpora stri∣ata, Nates, and Testes. The Pine-apple Gland. Its use. The Ventri∣cles. The manner of discovering them. Their uses.

HAVING given a short description of the Cerebrum, (or Brain pro∣perly so called) the Cerebellum, and Spinal Marrow; we now return to the Cerebrum, to take a more exact view of its several Parts; and we shall begin with the Rete mirabile or wonderfull Net.

This Net is framed of innumerable twigs of Arteries which spring from the largest branches of the Carotid and Cervical Arteries, which pass in∣to the Skull by proper holes in the Bones of the Temples. This Net is far more discernable in Oxen and Horses than in other lesser Animals.

It is called the wonderfull Net by reason of its structure, the Arteries of which it is composed crossing one another like the threds of a Net, or rather as if several Nets were spread one over another. It is dispersed all over the bottom of the Brain both without and within the dura mater, some of the smallest shoots of it branching into the pituitary Glandule.

The use of this Net is said to be for the preparing of the Bloud and Vi∣tal Spirits to make Animal Spirits of. For which purpose in the twinings and windings of these small Vessels they are a long time detained, for the better elaboration and preparation of them, and lest they might rush into the Brain in too full a stream, and thereby overslow and disturb the Ani∣mal Faculty.

To see this wonderfull Net, as also the other Parts of the bottom or under-side of the Brain, you must (after having sawn the Skull asunder, as is shewed in the foregoing Chapter) with a pair of sharp Pincers pinch off by little and little the sides of the remaining part of the Skull, all round, untill you come as near the bottom as you can; and you must then with as much care as possible lift up the Brain, beginning at the fore-part of it, where the Bone of the Fore-head a little separates it. After you have lifted it a little way up, there will come in sight the mam∣millary Processes together with their nervous Filaments or Threds that

pass through the Sieve-like Bone, hanging at them; which being loosened and the Brain farther pulled up, the next thing that appeareth are the branches of the Carotid Arteries, which having penetrated the Skull are carried to the Brain; which being cut off and the Brain yet a little farther turned up, the unition or coming together, and the going out of the Op∣tick Nerves are to be seen; the Trunks of which if you likewise cut off, there are other Arteries (also branches of the Carotides) to be seen, coming in through the Bones of the Temples: which Arteries (as I have already shewed) are (with some small Veins joined with them) those Vessels which make up the Rete mirabile or wonderfull Net, dis∣coursed of at the beginning of this Chapter.

After you have cut in sunder these Arteries also, then you may by lif∣ting up the Brain still a little higher, perceive the moving Nerves of the Eyes (for they come next to view) and after them the other pairs of Nerves follow in order, in such sort, that one pair of them being cut off and the Brain with its Appendices or Processes more lifted up, the next is still more plainly discerned by the carefull Anatomist. In which method and order all the Nerves, to which I shall particularly speak in a conve∣nient place, (I mean the Nerves arising within the Skull) and also the Arteries, as well the Carotid as Vertebral, being at length cut off, the whole frame of the Brain may be taken out of the Skull.

Table XXII. (Book 22)

Representeth two Skulls, the one to shew the basis or bottom of the Brain and the Head of the Spinal Marrow contained within the Skull, with the rise of the Nerves from it; and the other shews the cavity of the Skull in which the Brain was seated, but now remo∣ved, the better to shew the Glandula pituitaria and other Parts that lie under the Brain.

Figure I.

Shews the bottom of the Brain and Spinal Marrow.

• AA Shew the Eyes.
• BB The Optick Nerves.
• CC The moving Nerves of the Eyes.
• DD The fourth pair of Nerves, by Doctor Willis called the Pathetick Nerves, proper to one of the Muscles of the Eyes onely, by which the Eye is chiefly moved in the Passions of Love, Anger, &c.
• EEEE Several other Nerves arising from the Spinal Marrow within the Skull.
• FFFF The bottom of the Brain.
• GG The Spinal Marrow called here medulla oblongata.
• HH The Spinal Marrow cut off at its going out of the Skull.
• IIII The several barrs of the Palate of the Mouth.
• qq The cavity or hollowness that goes from the Palate of the Mouth to the Nose.
• RRRR The several Teeth.
• SS The dura mater cut insunder and turned back.
• T The Glandula pituitaria.

Figure II.

Shews the Skull with the Brain taken out of it.

• A Shews the hole where the Spinal Marrow passeth out of the Skull.
• B The Glandula pituitaria or Flegm-gland.
• CC The Optick Nerves.
• DD The bottom of the Skull upon which the Brain did rest.

[illustration] two views of a horse's skull

TAB. XXII. pag.110.

[illustration]

I

[illustration]

II

After you have thus taken out the Brain and viewed all its Parts as they appear before you dissect it, you will at the very middle of its bot∣tom, a little above the uniting of the Optick Nerves, within the hard Skin or dura mater, (for that is in the next place to be taken off and re∣moved, otherwise it will hide all other Parts from you; but that Skin being removed in the place aforesaid, I say) you will find a small round Kernel, in compass about the bigness of a Groat, and something flat and round. Its seat is in a little hole made for that purpose at the very bot∣tom of the Skull, in a Bone called the wedge-like Bone. This will be more plainly seen if you take the Brain out and leave the dura mater be∣hind; for then you see it in its natural position, as the letter B in Fig. 2. of the foregoing Table shews it: but if you take the dura mater out, this comes out with it. This Kernel is called Glandula pituitaria, the snotty or flegmey Kernel, from its office, which is to receive the snotty Excre∣ments of the Brain from the Infundibulum or Funnel, and afterward to transmit or convey them away, as some Authors say, into the Palate, from thence to be avoided by the Mouth or Nose. But others will have it, that it is sent into the Jugular Veins by two small ducts or passages, one on each side, being branches of one Trunk that begins at the bottom of the said Gland, and is divided into two, after it has penetrated the wedge-like Bone. Which passages they have found out by injecting Li∣quors of several colours with a syringe into them, for they have observed the said Liquors to pass into the Veins, but none to come to either the Pa∣late or Nose. By which Experiment they conclude, that whatever serum or wheyish or flegmatick Humour issues out of the Ventricles of the Brain through the Funnel, distils not upon the Palate, but is poured again into the Bloud and mixed with it. Whence we may gather that the Rheum or Snot which issueth so plentifully out of the Noses of Horses that have great Colds, and also of glander'd Horses, falls not (as I have my self sometimes thought) from the Brain, but is separated out of the Arte∣ries from the Bloud by the Glands or Kernels of the upper part and inside of the Nose. Which we may the rather believe, when we observe that other Glands are swell'd with Rheum at the same time, as particularly the Kernels under the Horse's Jaws; which is one of the certainest signs we have of a Horse's inclining to the Glanders. And this may serve to con∣vict of errour all our ancient Authors who did hold, (and our Practitio∣ners who at this day do hold) that the Glanders proceed from a defect and wasting in the Brain; and that all that snotty matter comes from thence which issues out of the Nose. Which were it so, all the Brain in the Horse's Head would not be sufficient to supply it with matter for three daies, according to the quantity that I have seen come from one in that time. It is therefore a very false opinion, taken up merely upon

guess, without inspecting into the Parts, that our Practitioners do com∣monly entertain concerning this Disease.

Neither is there such a Disease as the mourning of the Chine,as they do to this day hold; for it is impossible any Creature should continue so long alive as till all his Brain be so far wasted by this Disease, that it comes to reach the Spinal Marrow without the Skull, which is that I suppose they call the Chine.

But this Disease, by them called the mourning of the Chine, is distin∣guished into a different Disease from the former from the Matter's altering its colour; for it is generally observed that after the Horse hath had this Disease running on him for some time, the corrupt Matter or Snot chan∣ges by degrees from an indifferent white to a more dull colour, inclining at first to a little reddish, but after a longer time, especially when the Horse begins to grow towards his end, it will be very black and very nauseous both to see and smell.

From this alteration of the colour, as I have said, I do believe they give the Disease this proper and distinguishing name of mourning of the Chine; whereas it is onely a greater degree of one and the same Disease, in which the Chine is not at all affected, at least no more than any other Part of the Body, all of which languishes away by this inveterate Distem∣per. By what steps it proceeds, and how the Matter comes to alter its co∣lour, I will give you my opinion.

The mass of Bloud being depraved either by unwholsome Food, or by great Colds, or lastly by infection from the Air and from other Horses (for this Distemper is catching) this flegmatick Matter collected in it is spued out of the ends of the Arteries in the upper part of the Nostrils, about the spongie Bones chiefly; for in an Horse there is little of this Mat∣ter comes out of the Mouth, but it still descends by the Nostrils. This Humour, I say, distilling out of the Arteries by the spongie Bones conti∣nually, doth in process of time so fill the said Bones with filthy Matter, that like a Sink or Chanel being choaked up with filth, there is not so free a passage for the Humour, as when the Disease first began; so that the Matter by that means is there stayed, and by its continuance there it acquires so bad a quality that it corrodes and cankers those Bones, and indeed ulcerates and gangrenes all the passages of the Nostrils, till it have mortified and consum'd them (as happens sometimes to Venereal Persons) and at length destroy'd the Beast: for indeed it is seldom or never cura∣ble when it is once come truly to be a Canker.

Now by the foulness of these Bones (as I have said) that Matter or Snot which doth descend by these passages, (which indeed doth at length drivel down in a greater quantity than before, by reason of the passages being widened from the Parts being gnawn asunder by the cankered Hu∣mour; I say that Matter or Snot which doth descend after this) is of a contrary colour to what it used to be, for it is become more black and waterish, mixed with a little Red, and hath a very ill smell: but this altera∣tion happens not from the Matter's flowing from a new Part, but is caused by reason of the foulness of the Parts through which it passeth, for from thence it hath its dye in a great degree.

Not but that there is yet another cause of it, which is the greater foulness of the Bloud: for as the beginning of the Distemper did proceed from the corruption or depravation of the Bloud, which was become as it were de∣generate from its spirituous, balsamick and volatilised condition, into a

flat and vappid state, like to dead Wine; so in process of time for want of the Spirits to quicken it, and cause the fermentations necessary in the proper places of the Body, where the excrementitious parts of the bloud should be thrown off, (there being several Bowels of the Body appointed to separate, and some that have Receptacles to receive the same) I say, for want of these Spirits to cause a fermentation whereby the excrementi∣tious parts of the Bloud should be thrown off, such Excrements are col∣lected every day in greater quantity, and acquire a greater degree of ma∣lignity, being hardly any part of them discharged any other way but this, which is preternatural, and most times becomes destructive to the Beast, after the Disease hath arrived to this height.

Thus have I given you my opinion concerning this Distemper, which though it be new, will I hope to the intelligent Reader appear to be truer than that of our Ancient or Modern Practitioners, few of whom (I may affirm without boasting) have made so diligent an inquiry into this Di∣stemper as I with great pains and charge have done; for if they had, they would with great ease see themselves in an error, and no more be∣lieve that there is or can be such a Disease as the mourning of the Chine. But enough of this, (though I hope it will not be deemed to be from the purpose:) I shall therefore return from whence I have digressed, and de∣scribe the remaining Parts of the Brain.

Having examined sufficiently the Rete mirabile or wonderfull Net, as also the Pituitary Gland, if you then remove the dura mater quite from the Brain at the basis or bottom of it, there will appear the head of the Spinal Marrow, so much as is contained within the Skull, of which we have treated in a foregoing Chapter. There may be also plainly seen the rise of the several conjugations or pairs of Nerves, of which we will treat at large in a convenient place; also the bottom of the Cerebel or After-brain, as the next Table doth demonstrate to you.

After these you may take a plain view of the end of the Infundibulum or Funnel, (a cavity so called) which end reaches (before dissection) to the Pituitary Gland, upon which it pours the flegmatick Excrements of the Brain, as hath been already shewed.

This Funnel is so called from its shape; for above, the head thereof is large; but the lower part, is a long and strait Pipe. By some Authors it is called Pelvis the Basin. Its beginning is said to be on the fore-part of the third Ventricle, by some so called, but I could never in a Horse see more than two that I could properly call Ventricles, between which two this Funnel is seated, and into which they do empty themselves, dischar∣ging their serous or waterish moisture into it. This Funnel I have often found near filled with a thickish Flegm; and Doctor Willis says that in an Horse's Brain he has observed it wider than a Goose-quill, and full of a clear Water.

Next come we to speak to those Parts of the Brain that lie hid, and cannot well be seen without dissecting of it; and first of the Buttocks and Stones. These are four orbicular Prominences or round Bodies jet∣ting out of the medulla oblongata (or head of the Spinal Marrow) of which the two first, namely the Buttocks, are largest, and the latter (viz. the Stones) seem to be onely accrescences to them. The Buttocks stand lowermost, and adhere to the Brainlet; (as do also the Stones.) They are larger than in a Man, and look of a fleshy colour while they are cloathed with the pia mater; but that being removed, they appear

yellowish, and of a different colour from the rest of the Marrow. But of these we discoursed before at the beginning of the fourth Chapter; as also of the corpora striata or utmost ends of the medulla oblongata, that adhere to the Brain properly so called.

These four Prominences are by Doctor Willis compared to Mole-hills, and are therefore by him so called. They may be plainly seen if you but lift up the hinder part of the Brain after you have separated it from the After-brain, turning it as far back as you can without breaking it.

Between these four Prominences, or rather between the two lower of them, to wit the Buttocks, there is placed a certain Glandule or Kernel, which goes by the name of glandula pinealis, or Pine-kernel Glandule, from the resemblance it is said to have with the Kernel of a Pine-apple. It is also called the Yard or Prick of the Brain, from its being placed so near the Buttocks and Stones, as also because it resembleth a Man's Yard. This Gland as also the Buttocks and Testicles before-spoken of are repre∣sented in the next Table.

Concerning the use of this Glandule there are great disputes among the Learned; but I subscribe to Bartholin's opinion, who believeth its use to be the same with that of other Kernels, which is to separate the Lympha from the Arterial Bloud.

There is as it were a chink between the Buttocks near this Glandule, which I think fit to mention, because most Authours speak of it. Some give it the name of Anus or Arse, others call it Vulva; but why they have imposed such names as these upon these Parts, I cannot judge, nor is it worth the while to inquire, seeing they have no other foundation but fancy: however, since they are known by these names, I did think it fit not to pass them by, finding them as plainly to be seen and as easie to be found in Horses as Anatomists find them in Humane Brains.

I come in the next place to speak to the Ventricles of the Brain, which are by some accounted four, by others three; but if dissection be made by beginning from beneath, there will appear onely two: and indeed I could never find more; for that which is called the third, I cannot think to be one, but rather a portion of the other two joined together. Nay, some Authours will have it that there is but one, being onely divided at the beginning, but at the end they unite into and become one common Cavity, as any one that will diligently trace them may observe.

To see these Ventricles you must cut the whole substance of the Brain insunder in or as near the middle as you can guess, dividing the upper from the lower side, whereby you will discover them in the middle of the Brain of that shape as the first Figure of the following Table repre∣sents them in: for there they are represented to the life, as much of them I mean, as can be seen without farther dissection; and appear to be of a semicircular or Half-moon shape. But if you cut the Brain further, and so follow their Cavities lightly with a Probe forwards down towards the Nose (for there they sink deep into the callous body, or white inner part of the Brain) you will trace them as far as the mammillary Proces∣ses; and if backwards, you will find them to descend as far as the basis or bottom of the Brain; and then if you will take a view of them when you have laid them so far bare both ways, you will find them to resemble in shape in Horse-shoe.

Now the uses of these Ventricles according to the divers opinions of Authours are many, but I will follow the most Modern in this point.

First then they are framed for the more easie passage of the Bloud; for along their sides do pass many branches of the Bloud-carrying Vessels, which could not so conveniently be conveyed through the substance of the Brain, lest being compressed by the great weight of it, the passage of the Bloud should have been obstructed, whereas now it hath a free passage.

Another use of them is, to serve for the reception of the serous or wheyie excrement of the Bloud that is separated from it by the glandu∣lous Skin that invests them, and by the glandula pituitaria; which se∣rous Humour issuing out of the Arteries, is suckt up again by branches of the Jugular Veins, and is by them returned with the Bloud to the Heart.

In the Membrane that cloaths these Ventricles there is a contexture of small Vessels of both Veins and Arteries, which is called plexus Choroides. The Vessels that make up this plexus, are little branches of the Carotid Arteries, and some of the internal Jugular Veins interwoven with them. The Skin wherein these Vessels are so interwoven has a great many small Kernels sticking in it, which as I have already said, separate the serous Matter from the Bloud.

In the Anatomical Discourses of Humane Brains there are several other Parts of the Brain considered, as the fornix, the corpus callosum, the sep∣tum lucidum and the like, all which are as discernible in the Brains of Horses as in Men, and might therefore as largely be discoursed of: but it being not very material to treat of them, I will for brevity sake but in a manner name them.

First then, that which is called the corpus callosum, is the white sub∣stance of the Brain, plainly seen when you cut the Brain asunder in the middle to see its Ventricles; for then you may view its white substance which makes the middle part of the Brain; the outside of it being of an Ash-colour, and going by the name of cortex, or the bark.

The septum lucidum is onely the Partition that divides the two Ventri∣cles above-described, some taking it to be a reduplication of the pia mater, and others a portion of the Brain.

The Fornix or Vault is a kind of an Arch that stands between the Brain and the medulla oblongata. It is of a substance like the corpus callosum, and is of a triangular figure. Its use is to bear up the upper part of the Brain, that its weight may not press upon the subjacent Parts.

Table XXIII. (Book 23)

Fig. I. Representeth the Ventricles of the Brain with the plexus Choroides.

• AA Shew the two Ventricles of the Brain.
• BB The corpus callosum or white substance of the Brain, being the mid∣dle part of it.
• CCC The Cerebellum or After-brain.
• DD The plexus Choroides seated in the Ventricles of the Brain.

Fig. II. Represents the protuberances of the medulla oblongata called Nates and Testes, and also the Glandula Pinealis.

• D The Glandula Pinealis or Pine-kernel Glandule.
• GG Those two bunchings out of the medulla oblongata called Testes or Stones.
• HH Its other two protuberances called Nates or Buttocks.
• II A Ventricle between the Brainlet and roots of the medulla oblongata, by some Authours called the fourth.
• MM The Processus Vermiformes or Worm-like Processes.
• NNN The other Parts of the After-brain.
• OOO Part of the Cerebrum or Brain to be seen under the After-brain.

[illustration] anatomical view of the ventricles of a horse's brain

TAB. XXIII. pag.115.

[illustration]

I

[illustration]

II

CHAP. VI. Of the Action of the Brain, and the exercises of the Animal Faculty by the Nerves and Fibres.

The action of the Brain. What the A∣nimal Spirits are made of. How the Ani∣mal Spirits enter into the Nerves; And how into the Fibres. Whence the Fibres arise. They can move by the Spirit im∣planted in them.

HAVING hitherto spoken of the structure of the Brain, and dis∣coursed of all its Parts; I come in the next place to speak of its Action, in general, and to shew, according to the opinion of our most Learned and Modern Authours, how the Animal Faculty exerts it self.

It is generally agreed that the proper action of the Brain (taken in a large sense) is the elaborating of Animal Spirits; which Spirits are con∣veyed from it by the Nerves into the several Parts of the Body for the performing of the Animal actions or motions; for all voluntary motions are performed by the help of these Spirits.

These Spirits are made out of the Vital Spirits and Arterial Bloud, as out of their proper matter. And the place wherein, or the principal in∣strument that elaborates them, is not the Vessels, but the very substance of the Brain, into whose parenchyma or marrowy substance the Bloud and Vital Spirits are extravasated.

Now concerning the manner how this Work is performed there are great controversies amongst the Learned, and many arguments urged by each, which will be too tedious here to recite: I will therefore give you onely the opinion of a late Worthy Authour as delivered in his own words.

The Heart, says he, is like the primum mobile of the Body, to which the motion of all the Humours that have once past it, is owing. This by its systole impells the Bloud as into all other Parts, so into the Brain, by the several branches of the Carotides, whose innumerable twigs run partly through the outer cortex or greyish part of the Brain, and partly into the inner medullar or white substance of it. These twigs of Arteries spring partly from the Plexus Choroides and Rete mi∣rabile, and partly from the Carotides themselves immediately. The superfluous serum of the Bloud is separated by the Glands before de∣scribed;

and that Bloud which is not elaborated into Animal Spirits, is returned again to the Heart by the Veins. But those particles that are fit and proper to be converted into them, are extravasated into the ve∣ry parenchyma of the Brain, or at least are distributed through it by invisible capillaries, in which being perfected into Spirits, these by the help of the Fibres or Filaments which the inner part or substance of the Brain chiefly consists of, are conveyed into the Corpora striata (or other Processes of the medulla oblongata that adhere to the Brain) which consist of the like Filaments, and by them to the Nerves, whose inner substance is fibrous like the medulla from whence they spring. And the reason of this successive motion from one to another, is the pulse of the Heart, whereby that which comes behind always drives forward what is before. Whence (says my Authour) the true cause of an Apo∣plexy (wherein motion and sense are almost quite abolished) is from the obstruction or compression of the Arteries of the Brain: whereby both little Bloud and Vital Spirits can be conveyed thither to make Animal Spirit of; and also when it is made, it is not impelled out of the Brain along the Fibres into the Nerves, to enable them to perform their functions.

These are the words of that worthy Authour concer∣ning this Work.

It remains now to inquire how these Spirits, after they are thus elabora∣ted, do perpetually flow from the Brain through the passages of the Nerves, and how they enter and fill the several sorts of Fibres of which the mo∣ving and sensitive Parts consist.

That the Brain and Cerebel are the first fountain of the Animal Spi∣rits I have in my foregoing Discourse already shewed; from whence they flow along the Nerves as by so many rivulets unto differing and di∣stant Parts; till at length they pass out of the most capillary Nerves into the small Fibres interwoven in the Membranes, the musculous Flesh, and other Parts, and last of all into the tendons of the Muscles, making them the organs of Sense and Motion: in which Parts becoming more fixed, they are called the implanted Spirits, attending their office whensoever the Nerves with their influent Spirits bring from the Brain the instinct for performing the same.

Now concerning these nervous Fibres in their several Parts, which are the immediate instruments of the Animal Faculty, we ought to inquire from whence they have their rise: It is plain they do not arise immedi∣ately from the Head, or any of its marrowy Parts; neither can we reaso∣nably judge them to spring from the Nerves, because the Fibres in most Parts do much exceed the bulk or bigness of the Nerve that is brought to them, as may be easily seen by the tendon of every Muscle, which being made up of united Fibres, is observed to be far greater than the Nerve that is inserted into the Muscle: so that it is unlikely they should be onely continued portions of the Nerves divided or jagged into fine threds, as some have imagined; and it is more probable that they are spermatick and primigenial Parts, that is, that the rudiments of them were drawn in the first formation of the Parts of the Embryo in the Womb, as well and as soon as the Nerves themselves; unless one would with Doctor Willis except the Fibres of the sanguineous Parts, which he thinks to be bred secondarily of the Bloud and nervous Juice flowing into those Parts.

One thing further we must note concerning these Fibres, that they are enabled to perform their motion, not onely from the Animal Spirits that flow by the Nerves at the instant of such motion, but also from the Spi∣rits that are stored up in the Fibres themselves; of which any one may satisfy himself in observing an Animal newly killed when its Skin is taken off; for when life is perished, and all the force of the Spirits flowing in through the Nerves hath quite ceased, yet the Spirits implanted in these Fibres breaking forth from the Muscles still move and shake them, and force them into several convulsions and trembling motions. This I have not onely seen my self in several Horses I have caused to be killed on pur∣pose to dissect, but have also shewed it to several Spectators who have been very much pleased at the observation, and at the variety of their motions.

CHAP. VII. Of the several pair of Nerves arising from within the Skull, particularly of the first, second and third pair.

The first pair of Nerves, viz. the Smelling. The second pair, or Op∣tick Nerves. The third pair, or Eye-movers.

HAVING sufficiently treated of the Brain and Animal Faculty or Spirits, it is fit that in the next place I should come to speak of the Nerves, beginning according to the order of dissection with those that arise immediately from the Brain, which I find to be of the same number in Horses as Dr. Willis hath observed them to be in Humane Bodies, viz. nine pair. I will therefore observe the same method, and begin as the said Learned Doctor hath done, with the smelling Nerves first, because they are the foremost, and therefore do first appear in dissection.

These Nerves are called the mammillary Processes,because they are round at their end like a Pap. They take their rise from the shanks of the medulla oblongata betwixt the corpora striata or chamfered Bodies, and the chambers of the Optick Nerves; from whence running under the bottom of the Brain they do in their course by degrees increase, and become broader and larger, and at length reach as far as the Sieve-like Bone that is seated at the top of the Nostrils. During all which way they are soft and marrowy, (being hollow within and pretty full of moisture) but being arrived at this Bone, they receive a new covering or coat from the dura mater, (being clad before onely with the pia mater) with which they are divided into many little Fibres or Filaments like little strings, which do many of them pass through the holes of the Sieve-like Bone into the cavities of the Nostrils, where they are distributed on every side, entring into the Membranes that cover those Parts. These Fibres or Fila∣ments which do thus proceed from the before-named Processes, are be∣lieved to be the true organs of Smelling, and of Sensation also. From whence it is that those Persons that do not accustom themselves to draw snush up their Noses, are upon the least scent of it provoked to sneeze: which is occasioned by the Powder's ascending up the Nose and resting upon the tender Membranes thereof, wherein the little Fibres of the smel∣ling

Nerves being dispersed, are immediatly irritated or provoked into a convulsive motion, which is that we call sneezing. It was an old opinion that the Snivel was milked as it were out of the Ventricles of the Brain by these Processes; but having above in the fifth Chapter shewn other Vessels which discharge that flegmatick matter into the Nose, namely the Arteries, it seems more probable that these Mammillary Processes have a nobler use, namely that we have ascribed unto them, to be the instru∣ments of smelling. And therefore they are larger in Horses and all sorts of Cattle than in Men, because it was necessary their Smell should be very exquisite, seeing they can distinguish of the wholsomness or hurtfulness of their Food by that Sense onely.

Table XXIV. (Book 24)

Fig. I. Shews the Mammillary Processes, and the Bones at the upper part of the Nostrils.

• NN Shew the Cartilaginous or gristly Bones of the Nostrils.
• OO The Mammillary Processes or Smelling Nerves.
• SSSS The Sieve-like Bone through whose holes the Fibres of the Smelling Nerves are branched.

Fig. II. Shews the Brain in its natural situation, and the Parts afore∣said, &c.

• AAAA Shew the Brain in its natural situation covered with the pia mater.
• CCCC The spongy Bones laid bare.
• DE The gristly Bones of the Nostrils.
• GGG The Partition which divides the upper part of the Brain into two parts, a right and a left.
• HHH The os occipitis or Noll-bone.
• OOOO The Sieve-like Bone, upon which the Mammillary Processes do rest.

[illustration] anatomical view of the bones of a horse's upper nostrils

TAB. XXIV. pag.119.

[illustration]

I

[illustration]

II

Next come we to the second conjugation or pair of Nerves, and those are the Optick or Seeing Nerves; so called, either because they carry the visive Spirits to the Eyes, or because they convey the representations of visible things from the Eyes to the Brain.

These arise a little behind the former out of the medulla oblongata, and having proceeded a while with a certain compass, they are united above the saddle of os sphenoides, and that with a total confusion and mingling of their substances, as far as by the naked Eye I could ever dis∣cern in all Horses that I have dissected; though some Authours say that in Humane Bodies they do unite indeed, but that it is onely by contact, without confounding their Fibres with one another.

These Nerves after they are thus united, do soon after again separate, and go out of the Skull into the centre of the Eyes, three of whose coats are made out of the substance of these Nerves being dilated.

At their rise and a pretty way in their progress they are very soft, be∣ing covered onely with the pia mater; but as soon as they reach the dura mater; they are covered with it also, and thereby become stronger and harder. This outmost Membrane it is which doth constitute that coat of the Eye called the horney Coat or sclerotica; and from the inner or pia mater doth proceed the next Coat or Skin of the Eye called uvea or Grape like, from its colour; and lastly the marrowy substance of the Nerve doth make the third Coat called Retina or Net-like.

The Sense of Seeing like that of Smelling is by Doctor Willis said to be performed not so much by the help of the Nerve, as of the Fibres which are interwoven with the Organ; namely, saith he, the little Fibres in the Coats of the Eyes, and especially those that are inserted into the cor∣nea or sclerotick Coat, and disposed after the manner of a Net, do receive the impression of the visible species, and by representing the image of the thing so as it is offered without, cause sight: but it is the office of the Nerve it self to transmit inwardly, as it were by the passage of an Optick Tube, that image or sensible species, and to carry it to the com∣mon sensory.

The next pair are the Eye-movers, which are by Ancient Authours ac∣counted the second pair, but do by our Modern Authours go for the third pair.

These take their beginning from the basis or bottom of the medulla ob∣longata behind the Funnel, from whence they proceed forwards by the sides of the Optick Nerves. At their rise they are united, whence is a reason drawn that when one Eye is moved toward any object, the other is directed also towards the same.

They are smaller, yet much harder than the former, and as was said, run along by their sides untill they come to the os cuneiforme or Wedge-like Bone; where, as the Optick Nerves passed through the first, so these pass through the second hole of that Bone, and so on untill they come to the Muscles of the Eyes, into several if not all of which they send a twig or small branch, which is in each Muscle subdivided into innumerable other smaller ones, by which the Animal Spirits are conveyed into the Fibres of the Muscles, and by consequence the several motions of the Eye come to be performed, as shall be shewed at large in a more convenient place, when I come to treat of the Muscles of the Eyes in the next Book.

CHAP. VIII. Of the fourth and fifth pair of Nerves that arise within the Skull.

The fourth pair called Pathetick. The fifth pair. The reason of blushing.

THE fourth pair of Nerves do arise contrary to all other: for where∣as the rest do take their rise from the bottom or sides of the oblong Marrow, these have their beginning at the top of it, behind those round bunchings out of the Brain called Nates and Testes, (of which we have already treated where we described the Parts of the Brain.) From whence bending a little forwards by the sides of the said oblong Marrow, they are immediately hid by the dura mater, under which they run for some time, untill they come to that hole of the Skull, where the other Nerves designed for the Eyes do pass out, which these accompany, but do not unite with, and at length terminate in the Trochlear Muscles of the Eyes.

This pair of Nerves are by Doctor Willis called the Pathetick Nerves, because, says he, their office is to move the Eyes pathetically, according to the force of the passions and instincts of Nature, delivered and remanded from the Brain to the After-brain, and on the contrary from this to that, through the Nates and Testes and their Medullar Processes. For, saith that Learned Anatomist, seeing that by the diverse impulse and undulation of the Animal Spirit's dwelling in this by-path, there happen certain mu∣tual commerces between the Brain and Praecordia (the Cerebel media∣ting between either, from whose Ring-like Process he will have the Nerves of the Praecordia to arise;) it is necessary that these Nerves that are rooted in the middle way, should be struck upon by every march or remove of the Spirits going this way or that way, whereby the motions of the Eyes must needs follow the affections of those Parts. With these Nerves, (saith he) all perfect Animals are furnished, there being none but are obnoxious to anger, love, hatred, and other Affections, as may be discovered in every little Creature, but much more in this which we are a discoursing of, there being none the aspect and gesture of whose Eyes do shew them more than a Horse's do.

Next come we to treat of the fifth pair, concerning the rise of which there are several disputes amongst Authours, (Doctor Willis, particularly, affirming that they spring from the Ring-like Process of the Cerebel:) but if their original be strictly inquired into, I cannot find, in an Horse, (however it may be in Humane Brains) but that they do take their be∣ginning as the others do, I mean from the oblong Marrow, onely a little below the former pair.

These consist of very many Fibres gathered together, some of which are soft, and some hard; so that they seem not to be so much one single pair of Nerves, as a collection of many small Nerves into one bundle, some of which are designed for one use and some for another, being for that purpose distributed into several Parts remote one from another; in which they serve, in some for motion, in others for sense: from whence it is, saith Doctor Willis, that there is that sympathy and consent of

actions in those several Parts to which these Nerves are distributed. As for instance, seeing some twigs go to the Eyes, others to the Palate of the Mouth, Nose, &c. therefore when we see or smell what pleases our Palate, our Mouth waters, as we commonly phrase it.

But that it may be better understood what and how many Parts have consent by means of these Nerves, it will be convenient to discover their division, progress and different insertion. Their Trunks, beginning or arising out of the oblong Marrow, as hath been shewed, are divided each of them into two notable branches, the first whereof tending streight downwards, and going out of the Skull by their proper holes, are in their descent towards the lower Jaw, (for whose Parts, saith my Authour, they are chiefly design'd) divided into many lesser branches, which pro∣vide for the Temporal Muscles, as also for the Muscles of the Face and Cheeks. From these branches also there go twigs or little shoots into the Lips, Gums, roots of the Teeth, Jaws, Throat, and to the farther end of the Palate, and also to the Tongue.

The other branches of this pair of Nerves are called the superiour or up∣permost branches, being larger than the other, and do thus run their course. After their division from the former they go streight forward for a little space under the dura mater nigh the side of the Bone called the Turkey chair, and over against the glandula pituitaria send little twigs to the Trunk of the Carotides, that makes the wonderfull Net: then they are inoculated into the Nerves of the sixth pair, and from thence send back sometimes one, sometimes two shoots a-piece, which being united with two other slips turned back from the Nerves of the sixth pair, do constitute the root or first trunk of the intercostal pair of Nerves, rec∣koned for the ninth pair, of which more shall be spoken by and by in the tenth Chapter.

After they have sent out the slips for the root of the Intercostal Nerve, these same great branches of the fifth pair are again divided each into two notable branches; the lesser and upper of which tends towards the globe of the Eye, and being again divided sends forth two other, the first of which is parted into two more, that go, one, to the Nose, and the other to the Eye-lids; and the second into four or five slips, that are mostly spent on the Eye-lids, but partly on the Coats of the Eye and its Glands.

The second or greater branch of the second division of these Nerves, being carried towards the orbit of the Eye, is again divided into two new branches: the lower of these being bent downwards, and cleaving it self into many shoots, is bestowed on the Palate and upper region of the Jaws; the other, being the higher, is carried beyond the orbit of the Eye, and passeth through a proper hole of the upper Jaw with the Vein and Artery which it twists about, and sends many slips to the Muscles of the Cheeks, Lips, Nose, and roots of the upper Teeth.

From this pair of Nerves being distributed to so many Parts, I say, may the consent of those Parts one with another be learned: and particularly this is worthy observation, That seeing they twist about the Bloud-vessels that go to the Cheeks, &c. hence it is, that when in Men and Women the Animal Spirits are disturbed by the imagination of some uncomely thing; as if they took care to hide the Face, they enter these Nerves dis∣orderly, whereby their twigs that embrace the Bloud-vessels do com∣press and pull them, so that the Bloud comes to flow too impetuously in∣to the Cheeks, &c. by the Arteries, and is detained there for some time

by straitning the Veins. But such observations belong more to an Anatomist of Humane Bodies to which they are proper, and therefore I shall return from this digression, which yet, I hope, will not be unplea∣sant to the inquisitive Reader.

Table XXV. (Book 25)

Represents the Brain of an Horse taken out of the Skull, with the Op∣tick, Eye-moving, and Pathetick Nerves; as also the Eyes with their Muscles fastned to them, having been taken out of the Skull without tearing or breaking of them.

• AAAA Shew all the bottom of the Brain covered with the dura mater.
• BB The Cerebellum or After-brain.
• CC Part of the medulla oblongata, or head of the Spinal Marrow.
• DD The Glandula pituitaria cut in two in the middle, and turned back to each side with the dura mater, the better to shew the Chink or Funnel.
• E The Chink called Vulva.
• FF The Mammillary Processes covered with the dura mater, otherwise cal∣led the Smelling Nerves or the first pair.
• GG The rise of the Optick Nerves, or second pair.
• H The uniting of the Optick Nerves.
• II Their separating again, and their course down to the Eyes.
• KK The moving Nerves of the Eyes or the third pair.
• LL The Pathetick Nerves reckoned by Doctor Willis for the fourth pair.
• MM Doctor Willis his fifth pair of Nerves.
• NN The heads of the Muscles of the Eyes, from whence they were all of them cut, to be separated and placed as in the Figure.
• OO The orbicular Muscle of the Eye in its natural situation in this Eye, but in the other Eye it is quite removed, the plainer to shew the course of the Optick Nerve to the Eye.
• PP The Muscle that pulls up the Eye, called Attollens, or superbus, the proud Muscle.
• QQ The humble Muscle or puller-down of the Eye, called humilis.
• RR The Muscle that brings the Eye inwards to the Nose, called Adducens, or bibitorius, the drinking Muscle.
• SS The Muscle that pulls the Eye outward, called Abducens, or indigna∣torius, the angry Muscle.
• TT The Muscle that brings the Eye towards its inner corner obliquely, and from that office is called obliquus inferior.
• VV The obliquus superior cum trochlea, whose office is to bring the Eye obliquely to its outward corner.
• WW The horney Tunicle or Coat of the Eye, with the pupilla or sight.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's brain and its eyes along with its muscles

TAB. XXV. page. 123.

CHAP. IX. Of the sixth and seventh pair of Nerves arising within the Skull.

The sixth pair. The seventh pair, or Audi∣tory Nerves.

THOSE Nerves which are by Doctor Willis reckoned for the sixth pair, are in the next place to be spoken to. These take their be∣ginning just by the fifth, and being for a little time hid under the dura mater, go at length out of the same hole of the Skull with the before-named fourth and fifth pairs, and are carried each with a single Trunk nigh to the Sockets of the Eyes; but so, that near the side of the Turky-chair-bone they are inoculated with the second or greater branches of the fifth pair. Whence they send back sometimes one, sometimes two twigs, which being united with the first or recurring branches of the fifth pair, as was noted in the foregoing Chapter, do constitute the beginning of the Intercostal Nerves. Afterward going a little forwards, each of them near the Orbit or Socket of the Eye, is divided into two branches; one of which is in∣serted into the Abducent Muscle of the Eye (or the Muscle that draws the Eye outward) which is seated in its outer corner; and the other be∣ing split into very many Fibres is bestowed on the seventh Muscle of the Eye, which is said to be proper onely to Brutes. Whether Men do wholly want them, let others examine; however, in the Animal we are treating of, they are very conspicuous and most easie to be found, concerning whose use I will speak when I come to a proper place for that purpose.

Next are the seventh pair to be examined, which by the Ancients (and by all untill Dr. Willis altered the account) were reckoned for the fifth pair. These are employed about the Sense of Hearing, and are therefore called the Auditory Nerves. They take their rise in Humane Bodies (ac∣cording to Doctor Willis) out of the lower side of the Annular or ringy protuberance of the Cerebel; but I am sure they do not so in Horses, in whom I have always found them to arise from the sides of the oblong Marrow.

They have each of them two Processes, one soft and the other harder; which distinction of them makes many be of the opinion that they are indeed two pair of Nerves, though usually they are accounted but for one.

The softest of these two Processes is properly called the Auditory Nerve, the which is carried through an hole of os Petrosum (or the craggy Bone) into the Cells of the Ear, which it cloaths with a most thin Membrane, and by which the sounds are conveyed to the common Sensory.

The harder part or process of the Nerve is said to conduce more to Motion than Sense; which passing out also through its proper hole in the aforesaid Bone doth immediately receive a twig from the eighth or wandring pair; after which it is streight divided into two branches; the first of which tending downward is bestowed on the Muscles of the Tongue and the Bone Hyoides; the other winding about the auditory passage and bending more upwards, is divided into three Shoots; the first of which answering to the Nerve of the former division, bestows certain

slips on the Muscles of the Lips, Mouth, Face and Nose, and so actuates some of the outward organs of the Voice, as the former doth some of the inner. The second of these Shoots being divided into many other lesser, is sent into the Muscles of the Forehead, as also to the Eye-lids. And the third or last of them doth run towards and spreads it self into the Mus∣cles of the Ears. Whence upon any unusual and astonishing sound the Ear is by a natural instinct prickt up, to listen to it the more attentively, and at the same time the Spirits flowing by other branches of this Nerve into the Muscles of the Eye-lids, cause them to be drawn as far asunder as is possible, that the Beast may have the clearer view of any threatning danger; which posture of the Eyes we call staring.

CHAP. X. Of the eighth and ninth pair of Nerves.

The eighth or wandring pair. The ninth or intercostal pair.

THE next pair of Nerves we are to treat of are the eighth, (com∣monly reckoned for the sixth) otherwise called the wandring pair, from their being distributed into many Parts, wandring as it were not one∣ly through the Head and Neck, but through many of the inferiour Parts of the Body both in the Chest and Paunch, furnishing them with nerves branching from them.

These Nerves do also arise out of the oblong Marrow a little below the Auditory Nerves. Their root or beginning consists of many Fibres, some of which are smaller and some thicker, to which is added a notable Fi∣bre or rather Nerve, much greater than the rest, coming from the Spinal Marrow of the Neck, which is joined with them and wrapped about with one and the same Coat taken from the dura mater, as if they were but one Nerve. They continue to be thus united till they have past with∣out the Skull, after which they are dispersed to several Parts. The Ac∣cessory Nerve is distributed to the Muscles of the Neck and Shoulders; and one notable Fibre of the eighth pair joins it self on each side to the harder Process of the Auditory or seventh pair, as also two others run to the Muscles of the Gullet and Neck. But the rest of the Fibres of the wandring pair continue together, going forward in one Trunk; and in∣stead of the other companion lately parted from them (I mean the Spinal or Accessory Nerve) they entertain a new one, which is the Intercostal, or Nerve of the ninth pair.

In this place where the said Intercostal Nerve is united with this Nerve of the eighth pair, there is made a notable Plexus, (that is, the Trunk of the Nerve in that place swells into a kind of tumour, resembling the joint or knot of a Cane.) For as the Intercostal Nerve is received into it, so out of it there springs a considerable branch, which being carried to∣wards the Throttle is divided into three twigs; the first of which is stretch∣ed out into the sphincter of the Gullet; the second being hid under the Shield-fashioned Gristle, distributes its Shoots to the upper Muscles of the Throttle, and particularly to the Muscle by which the Chink of the

Throttle is shut up. The third of these shoots or twigs going also under the Shield-fashioned Gristle, meets the top of the Recurring Nerve and is united with the same.

Below the aforesaid inoculating of the Intercostal with the wandring pair, which makes that Plexus before named, the Trunk of this latter goes streight down by the sides of the ascending Carotid Artery, on which it bestows some slips, and at the bottom of the Neck it sends out another twig into the Recurrent Nerve, but this it does onely on the left side.

From hence the Trunk of the wandring pair descends without any no∣ted branchings till it comes over against the first or second Rib, where out of a second Plexus many shoots and numerous Fibres are sent forth towards the Heart and its appendages, but not altogether in the same manner on both sides. Doctor Willis says, many more branches are sent from this pair towards the Heart in Beasts than in Men; for in these lat∣ter there are a great many twigs sent thereto from the Intercostal pair, whereas there are very few in Brutes; so that in both, the plenty of the one supplies the defect of the other.

There is (saith the same Authour) one notable difference worthy of note, of the two Recurrent Nerves that spring out of the Trunk of this eighth pair, viz. that that on the right side arises out of it higher, and winds about the Axillar Artery; whereas that on the left springs much lower therefrom, and twisting about the descending Trunk of the Aorta, returns back from thence, and ascends upwards where in its progress it sends forth shoots to divers Parts.

And that observation of the said Doctor is worthy to be taken notice of, viz. That the Nerves that pass towards the Heart of Brutes are much fewer in number than those in Men, of which (as also of their procee∣ding chiefly from the wandring pair) he gives this ingenious reason; That seeing Beasts want prudence, and are not much liable to various and divers passions, it was not therefore necessary that there should be two ways of deriving the Spirits from the Brain to the Praecordia, name∣ly one to bring Spirits to maintain the exercise of the vital function, and the other to minister to the impressions of the affections; but it is suffi∣cient that all the Spirits, for whatsoever office they are destin'd, should be conveyed thither by one and the same path.

Over against the Heart, the Trunk of the wandring pair sends forth many notable branches on either hand, which passing to the Lungs, are distributed through their whole substance along with the Bloud-vessels and branches of the Wind-pipe, which they climb upon and twist about: and as it descends by the sides of the Wind-pipe, it distributes also many slips into the Coats of the Gullet. After these branches have grown out of these Nerves, then is each Trunk, as it descends by the Gullet, divided into an outer and inner branch: but presently the outer branches unite with the outer, and the inner with the inner; and being so united, the former des∣cends by the outside of the orifice of the Stomach to its bottom, where it disperses it self; and the latter descending by the inside of the orifice of the Stomach, turns back there, and creeps along its upper part. To what other Parts the twigs of this eighth or wandring pair are extended, the Reader may learn in the description of the Parts themselves, in treating of which we have constantly observ'd to shew from whence their Nerves were derived.

After the wandring or eighth pair, by order of dissection the ninth and last pair of Nerves that spring from within the Skull are to be spoken to. Concerning the rise of which pair, there are various opinions; for some there be that will have them onely branches of the wandring pair, and that they take their beginning from them: but that opinion is rejected, since it is now made very apparent that they have another original, of which the often before-cited Doctor Willis was the first discoverer, whom I may be bold to follow, since none have given, nor 'tis probable can give a better account of them than that Learned man, who saith that the beginnings, (as also the different Trunks in the progress) of these Intercostal Nerves are easily distinguished from the former, notwithstan∣ding they do often communicate or join together by branches sent forth from one to the other.

But though they owe not their original to the wandring pair, and much less are to be reputed as branches of them, yet have they no proper root of their own, but do borrow their original from two or three recur∣ring branches of the fifth and sixth pairs near their origine, growing out of them as a Shrub upon another Tree or Shrub.

These Nerves thus constituted do afterward run out of the Skull by their proper holes, and presently on each side form a Plexus near that of the wandring pair, into which two Nervous Processes out of the first vertebral pair are inserted, and out of which there goes one twig or slip into the Sphincter of the Gullet, and another into the Plexus aforesaid of the wandring pair. Whence descending by the vertebrae of the Neck, by that time they arrive at its middle, they have each another greater Plexus, into which a large Nerve from a neighbouring vertebral pair is inserted, and from which proceed some twigs that uniting with others of the wandring pair are distributed all about the Praecordia, (that is, to the Heart and Lungs) as also one single one a little lower. 'Tis true, Doctor Willis affirms that this Plexus last spoken of is proper to Man onely; but since I find so little dif∣ference in the other Parts between a Man and the Animal I am treating of, I suspend my belief whether this Plexus may not be found in him also, though I have not been yet so diligent as to make any exact inquiry into it.

This Plexus is called the Plexus cervicalis, because it is formed in the Neck; whence the Trunks of this Intercostal pair descending by the Cla∣viculae or Chanel-bones into the Chest, as soon as they have arrived at the second Rib, each of them receives three or four branches from the Verte∣bral Nerves next above, whereby is made another notable Plexus, com∣monly called the Intercostal. From whence as its Trunks pass down by the roots of the Ribs, in every one of their Interstices, and even as low as the Os sacrum from every jointing of the Vertebrae each Trunk receives a Vertebral Nerve.

As soon as they are descended out of the Cavity of the Chest, and are come over against the bottom of the Stomach, they send forth on each side a notable branch, each of which tending towards the Mesentery makes its chief Plexus's, being in number seven, viz. five large ones which are upper, and two less that are lower. For each branch is presently divided into two other, and every one forms one Plexus, which make four; and the fifth is in the middle of these, being the largest: and these are the five upper.

The two lower Plexus are framed of two branches that spring from the Trunks descended as far as the lower part of the Loyns, and are distin∣guished by the names of Plexus infimus, and minimus, (i. e. the lowest, and the least) which two Plexus do furnish several Parts of the Lower Belly with Nerves.

Lastly, When this Intercostal pair have descended as low as the Os sa∣crum, and have furnished in their course the several Parts of the Lower Belly with Nerves, they bend towards one another and seem to be knit together by two or three Processes, and at length each of them ends in small Fibres which are distributed into the Sphincter Muscle of the Arse.

Thus have I given a description of the several pairs of Nerves arising within the Skull, in describing of which I must own my self obliged to several worthy Authours, whose Doctrine I have been forced much to follow and relie on in this particular, having not as yet made a thorow inspection into these most curious Instruments of the Animal Faculty my self: the chiefest of which Authours and whom I have most followed, is that accurate Tracer of them, Doctor Willis, to whom all that have trea∣ted of these Parts since him, have been so much beholding. But onely where he assigns some differences betwixt the course of the Nerves in Men, and all Brutes in general, I cannot easily acquiesce in his opinion in relation to a Horse, the frame of whose Body comes almost in all re∣spects so near to that of a Man's; however, till I have made a more exact scrutiny, I shall forbear contradiction.

Table XXVI. (Book 26)

Shews the basis or bottom of the Brain of an Horse taken out of the Skull, having the dura mater removed, the better to shew the rise of all the Nerves, and the other Parts of the bottom of the Brain.

• AAAA Shew the substance of the basis or bottom of the Brain.
• BB The Cerebel or After-brain placed in the hinder part of the Head.
• CC The Oblong Marrow.
• DD The Smelling Nerves, being the first pair.
• EE The Optick Nerves, being the second pair.
• FF The third pair of Nerves, which move the Eyes.
• GG The fourth pair of Nerves, by Doctor Willis called the Pathetick Nerves.
• HH The fifth pair.
• II The sixth pair.
• KK Doctor Willis his seventh pair, being the Auditory Nerves, which went formerly for the fifth pair.
• LLIII The eighth pair of Nerves, called otherwise the wandring pair, which before Doctor Willis were reckoned for the sixth pair.
• MM The Spinal Nerves, or Accessory pair, that unite with the wan∣dring pair.
• NN The ninth pair.
• OO The tenth pair (or rather the first of the Neck) arising from the further or hinder part of the Oblong Marrow near its going out of the Skull.
• PP The Trunk of the Carotid Artery cut off where it is divided into the fore and hinder part.

• QQ A branch of it going into the substance of the Brain.
• R The Infundibulum or Funnel.
• SS Two Glands or Kernels placed behind the Funnel.

[illustration] basal view of a horse's brain

TAB XXVI. pag. 128.

CHAP. XI. Of the Nerves arising from the Spinal Marrow, while it is in the Vertebrae of the Neck.

Thirty seven pair of Nerves spring out of the Spinal Marrow. The first pair of the Neck. The second. The third and fourth. The fifth. The sixth. The Accessory Nerve, that ascends to the Brain, and unites with the wandring pair.

HAVING treated of the several Conjugations or Pairs of Nerves which take their beginning from that part of the Spinal Marrow contained within the Skull, the usual and most natural method requires me next to proceed to those that spring from that part of it that is con∣tained in the Vertebrae of the Neck and Chine without the Skull.

We observed in a Chapter above, that in its whole progress from the Skull to the Rump-bones there spring from it thirty seven pair of Nerves. Particularly, while it is in the Neck, there arise out of it seven pair; while it is in the Back, seventeen pair; while it is in the Loyns, seven pair; and while it is in the Os sacrum, six pair: for as was noted before, such is the number of the Joints in the Rack-bone, betwixt every of which a pair of Nerves issues. Of all which we will treat briefly in order.

The first pair of the Neck, though it be commonly reckoned among the pairs of the Spine or Rack-bone, because it comes out from between the first Vertebra and the Skull; yet if we consider its rise, it ought rather to be reputed the tenth pair of the Brain; for it rises with many Fibres from the Spinal Marrow while it is yet within the Skull, but presently after its rise tends backwards or downwards (whereas all the rest that arise within the Skull go forwards.) This pair is chiefly bestowed on the Muscles of the Neck.

The second pair comes out between the first and second Vertebrae of the Neck, and is bestowed upon the Neck, Head and Face.

The third and fourth pair come forth of the holes that are between the second and third, and the third and fourth Vertebrae, and are spread into the Muscles of the Cheeks, as also into the Muscles that are common to the Head and Neck.

The fifth springeth forth between the fourth and fifth Vertebrae. A twig from each Nerve of this pair, being joined with the like twigs of the fourth and sixth, do make that remarkable Nerve that goes to the Midriff, and is called Nervus Phrenicus. The other branches of this fifth pair are distributed some of them backward and some forward into se∣veral Muscles; some of which do bow the Head; other twigs run to∣ward the Fore-legs, and are distributed into several Muscles about the Shoulders.

The sixth pair cometh out under the fifth Vertebra, and hath, as the rest, several branches; some of which go to the Muscles of the Fore-legs, and some to the Muscles of the Neck; but one particular twig helps to

make up the Trunk of the Nervus Phrenicus, joining it self with the afore∣said twigs of the fourth and fifth pairs.

The seventh pair cometh out of the hole common to the sixth and seventh Vertebrae, which joining with the foregoing pair, viz. the sixth of the Neck, and likewise with the two following, viz. the two first of the Chest, is dispersed into several Muscles of both the Shoulders, also to the Neck and Cheeks.

About where this seventh pair of Nerves arises, there springs another, found out by Doctor Willis, and by him called Nervus ad par vagum ac∣cessorius, which ascends up by the sides of the Spinal Marrow (growing in its course thicker and thicker) untill it reach up to the Skull, during which way it continues in one body without sending any branches to any Part. When it has entred the Skull, it then joins it self with the Fibres of the eighth pair of the Brain called the wandring pair, with which it takes its progress out of the Skull, but presently after separates from them, and is dispersed into the Muscles of the Neck and Shoulders, as was shewed before in the foregoing Chapter, while we discoursed of the wandring pair.

CHAP. XII. Of those Nerves that arise out of the Spinal Marrow whilst it is in the Vertebrae of the Back, Loyns, and Os sacrum.

The first pair of the Back. The second pair. The remain∣ing fifteen pair. The first pair of the Loyns. The second pair. The third pair. The remain∣ing four pair. The first pair of Os sa∣crum. The remain∣ing five pair. How the Nerves spring out of the Spinal Mar∣row.

FROM the Marrow of the Back proceed seventeen pair of Nerves, there being in an Horse so many Spondyls or Back-bones; which number exceeds that of the Joints of the Back in Humane Bodies, there being in them but twelve, and so accordingly they have no more than twelve pair of Nerves from the Marrow within the Back.

The first of these pairs springeth out of the hole which is common to the last Vertebra of the Neck and the first of the Chest: Each of them (as are likewise all the following) is presently divided into two branches, of which the formore is larger than the hinder. The formore joineth it self with the two last of the Neck, and so goeth the greatest part of it to the Fore-legs; onely one little twig that ariseth out of it before such con∣junction, is bestowed upon some of the Muscles of the Breast and Neck; and the smaller which is the hinder, is bestowed upon the Muscles seated on the Back.

The second pair springs out between the first and second Vertebrae of the Chest, whose formore branch being united with the first of the Chest, together with it is joined with the sixth and seventh of the Neck, which all together make one Plexus, out of which proceed most of the Nerves that are inserted into the Muscles of the Shoulders and Fore-legs. But before the aforesaid formore branch unite with the foregoing, it sends forth a twig to the Intercostal Nerve (or Nerve of the ninth pair) des∣cending

down the Thorax or Chest, as also do all the rest of the re∣maining fifteen pair.

That branch of this pair which is called the hinder branch, hath the same distribution with the hinder of the foregoing pair, and therefore I will omit speaking particularly of it: Neither do I think it necessary to treat of every particular of the remaining pairs that proceed from the Mar∣row of the Back; first, because my design is to be as brief as possible both in these and all other Parts, that I may not make my Volume swell too big; and in the next place, the remaining pairs coming out of the several holes betwixt the jointings of the other Bones of the Back as these already spoken of do out of the former, it would be but repeating almost the same things over again so to describe particularly every pair. I will therefore onely speak thus much of them in general, that after they are come out of their several holes of the Vertebrae, they do each of them im∣mediately divide themselves into two branches, whereof the formore (being, as hath been said, the larger) sends one twig to the Intercostal Nerve, and the remainder of it is bestowed on the Muscles between the Ribs, called the Intercostal Muscles, both external and internal, and a few twigs also upon the other Muscles of the Chest that lie upon the Ribs; and lastly, a twig or two on the obliquely descending Muscles of the Lower Belly. The hinder and lesser branches presently upon the division bend backward to the Spine, and are spent upon the Muscles and Skin of the Back.

Next come we to speak to those Nerves that spring from that part of the Spinal Marrow that is contained within the Vertebrae of the Loyns, which are in number seven pair according to the number of Bones in that Part. The first of which cometh out between the first Vertebra of the Loyns and the last of the Back. Each of them, like those of the Back, is presently divided into two branches; the formore of which is bestowed upon the fleshy part of the Midriff, especially its two Processes, and partly on the Muscle Psoas; and the hinder of them is inserted into the Musculus longissimus or longest Muscle of the Back.

The second pair come out between the first and second Vertebrae of the Loyns under the Muscle Psoas; the formore of whose branches is be∣stowed upon the Muscle that fills up the Cavity of Os Ileum or Haunch-bone (which Muscle is the second bender of the Thigh) also a twig of it is sent to the Musculus fascialis, and to other neighbouring Parts. The hinder branch passeth into the Buttock Muscles, and doth lose it self in the bodies of those Muscles.

The third pair of these Nerves of the Loyns come forth between the second and third Vertebrae of the Loyns, from under the Muscle Psoas, as the former did. The fore branch is dispersed down the hinder Leg to the Cambrel or Hock, furnishing several Muscles about those Parts with Nerves. The hinder branch is bent back and dispersed through the Mus∣cles of the Loyns, supplying them with Nerves.

The other four pair of these Nerves of the Loyns, like the former, come forth from between the other four Vertebrae of the Loyns. Their fore branches are dispersed into most of the Muscles of the Buttocks and hinder legs; also some twigs are sent from them to the Muscles that raise the Yard, some others to the neck of the Bladder; and in Mares some twigs are sent to the Matrix or Womb. And the hinder branches are car∣ried backward, and are bestowed upon several Muscles of the Back.

In the next place I come to treat of the remaining Conjugations or pairs of Nerves that spring from the Spinal Marrow, which are those that come forth of the holes of Os sacrum, and are in number six pair, there being in the said Bone six Vertebrae, with pretty wide holes for the coming forth of the Nerves.

The first of these pair issueth out between the last Vertebra of the Loyns and the first of Os sacrum in the same manner as those that spring out of the Vertebrae of the Loyns, and like them is divided into two branches; the foremost of which is a great part of it mixed with those other of the Loyns, and with them runs down to the hinder Legs, sup∣plying several Muscles of those Parts with Nerves. And the hinder fur∣nisheth the biggest Buttock-muscle and other Parts thereabouts with Nerves.

This pair of Nerves, as I have said, come out side-ways like the Nerves of the Loyns, and are divided like them afterwards into a fore and a hin∣der branch; but the other five pair come out before and behind; but before they go out of the Bone, they are on each side double, and on each side one Nerve goes into the fore-parts and the other into the hinder. Those that go into the hinder-parts are dispersed as those of the Loyns were, that is, into the Muscles that lie upon the Os sacrum, and Ileum; but those that go into the fore-parts are dispersed into some Muscles on the fore-part of the Thigh; also some twigs of them are sent to the Cods, the Bladder, and to the Muscles of the Fundament.

Table XXVII. (Book 27)

Represents all the Nerves of the whole Body, as well those that arise from the Oblong Marrow within the Skull, as those that spring from the Spinal Marrow without the Skull, (taken out of a French Authour.)

• AAAAAA Most of the Nerves that spring from the Oblong Marrow within the Skull.
• B The said Oblong Marrow.
• CC The Eyes with the optick and moving Nerves branched to them, the one making their Coats, and the other serving to move them.
• DD Doctor Willis his eighth pair or the wandring pair of Nerves, with their course through the Middle and Lower Belly.
• From the Figure or Cipher 1 to 7. are shewn the Nerves that spring from the Spinal Marrow while it is in the Vertebrae of the Neck.
• From the Figure 1 to 17. are shewn those that spring from it while it is in the Vertebrae of the Back.
• From the Cipher 1 to 7. are shewn those that arise out of it while it is con∣tained within the Vertebrae of the Loyns.
• From the Cipher 1 to 6. are shewn those that arise out of it while it is in the Os sacrum, which Nerves are branched into all the hinder Parts and down the hinder Legs, imparting to them both Sense and Motion.

[illustration] anatomical view of the nervous system of a horse

TAB XXVII pag.132.

Thus have I given a brief description of the several Conjugations or Pairs of Nerves that spring from the Spinal Marrow, shewing where they arise, which way they pass, and to what Parts they run; which

may be of great use to our Practitioners, if they will but take the pains to inquire into this part of Anatomy; for by understanding the be∣ginning or rise of the Nerve that furnisheth an affected Part, one may learn where to apply the Remedy. As for instance; When from any outward cause, as from a fall, stroke, bruise or any other accident, any Part hath lost either Sense or Motion or both; or from any inward cause a Palsie happens, by which the use of some particular Limb is taken away; it would conduce very much to the cure if the rise of the Nerves of such Part were known by the undertaker of the cure of those Affec∣tions; for the Medicine is to be applied always to the beginning or rise of that Nerve that passes to that Part, or as near to it as is possible.

I should here put an end to this discourse of the Spinal Nerves, if it were not convenient to add a word of the manner how they arise out of the Marrow, which is very accurately described thus by Doctor Willis.

On each side of the Spinal Marrow, near its outer edge four or five Fibres arise in its upper side, and as many in its lower: both which companies penetrate first the pia mater or inmost Coat of the Spinal Marrow, and then the dura mater or middle Coat, (which is as it were a common case to them all) with distinct Fibres: but afterwards as both companies of Fibres are to pass through the third Membrane (for the Spinal Marrow has three) they meet together, and being invested with the Coat they borrowed from the second Membrane, they become as it were one Trunk: which Trunk passing out of the jointing of the Vertebrae, is again divided into several Nerves design'd for sundry Parts. After this manner in the whole tract of the Spinal Marrow have the several vertebral Nerves their origine; and in those places where the brachial (or fore-leg) and crural Nerves pass out, the Spinal Marrow encreases both in thickness and breadth, and the nervous Fibres are lar∣ger.

All which that it may be the better apprehended, I have thought good to annex the following Figure from Him, onely encreasing the num∣ber of the pairs of Nerves as they are found to be in an Horse.

Table XXVIII. (Book 28)

Shews the Spinal Marrow taken whole out of the Rack-bone, where the Membrane that cloatheth it is dissected and turned back on each side, the better to shew the beginnings and productions of all the vertebral Nerves, (from Doctor Willis.)

• AA Shew the top of the Spinal Marrow, where it is cut off from the Ob∣long Marrow.
• B The Spinal Artery seeming to descend through the whole Marrow, which however is made up of Arteries brought into it from between the se∣veral jointings of the Vertebrae.
• CC The Spinal Nerve coming from the fifth or sixth Vertebra of the Neck to the beginning of the wandring pair.
• DD Portions of the Membrane cloathing the Marrow dissected and turn∣ed back.
• EEEE The Spinal Nerves sent out of the upper margin of the Marrow by bands, with which the like bundles springing from the lower margin also meet, and join together all into one Trunk within the junc∣tures

• of the Vertebrae, then being separated again without them, they are carried into their respective provinces.
• Ff Nerves springing within the region of the Neck.
• Gg Nerves destinated for the Shoulders and Fore-legs, where both the Marrow is thicker in bulk, and the Nerves greater.
• Hh Nerves going out about the Back and Loyns, where both the body of the Marrow is again become smaller, and the Nerves are somewhat slenderer.
• Ii Nerves destinated for the Buttocks and hinder Legs, where both the Me∣dullar body and the Nerves are again larger.
• K Nerves going out of Os sacrum.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's spinal marrow, nerves, and arteries

TAB. XXVIII pag. 133.

CHAP. XIII. Of the Eye-lids, Eyes and their several Parts, viz. their Coats and Humours.

The Eyes, their name. Their num∣ber. Their figure. Their Parts. The Eye-lids. 1. The Tunicles of the Eyes. Adnata. 2. Sclerotica. 3. Choroides. 4. Retina. The Humours of the Eyes. The watery Humour. The Crystal∣line. The Glassey.

THE Eyes are termed in Latin Oculi, from the word occludo to shut, or from occulto to hide, because they are hid by the shutting of the Eye-lids. They are the Organs or Instruments of Sight, consisting of many Parts, viz. of Humours, Membranes, &c.

Their number is by all People known to be two, and that for the se∣curity and perfection of sight; that if one be defective, or should by acci∣dent be lost, the other may supply its place and office, though not alto∣gether so perfectly.

The Eye alone, when its Muscles, and the Nerves and Bloud-vessels that enter into it, are removed, is of a round figure, both that it might move the better, and also that it might the better receive the visible Rays.

Adjoining unto the Eyes are the Eye-lids, which contain them as it were, and serve as a safeguard or cover to preserve them from external injuries: United with them are the Fat and Muscles: and lastly the Parts that constitute the Eye it self are the Membranes, Humours, and Vessels.

The Eye-lids do serve as Curtains to the Eyes, by which dust, Flies, or any thing else that might annoy them, is kept out. They are made up of the Skin, the membrana Carnosa or fleshy Pannicle, and Muscles; but both the Muscles and fleshy Pannicle are in these Parts very thin. On the inside next the Eye they are lined with a Membrane that is propaga∣ted from the Pericranium, which is very smooth, that it may move glib∣ly upon the Eye. The extremities or edges of the Eye-lids are hard and gristly, partly to strengthen them, and partly that they may meet the more exactly, and not fall one over the other. And thus much shall suffice for the outward or containing Parts of the Eyes, viz. the Eye-lids.

As for the Muscles, we shall defer speaking of them till the next Book. And as to the Fat, it differs not from that which is intermixed among the Muscles in other Parts, and serves here to keep the hinder-part of the Eye and parts adjoining moist, that the Eye may move the more glibly in its Socket.

We shall therefore next proceed to the Eye it self, and describe the Parts of which it consists, and first its Tunicles or Coats, the first or outmost of which is a common Coat, arising from the Pericranium, and is spread over all the white of the Eye. By this is the Eye kept firmly within its Soc∣ket or Orbit. It is of exquisite sense, and hath many small Arteries and Veins creeping through it, which are very discernible when there is any inflammation in that Part. It is called Adnata.

This Adnata being removed, the proper Tunicles or Coats do appear, being in number three; the first of which from its hardness is called scle∣rotica. This arises from the dura mater, or (which is all one) from the out∣most Coat of the Optick Nerve. It is somewhat hard, and opaque on its backside; but on its fore-part, because it is transparent like an Horn, it loses its name of sclerotica which it had from its hardness, and is called tunica cornea or horney Coat from its clearness.

The second proper Coat lieth next under this, and goeth by the name of Choroides, because it resembles that Membrane that inwraps the Foal in the Womb, called Chorion. As the former did arise from the dura ma∣ter, so doth this from the pia mater, (or if you will, from the inner Coat of the Optick Nerve.) All over the back-part of the Eye, this Coat on its inside is blackish, that the Idea's received in might appear the more illustrious.

This Coat is perforated before as wide as the pupilla or sight of the Eye is in compass, to permit the rays of visible Species to pass in to the cry∣stalline Humour. Which fore-part, because so much of it as is from under the white is somewhat of the colour of a Grape, is called uvea: by which name the fore-part of this Coat is distinguished from its hinder-part, as the former was by the name of cornea, from sclerotica; which I thought fit to take notice of in this place, that the Reader might not take the four names for four several Coats, when they are but two, and so might go about to find what indeed there is not.

From the circumference of the uvea, where its duplicated Membrane bends it self back to the crystalline Humour, there is formed a Ligament called ligamentum Ciliare, because it consists of slender Filaments or Fi∣bres like the hairs that grow upon the Eye-lids in Humane Bodies, run∣ning like so many black lines from the circumference of the uvea to the sides of the crystalline Humour; which Humour they encompass, and widen or constringe it as there is occasion, by contracting or opening the perforation of the uvea.

The third or inmost proper Tunicle of the Eye is called Retina or the Net-fashioned Coat, because it encompasses the vitreous or glassey Hu∣mour like a Net.

This Coat is made of the medullar substance of the Optick Nerve, be∣ing very thin, and rather of a dark than lightsom colour, mixed with an obscure redness. Its figure is semicircular, round on its outside, and hol∣low within, containing in it the vitreous Humour, and receiving into its bosom the crystalline Humour also, having its Fibres extended as far as the ligamentum Ciliare, to which these Fibres afford animal Spirits for the continuance of its motion. It is observed that if this Coat be taken and put into warm Water, shaking it a little to wash off the mucous or snotty matter that cleaves to it, and then be held up to the light, the Fibres or Filaments will appear very numerous like the threads of the finest Lawn.

Having done with the Tunicles or Coats of the Eyes, I come next to speak of the Humours contained within those Coats, which are in number three, that is the Aqueus or watery, the Vitreus or glassey, and the Cry∣stalline: of which the last for its use is the most noble, and is placed al∣most in the centre of the Eyes.

Of these Humours the Aqueus or watery is outermost, being thin and fluxive like Water, from whence it hath its name. It fills up that space that is betwixt the horney or outmost Coat and the crystalline Humour in the fore-part of the Eye. It is observed in Men, that if any clotted and coloured bits or motes swim in this Humour, the shapes of several Insects, as Gnats, Flies, Spiders and the like, will seem to be flying before their Eyes, as hath been oft declared by Men who have had this Affection. I am therefore apt to believe that many Horses are not without such kind of congealed bits floating in this Humour, that without any evident or external cause to occasion it, are much given to start, especially with their Head; the representation of the aforesaid Insects moving before the crystalline Humour, which makes them fear something or other is still flying into their Eye.

Yea it is in Humane Bodies farther observed, that oft times several of these coloured Particles in the watery Humour do gather together, and unite so close, that they grow as it were into a skin or film, spreading before the sight of the Eye, which causes an absolute blindness, and is that Disease which Physicians call a Cataract; which Disease the Animal we are treating of is much subject to, though we have not so proper a term for it as this is.

The next Humour is the Crystalline, which is so called from its excee∣ding bright and shining colour, being as transparent as Crystal; It is it self of no distinguishable colour, that it might receive the Idea's of all colours.

It is placed betwixt the watery and glassey Humours, but not exactly in the middle or centre of the Eye, but rather towards its fore-part. It is inclosed in the bosom, as it were, of the glassey Humour, and is flattish on the fore-side, but rounder behind.

This Humour is believed to be the primary or chief instrument of the sight, because it collects or receives the rayes of visible things; though the tunica Retina doth afterwards stop them by its dark body, and com∣municate them to the common Sensory by the Optick Nerve.

The third and last of the Humours of the Eye is the Vitreus or glassey, so called because in colour it is like to molten glass. This is not of so thick a consistence as the crystalline; but it much exceeds both it and the wa∣tery in quantity. It is round in its hinder part but plane before, onely it has a little hollowness in the middle wherein the crystalline Humour is placed as in a mold or case. It fills up all the hinder part of the globe of the Eye, as also some part of the sides.

The uses of this Humour are said to be, first, to nourish the crystalline Humour, as Galen conceived; next, that the visible species received into the crystalline Humour might not be reflected, or return defiled by dark and coloured tinctures, whereby the sight should be disturbed; but that they might have a free passage through it to the Retina.

Table XXIX. (Book 29)

Represents the several Coats, Humours and Muscles of the Eyes.

Figure I.

• A Shews the crystalline Humour.
• B The Iris or circle about the sight of the Eye.

Figure II.

• A The crystalline Humour.
• B The watery Humour encompassing the crystalline on its fore-side.

Figure III.

• A The back-side of the crystalline Humour.
• B The vitreous or glassey Humour receiving the crystalline into its bosom.

Figure IV.

• AAAA The common Coat of the Eye or Adnata, cut asunder and thrown back.
• B The Cornea or horney Coat.
• C The Choroides, whose fore-part is called uvea by reason it is of the co∣lour of a Grape.

Figure V.

Shews the Eye taken out of the Head with its Muscles in situ, not being loosened from either their rise or termination.

• A The Optick Nerve cut off near the Brain.
• B The rise of the Muscles.
• CC Their several terminations or endings into the Coats of the Eye.
• D The common Coat of the Eye called Adnata or Conjunctiva.
• E The Cornea or horney Coat.
• F The Apple of the Eye.

Figure VI.

Shews the fore-part of the Eye with its Muscles removed from their originals, and placed round the Eye according to the motions they perform.

• AAAA The right Muscle that lifts up the Eye, called Attollens.
• B The Adnata Tunicle.
• C The Tunica cornea or horney Coat.
• D The Pupilla or Apple of the Eye.
• E The right Muscle that draws down the Eye, called Deprimens.
• F The Muscle that draweth the Eye from the Nose towards the outer cor∣ner, called Indignatorius.
• G The Muscle called Bibitorius, which brings the Eye inwards towards the Nose.
• H The superiour oblique Muscle called Trochlearis, which carries the Eye slantingly to its outward angle.
• I The inferiour oblique Muscle, that moves the Eye slantingly to its in∣ward angle.

[illustration] the muscles and membranes of a horse's eyes

TAB. XXIX. pag. 137.

[illustration]

Fig. 1.

• A
• B

[illustration]

Fig. 2.

• A
• B

[illustration]

Fig. 3.

• A
• B

[illustration]

Fig. 4.

• AAAA
• B
• C

[illustration]

Fig. 5

• A
• B
• CC
• D
• E
• F

[illustration]

Fig. 6

• AAAA
• B
• C
• D
• E
• F
• G
• H
• I

[illustration]

Fig. 7

• A shews y^e optick nerue
• B the seuenth muscle
• ...jndignatorius.
• ...Obliquus. minor
• ...Deprimens
• ...Atallens
• ...Trochlearis
• ...Bibitorius

CHAP. XIV. Of the Ears and their several Parts.

The Auricle. Its Parts. Its use. The inward Ear. Its Parts. The Dium. Four little Bones. The Hammer. The Anvil. The Stirrop. The orbicular Bone. The use of these Bones. The Cavities of the Ear. Concha. Fenestra ovalis. Fenestra ro∣tunda. The Laby∣rinth. Cochlea.

THE Ears (which according to order we come now to speak to) are the instruments of Hearing, framed by Nature with no less Art than the Eyes; yea so full of intricate Meanders they are, and con∣sist of so many Parts, that they will be very hard to be deciphered. Not∣withstanding I will endeavour to give what satisfaction I can, by what I have learned by Inspection, as well as by the Writings of the most accu∣rate Anatomists.

First then the Parts of the Ear are either Outward or Inward. The out∣ward part is called Auricula, which is onely an adjuvant or assisting in∣strument of Hearing, collecting in its hollowness some part of the Air that is the vehicle of the sound, as it is passing by.

The Parts whereof the outward Ear is framed, are either proper, or common. The common are the Scarf skin, the true Skin, and membrana nervea, or nervous Membrane. The proper are the Muscles, Veins, Arteries, Nerves, and the Gristle. Of the Muscles we shall speak in their proper place, viz. in the next Book that treats of the Muscles. The Veins of the Ear are branched to it from the external Jugular Vein; the Arteries from the Carotid Arteries; and the Nerves from the second pair of the Neck be∣ing joined with the harder Process of the seventh pair. As to the Gristle of which for the greatest part it consists, that is a substance that is fittest for this place; for if it had been bony, the Ear would both have been im∣moveable,

and so could not have turned it self toward the sound, as we see the Horse can now move it; and also it would have been in conti∣nual danger of being broken off: and if it had been fleshy or membra∣nous onely, the Horse's Ears would have flap'd down like Hounds Ears, which would have been a great deformity.

The uses of this outward Ear are, first, to serve for an ornament to the Head; secondly to receive, or at least to help to receive the sounds; for first, it gathereth them being dispersed in the Air; secondly, it doth moderate the fierceness of their motion, so that they come gently to the Tympanum, or Drum, and beat moderately against it.

The internal or inward Ear hath also sundry Parts, contained in the Os petrosum, as the outward Ear is fasten'd upon it.

These Parts are first the Drum with its Cord and Muscles; secondly, four little Bones; thirdly, its Cavities with the implanted Air; and last∣ly, its Vessels.

The Drum, called Tympanum, is a nervous, round and transparent Membrane, of most exquisite sense, arising from the softer process of the Auditory Nerve expanded. It is exceeding dry, that it might give the better Echo to the sound. It is also strong, that it should the better en∣dure outward harms or injuries. It hath a Cord behind it for strength∣ning and stretching of it, even as the Military Drum hath. As for its Muscles, we shall describe them in the next Book.

Within the Membrane of this Tympanum or Drum there is an internal Cavity, called Concha, in which are several little dry Bones, which have in them no Marrow, nor are covered with any Membrane or periosteum: yet at their ends where they are joined together, they are bound with a small Ligament, proceeding from the before mentioned Cord of the Drum.

These little Bones are four in number; the first of which is called mal∣leolus, that is, a little Hammer. This Hammer hath a round head, which by a loose Ligament is jointed into the Cavity of the second little Bone that is called the Anvil; which head is continued into a small neck, that reacheth beyond the middle of the Drum and adhereth to it. About its middle it hath two Processes, the one of which, being shorter, hath the tendon of the internal Muscle inserted into it; and the other, being longer, hath the tendon of the external, the Drum intervening.

The next of these little Bones is by Anatomists called Incus, the Anvil, having one head and two feet, being therefore more like to one of the grinding Double-teeth than to an Anvil.

The head of this is indifferent thick, having in the top of it a little smooth hollowness, which receives the knob or head of the Hammer. The smaller foot of the Anvil is tied to the top of the Stirrop by a loose but firm Ligament, but the thicker foot resteth upon the Os squamosum, or scaly Bone.

The third is called the Stirrop, having a perforation in the middle, and is fixed before or rather round that passage that is called the oval Window, by which sounds pass out of the first Cavity into the second called the Labyrinth. Which Cavities are wrought by Nature in the Rocky-bone, and contain in them the inbred Air. Now as the crystalline Humour of the Eye is the chief instrument of the Sight, in respect of the reception of visible Images or Forms; so is this inbred Air of the Ear, the chief in∣strument which receiveth the forms of Sounds, although there be another more noble Organ which judgeth of them, as shall be shewn by and by.

The figure of this Bone is in Horses triangular, very like the Greek Let∣ter Δ, (but in Men it is represented to be of somewhat another shape) which Letter is like such a Stirrop as we often see in old Hangings (not such Stirrops as are used now-a-daies) from its similitude unto which I suppose it hath its name.

The upper part of this Stirrop is small, as you may see by the figure of it, upon which the longest foot of the Anvil stands.

The fourth and last of these little Bones of the Ear was not long since found out by a diligent Anatomist, named Franc. Sylvius, till whose time there were but three Bones of the Ear reckoned.

This Bone from its round shape is called orbiculare. It is tied by a slen∣der Ligament to the side of the Stirrop, in that part where the Stirrop is fastned to the Anvil.

The use of these four Bones is not, that by hitting one against another they should produce a sound, but first, to defend the Membrane of the Tympanum or Drum, lest it should be torn and beat inwards by the vio∣lent shaking of the outward Air against it, in loud sounds, such as Thun∣der, or the noise of great Guns and the like.

Secondly, They are assisting to the Sense of Hearing on this manner: The external Air beats against the Drum, which is driven against the Hammer, and this strikes upon the Anvil, as the Anvil bears against the Stirrop; which as it does, more strongly or weakly, so does the Stirrop open the oval Window more or less, and proportionably the sound ap∣pears to the common Sensory, louder, or lower.

We come in the next place to speak of the Caverns or Cavities, by some called Dens, which are formed in the midst of the Os petrosum or Rockey-bone where it bunches out most, and are three in number.

The first of them is to be seen as soon as the Membrane of the Drum is taken away, and is called Concha, from its resemblance to the shell of a Taber. Others call it the Basin, and some the Den. It has its first deno∣mination, (which is that which it is most commonly known by) not so much from its shape, as from its use; for when the Membrane is struck upon by any outward sound, the Echo is made in this Cavity, even as it is in the hollow of a Taber, or in our common Drum when the Parch∣ment is beat upon; for in all these the sound is principally occasion'd by the Air included in the Cavity.

Nature hath placed in this Cavity divers Instruments; as first, some serving for pulsation, such are the four Bones, the Cord and the Muscles, (of all which before.) Secondly, others for conduction into the other Ca∣vities; such are two perforations or little holes, commonly called Win∣dows. And lastly, a third sort for Expurgation; such are the passages which lead, one into the Palate, and another into the Nostrils, by the help of which the pituitous Matter which is collected in this Cavity is discharged.

The first of the perforations being the upper and larger, has added to it the Epithet Oval, alluding to its figure. This opens inwards or back∣wards, and that with a pretty wide mouth, into the Labyrinth; but is kept shut next the Concha by the basis of the Stirrop, when sound ceases. The other being the less and lower, is of a round shape (and therefore styled Rotunda.) This is always open having no covering, and is divided by the Os squamosum into two Pipes, one of which tends to the Cochlea, the other into the Labyrinth.

The second of these Cavities of the inward Ear is (from its windings and turnings) called Labyrinthus, the Labyrinth. If one consider it in its whole dimension it is round, and much less than the former. Its windings are circular, yet the circles run not quite round the Cavity, but come as much short of an intire circle as the Gristles of the Wind-pipe in the Throat do, or rather more, so that they are commonly termed semi∣circular. Their use is to modulate the sounds so as they may be leisurely communicated to the Auditory Nerve which is dispersed through the Membrane that invests this Cavity, or rather makes it. It has three pret∣ty wide holes, two opening into it, and one out of it. The two that open into it, are the oval and round holes, mentioned in the foregoing Para∣graph. By these the internal agitated Air passes out of the Concha into the Labyrinth. That which opens out of it is that which passes towards the third Cavity called Cochlea, into which the aforesaid Air passes further by it out of the Labyrinth. Besides these there are four other very small holes for the ingress of the nervous Fibres that are inserted into the Mem∣brane that cloaths this Cavity.

The third and last inner Cavity is called Cochlea or the Snail-shell, from the resemblance it hath with that Shell, especially in its Spiral winding; which, if you take off the upper part of the Bone, will plain∣ly appear.

This Cavity is far less than the former two, being indifferent long but crooked. Into this endeth one Pipe from the round hole of the first Ca∣vity, and another from the second, just now mentioned.

It is invested, as the other Cavities are, with a soft and thin Membrane (after the same manner as the sockets of the Teeth are) into which (as into that of the Labyrinth) the slender Fibres of the Auditory Nerve do enter, and that through three or four several holes which are all very small.

It is filled with the internal inbred Air as well as the former, by which the Echo is made to the impulse of the external Air upon the Tympanum that is the vehicle of the sound: And the Auditory Nerve being inserted into the Membrane that cloaths the Cavities, is affected therewith, whereby it comes to be communicated to the original of the Nerves where the com∣mon Sensory is seated, that judgeth and distinguisheth of them.

Into these three Cavities that make up the Internal Ear, are the same Bloud-vessels distributed as to the External: The Nerves are also from the same conjugation, namely the seventh pair; onely whereas the harder Process of the Nerve goes to the External Ear, it is the softer that comes to the Internal.

Table XXX. (Book 30)

Represents the inner structure of the Ear or Organ of Hearing, with the Auditory Bones as well lesser as bigger.

Figure I.

• AA The inside of the Temple-bone, or Os temporis.
• BB The spongy Bone, or Os spongiosum.
• C The hole into which the Auditory Nerve is inserted.
• D The greater winding of the Cochlea or Snail-shell.

• E The three bony half-circles that form the Labyrinth.
• F The Malleus or Hammer in its situation.
• G The Incus or Anvil.
• H The Stapes or Stirrop.
• I The External Muscle of the Ear.
• K The Internal Muscle.

Figure II.

• aaa Shew the Labyrinth.
• b The Cochlea or Snail-shell.
• c The oval hole before which the Stirrop is seated.
• d The Aqueduct found out by Fallopius.
• ee Little holes to let out the Veins and Arteries.
• f The Fenestra rotunda, or round Window.

Figure III.

Shews the Cochlea and Labyrinth dissected.

• aa The intermediate space dividing the Cochlea into two wreaths.
• b The round hole that makes the passage out of the Concha, into the lower wreath of the Cochlea.
• c The windings or circumvolutions of the Labyrinth opened.
• d The Fenestra ovalis, or oval Window.

Figure IV.

Shews the Os petrosum cut through the middle, the plainer to shew the round circle over which the Drum is placed.

• A The round circle covered with the Tympanum or Drum.
• B The Malleus or Hammer in its natural situation.
• C The Incus or Anvil in the like.
• D The Stapes or Stirrop also in situ.

Figure V.

Shews the Incus or Anvil taken out and freed from the Hammer.

Figure VI.

Is the Hammer taken out also and freed from the other Parts.

Figure VII.

Is the Stirrop out of its place.

[illustration] the structure of a horse's inner ear

TAB. XXX. pag. 141.

[illustration]

Fig 1

[illustration]

Fig 2.

[illustration]

Fig. 3.

[illustration]

Fig 4.

[illustration]

Fig. 5.

[illustration]

Fig. 6.

[illustration]

Fig. 7.

CHAP. XV. Of the Nose, Lips and Mouth.

The external Parts of the Nose. The Skin. Bones and Gristles. Vessels. The internal Parts. The nervous Membrane. The muscular Membrane. Spongy Flesh. Sieve-like Bone. The uses of the Nose. The Lips. Their sub∣stance. Their use. The Mouth. The Parts containing. The Parts contained. The Gums. The Palate. The Uvula. Its use. The falling of it a Distem∣per incident to Horses as well as Men. The Tongue. Its Mem∣branes. Its substance. Its Vessels. Its uses. The salival Ducts. The use of the Slaver.

HAVING described all the Organs of Seeing and Hearing, we come in the next place to the third outward Sense which is the Smelling, of which the Nose being the Instrument, we are now to enter upon its description.

As therefore the Ear is divided into an External or outward, and an Internal or inward part; so will we divide the Nose, it being made of the like parts.

The External Parts are the Skin, the Muscles and Gristles, Vessels of all sorts, as also many Bones, and those distinguished or divided by seve∣ral Sutures.

The Skin wherewith the Nose is covered is thin, and without any fat under it, for beauty sake; for if there had been any fat naturally in this place, it might have been collected to that quantity or bulk, as to have become a great deformity to the Creature: for which reason Nature hath so ordered it, that in this place the Skin sticketh so fast to the Muscles and Gristles, that it is not easie to part it from them without renting.

The Bones which make the Cavities of the Nose are some proper, and some common: of which hereafter in the Fifth Book of the Bones. The Gristles are five in number, of which we shall also discourse in the same Book.

The Vessels of the Nose are, Veins from the Jugular Veins, and Arte∣ries from the Carotides; also Nerves from the third pair of the Brain, which send to each side of the Nose one branch, (besides the olfactory Nerves or first pair, called the Mammillary Processes.)

As to the Internal Parts of the Nose, we shall begin first with the Coat or Skin which compasseth the whole capacity of the Nostrils. This Coat is said to arise from that Skin of the Brain which is called the dura mater; and is not peculiar to this Part alone, but is as well common to the Mouth, Palate, Tongue, Larynx, &c. as to the Nostrils; onely in the Nostrils it is thinner and of exquisite sense; for any thing blown up the Nose that is of a biting nature, so irritates it, as immediately to cause the Horse to sneeze. This Skin hath on its back-side abundance of little Glands or Kernels, in which the Rheum is separated that runs out by the Nose.

There is also another Skin belonging to the inside of the Nose called the muscular Membrane, which is said to draw together or contract the Nostrils.

In the upper part of the Nostrils there is a red fleshy spongious sub∣stance, with which the spongy Bones are filled up.

There are also seated at the upper end of the Nose next to the Brain over both Nostrils a Bone which from its likeness to a Sieve, (by reason of the innumerable little perforations or holes that are in it) is called Os cribriforme or Sieve▪like Bone. In the inside of this Bone are seared those two productions of the Brain called precessus mammillares, which are the

true Instruments of Smelling, and are therefore better called the Smelling-nerves. There pass from them through the holes of this Sieve-like Bone many little Strings or Fibres, which are dispersed into all the inward ca∣pacity of the Nose, serving there to be the immediate Organs of Smel∣ling, but the Scents are communicated to the common Sensory of the Brain by the aforesaid Mammillary Processes.

The principal use of the Nose is for Smelling, which is performed in this manner. The Nostrils are adjuvant Instruments of Smelling even as the External Ear is of Hearing. For as the Ear gathereth the sounds that fly in the Air; so when smells exhale out of odoriferous Bodies into the Air, the Horse by taking in his breath at his Nose, (which he for the most part does, and not in at his Mouth as we often do) the scents ac∣companying the Air ascend up the Nostrils to the top of their Cavity, and so to the before-named Sieve-like Bone, where affecting the little Fi∣bres of the Olfactory Nerves that come, as hath been said, from the Mammillary Processes through those little holes, those Fibres communicate their sensation to the Processes, and these convey it to the original of the Nerves or common Sensory, by which it is distinguished.

Inferiour uses of the Nose are, first, to take in the breath by; and next, to serve as a common Shore or Sink for the discharge and evacua∣tion of the superfluous flegmatick Humours of the Bloud.

In the next place we come to treat of the Lips (or the external Parts of the Mouth) which are two in number, one upper and the other lower. These are framed of a soft fleshy fungous substance, as also of some pro∣per Muscles covered with the hairy Skin on the outside of them, but on the inside they are covered with a Membrane common to the Mouth and Stomach.

The uses of the Lips are first to gather the Hay or Oats or other Food into the Mouth; secondly to retain, or help to retain it, while it is chewing; thirdly, they serve to keep the Gums and Teeth from exter∣nal Injuries.

Within the Lips is the Mouth, whose Parts are either containing or con∣tained, that is, either those that make the Mouth, or such as are con∣tained in it.

The Parts whereof the Mouth is made, are of two sorts, some fleshy, others bony. The fleshy Parts are the Lips, of which we have already spoken; also the Muscles of the Cheeks and lower Jaw. The bony are the upper and nether Jaws, with the Teeth fixed in them.

All these Parts (as also the whole inward capacity of the Mouth) ex∣cept the Teeth, are lined with a thick Membrane or Skin, which in the Palate is rugged and knotty as it were, by reason of the many little Glands on the back-side of it, by which part of the Slaver is separated into the Mouth; and this Membrane reduplicated maketh the Ʋvula, as some think; though others more probably hold, that it is of a peculiar substance.

The Parts contained within the Mouth are divers. As first the Teeth and the Bone Hyoides at the root of the Tongue; of both which we shall treat in the Book of the Bones.

Besides these there are the Gums, the Palate, the Ʋvula, the Al∣monds, the Tongue, and the Muscles that serve to move it.

The Gums being in number two, are made up of a hard fleshy sub∣stance, destitute of motion, that so the Teeth might be better fastned in their Sockets.

The Palate is the upper part of the Mouth, and is called by that name, from its being as it were fenced or paled in with Teeth. It extends from the back-part of the Mouth to the Fore-teeth, but is not so much hollow∣ed in an Horse as in Humane Skulls. It hath in it some eighteen steps or bars which reach from the inside of the Fore-teeth to the very farther end of the Mouth. It consists of Bones, of a peculiar glandulous Flesh, and a thick Coat; which Coat is full of little perforations or holes for the Sla∣ver that is separated in the little Glands (above-mentioned) to distill through into the Mouth.

The Ʋvula is a red, fungous and longish kind of a Kernel seated in the inward or backer-part of the Palate, where the Nostrils open into the Mouth, hanging directly downward with a small but bluntish end just over the chink of the Larynx.

The use of this Ʋvula is said to be, first, to moderate the coldness of the Air drawn in by the Lungs. This is Bartholin's opinion, who says further, that from this use of it it comes to pass, that such Persons as want it, die Phthisical. Whether that be so or no I cannot tell: but the main use of it in an Horse I take to be, secondly, to hinder the Water, when he drinks, from passing out of his Mouth into his Nostrils.

This Kernel is very necessary to be known by all professed Farriers, for such knowledge might have contributed to the preservation of many Horses which for want of it have been lost. Such are those which by reason of Humours too much flowing to this Kernel have had it so much distended, that it hath hung down into the Throat to that degree, that the Horse hath not been able to swallow, there being no passage left for the Meat to go down; but when he has chew'd it and endeavours to swal∣low it, instead of its going down the Gullet into his Stomach, it comes out at his Nose; whereby it comes to pass that although the Horse have never so good a Stomach, yet for all that he comes to starve to death with hunger.

This my self have been sometimes an Eye-witness of, and have oftener heard of it by others; but could never see nor hear of any of them, that had any help for this Distemper; their endeavours proving still unsuccess∣full by their not well understanding either the Distemper, or the Part affected.

This swelling of the Ʋvula in Men is called by Physicians Casus Ʋvu∣lae; and by the Vulgar, the falling down of the Palate of the Mouth. It is a Distemper that commonly comes upon taking some great cold; but is very ordinarily cured not by Physicians onely, but by every old Wo∣man, who knows that by holding Pepper or Ginger or the like against it, the Rheum is thereby drained out of it, and it contracts it self to its due and natural bulk, whereby the Party is speedily relieved. How far such Medicines might contribute to the cure in Horses, I shall forbear in this place to give my opinion, because as I have already said, I do by God's assistance design to publish a Book of Cures by it self, but was willing in the first place to teach my Practitioner the frame and use of the Parts, and to hint some of those Diseases they are incident to, which we have least understood: and by that time the Ingenious Student is come to un∣derstand them, I shall I hope be ready to publish a new and certainer way of curing them than has hitherto been practised.

Next we come to speak of the Tongue and its Parts. It is called in La∣tin, Lingua, à lingendo, from Licking. It is in figure long, broad and

thick, especially towards the root. It is covered with two Skins; the outward, cloathing onely its upper part, which in an Horse is almost as smooth as in Men, though it is much rougher in Oxen, and the like. This Membrane is very porous.

The inward Skin covers the whole Tongue, the lower side as well as the upper, and is thin and soft, having many Teat-like Protuberances bunching out of it, which are inserted into the pores or holes of the out∣ward Coat.

Concerning the substance of the Tongue there is diversity of opinions; for some would have it of a glandulous, others a musculous substance; and some, that it has a peculiar substance: to which opinion I most in∣cline, because I do not find in any Part of the Body a substance like it.

It hath Vessels of all sorts; Veins from an inward branch of the exter∣nal Jugular; Arteries from the Carotid Arteries; and Nerves of two kinds, one from the fifth and another from the eighth pair of the Brain.

The Tongue hath at its root several Muscles, by which all its motions are performed, of which we will speak in the next Book. And besides the Muscles, there is also at the root of the Tongue a considerable quan∣tity of Fat, with which the Muscles are interlarded as it were.

The uses of the Tongue are, first, to taste the Food that is offered, whereby (as well as by the smell) the Horse distinguisheth whether it be good and wholsom for him or not; and in the next place it helpeth the chewing of the Meat, by tossing it to and fro, and after it is chewed, it assisteth in turning it down to the Stomach.

There is to be found out by dissection underneath the root of the Tongue a large Kernel, from whence two Pipes, called salival Ducts, do spring, one from the fore, and the other from the hinder-part of it: These two at a small distance from the Gland unite into one, which runs pret∣ty streight forward under the Tongue toward the Chin: but in the mid∣dle way, as Doctor Wharton affirms, there are other pretty remarkable Glands (in an Horse) that stand on each side this Duct, and discharge themselves into it. When it is come near the Chin at the Bridle of the Tongue, it ends into other small Glands, through which it pours into the Mouth part of the Slaver that keeps it continually moist.

Besides this Duct there are two others of the same use, which do arise out of the Kernels below the root of the Ear, (called Parotides) and run on the outside of the Jaw-bone to the middle of that Muscle of the Cheek that is called Buccinator, where they open into the Cavity of the Mouth, into which they discharge the before-named Liquor, which in these and the other Glands of the Mouth is separated from the Bloud.

Now we must understand, this Slaver (or Saliva) is not merely an Hu∣mour excrementitious, as that is which is separated in several Kernels in other Parts of the Body, as particularly in the Guts; for this is of great use, not onely in that it continually moistens the Mouth, as also the Hay and Oats whilst they are in chewing; but being swallow'd down with the Meats, it doth further the fermentation and concoction of them in the Stomach, whither part of this Juice also goes with every morsel. It is of the same nature with that which in Men we call the Spittle, and of the same use.

And here it may not be amiss to recite a story I have read of a Person that had one of these external salival Ducts wounded, because I have ob∣served (the last Spring at Greenwich) the same accident happen to an Horse, with the same symptom. The Story is thus: A Noble-man being

wounded in the middle of the Cheek with having a Glass thrown at him; the Wound was quickly almost closed, but in the middle of it, through a little hole, there leisurely distilled out of it for a long time a watery and clear Liquor, which for all that ever the Surgeon could doe, hindred the intire closing up of the Wound for almost two years. This Liquor did distill out of the salival Duct, which was not then found out; but at last an actual Cautery being applied to the end of the Duct, the Liquor was by that means stopt, and the Wound presently healed. The Horse that I saw had a clear watery Humour running in like manner out of the side of his Cheek, but in that quantity, that in a few hours time (especially in the time next after his drinking) it would make his Manger all a float. A Farrier had him under cure there, and my opinion being ask'd, I ad∣vis'd to sear it, but he that had him in hand not knowing the occasion of this flux of Humour, thought rowelling of him would serve; but what he did to him, I had no opportunity since to inform my self.

Now seeing a like case to this may happen, that my Practitioner may understand where to apply his Cautery (or red-hot Iron) for the stan∣ching of the Liquor, I have thought it convenient to annex a Scheme of each of these salival Ducts; that under the Tongue being found out by Doctor Wharton, and the other arising from the Parotides and running on the outside the Gums, by one Steno, a Dane.

Table XXXI. (Book 31)

Fig. I. Shews the salival Duct that springs from the Glands under the Ear called Parotides, (in a Calves Head.)

• aaaa The conglomerate Parotis.
• bb The conglobate Parotis.
• c The lymphatick Vessel tending downwards from the conglobate Gland.
• dddd The roots of the salival Duct.
• eee The Trunk of the said Duct.
• ffff The outer branches of the Jugular Vein.
• ggg The Nerves, which as they are inoculated one with another within the Gland and the head, so without these places as in h.
• ii The twigs of Nerves accompanying the salival Duct.

Fig. II. and III. Shew the Gland under the Tongue (called the maxil∣lar Gland) with the Duct that springs from it, (from Dr. Wharton.)

• A The hinder part of the Gland.
• aaa The hinder roots of the salival Duct.
• B The fore-part of the Gland.
• bb The fore-roots of the said Duct.
• C The hinder Trunk of the same Duct, climbing upon the Tendon of the dou∣ble-belly'd Muscle.
• D The return of the same and its union with the Fore-duct.
• E The common Trunk of the salival Duct.
• FG The double-belly'd Muscle.
• H The progress of the said Trunk towards the Fore-teeth of the lower Jaw.

• I The opening of the salival Duct under the tip of the Tongue near the Fore∣teeth of the said Jaw.
• K The round Gland that lies by the Maxillar.
• L A row or rank of asperities (or roughnesses) under the side of the Tongue.
• M The Tongue thrust to one side out of its place, that the exit of the Vessel may be seen.
• N The Tonsil or Almond of the Ear.

[illustration] anatomical views of a horse's salival duct

TAB XXXI p. 147.

[illustration]

Fig. I.

[illustration]

Fig. II.

[illustration]

Fig. III.

Having now gone through the first division of the Body, which is into three Venters or Regions, wherein I have principally treated of the Parts contained in them; it now remains that I examine the Parts wherewith the Venters themselves are made up, laying each apart by themselves, that their natures, differences and figures may better appear. The Parts of this nature are the Flesh and Bones, of which two it will be most pro∣per to begin with the Flesh, both because it maketh the greatest part of the bulk of the Body, and also because of its quick tendency towards pu∣trefaction, whereas the Bones are of a durable nature, and so no incon∣venience will happen upon deferring the examination of them to the last.

The End of the Third Book.

THE ANATOMY OF AN HORSE. BOOK IV. Of the Muscles.

CHAP. I. Containeth a description of the several sorts of Flesh, and an Apology for not expressing the Muscles so particular∣ly in Figures as I have done other Parts of the Body.

IN the First Book Chap. 6. treating of the Muscles of the Belly, I affirmed that all the fleshy Parts of the Body are muscular; which must be understood not of all Flesh in general, but onely of Flesh properly so called. For there are four kinds of Flesh: First, that which is properly so called, such as is that of the Muscles; second∣ly, that of the Bowels, as of the Liver and Spleen, and the like; thirdly, that of the Glands or Kernels; and fourthly, membranous Flesh, such as is that of the Stomach, Guts, &c.

The Flesh of the Muscles is soft and ruddy, consisting of Fibres and coa∣gulated or curdled Bloud, called a Parenchyma. For the Bloud in its cir∣culation as it passeth out of the Arteries into the Veins, is extravasated out of the Arteries into the very fleshy substance, out of which it is not

so clearly imbibed or drunk up by the Veins, but that some particles of it adhere to the fleshy Fibres, and fill up their interstices, that is, the empty spaces between one and another: which Bloud congealing and fixing there, does, I say, together with the Fibres constitute that substance which we properly call Flesh.

As to the other Parts that serve to constitute a Muscle, as also of its use, and the reason of their sundry denominations, I discoursed so fully in the above-mentioned sixth Chapter of the First Book, that I shall not need to add any thing to the same purpose here: onely I think my self in this place obliged to give the Reader the reasons, why I have not represented the Muscles in Figures particularly, as I have done other Parts of the Body, nor dare be so confident of my exactness in the description of them; for

First, The Muscles are so numerous, that to have exprest them all in Figures would have made this Volume at least half as dear again as it is; as may be guest by the number of Copper-plates (in Folio) that Mr. Brown has represented the Muscles of an Humane Body upon; for they are near fourty, and these of an Horse must have required rather more than fewer.

Secondly, Though some knowledge of the Muscles, especially the ex∣ternal ones, is necessary that one may know in Tumours which way to make incision (that is, lengthways of the Muscle and not across, for fear of rendring it useless by cutting its nervous Fibres asunder) yet to be so very exact in the knowledg of all of them, is matter rather of commen∣dable curiosity than real usefulness.

But thirdly, The chief reason is (for I will confess it) that I have not had the opportunity my self to raise and inspect every particular Muscle, so that I must have delineated several of them by guess and upon trust, whereby I should both have betrayed my own importune vanity, and have led my Reader 'tis like into several Errours. Neither probably may my ver∣bal description of them be truly exact as to those which I have not my self viewed: though seeing in those that I have inspected, I have found so great a similitude between the Muscles of an Horse and those of a Man, I hope I shall not be much wide of the truth, if I presume of the same Ana∣logy or likeness in those that I have not inspected.

Now as to the likeness of a Man's and an Horse's Muscles the Reader may be pretty well satisfied if he compare those of an Horse's Belly (de∣lineated with the autopsie or self-view of the Graver) exprest at the end of the sixth Chapter of the First Book, with those of a Man's: or take but a prospect of the next following Figure which represents an Horse, several of whose Muscles I have preserved, and after having raised them, placed them in their several places again, the Horse standing up in a Press with them on, just in the same posture as he appears in the Figure.

To these reasons I might add the impossibility that most of my Profes∣sion should ever attain to an exact knowledge of them; so that this Book being principally designed for their use, I should have been at a great deal of cost and more pains to no great purpose. Now the difficulty lies in this, That most of the names of the Muscles being originally Greek, and several of them such as can no way aptly or intelligibly be rendred into English; and considering the mean education of most Farriers, that few of them un∣derstand so much as Latin; I say considering these things, 'tis impossible to describe them to their capacity, and therefore I have contented my

self with a more superficial and succinct description of them. And though for my own part I may without vain-glory pretend to a more liberal edu∣cation than most of my Profession, so that the Cramp-names (as we call them) of the Muscles are no such hindrance nor discouragement to me as they will be I fear to most others; yet I hope no curious and ingenious Anatomist, that knows how much time and pains is necessary to be spent upon the exact examination of any one Part, will think me sluggish and supine, that I have not in those few years that I have applied my self to this study, attained as yet to the full knowledge of all the Parts of this Beast that I anatomize. And as on the one hand I hope I may my self attain to greater skill in this Art than I have yet arrived at; so on the other hand I would not be guilty of the vanity of thinking to monopolize it, but shall both desire and hope that others will make up what I shall leave imperfect. But thus much I hope may serve for mine Apology with all ingenuous Men, I shall therefore return from whence I have di∣gressed.

A second sort of Flesh is that of the Bowels, as of the Liver, Spleen and Kidneys, whose substance hath been held to be for the greatest part parenchymous, or to consist of an affusion of Bloud congealed about the Vessels; though latter Anatomists do affirm them to be for the greatest part glandulous. And to these hath used to be reckoned the Heart; but that is of a substance far different from these, as being truly muscular, and may therefore more properly be ranked with the Muscles, though it be of a more hard and compact frame than them also.

A third kind of Flesh is that of the Glands, such as the Thymus, which by some is called the Sweet-bread, and is situated near the Collar-bone just within the Chest, of which we have already treated in the Second Book. Of this sort of glandulous Flesh likewise are the Parotides or Ker∣nels below the Ears, also the Tonsils (commonly called the Almonds of the Ears) very many Glands in the Mesentery and other Parts of the Bo∣dy; to which may be added the Pancreas seated in the Lower Belly, which is commonly known by the name of the Sweet-bread.

Now the Glands being spermatical Parts, their parenchyma or fleshy substance is not sanguineous or bloudy, as that of the two former kinds of Flesh; but spermatical, composed out of the very first rudiments of the embryo or conception. And though the Glands are many times en∣creased in bulk, as particularly in Humane Bodies affected with the King's-Evil, and in Horses which upon taking great Colds have the Tonsils or Almonds of the Ears, and also the Parotides or Kernels below the Ears, so swelled and sore, that the Horse will not be able to swallow his Drink, or at least not to hold down his Head to take it, but must be forced to have it given him in a Pail held up as high as the Manger; yet I say, the en∣crease of these Kernels happens not upon any extraordinary afflux of Bloud flowing to those Parts, but by a flegmatick Humour falling upon them, and when the Distemper is cured they return again to their former small∣ness, being according to Nature incapable of that growth that is natural and proper to the Parts called sanguineous. To this sort of Flesh (say some Authours) may the Brain be reduced.

The last sort of Flesh is that which is called Membranous, such is that of the middle Coat of the Gullet, Stomach, Guts, Womb and Bladder. For though the inmost and outermost Coats be purely nervous or mem∣branous, yet the middle consists of two ranks of Fibres and a Paren∣chyma

that adheres to them, which is discoverable particularly in the Guts, when they are scraped by Men that make strings for musical In∣struments, for then you may perceive a great deal of slimy stuff to be scraped off them, which is this Parenchyma: For that they lose no part of their membranous or fibrous substance is evident, in that their strength is rather increased than diminished by such scraping. This Coat not∣withstanding it is muscular, yet its Parenchyma differs in many regards from that of the sanguineous Muscles, particularly in that it is spermatical as was said before of the Glands.

Now the Parts that consist of these three latter sorts of Flesh are all de∣scribed in their proper places; but those that consist of the first sort, which as I have said, is most properly so called, I intend to treat of in this Book which containeth the Doctrine of the Muscles.

CHAP. II. Of the Muscles of the Eye-lids.

The Eye-lids have three pair of Mus∣cles. One pair to open them; and Two to shut them. The Fore∣head Mus∣cles.

HAving in the sixth Chapter of the First Book spoken of the several Parts of which a Muscle is compounded, and also of the differences and actions of them; as likewise of what use they are in general; (to which Chapter I refer the Reader) My proposed method requires that I should now come to speak to every particular of them, beginning with those of the Lower Belly: but having in the before-cited Chapter of the First Book treated particularly of them, I will in this place pass them by, desiring the Reader to consult the said Chapter for his satisfaction; for I love not to be tedious with repetitions.

The next Muscles then that we come to speak to according to order, are the Muscles of the Eye-lids, which are in number three to each Eye.

The first of these is called Rectus or Aperiens, from its office, which is to lift up or open the Eye-lid.

This is seated in the upper part of the orbit of the Eye, and springeth with a slender but fleshy beginning from the same place as the Elevator of the Eye doth, (which is at the hole which the Optick Nerve passes through into the orbit) and holds the same course with it, being of the same figure and substance, that is, fleshy; till at last parting from it, with a pretty broad but thin Tendon, it is inserted into the Gristle at the edge of the upper Eye-lid, where it serves (as hath been said) to open the Eye-lid by lifting it up.

The two other Muscles of the Eye-lid are called Shutters, and other∣wise semicircular, because each runs the length of one Eye-lid: though there are some that call them circular or orbicular, supposing them to be but one Muscle which compasses the Eye-lid round as with a circle. But in Bodies that are very musculous or fleshy, they have by curious Anato∣mists been plainly discovered to be two, and that the rather, because each receives distinct Nerves from different places. They lie betwixt the car∣nous Membrane and the inner smooth Skin that lines the Eye-lids.

That which draweth down or shutteth the upper Lid is larger, and ariseth from the inner corner of the Eye, from whence it passeth across, though with a kind of an oblique line, towards the outward corner, grow∣ing presently fleshy and broad, so that it filleth up all the space betwixt the Eye-brow and the lowest edge of the Eye-lid, and so at last is inserted into the outward corner of the Eye.

The lesser of these two is that which moveth the lower Lid in order to shut it. This is rather membranous than fleshy at its origin, (being also very thin) and takes its rise at the inner corner of the Eye with a sharp beginning as the former did: whence being carried overthwart, it pro∣ceeds to the middle of the Eye-lid, where it becomes something fleshy, and continues its course to the outward corner, which it turns about, and ascending a little to the upper Eye-lid, is with an indifferent broad end inserted into it.

There is another pair of Muscles which though not belonging properly to the Eye-lids, yet seem to contribute something to their motion up∣ward or opening, which therefore may reasonably be described in this place, and those are the musculi frontales, or Fore-head Muscles. These arise from the Skull near the coronal Suture, and descend with streight Fibres to the Eye-brows, where they terminate. By the help of these Muscles the Skin of the Fore-head to which they closely stick is contrac∣ted or wrinkled, and so by consequence the upper Eye-lid's a little drawn upward.

CHAP. III. Of the Muscles of the Eye.

The Eyes have seven pair of Mus∣cles. Their rise and insertion. Whence they have their names. Attollens and Depri∣mens. Adducens. Abducens. The upper ob∣lique Muscle. The lower ob∣lique Muscle. The orbicular Muscle. The manner of raising the Muscles of the Eye.

TO the moving of each Eye of an Horse do belong seven Muscles; though in Humane Bodies there are accounted but six, because the circular or suspending Muscle is said in them to be wanting.

Of these seven, four are streight, two oblique or slanting, and the other circular or round. The streight serve to move the Eyes upwards and downwards, to the right hand and to the left. The oblique move them obliquely; and the circular or round one keeps the Eye suspended up in its place.

These Muscles have all their rise from one and the same place; they have also the same progress and structure, and their termination is alike: for they do all arise from the Membrane that invests the Orbit of the Eye near the hole where the Optick Nerve passeth from the Brain into the said Orbit, touching one another at their beginning; but they immediately separate, and in their course become still more and more bulky and fleshy till their middle, which is round and buncheth out with a kind of a bel∣ly; but as they grow toward their ends or terminations they degenerate from their fleshy into a thin membranous substance, which is inserted into the horney Coat of the Eye, encompassing it as far as it is white.

These Muscles have their several appellations or names from the several motions they perform; as first, The first of the streight Muscles, from its office of pulling up the Eye, is called Attollens: The second is called Deprimens, because it is an Antagonist to the former, for as that pulls the Eye up, so this by a contrary motion pulls it down again. From which offices they have also in Men other two names given them by Anatomists: the first is called the proud, because when the Eye is pulled up, a Person looks high and lofty or proud: and on the contrary when the Eye is pul∣led down by the other Muscle, he looks with a contrary countenance, submissive and humble, for which reason this second Muscle is called hu∣milis or the humble Muscle.

The next, being the third streight Muscle, is called Adducens, because it pulleth the Eye towards the Nose. It is otherwise called Bibitorius, because it performs that motion of drawing the Eye to the Nose when we drink, for then we commonly look into the Pot or Glass that is before our Nose.

The fourth streight Muscle is called Abducens or Indignatorius, from its office of drawing the Eye to the outer corner, which turn or aspect of the Eye betokens anger or scorn.

Now these four Muscles have these four several motions, when they work severally; but when they all four work together, they have but one action, which is to keep the Eye steady and fixt, which Physicians call a tonick motion: but in Beasts that have the suspending Muscle, the tonick motion is performed mainly, if not altogether, by that Muscle. You have these four, as also the three other lively represented to you in the twenty fifth Table of the Third Book, p. 123.

The next are the oblique Muscles, being as hath been said, in number two pair, which from their rolling the Eye about are called circumagen∣tes. The first of them is called obliquus major vel superior (or the upper∣most and largest oblique Muscle) being longer than the other, but rather slenderer. It springeth from the upper but inner part of the Orbit of the Eye by the hole where the Optick Nerve comes through, (as do all the rest.) From hence it passeth streight to the upper part of the inner cor∣ner of the Eye, where it endeth in a small round Tendon, which passeth through a transverse Cartilage or Gristle there placed, called Trochlea (or the Pully) and thence continueth its course slantingly along the upper part of the Eye, till at last it is inserted into the outmost Skin of the Eye between the Tendons of the Muscles Attollens and Abducens. This rolleth the Eye towards its inner corner.

The second oblique Muscle is called obliquus minor sive inferior, or the less and lower oblique Muscle, being shorter than the other, though ra∣ther thicker. This springeth from a chink which is in the lower part of the Orbit of the Eye, beginning with a fleshy head, from whence it as∣cends with a slanting course towards the outward corner of the Eye, about which it turns, and then ends in a short roundish and nervous Ten∣don, which meets with the Tendon of the other oblique Muscle, and seeming to unite with it, is inserted in the same place. This rolls the Eye towards its outer corner.

The seventh Muscle is called the orbicular or round; likewise Musculus suspensorius, the suspensory Muscle; and lastly, because it is onely found in Brutes, it hath the name given it of septimus Brutorum, the Brute's seventh Muscle. It is short and fleshy, encompassing the Optick Nerve,

and is inserted into the hinder part of the Cornea. You have the figure of it in the afore-mentioned twenty fifth Table of the Third Book, where∣in it is removed from one Eye, but in the other it is plainly represented in situ. The use of this Muscle, as hath been said, is to sustain the Eye, lest by looking continually down toward the ground, it should hang too much outward; and by it also the tonick motion is performed.

Having discoursed of these several Muscles and of their several actions and uses, I think it very necessary to set down the manner of raising them, that he that will take the pains to examine them in the Creature it self, may the better find them, without violating of them unawares, whereby he will lose his labour, and miss of satisfaction in the inquiry after them.

You must then, after the taking the Eye and all its appurtenances clear out of the Orbit (if you will make your dissection that way; but if you will take the pains to remove the Bones of the Orbit and not cut the Eye out, it will be much better, for then you are sure to see the Muscles in their natural situation: but whether you remove the Bones, or take the Eye out, you must I say) make your dissection on this manner: First, you must with a pair of Scissers cut off the Fat and the Skins before you raise any of the Muscles, making them as clean as you can. Then begin with them in order thus: first raise the larger or upper oblique Muscle, then the lesser or lower oblique; then the four streight Muscles: but you must onely raise the larger oblique Muscle and not remove it, un∣till you have seen and removed the other five; for when the others are removed, you will the plainer perceive how the Tendon of the said Muscle passeth through the Pully, that is seated in the inner corner of the Eye.

After you have had a full view of these Muscles before-named, then mind the last and seventh Muscle, which still encompasseth the Optick Nerve, reaching from the place where the other Muscles had their rise, quite down to the hinder hemisphere of the Eye.

CHAP. IV. Of the Muscles of the Nose.

The first pair of Abducent Muscles. The second pair. The first pair of Adducent Muscles. The second pair.

THE Nose of an Horse so far as it is gristly, is moved several ways, which motions are performed by these following Muscles. First it is drawn together to shut the Nostrils by the Adducent or Claudent Muscles: and secondly it is drawn asunder to open the Nostrils by the Abducent or Aperient Muscles. And to the performing each motion there belong two pair of Muscles; so that in all there are eight Muscles that belong to the Nose. I shall describe the two latter pair first, whereof

The first pair arises from the upper Jaw-bone, near the first proper pair of the Lips, and is inserted partly into the lower part of the Alae, or grist∣ly circumference of the Nostrils, and partly into the upper part of the upper Lip.

The other pair begins at the top of the Nose near the Eye, with an acute and fleshy beginning, whence descending somewhat slantingly, and in its passage lying upon each side of the Nose, it doth at last end at the Alae, as the other pair did, but with a broader and fleshier end. Each of these Muscles being narrow at the beginning, and ending broad, is in shape triangular or three-square, like the Greek Letter Δ delta, from whence it is called by some deltoides. The use of this pair, as also of the former, is to draw the gristly circumference or wings of the Nostrils upwards, and so to widen and open them.

The other two pair are called the Adducent or closing Muscles; the first pair of which is external, arising about the root of the Gristle, and ascending cross-ways to the ridg or tip of the Nose, into which it is inser∣ted. This pair is more fleshy than the other, though indeed there is not much Flesh in any of the Muscles of the Nose, and therefore it will re∣quire a very accurate Anatomist to raise any of them, and to distinguish them.

The second pair of the closing Muscles are internal, and are hid in the Cavity of the Nostrils under the inner Coat that cloaths them. These are not so fleshy as the former. They arise from the end of the Bone of the Nose, and spreading into a kind of membranous substance, they de∣scend to the gristly circumference of the Nostrils where they terminate.

The first pair of these Muscles being contracted depress the Alae or Gri∣stles of the Nose, and the latter pair draw them inwards, and so close the Nostrils; to which motion the orbicular or round Muscle of the upper Lip is assistant, for by its drawing the upper Lip downwards, it doth at the same time constringe or straiten the Nostrils.

CHAP. V. Of the Muscles of the Lips and Cheeks.

The first com∣mon Muscle, called the foursquare Muscle. The second common Mus∣cle, called the Trum∣peter. The first pro∣per pair of Muscles of the Lips, cal∣led par At∣tollens. The second pair, called par Abdu∣cens. The third pair, called Zugomati∣cum. The fourth pair, called Deprimens. The fifth pair, called Obliquè de∣trahens. The odd Mus∣cle, called Orbicularis.

TO the Lips do belong several pair of Muscles, some of which are proper to the Lips alone, and others are common both to the Cheeks and Lips.

The common are on each side of the Face two. The first of which is called detrahens quadratus, or the four-square drawers aside of the Cheeks and Lips. This shews more like a Skin than a Muscle, being broad and thin, onely it is interlaced with fleshy Fibres, which makes it to be ac∣counted a Muscle.

It arises from one of the Vertebres of the Neck on its outside, as also from the Shoulder-blade, the Collar-bone and Breast-bone, from whence it ascends with oblique or slanting Fibres up to the Chin, Lips, and root of the Nose; which Parts it draws downwards with a slanting motion.

The second common Muscle of the Cheeks and Lips, is called in Hu∣mane Bodies Buccinator the Trumpeter, because in blowing a Trumpet the main stress lies upon this Muscle; though others derive that name from Bucca the Cheek, because it is the most considerable Muscle of it,

and on this account it may retain the same name in an Horse: or it may be called the Contracter, from its action, which is to contract the Cheek.

It springs from almost the whole length of the upper Jaw-bone, and is inserted into the whole length of the lower, at the root of the Gums. It is thin and membranous, and interlaced with divers Fibres running sun∣dry ways; and hath the inner Coat of the Mouth so closely and firmly adhering to it, that it is scarce separable from it. This Muscle is seated under the upper part of the former, and is spread over the whole dimen∣sion of the Cheek.

Its use in Horses and other Brutes is to be as a Hand to help the Mouth in its chewing motion; for as the Meat in chewing falls on the outside of the Teeth, betwixt them and the Cheek, this Muscle helps to turn it over the Teeth again, that it may be sufficiently broken and ground, and made thereby the readier for concoction when it is turned down to the Stomach.

Besides this office of assisting in chewing, it doth serve also at other times upon any occasion to move the Cheeks and Lips.

Next come we to the Muscles that are proper to the Lips onely, and those are by Anatomists accounted five pair and one odd one. The first of them is called par Attollens, or Lifters up of the Lip. This pair spring from the upper Jaw, where it makes the hollow of the Cheek. At their rise they are broad and fleshy, from thence passing down obliquely along the Cheeks, each of them is inserted into its own side of the upper Lip, near the Nose. The use of these Muscles, if they both of them act toge∣ther, is to draw the upper Lip directly upwards and outwards; but if onely one acts, then is but one side of the Lip drawn upward oblique∣ly. You may plainly see these Muscles work, if you take notice of a Ston'd Horse after he hath smelt to a Mare; for then he will most times hold up his Head in the Air, and turn up his upper Lip till he hath almost turned it inside outwards. And the like you may see many Horses doe, if you onely let them smell to another Horse's Dung.

The second pair is called Abducens, the Drawers of the Lip on one side. This arises at the Cavity that is under the Os jugale with a fleshy and round beginning, which is cover'd with some Fat, especially in fat Horses; from whence they run down on each side to the middle of the upper Lip, into which they are inserted with a strong round Tendon. These jointly move the Lips upwards and outwards as the former did, assisting them in their motion; and when either of them acts singly, then it assists the action of one of the former that is on its own side, and helps to draw the Lip upwards of one side.

The third pair is called by Riolanus, Zugomaticum or Jugale, from its rise, which is outwardly from the process of the Os jugale. At their be∣ginning they are fleshy and somewhat round, and running downward a little overthwart the Cheeks they reach at last to the sides of the upper Lip, where they are inserted near the corner of the Mouth. The use of this pair is to draw the Lip upwards sideways.

The fourth pair is called Deprimens, or the Drawers down of the lower Lip. These arise fleshy and broad from the lowermost and outwardmost part of the Lower Mandible; from whence each marches obliquely to the under Lip, into which they are inserted about the middle of it. The use of this pair is to draw the under Lip downwards and somewhat out∣wards.

So that it joineth in the same action with the first pair of the common Muscles called Detrahens quadratus.

The fifth pair is called Obliquè detrahens, from their office, which is to draw the lower Lip obliquely downwards and outwards. They take their beginning from the sides of the lower Jaw, where they rise with a fleshy and broad head; from whence they ascend upwards, growing in their passage something narrower, and are each inserted into the corners of the lower Lip. The use of this pair is, as hath been said, to draw the lower Lip obliquely downwards and outwards.

In the next place we come to the odd Muscle, called Orbicularis, or orbicular, because it goes round the circuit of both the Lips. It is also called Constringens, because it serves as it were for a Sphincter Muscle to purse up or contract the Lips. Besides these names it has in Men that of Osculatorius, the Kissing Muscle, because it contracts or draws the Lips together in kissing. It sticks very close to the Skin of the Lips, and makes up the greatest part of their substance.

CHAP. VI. Of the Muscles of the lower Jaw.

The first pair of Muscles called the Temporal. The second pair, called Deprimens. The third pair, called Masseteres. The fourth pair, called Pterygoide∣um exter∣num. The fifth pair, called Pterygoide∣um inter∣num.

THE upper Jaw being immoveable hath no Muscles, there being no occasion for them where there is no motion, which is their onely use. But the lower Jaw which hath motions of divers sorts, doth require divers sorts of Muscles to perform them. Now these Muscles are in num∣ber five pair.

The first pair of these Muscles is called the Temporal, because they are seated upon the Temples. They spring on each side from the Bones of the Brow or Fore-head, the Synciput, Temples and Wedge-like Bone. They are the strongest and largest of all the five pair. Their beginning is fleshy, large and semicircular, their inside lying upon the Periosteum, and their outside covered with the Pericranium. They descend under the Os jugale to the acute Process of the lower Jaw, into which they are in∣serted by a short but very strong Tendon. These Muscles with great force pull up the lower Jaw, and so shut the Mouth.

The second pair hath the name of Deprimens, because they pull down the Jaw. They are also from their shape, having as it were two bellies, called biventre. These being assisted by the quadrati, which were de∣scribed in the foregoing Chapter (being one of the pairs that are common to the Cheeks and Lips) pull down the Jaw, and so open the Mouth. They arise with a broad and nervous beginning from the Process of the Temple-bone called Styloides, and suddenly becoming round, fleshy and small, they pass downwards, and in their middle where they come to the flexure of the lower Jaw-bone, they lose their fleshy substance and de∣generate into a nervous and round Tendon, and then becoming fleshy again they are inserted into the inner side of the lower Jaw at the middle or fore-part of it.

The third pair is called Masseteres, because they are very assistant in the office of chewing, by moving the Jaw to the right and left side. Each hath two beginnings: the first is large, strong and nervous, arising from that Suture where the fourth and first Bone of the upper Jaw are joined; the other beginning is fleshy, springing from the Os jugale. They are firmly and largely inserted into the outside of the lower Jaw. These Muscles, by reason of their diversity of Fibres, move the nether Jaw both forwards, backwards and to the sides, and so in a manner cir∣cularly.

The fourth pair are called Pterygoideum externum, as if they resembled a pair of Wings. These like the former have also a double beginning, partly nervous, and partly fleshy. They spring partly from the upper and outward side of the Wing-like Process of the Wedge-like Bone, and partly from the rough and sharp line of the same Bone, from whence they march down with streight Fibres, becoming in their course larger and thicker, till they come to the lateral part of the lower Jaw, into whose inside they are inserted with a strong Tendon. The use of this pair of Muscles is to open the Jaw and move it forward, which appeareth when the Teeth of the lower Jaw are stretched farther out than those of the upper.

The fifth and last pair of Muscles of the lower Jaw are called Pterygoi∣deum internum. These arise with a nervous beginning from the inner side or cavity of the Wedge-like Bone, at its wing-like Process; then becom∣ing fleshy, large and thick, they march down with a streight passage to the inner and hinder part of the lower Jaw, where they are inserted by a nervous, broad and strong Tendon. The use of these Muscles is to draw the Jaw towards its head or backwards; and also to help the Tem∣poral Muscle to draw the Jaw up.

CHAP. VII. Of the Muscles of the Ear.

The External Ear hath four Muscles. 1. The lifter up of the Ear. 2. The puller back of the Ear. 3. Adducens Aurem. 4. Abducens Aurem. 1. The Inward Ear hath two. The Ex∣ternal. 2. The Inter∣nal.

THE Muscles of the Ears in Brutes (especially such as have large Ears, as Horses, Asses, Oxen, Hares, &c.) differ much in mag∣nitude from those of Men, in whom they are so very small, that Galen calls them, the lineaments of Muscles. The reason of which is, that in Man the Ears are most commonly immoveable, (though there have been some that could move them) and therefore to have large Muscles were needless; and yet to have none at all, would look like a defect in the most perfect of all Animals. But though Man cannot move his Ears, yet is that no prejudice to his hearing; for the want of that motion is recom∣penced by the easie and speedy motions of his Head, whereby he can turn it on every side to receive the sounds; whereas four-footed Beasts, that have the motions of their Heads not so nimble, have need to have their Ears always moveable every way, to receive the sounds from every side: and their moveableness has also a further use, to wit, to drive away

Flies and other Insects that are troublesome to the Beast, which Men can doe with their Hands.

The Ear we divided, in the former Book, into the Outward and In∣ward. The Outward (of which we have been discoursing thus far in this Chapter) has four Muscles; and these are those which are so much lar∣ger in Brutes than Men. The Inward Ear has two, which are of a pro∣portionable largeness in both.

The first of these we come to treat of is the first of the Outward Ear, which goes by the name of Attollens Aurem, the lifter or puller up of the Ear. This arises at the outside of the Frontal or Forehead Muscle, and at its rise is thin and membranous; from whence being carried over the Temporal Muscle, and growing in its course something narrower, it doth at last insert it self into the upper part of the Ear, moving it up∣wards and forwards.

The second is called Detrahens Aurem, or the puller back of the Ear. This Muscle arises from the Mammillary Process with a fleshy, broad and fibrous head; and so growing narrower in its progress is at length in∣serted into the root of the Gristle of the Ear, sometimes by two, some∣times by three Tendons. The use of this Muscle is to draw the Ear back∣wards and somewhat upwards.

The third is called Adducens Aurem, by which the Ear is drawn for∣wards and somewhat downwards. This is said to be but a part of the musculus quadratus before spoken of in the fifth Chapter of this Book, be∣ing one of the common Muscles of the Cheeks and Lips. This Muscle ascending with its Fibres is implanted into the lower side of the root of the Ear.

The fourth is called Abducens Aurem, because it draws or pulls the Ear backwards. This takes its beginning at the Occiput or back-part of the Head from the Coat that cloaths those Muscles that belong to that part, where it is at first something narrow, but afterward waxing broader it is carried transversly to the hinder part of the Ear, into which it is inserted. This assists the second in its action, having sometimes two, and sometimes three Tendons as that has.

The next are the two Muscles of the Inner Ear (called Auris, as the Outward Ear is called Auricula) the first of which is called Externus Tym∣pani Auris, or the external Muscle of the Drum of the Ear, because it moves the Membrane of the Ear so called upwards and outwards. This is thin but broad at its rise, which is from the upper part of the passage of the Ear; then becoming narrower it grows into a very fine and small Tendon, which is carried on the outside of the Tympanum till it arrive at its centre or middle into which it is inserted, where on the inside of this Tym∣panum the little Bone called the Hammer sticketh, which with the Mem∣brane or Tympanum this Muscle draweth a little outward and upward. This Muscle as also the next are very small, there being scarce any in the whole Body again so small as they are; and therefore it will require great skill to raise them without violating of them. To prevent which the un∣dertaker is to open with great care the Os petrosum which is to be done on that side which is next to the Temples, taking out the pieces of Bones by degrees that these Muscles may receive no prejudice. It is left to the discretion of the Dissector whether he will remove the Bones with a Chis∣sel, or Saw, or by filing, so he doe it carefully.

The second is called Internus, and hath its origination from the bottom of the Os cuneiforme or Wedge-like Bone, there where it is joined with the Processus petrosus. It is seated inwardly in the Cavity of the Os petro∣sum, being fleshy at its beginning, yet thin and small: at its middle it is divided into two very small and very thin Tendons, whereof one is in∣serted into the upper Process of the Malleus or Hammer, and the other into the neck of it. The use of this Muscle, alone, is to draw the head of the Hammer obliquely forwards, and also to draw it somewhat inwards: but when these two act both together, they move the Tympanum with its small Bones upwards and downwards, which is done when the Horse would carefully listen or harken to any approaching noise.

CHAP. VIII. Of the Muscles of the Tongue.

The Tongue hath five pair of proper Muscles. 2. Hypsilo∣glossum. 3. Myloglos∣sum. 4. Cerato∣glossum. 5. Styloglos∣sum.

THE Tongue in Brutes hath but two principal uses, viz. to taste the Food, and to rowl it up and down the Mouth: but in Men it has a third use, which is to be the main instrument of Speech. Yet notwithstanding there are as many Muscles that belong to it in Brutes as there do in Men; for in some regard it has a further use in them than in Men, seeing it does not onely taste and rowl about the Meat, but it serves also to gather it into the Mouth; for that they doe with their Tongue, because they have not the help of Hands as we have. Wherefore that the Tongue might perform all these offices, it was necessary it should be furnished with va∣riety of Muscles, to make it capable of being moved every way, out∣ward and inward, upward and downward, and sideways. And lest in undergoing these motions it should be made to reach farther than is neces∣sary, Nature hath restrained it with a strong Ligament underneath, which in Men is called the Fraenum or Bridle of the Tongue.

The Tongue therefore hath five pair of Muscles proper to it self, besides those that are common to it and the Os hyoides, of which in the following Chapter.

The first pair proper to it is called Genioglossum (or the Chin-tongue pair) so called because their rise is from the Chin, and their insertion into the Tongue. This name is proper enough in Men who have Chins, but agrees not so well with them in Horses (or other Brutes) in whom we call all that part below the Teeth, the lower Jaw, not distinguishing any part of it by the name of the Chin. But notwithstanding I shall describe them by that name, because it would be too tedious and too bold an un∣dertaking for me to invent new names for this as well as for others that are in Brutes as improperly called by such names as this pair is; leaving such an attempt to those that have both more leisure, and that make a greater figure in the Anatomical Province.

This pair arise from the ruggedness which is in the middle of the lower Jaw before, in the inner and lower part of it. In their progress they are said to have several such inscriptions as the streight Muscles of the

Paunch have, as if each consisted of several Muscles; however that be, they reach to the middle of the Tongue where they are inserted into its lower side. Their use is to move the Tongue forwards, towards the Fore∣teeth, and many times out of the Mouth, that is, when the Beast gathers in his Meat.

The second pair is called Hypsiloglossum, (which word should be writ without an H, seeing they have this name because they rise from the bot∣tom of the Os hyoides, which is otherwise called Ypsiloides,) from its re∣sembling in shape the Greek Letter v (Ypsilon.) They end in the middle of the Tongue, and have an action contrary to the former; for as those mov'd the Tongue outward, so these move it streight inward or back∣ward.

The third pair is called Myloglossum, from the places of its rise and in∣sertion; for they arise from the inner part of the lower Jaw, at the roots of the farthest grinding Teeth, and are inserted into the Ligament by which the Tongue is tied to the fauces or Jaws. If this pair work toge∣ther, they draw the Tongue downwards; but if onely one of them work, then it draws the Tongue obliquely to its own side.

The fourth pair is called Ceratoglossum, because they arise from the horns of the Os hyoides, and reaching from thence to the sides of the Tongue are there inserted into it. If one of these work alone, it draws the Tongue aslant to either the right or left side; but if both work to∣gether, they draw the Tongue downwards and inwards.

The fifth and last pair of Muscles proper to the Tongue are called Sty∣loglossum, because they arise from the Styloides (or Pen-like) Process of the Temple-bones, being fleshy at their beginning, though very small and sharp; but afterwards becoming broader and thicker, they run to the sides of the Tongue, into which they are inserted about the middle of its length. If either of these Muscles move singly, the Tongue is drawn to the right, or left side; but if both act together, they pull the Tongue upwards and inwards.

CHAP. IX. Of the Muscles of the Bone of the Tongue, called Os hyoides.

The Os hyoi∣des hath four pair. 1. Sternohy∣oideum. 2. Geniohy∣oideum. 3. Coraco∣hyoideum. 4. Styloce∣ratohyoide∣um.

THE Muscles of the Cheeks and Tongue serving to toss the Meat to and again in the Mouth, and those of the lower Jaw helping to chew or grind it; after it is sufficiently minced, it wants afterward to be swallowed and to be transmitted into the Stomach. Now none of the fore∣said Muscles contribute any thing thereto, therefore it was necessary there should be others appropriated thereto, which by moving diversly the root of the Tongue might make way for the morsel to descend into the Gul∣let. Such are those that are common to the Tongue and the Bone called hyoides that is fasten'd to its root or basis, which are in number four pair.

The first pair is called Sternohyoideum, because they spring from the upper but inner part of the Sternum or Breast-bone (with a broad and fleshy beginning) and ascending under the Skin of the Neck by the Wind-pipe (still keeping the same largeness and substance) are at length inserted into the root or bottom of the Os hyoides, which they move downward and backward.

The second pair is opposite to the former, and is called Geniohyoideum. These are large, short and fleshy all over, and arise with Fibres of a divers course, from the inside of the fore-part of the lower Jaw (called in Men the Chin) and are inserted into the middle part of the Bone hyoides, which they draw streight upwards and a little forwards.

The third pair is called Coracohyoideum. These are slender, but strong, and long; yea considering the slenderness of them, they are the longest Muscles of the whole Body. They arise out of the Process called Coracoi∣des at the upper end of the Shoulder-blade near the Neck, and run ob∣liquely upward under the first pair of Muscles of the Head called Mastoi∣deum, where they lose their fleshy substance, as giving way to the other that are more worthy and considerable than themselves, and degenerate each into a nervous and round Tendon for some time; but so soon as they are past these Muscles, they become musculous again, and so conti∣nue till they reach to the Os hyoides, into whose horns they are inserted. These because of their two bellies are by some called Digastricks. Their use is to pull the Os hyoides obliquely downwards.

The fourth and last pair of Muscles of the Os hyoides is called Styloce∣ratohyoideum. These arise from the root of the Appendix or Process cal∣led Styloides, and end in the horns of Os hyoides. They move the Bone obliquely upwards.

I hope the English Reader will pardon me for not translating the names of these Muscles, for it is impossible for any Man to doe it, seeing our English Tongue is not capable of such compositions as the Greek admits of, from whence these names are borrowed: but he will see the reasons of the names, if he observe but the parts from whence the Muscles are said to rise, and into which they are inserted, in the description of them.

CHAP. X. Of the Muscles of the Larynx or Throttle.

The Larynx hath two pair of common Museles, viz. 1. Sterno∣thyreoide∣um. 2. Hyothy∣reoideum. 1 and four pair proper ones and an odd one, viz. Cricothy∣reoideum. 2. Cricoary∣taenoideum posticum. 3. Cricoary∣taenoideum laterale. 4. Thyreoa∣rytaenoide∣um. 5. The Mus∣cle Arytaeno∣ides.

THE Larynx in Mankind is the main instrument in modulating or forming the Voice, so as to make the tone high or low, &c. And though few Beasts can alter their tones with that variety that a Man can, yet have they the same number of Muscles to move the several Gristles whereof the Larynx is composed. Now its Muscles are either proper, or common. The common are those that are implanted into the Larynx, but arise not therefrom; and the proper are those that both arise and end in the Larynx. The common are four, and the proper nine.

The first of the common pair is called Sternothyreoideum, and by some Bronchium, or the Weazand-muscles. These arise with a fleshy and broad beginning from the upper and inner part of the Sternum or Breast-bone at the very Throat, ascending with right or streight Fibres up by the sides of the Wind-pipe, continuing the same largeness and substance till they reach to the Cartilago thyreoides, or Shield-fashioned Gristle, into which they are inserted. Their use is to draw down the said Gristle, and so to widen the Chink as some Authours think; though others are of opinion that such drawing of it down, serves to straiten the Chink.

The second pair is called Hyothyreoideum. These arise from the lower side of the Bone hyoides, having a broad and fleshy beginning; from whence descending with streight Fibres they are inserted into the Cartila∣go thyreoides; by lifting which upwards they are said to straiten the Chink of the Larynx; though some on the contrary affirm that they widen it.

Next come we to the proper Muscles of the Larynx, the first pair of which is called Cricothyreoideum anticum, because they take their begin∣ning from the fore-part of the Ring-fashioned Gristle called Cricoides, and proceed obliquely to the Shield-fashioned Gristle or Thyreoides, into whose sides they are implanted. The use of this pair of Muscles is to move the Shield-fashioned Gristle or Thyreoides obliquely downwards, and by that means to open the glottis or Chink of the Larynx.

The second of the proper pairs of Muscles of the Larynx are called Cri∣coarytaenoideum posticum. These contrary to the former arise from the lower and back-part of the Ring-fashioned Gristle, and running upward with streight Fibres are inserted with a nervous end into the lower side of the Arytaenoides or Ewer-like Gristle, which it pulls upward and back∣ward, and thereby opens and widens the Larynx.

The third pair is called Cricoarytaenoideum laterale, because they are seated at the sides of the former pair. They arise from the sides of the Anulary or Ring-fashioned Cartilage somewhat slender; from whence proceeding directly upwards, and becoming more large and fleshy, they come to the Arytaenoides, into the sides of which they are implanted in that part that the foregoing pair did not cover. The use of this pair is to open the Larynx by drawing the Gristles obliquely aside.

The fourth pair is called Thyreoarytaenoideum. These are the largest and strongest of all the proper Muscles of the Larynx, yea almost equal to all the rest put together. They arise close one to the other from the inner hollow and middle part of the Thyreoides or Shield-fashioned Gristle, whose inner Cavity they fill through the whole length of it, and with oblique Fibres they ascend upward, growing narrower in their ascent, till they come to their insertion into the sides of the Ewer-like Gristle. These are the Muscles that are principally affected in Humane Bodies when they are in the greatest danger from that Disease called the Squi∣nancy or Quinsie. For when these Muscles are inflamed, they swell in∣wards into the Throttle, and make the Cavity thereof so strait, that the Patient cannot fetch his breath, but is strangled.

The fifth and last is reckoned but for one single Muscle, and is called Arytaenoides, also Claudens secundum, or the second Shutting-muscle. They take their rise from the hinder line of the Ewer-like Gristle or Ary∣taenoides from whence it hath its name. It is very small but fleshy, and running with transverse Fibres, it is inserted into the sides of the same Gristle, which it helps to constringe or draw both its sides together, and so straitens the Throttle.

The Epiglottis or Throat-flap, that covers the Chink of the Larynx has no discernible Muscles in Man, nor I believe in an Horse: but in Cattle, Sheep, &c. that chew the Cud, it is said to have evident ones; some of which spring from the Os hyoides, and are inserted into the basis of the Epiglottis, which they lift up; and others are placed between the Coat and Gristle of the Epiglottis, helping it to shut the Larynx.

CHAP. XI. Of the Muscles of the Uvula and Throat.

The Uvula hath two Muscles. 1. Pterygo∣staphilinus externus. 2. Pterygo∣staphilinus internus. The Pharynx hath seven Muscles. 1. Par Sphe∣nopharyn∣gaeum. 2. Cephalo∣pharyngae∣um. 3. Stylopha∣ryngaeum. 4. The Mus∣cle Oesopha∣giaeus. Two pair of Muscles late∣ly found out by Doctor Croune, viz. Pterygo-pa∣latini, and Spheno-pa∣latini.

THE Ʋvula is said to have two Muscles to hold it up, one of which is called Pterygostaphilinus externus. This springeth from the upper Jaw a little beyond the furthermost Grinder, and is inserted into the Ʋvula.

The second is called Pterygostaphilinus internus. This proceeds from the lower part of the inner Wing of the Process Pterygoides (or Wing∣like) and is inserted in like manner as the former into the Ʋvula.

This is the description that Anatomists commonly give of these two Muscles; but it may be question'd whether they are any more than ima∣ginary ones; for seeing the Ʋvula has no apparent voluntary motion, it seems to have no occasion for any Muscles.

Next to the Muscles of the Ʋvula come those of the Throat (or the be∣ginning of the Gullet called Pharynx) to be treated of, to which belong seven Muscles, that is, three pair and a Sphincter. The first of the pairs is called Sphenopharyngaeum. These arise thin and nervous from the Ap∣pendix of the Wedgelike-bone, descending by the inward Cavity of its

Wing-like Processes, and are inserted into the lateral parts of the Palate and Pharynx, which they widen in swallowing.

The next pair is called Cephalopharyngaeum. These spring from that part where the Head is joined to the first Vertebra of the Neck, from whence they descend to the Pharynx, into which they are spread with a large plexus of Fibres, which seemeth to make its Membrane. The ac∣tion of this pair is contrary to the former; for as those widen the Pha∣rynx to let the nourishment descend into the Gullet, so these straiten it when the Food is past by it, and thereby squeeze the Food down the Gullet.

The third pair is called Stylopharyngaeum. These arise with a small beginning from the inner part of the Styloides Process of the Temple-bone, and descending with a thin body are inserted into the sides of the Pharynx which they dilate or widen.

The last of these Muscles is that which hath no fellow, and is called Oe∣sophagiaeus, or the Sphincter of the Gullet. This arises at one side of the Thyreoides, or Shield-fashioned Gristle, and is inserted into the other side of the same, wholly encompassing in its course both the fore and back part of the Gullet, in the same manner as the Sphincters of the Anus and Bladder do those Parts, serving here for the same use, viz. to draw or purse in the mouth of the Gullet, as those do the Arse and Bladder. Now though I have the warrant of several Authours in describing of this Muscle last of the seven, yet there be others that treat first of it, and reckon it the first Muscle of the Throat, saying, that if you first raise this, the two next before-mentioned pairs, namely, the Stylopharyngaeum and the Ce∣phalopharyngaeum, may be the better found.

Having done with the Muscles of the Ʋvula and Throat, as also with all the Muscles of the inward and outward Parts of the Mouth and Chaps, according as they are treated of by the Ancient and Modern Anatomizers of these Parts; it remains now that I should descend to the Muscles of the Head and Neck, and so to the inferiour Parts; but before I depart quite from hence, I think it necessary to give the Reader an account of two pair of Muscles more, which belong to the Palate of the Mouth, never treated of by any Anatomist yet, save Mr. Brown, who in his Book of the Muscles lately set forth, gives the first account of them, at the desire of the discoverer of them, which was the most ingenious Doctor Croune now living, and at this time Lecturer at Chirurgeons Hall in London.

This worthy and learned Discoverer hath given them these names fol∣lowing; the first he calls Musculi Pterygo-palatini, and the other Spheno∣palatini.

This description hath he also given of them, viz. The first or Pterygo-palatini are seated in the lower part of the Cavity of the Wing-like Pro∣cesses of the Wedge-like Bone, and terminate about the Glandula palati with their Tendons, which run upon part of the fore-mentioned Proces∣ses, as on two Trochleae or Pullies. The use of this pair is to depress the before-named Gland of the Palate and the Ʋvula.

The latter of them, which he calls Spheno-palatini, have an use con∣trary to the former, viz. to lift up the fore-mentioned Gland and Ʋvula. Their rise is from the Os sphenoides or Wedge-like Bone, and their inser∣tion (with a broader Tendon than the former) into the sides of the be∣fore-mentioned Gland and Ʋvula. It is believed from the situation and ac∣tion of this last pair of Muscles, that when the Rheum that had swelled the

Gland and relaxt the Ʋvula, is drained away, these Muscles help to re∣duce the Ʋvula to its proper and natural situation; though to me it seems, that its own contracting of it self is sufficient.

CHAP. XII. Of the Muscles of the Head.

The Head hath eight pair of pro∣per Muscles. 1. Mastoide∣um. 2. Splenium. 3. Comple∣xum. 4. Parvum & crassum. 5. Rectum majus. 6. Rectum minus. 7. Obliquum superius. 8. Obliquum inferius.

THE Muscles of the Head are either proper or common. The com∣mon are those which primarily move the Neck, and the Head one∣ly secondarily, of which in the next Chapter; for according to order the proper are first to be spoken to, and these are they that move the Head onely, the Neck at that time remaining unmoved, the number of which are sixteen, or eight pair.

The first pair is called Mastoideum (which pair some Authours indeed reckon for the eighth or last pair, and the Splenium for the first; but be∣ing willing to follow the more modern Writers I will begin with the Ma∣stoideum and reckon them for the first pair.)

These are seated in the fore-part of the Neck, having each a double be∣ginning; one of which is from the Breast-bone, being altogether ner∣vous, and the other from the Collar-bone, which is fleshy. From these originals they ascend obliquely upwards by the Neck, till they come to the hinder part of the Head, viz. to the Mammillary Process of the Tem∣ple-bone, into which each is inserted by a round and fleshy Tendon. If both these Muscles work together, then they bend the Head right forward or downward; but if one onely works, then that draws the Head a little to one side. Of all the eight pair there are onely this that bend the Head streight forward, and that are placed in the fore-part of the Neck; for all the rest are seated behind towards the Mane, and do either pull the Head back, or else to one side.

The second pair (or first pullers back of the Head) is called Sple∣nium. These are long and thick, arising from the five uppermost Verte∣brae of the Chest and five lowermost of the Neck, with a nervous begin∣ning; from whence ascending to the hinder part of the Head, they there end with a broad and fleshy Tendon. The use of these, if both of them act together, is to draw the Head directly backward; but if either of them act singly, then it draws the Head a little to one side.

The third pair, (being the second puller back of the Head) is called Complexum or Trigeminum, because each Muscle seems to consist of three, for it arises with three heads; one of which is from the transverse Process of the fourth and fifth Vertebrae of the Chest; the second from the first and second of the same, and the third from the ridge of the seventh Ver∣tebra of the Neck: all which uniting into one body, the Muscles ascend upward as far as to the Occiput or Noll-bone, (in their course becoming fleshy and broad) and are inserted into the said Noll-bone, at the root of the Mammillary Process, sometimes by one, and sometimes by a triple Tendon.

The third puller back of the Head, or fourth pair, is called parvum & crassum, because they are small and thick. These are situated under the for∣mer, arising from the transverse Processes of the six uppermost Vertebrae of the Neck, with a nervous beginning; but afterward becoming fleshy, they are carried obliquely upward, and are inserted into the hindermost root of the Processus Mammillaris. Their use is, if they act both toge∣ther, to bring the Head lightly backwards; and if but one act, then to bring it backward to one side.

The fifth pair is called Rectum majus or the greater right pair, being small, fleshy and slender, and arising from the tip of the Spine or ridge of the second Vertebra of the Neck, where they touch one another; but presently part, and ascending both upward, end with a round Tendon in the middle of the Noll-bone or Occiput. The action of this pair is the same as of the former.

The sixth pair (being the fifth of the pullers back) is called Rectum minus, or the lesser right pair. Their situation is just under the former pair, as it were concealed, and are of the like substance, form and pro∣gress. They arise close together from the back-part of the first Vertebra of the Neck where the Bone should have ended in a Spine, but that Spine is wanting because it would have offended the former pair of Muscles that spring from the second Vertebra and march over this. Presently after their original they part, and ascend upwards, and on either side are im∣planted into the Noll-bone. The use of these is to assist the motion of the two foregoing pair. Now the reason why there are so many Muscles appointed to move the Head backward, and but one pair forward, is be∣cause the Head by reason of its great bulk and weight, is prone enough of it self to incline forward or downward; but it requireth a great force to move it upward or backward.

The seventh pair is called Obliquum superius, or the upper Oblique pair. These are seated under the right or streight pairs, and are like them in form and substance. They are small, arising out of the middle of the Occiput at the outside of the streight pairs, from whence they descend downwards, and are inserted into the tips of the transverse Processes of the first Vertebra of the Neck, the right-hand Muscle into the right Pro∣cess, and the left into the left. The use of these, if they both act toge∣ther, is to nodd the Head gently directly backwards.

The eighth pair is called Obliquum inferius, or the lower Oblique pair. These arise from the Spine or ridge of the second Vertebra of the Neck, from whence running obliquely upwards, they end at the transverse Pro∣cesses of the first Vertebra of the Neck. They are longish, round and fleshy, and make (as do also the former) a Triangle of equal sides.

The use of this pair is to move the Head as it were semicircularly, (for it cannot be moved quite round) the first Vertebra turning upon the Tooth-like Process of the second: but this motion is performed, when one of them onely acts at a time; for if both of them move or act toge∣ther, then they either keep the Head steady (as some Authours con∣ceive) or else draw it a very little backwards.

CHAP. XIII. Of the Muscles of the Neck.

The Muscles common to the Head and Neck are four pair. 1. Spinatum. 2. Transver∣sale. 3. Longum. 4. Scalenum.

THE Head is not onely moved by its proper Muscles mentioned in the last Chapter, primarily; but secondarily also by other Mus∣cles belonging to the Neck, which are in number eight, on each side four, by the help of which the Neck is sometimes bent forward, other times extended backward; it is also sometimes drawn to one side, and some∣times to the other: but there are more Muscles to draw it backwards than either forwards or to one side, because the labour is greater by rea∣son of the weight of the Head and Neck (as was said in the former Chapter.) There are therefore two pair of Muscles to bend the Neck backward, namely the first and second, which do also draw it a little obliquely; and the third and fourth pair draw it both forward and to one side, as both act together, or but one of each pair at a time.

The first pair of these is called Spinatum, because they are seated a∣mongst the Spines of the Vertebrae. They arise from the roots of the Spines of the seven uppermost Vertebrae of the Chest, and five lowermost of the Neck, being separated from one another onely by the tips of the Spines, and are inserted into the whole lower side of the Spine of the se∣cond Vertebra of the Neck. They bend the Neck backward, or a little obliquely. Some think that they have no original from the Spines of the Neck, but that they onely adhere to them in their passage.

The next pair is called Transversale, because they both rise from and are inserted into the transverse Processes of the Vertebrae. They take their be∣ginning from the roots of the transverse Processes of the six uppermost Ver∣tebrae of the Chest; from whence ascending by degrees they become stron∣ger and thicker, and are inserted into the outsides of all the transverse Processes of the Neck-bones. The use of this pair, as also of the former, is as hath been said, to pull or draw the Neck directly backwards; but if one Muscle of either pair work alone, it pulls the Neck with an oblique motion.

The third is called Longum, or the Long pair. These lie hid under the Oesophagus or Gullet, wherefore they are by some called the Under∣gullet-lurkers. They arise with a thin and sharp but fleshy beginning from the body of the fifth and sixth Vertebrae of the Back, and as they ascend upwards, are knit to the sides of all the Vertebrae, till they come to the first or highest of the Neck, where each touching other they are both inserted into its Process. The use of this pair, when they work to∣gether, is to bend the Neck directly forward, and withall to incline the Head; but if one of them act alone, then is the Neck drawn towards that side on which the Muscle moveth.

The fourth and last pair of the Muscles of the Neck is called Scalenum or Triangulare. These by some Authours are accounted as the eighth pair of the Chest. They are seated on the sides of the Neck inclining rather to the fore than hinder part of it. They take their beginning from the first Rib, arising fleshy and large, and are inserted into the inside of all

the transverse Processes of the Vertebrae of the Neck. Their use is the same with the foregoing pair. They are observed to be perforated or to have holes through them, by which Veins, Arteries and Nerves do pass out of the Body into the Fore-legs.

Table XXXII. (Book 32)

Representeth an Horse standing with his Face towards us, that one may have the fuller view of some of the Muscles of the Head and Neck. It sheweth also several other Muscles, less perfectly.

• AA Shew the par Mastoideum.
• BB The Muscles of the Shoulder-blade.
• CC The par Trigeminum or Complexum.
• DD That pair of Muscles of the Neck called Scalenum or Triangulare.
• E The Wind-pipe in its natural situation.
• FF That pair of Muscles of the Neck called Longum, removed from under the Gullet.
• GG The pair of the Nose called Philtrum.
• HH The Adducent or closing Muscles of the Nostrils.
• II The Muscles of the Eye-lids.
• KK The Temporal Muscles.
• LL The Muscles of the Ears.
• M The Frontal or Fore-head Muscle.
• N The Cucullaris or Monk's hood.
• O The Deltoides of the Shoulder.
• P The Serratus major Anticus (shrunk up, for naturally their Teeth reach to those of the obliquely descending pair of the Abdomen.)
• QQ The Pectorales.
• R The Obliquè descendens of the Abdomen, a little shrunk up from the Serratus major.
• S The Deltoides of the Thigh, (which I presume to call so, for it is just of the same figure with that of the Shoulder.)
• T The Serratus posticus.
• VVV The external Intercostal Muscles.
• WXY The three Buttock Muscles.
• Z The Vastus externus.
• a The Sacrolumbus.
• b The Longissimus dorsi.
• c The Semispinatus.

[illustration] anatomical view of the muscles of a horse's head and neck

TAB XXXII p. 170.

There are four pair of Muscles that widen the Chest. 1. Subcla∣vium. 2. Serratum majus Anti∣cum. 3. Serratum posticum su∣perius. 4. Serratum posticum in∣ferius. Two pair that contract the Breast. 1. Par Tri∣angulare. 2. Sacro∣lumbum. Cervicale descendens.

CHAP. XIV. Of the Muscles of the Breast.

HAving dispatched the Muscles of the Head and Neck, we come in the next place to speak to those of the Chest or Thorax, in which are contained the principal Instruments of Life, the Heart and Lungs. Now the Lungs being the principal organs of Respiration, and wanting Mus∣cles whereby to dilate or contract themselves, it was necessary they should receive assistance from the Chest in which they are included, by the dilatation or contraction whereof, they might be also dilated and con∣tracted. To which end the Chest is furnished with several Muscles, some of which contract it in Expiration, that is, when the Horse lets forth his breath, and others dilate it in Inspiration, when he receives in his breath.

Of the Dilaters or those that widen the Chest there are four pair, be∣sides the sixteen pair of the External Intercostals, there being (as is al∣ready said in Chap. 2. of the Second Book where I largely treated of them) between each Rib two Muscles, an External and an Internal one. Now there being in number seventeen Ribs, reckoning a Rib for the ex∣treme part both toward the Neck and toward the Flank, there must be one pair of Muscles fewer than there are Ribs, of which those that are seated externally, serve all as one Muscle to assist in the widening or dila∣ting the Chest, and those that are seated internally (lying under the for∣mer) assist in the contraction of it. For a more full description of these Muscles you may please to turn back to the afore-cited Chapter.

The first pair of the dilating or widening Muscles is called Subclavium,from their situation, which is under the Collar-bone called Clavicula, for they fill up that space that is between the Clavicle and the first Rib. These arise fleshy from the inner and lower part of the Clavicle or Collar∣bone, which is next to the Rib, and running obliquely or slanting for∣ward, are implanted into the first Rib near the Breast-bone with a fleshy end. The action of this pair of Muscles is to draw the first Rib upwards and outwards, by which motion the cavity of the Chest is widened.

The next or second pair of the Dilaters is called Serratum majus Anticum, or the greater and foremost Saw-like pair, so called partly from their situa∣tion and magnitude, and partly from the figure of their Tendons which resemble the teeth of a Saw. They arise from the inside of the Shoulder∣blade and the two upper Ribs, and are inserted into the lower five True∣ribs and two upper bastard or Short-ribs, before they end into Gristles; so that its breadth takes up a great part of the side of the Chest, and it is also very fleshy. The use of this pair of Muscles is to draw the Ribs outwards and upwards, and so to dilate or widen the Chest, which it doth more especially in great and violent strainings.

The third proper pair of the Muscles of the Chest is called the upper backward Saw-pair, or Serratum posticum superius. They are seated on the Back under the Muscle called Rhomboides or the fourth Muscle of the Shoulder-blade, betwixt both the Blades, and above the first pair of the

Head. They spring membranous from the Spines of the three lower Rack-bones of the Neck and the first of the Back, and are inserted into the Interstices of three or four of the upper Ribs. Their use is the same as of the former, viz. to draw the Ribs upward, whereby the Chest is dilated, and the inner Cavity thereof inlarged.

The fourth is called Serratum posticum inferius, the lower backward Saw-pair. These are seated almost in the middle of the Back, under the broad Muscle that is the first of the Depressors of the Shoulder. They arise from the Spines of the three lowest Vertebrae of the Back and of the first of the Loins, with a membranous, nervous and broad beginning; afterwards they pass with an overthwart line cross the Muscles of the Back, and being increased with fleshy Fibres are inserted into three or four of the lower short Ribs before they turn into Gristles. Their use is to draw the three or four lowest Ribs outwards, and so to dilate or widen the lower part of the Chest.

Besides the four pair already named there is yet another Muscle that as∣sists these in the motion of widening the Chest in Inspiration, which is the Diaphragma or Midriff, of which I have already spoken in its proper place, namely in the fourth Chapter of the Second Book; I shall there∣fore omit speaking of it any farther here.

Next come we to treat of the Muscles that contract or straiten the Chest in Expiration or letting forth the breath. The first pair of these is called par Triangulare, or triangled pair, though they make not a perfect triangle, because they consist of two long sides and one short one. These arise from the middle line of the Breast-bone on the inside of it, (for their seat is within the Cavity of the Chest, under the Breast-bone) being lit∣tle and slender, and are inserted into the bony ends of the third, fourth, fifth and sixth True-ribs (where they are fastned to the Gristles.) The use of this pair is to draw the Ribs toward the Breast-bone, and there∣by to straiten the Chest in Expiration.

The next is called Sacrolumbum from their rise, which is from the Os sacrum and from the Spine or ridge of the Lumbi or Loins. They are seated under the Serratum posticum inferius, and creeping upwards mix themselves with the long Muscle of the Back, and also fasten themselves to the transverse Processes of the Racks of the Loins as far as to the lowest Rack of the Chest, from whence ascending up to the Ribs, they are in∣serted into the lower side of them all by a particular Tendon about three or four fingers breadth from the ridge of the Back. The use of this pair according to Veslingius, is to contract the Chest; but Spigelius and also Bartholinus do believe that because it grows out of the same beginning with the long Muscle of the Back, therefore it extends and raises up the Chest as that doth.

There is another pair opposite to this described by Diemerbroeck, a di∣ligent Anatomist, who hath given them the name of Cervicale descendens. These, says he, do spring from the third, fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh Vertebrae of the Neek, and are inserted into the upper side of each Rib, as the Sacrolumbum is into the Lower; and says, that this pair by pulling the Ribs upwards in Inspiration widen the Chest, as the other by draw∣ing them down in Expiration straiten it.

To the Muscles already spoken of, which do contract the Chest, do belong the sixteen Internal Intercostal Muscles: For as the External ones assist the Wideners or Dilaters of the Chest in their motions, so do the

Internal also assist these contracting Muscles in the drawing together of the Chest, and do all act together as one Muscle, as the others do; for they pass obliquely from the lower to the upper Ribs, as the others did from the upper to the lower, their Fibres running contrary to or across the former. All these Muscles are said, secondarily, to be assisted in their motion by the Abdominal Muscles, as also by the Muscles of the Shoulder∣blade and Fore-legs.

CHAP. XV. Of the Muscles of the Back and Loins.

The Muscles of the Back have but one motion. Four pair of the Back and Loins. 1. Musculi longissimi. 2. Par Qua∣dratum. 3. Sacri. 4. Par Semi∣spinatum. The distem∣per called a sway'd Back is oftner an affection of these Muscles, than any dis∣location in the Verte∣brae.

THE Muscles of the Back, as also of the whole Spine, are so di∣versly and intricately intermixed and knit together, that some Anatomists have divided them into more, others into fewer, and that by reason of the infinite originals of the Fibres and the multitude of their in∣sertions, all which the admirable wisedom of Nature thought fit to min∣gle and knit one within another, that they might the better and with the more strength sustain and accomplish those strong and violent actions to which they are design'd, and also with more ease and safety bear such ex∣traordinary heavy weights, as this noble Animal, the subject of my Dis∣course, doth continually undergo. For if power united be the stronger, (as the common saying is) then certainly if many Muscles conspire together unto one motion, they will be better able to perform it.

Now that there are not more than one apparent motion performed by the Muscles of the Back of an Horse is plain, which motion is by the help of the Back-bones to raise up and suspend as it were the whole bulk of the Body, and to bear also great weights many times upon it: I say this is the main, if not the onely motion performed by these Muscles; for the Bodies of Horses cannot be turned backwards and forwards, to the sides, and almost semicircularly, as the Backs of Men are, as may be seen in Dancers, Tumblers and the like.

Again, these Muscles though they are by later Anatomists divided into several pairs, yet the Ancients (as Galen for one) were of opinion, that seeing they cannot be by any means truly separated, either there must be so many pair as there are Rack-bones, or else (which is more likely) that there is but one onely pair, offering tendinous distributions to all the Vertebrae of the Back. And says Galen, If one of this pair work alone, the Spine is inclined towards that side, be it the right or left; but if they both work together, the Spine is bended to neither hand, but pulled streight backward, or rather the Spines are held in their several proper places. And, adds he, whereas almost all Muscles have their An∣tagonists, that are the Authours of a contrary action to theirs, yet these Muscles of the Spine (if you except the bending Muscles of the Neck) have no Antagonists or Opposites.

Neither are these Muscles of the Back proper to the Back alone,but common to the Loins also, being reckoned their second pair, of which I

will first treat though it be contrary to the custom of Anatomists to doe so This pair then goes by the name of Masculi longissimi, so called from their extraordinary length, as being the longest Muscles (and also the strongest) in the whole Body. For they arise from the Os sacrum, and Ileium or Haunch-bone, and passing along by the Spine or ridge of the Loins, Back and Neck, they reach as far as to the Processus Mammilla∣res, or Mammillary Processes of the Temple-bones. They are almost con∣founded with the Sacrolumbum and Semispinatum in their march through the Loins, whence by some those are taken to be parts of this pair: but as soon as this pair arrives at the Back, it parts with those, and appears to be distinct from them. Their use is (if they act together) directly to extend the Back and Loins; but if one onely work, then is the Spine inclined on one side, for their Fibres are oblique or slanting.

The next pair goes by the name of Quadratum or the Square pair, from their Figure; for whilst they are in their natural situation they both of them together make a four-square figure, though when they are separa∣ted they are each of a triangular shape. They arise broad, thick and fleshy from the backward and upper Cavity of the Haunch-bone, and from the inner and upper side of Os sacrum, and remaining fleshy in their whole course, they are inserted into all the transverse Processes of the Vertebrae of the Loins as far as the lowest Rib. Their use is to bend the Racks of the Loins with a right motion forward or downward; but if one of them work alone, it draws the Loins to one side a little down∣ward.

The next are the Muscles called Sacri, or holy Muscles, from their rise, which is from the Os sacrum. They spring with an acute original from that part of the said Bone where the Spine is fastned to the Haunch∣bones. After their original they grow broad by degrees, and though they end not till they come to the Spine of the lowest Vertebra of the Thorax, yet in their progress they are inserted into several of the Spines and oblique Processes of the Vertebrae of the Loins, their Fibres running obliquely or with a slanting line upwards and inwards. The use of this pair, if one work alone, is to pull the Body a little on one side, but if both act or work together, they extend that part of the Spine to which they are fastned.

The last pair is called Semispinatum. These arise with a nervous original or beginning from all the Spines or Ridges of the Os sacrum and the Loins, and are inserted into the transverse Processes of the Vertebrae of the Loins and some of the lowermost of the Chest. These with the former pair do fill up the distances between the Spines, where they touch one another, nothing coming between them to separate them from one another, but a membranous Ligament issuing from the upper Spine. The use of this pair is to join the Spines together, and to extend or erect that part of the Back to which they grow. Now if all these Muscles of the Back and Loins work together, the whole Back is extended, or in a manner drawn backwards: but if the Muscles of one side work alone, the Body is in∣clined to that side.

These Muscles are apt to have their tone and strength violated by se∣veral accidents, as by over-great Loads, by a sudden Gold taken by pul∣ling off the Saddle after hard riding before the Horse be quite cold, and the like; whereby the Muscles become benumbed and relaxed, and so are in a manner deprived of both sense and motion; by which means the

Horse becomes useless, being so far from being able to carry Burthens or to perform any other service for his Master, that when he is up he can hardly serve himself, I mean, stand to eat his Meat; or if down, not able to rise without help. This also often happens to old and lean Horses, in whom by reason of the weakness of their Bodies, as also because they abound with flegmatick Humours, these Muscles are so relaxt that they are scarce able to support the weight of their own Bodies, much less other Burthens. And in this case I think nothing more proper than good store of strengthening Food, to support and nourish their inside, whereby they may gain strength, and withall to apply some strengthening Plaster to the outside at the same time.

But to recover those that come by this affection by great Colds taken as is above-mentioned, it will be the best way to give them warm, strengthening and comfortable Medicines inwardly, and also to apply first some warm Sheep-skins pretty often renewed, and at the same time to anoint the Loins with some sovereign Ointments or Oyles out∣wardly; or if this will not doe, then to sweat him in a Dunghill, and after he comes out, to apply to the Loins a strengthening Charge or Plaster.

I thought my self a little obliged in this place to inlarge upon this ac∣count, to undeceive many of our Professors, who take all Distempers in this kind to be as one, concluding still that all Horses thus affected, are either strained in the Kidneys or swayed, as we call it, in the Back; when indeed these Muscles are either benumbed by cold as aforesaid, or by strains gotten by carrying over-great weights or burthens, they are distended to that degree, that for some time they lose the strength and vigor they used to perform their motions with; this, I say, is often the true cause of the debility and weakness of the Back.

Not that I will deny that there is any such malady as a swayed Back, for I have my self by dissection seen in a Horse that was knocked on the Head, (being not curable of this Distemper) not onely all the muscular Parts as it were bruised, and many of their interspaces filled with a kind of a congealed Humour or Matter, but also found a kind of dislocation in that part where the Os sacrum or lowest Vertebra of the Loins are joined, and a deal of congealed Matter settled about those Parts. But such a strain is seldom curable, or if ever, not without great charge and long keeping. What I have therefore said upon this account is to let our Professors know, that most of those affections which they call sway'd Backs are onely di∣stempers of the Muscles, and therefore easily cured if soon taken in hand: but those which have broken Backs, (which we commonly understand by swayed Backs) are seldom curable. And thus much shall suffice as to this sort of discourse in this place; it remains now that I return to my former discourse, and describe the remaining part of the Muscles, of which those of the Anus, Bladder, and Genitals both in Horses and Mares come next to be spoken to.

CHAP. XVI. Of the Muscles of the Fundament, the Bladder, the Te∣sticles, Yard and Clitoris.

The Sphinc∣ter Muscle of the Anus. Two Leva∣tors. The Sphinc∣ter of the Bladder.

AHorse being a Creature made for service, it was fit that he should void his Excrements at his own conveniency and choice, and not perpetually; As therefore Nature hath provided Muscles about the Mouth and Chaps for the receiving, chewing and swallowing of the Food, so at the end of the Guts and at the outlet of the Urine there are Muscles set as Porters to interclude the passage, that nothing might go out but by the Horse's own accord; whereas were it not for these Muscles, his Ex∣crements would come from him continually and involuntarily, as I have seen to happen in such Horses whose Sphincter Muscle hath by some ac∣cident or extraordinary weakness been violated. Neither hath Nature onely provided Muscles for the keeping of the Excrements in, I mean till such time as it is necessary they should be let forth; but others also as in∣struments to assist in the voiding or letting of them forth. For the for∣mer purpose is appointed one Muscle at the Anus called the Sphincter, and for the latter, two, called Levators.

The Sphincter is a fleshy Muscle seated at the very end of the Arse∣gut, the which it incompasseth round like a Ring, to which it may fitly be resembled. It is rather knit to than arises from the lower Verte∣brae of the Os sacrum, being round and broad, and furnished with trans∣verse or overthwart Fibres, or indeed orbicular ones. This Muscle is much thicker above or inwards, than below or at the Fundament, where it adheres so firmly to the Skin, that it is not easie to separate it from it. Its use we have mentioned in the former Paragraph.

The other two are called the Levators or litters up of the Fundament.These are small, broad and nervous, arising from the Ligaments of the Hip-bones and Os sacrum, from whence passing by the sides of the streight or Arse-gut they adhere to it, and are inserted into the upper part of the Sphincter. A portion of them also grows to the root of the Yard, and in Mares to the neck of the Matrix. Their use is to assist the Abdominal Muscles in the expulsion of the Excrements, which they doe by lifting up the Fundament. They also help to keep the Fundament from falling out, which sometimes happens when they are too much relaxt.

To the Bladder doth also belong a Muscle called a Sphincter, which is seated in the beginning of its neck, the which it compasseth round. It is furnished with orbicular Fibres as the Sphincter of the Fundament is, and is of the same use; for it constringes or purses up the neck of the Bladder (as that doth the Anus) that the Urine may not pass out with∣out a spontaneous relaxing of this Muscle. In Mares it is seated at the very end of the Bladder, viz. at the hole where the neck of the Bladder opens into the Vagina.

The Muscles of the Tard are in number four (or two pair) of which we have already treated in the First Book at Chapter 20. of which the first pair are called the Erectores or Lifters up of the Yard, and the other

Dilatantes, Wideners, and by some they are called Acceleratores or Hast∣ners. I thought fit in this place onely to name them, referring the Rea∣der to the above-named Chapter for his farther satisfaction; as also to the said Book at Chap. 22. for the description of the Muscles of the Testicles called the Cremaster Muscles, by which the Testicles are suspended. The Reader may also be satisfied in the same Book at Chap. 27. concerning the Muscles of the Clitoris in Mares, which are two pair, as the Yard of a Horse, to which it is resembled, hath; for I shall not insist upon them in this place neither.

CHAP. XVII. Of the Muscles of the Scapula or Shoulder-blade.

The Shoul∣der-blade hath four pair. 1. Cuculla∣res. 2. Levato∣res. 3. Serratum minus Anti∣cum. 4. Rhombo∣ides.

HAving sufficiently treated of the Muscles of the three Venters, it re∣mains that I descend now to treat of those of the Limbs, beginning first with the formost of them, the first of which shall be those that move the Shoulder-blade.

The Shoulder-blade is observed to have four motions, viz. forward, backward, upward and downward, which motions are performed by four pair of proper Muscles. The first pair are seated betwixt the two Shoulder-blades, covering the top of the Withers. They are called Cu∣cullares from the resemblance they have with a Monk's Hood or Cowl. Their first original is fleshy and thin, which they take from the Occiput or hinder part of the Head; but as they descend down the Neck they have other membranous beginnings from five of the Spines thereof, yea and from eight or nine of the uppermost of the Chest: but they presently begin to be straitned as they descend towards the Shoulder-blades, into whose whole spine or ridge they are implanted, as likewise into the Shoulder-bone and broader part of the Collar-bone. This pair of Mus∣cles, because of their divers originals, from whence they have several sorts of Fibres, are said to perform several motions; as when the upper part of the Muscle that arises from the Occiput is contracted, then is the Shoulder-blade lifted obliquely upward, that part being furnished with oblique Fibres; and when that part which springs from the Withers is contracted, then it is pull'd streight thitherward.

The second pair are called Levatores, the Lifters or Heavers; and by some (in Men) Patientiae Musculi. These are situated above the Collar∣bone, taking their beginning from the transverse Processes of the first, second, third and fourth Vertebrae of the Neck; which beginnings being united in the middle (or thereabouts) of the length of the Muscles, they are at last inserted into the Shoulder-blades at their fore corner. The use of these Muscles is to draw the Blades upward and forward.

The third pair is called Serratum minus Anticum or the lesser fore Saw∣pair.These lie under the Pectoral Muscles, and spring from the four upper∣most Ribs before they become gristly, by four fleshy portions representing

the teeth of a Saw; from whence they pass somewhat slantingly to the Shoulder-blade, into whose Process (called its Anchor-like Process) it is inserted with a broad (partly fleshy and partly nervous) Tendon. The use of this pair is to move the Shoulder-blades forward to the Chest.

The fourth and last pair is called Rhomboides. These are seated under the Cucullares, being thin, broad and four-square. They spring fleshy from the hinder Processes or Spines of the three lowest Rack-bones of the Neck, and as many of the uppermost of the Chest, and continuing fleshy to their very insertion they are implanted into the basis of the Blades. Their use is to draw the Blade somewhat upward and backward, couching it to the Back.

Note, that seeing a Horse and all four-footed Beasts go prone, whereas Man walks erect or upright, the motions of the Muscles might, and ought in strictness, to be explained diversly in them from what they are in him: As for example, Those which are said in Man to move the Part upward, viz. toward the Head, ought in a four-footed Beast to be said to move it forward; and those which move it backward in Man, move it upward in the other, because of the different posture of their Bodies: and the same might be said as to their motions forward and backward. But seeing many of the Muscles have their names from their offices in Men, it would make but a confusion and a great impropriety in their ap∣pellations to explain their motions by other termes in Brutes. And there∣fore the Reader is desired to observe, That when we say a Part is moved upward, we mean towards the Head; when downward, toward the Tail; when backward, toward the Back; and when forward, we un∣derstand it toward the Breast or Belly.

CHAP. XVIII. Of the Muscles of the Shoulder.

Each Shoul∣der hath nine Muscles, viz. first, two E∣rectors. 1 Deltoides. 2 Supraspina∣tus. 1 Secondly, two Depressors. Latissimus. 2 Rotundus major. 1 Thirdly, two Pullers for∣ward. Pectoralis. 2 Coracoideus. 1 Fourthly, three Pullers backward. Infraspina∣tus. 2 Subscapula∣ris. 3 Rotundus minor.

THAT which I call the Shoulder is that Part or Bone that reaches from the top or pitch of the Shoulder (and is joynted into the Shoulder-blade) to the next Joint which we call the Elbow; which it is necessary to intimate for distinction sake, because the Shoulder-blade and this part are commonly both understood by the name of the Shoulder. Having advertised this, pass we now to its Muscles.

The motions of the Shoulders are five, viz. backwards, forwards, up∣wards, downwards and circularly. To perform which each hath nine Muscles, of which there are two that move it upward, namely the Del∣toides and Supraspinatus; and of these we shall treat in the first place.

The first is called Deltoides from its figure, which resembles the shape of the Greek Letter Δ delta. It is fleshy and (as you may see) triangu∣lar, arising from the midst of the Clavicle or Collar-bone, the top of the Shoulder, and the whole ridge of the Shoulder-blade, and is extended as far as to the middle of the Shoulder-bone, where it is inserted. This Muscle is observed to have divers sorts of Fibres; some of which run ob∣liquely

downwards, such are those on the fore-part; others run oblique∣ly forward, which are those on the back-part of it; and a third sort, which are placed in the middle, run directly toward the Fore-leg: Where∣fore (says my Authour) when the Fibres of the fore-part are contracted, the Shoulder is lifted upward and forward towards the Horse's Nose; if the middle Fibres be contracted, the Shoulder is lifted directly towards his Back; and if the hinder Fibres be contracted, then is the Shoulder carried obliquely backward: so that this Muscle is said not onely to raise up the Shoulder (which is indeed its chiefest use) but helps also to per∣form other motions as well as that.

The second Erector or Lifter up of the Shoulder is called Supraspinatus by some, but by others Superscapularis superior, or the upper Blade-rider,because it is seated uppermost upon the Shoulder-blade, and filleth up all that cavity which is between its spine and upper edge. It arises from the spine of the Blade with a long and fleshy beginning, and passing over the jointing of the Scapula with the Shoulder-bone by a broad and strong Tendon, is inserted into the neck of the said Shoulder-bone. This Mus∣cle is by some Authours thought not onely to lift up the Shoulder (which is its principal use, as being one of the Erectors) but also to help to turn it a little round.

The Depressors or Pullers down of the Shoulder are also two, namely Latissimus and Rotundus major. The Latissimus is so called from its breadth and largeness, for with its fellow it covereth almost the whole Back. It goeth also by the name of Ani-scalptor, or Scratch-arse Muscle (in Men.) It rises with a membranous and broad beginning from the tops of all the spines of the Rack-bones that are betwixt the sixth Vertebra of the Chest and the middle of Os sacrum, as also from the upper part of Os ileum or Haunch-bone: from thence ascending upward untill it come to that part of the Back where the Ribs begin to bend backward, there it becomes more fleshy, and is carried over the lower or hinder corner of the Shoul∣der-blade, at which place it begins to grow narrower but continues fleshy: and at length by a broad and strong Tendon it is inserted below the up∣per head of the Shoulder-bone lengthways, on the inside, betwixt the Pectoral and Round Muscles, there being a space left betwixt them for that purpose. This draws the Shoulder downward or toward the Tail, though a little obliquely backward.

The second Puller down of the Shoulder (or its fourth Muscle) is cal∣led Rotundus major, or the greater Round Muscle. It takes its beginning from the whole lower Costa or Rib of the Shoulder-blade, and is inserted into the upper and inner part of the Shoulder-bone with a short but broad, strong and nervous Tendon. The use of this is the same with the former, viz. to pull the Shoulder downward.

The two pair of Muscles that pull the Shoulder forward are called, the one by the name of Pectoralis, and the other Coracoideus. The Pectoralis is so called from its situation, which is upon the fore-side of the Breast. It hath a very large and for the greatest part membranous beginning, which it takes from divers parts: for its upper part arises from the middle of the Collar-bone on that side next the Breast; its middle, from the whole length of the Breast-bone and the ends of the Gristles of the Ribs that end in it; and its lower part springs from the Gristles of the sixth, seventh and eighth Ribs. After it hath taken these beginnings, it present∣ly becomes fleshy and thick, and running towards the Shoulder is at

length inserted into the Shoulder-bone with a short, but broad, finewy and strong Tendon a little below its head, betwixt the Muscle Deltoides, and that which is called Biceps. The office of this Muscle is, when it contracteth it self equally, to move the Shoulder equally and directly for∣ward or toward the Breast, inclining to neither hand: but if all its Fibres be not equally contracted, (for by reason of its divers beginnings it hath also divers sorts of Fibres, some running with a slanting line from above downwards, others with the like slanting line from below upward, and those betwixt these running streight; wherefore I say, if all these Fibres be not equally contracted, but some work, and others not) then are other motions performed by this Muscle, as the Shoulder drawn more upward or downward, as the different Fibres work.

Coracoideus is by Bartholin accounted the ninth Muscle of the Shoulder (which, says he, was first observed by Arantius and Placentinus) but we do after the more modern Authours reckon it for the sixth, and second drawer forward of it. It hath its name Coracoideus from its beginning, which is from the Processus Coracoides of the Scapula; from whence it reaches to the middle of the Shoulder-bone where it terminates. Its use is (as say the discoverers of it) to draw the Shoulder to the Process of the Blade-bone, or forward upon the Breast.

The Shoulder is moved also backward by three Muscles, which are In∣fraspinatus, Subscapularis or Immersus, and Rotundus minor.

That which is reckoned the first of these, is the Infraspinatus, by some called Suprascapularis inferior. It is seated upon the Shoulder-blade and fills up all that space which is betwixt the ridge or spine of the Scapula and its lower edge, even as the Suprascapularis superior fills up the upper space. It arises fleshy from the basis of the Blade below the ridge of it, becoming narrower in its progress as the Blade-bone grows narrower, and is inserted by a broad and short Tendon into the fourth Ligament of the Shoulder-bone.

The second Puller or Drawer back of the Shoulder is the Subscapularis,the Under-blade-lurker, or Immersus the drowned Muscle, because it is seated under the Blade-bone betwixt the Ribs and it. Very fleshy it is, ari∣sing so from the inner part of the basis of the Blade; in figure it is trian∣gular, like the Bone, growing narrower or straiter by degrees as it de∣scends, and is inserted into one of the Ligaments of the Shoulder.

The next being the third and last of the Drawers back of the Shoulder is called Rotundus minor, the lesser Round Muscle, from its figure. It arises from the lowest corner of the Scapula, and is implanted into the neck of the Shoulder-bone.

As for the circular motion of the Shoulder, that is not performed by any one Muscle, but by several of these already named, acting successive∣ly one after another.

CHAP. XIX. Of the Muscles that move the Fore-leg and Foot.

How far the Fore-leg of an Horse an∣swers in its Parts to the Arm of a Man. 1. Two Muscles bend the Cu∣bit. Biceps. 2. Brachiaeus internus. 1. Two also ex∣tend it. Longus. 2. Brevis. 1. Two Muscles bend the Shank. Cubitaeus internus. 2. Radiaeus internus. 1. Two also ex∣tend it. Cubitaeus externus. 2. Radiaeus extrnus. The Pasterns and Coffin-joint are ben∣ded by two Muscles. 1. Sublimis. 2. Profun∣dus. 1 They are ex∣tended by one, viz. Exten∣sor magnus.

THAT part of the Leg which reaches from the Elbow to that which we call the Knee, answers to that part in Humane Bodies which reaches from the Elbow to the Wrist. Onely in an Horse there is but one Bone in this space (which we shall call the Cubit-bone) whereas in Men there are two going by two distinct names, one of which being the greater is called Cubitus or the Cubit, and the other Ʋlna or the Ell. But as for that part which we call the Knee, it agrees more exactly with the Wrist in Men, and might more properly be called so: For examining the Part to see of what it is compounded, I find it made up of two ranges of little Bones as the Wrist of a Man is, and not like the Knee of a Man; which consists of one little round Bone (called the Knee-pan) fastned be∣tween the Jointings of the lower head of the Thigh-bone and the heads of the tibia and fibula: for that Bone is exactly found in the Hind-leg of a Horse in that Joint we call the Stifle, which is indeed the Knee, as shall be proved in a convenient place. And as the Knee of a Horse is like the Wrist of a Man, so is that Bone below it, (or indeed three Bones, for the Bone which we call the Shank or Shin, hath two small Bones fastned to it running by its sides down almost all its length till within two or three inches of the great Pastern; I say that as the Knee is that part which is the Wrist in Man, so is this part between the Knee and great Pastern) answerable to the Metacarpium, that is, to that space which reaches from the Wrist to the setting on of the Fingers. Onely in Man there are five Bones, and in an Horse but three. So likewise does the great Pastern correspond to the first Joint of the Finger; the little Pastern to the second Joint; and the Coffin-joint on which the Hoof grows, to that Joint of the Finger on which the Nail grows.

By this you may see that these Parts of an Horse come very near the like Parts of a Man, the number of Bones and Muscles of the Fingers one∣ly excepted. For a Horse is solidipes, or whole-footed, so that the whole of it is necessarily moved at one time, and therefore has no need of that variety of Muscles that a Man's Hand is endowed withall. An Horse's Fore-feet are of no other use than to go upon, any more than his Hinder-feet; whereas the Hand of a Man is ordained for other uses, and is there∣fore accordingly shaped, and divided into more Parts, to wit four Fin∣gers and a Thumb, all which have their peculiar Muscles to enable them to perform those motions to which they are designed. Whence the number of the Muscles come to differ greatly. Now we shall take no notice of those that a Man has more than an Horse, but shall onely treat of those that are to be found to move the Joints of an Horse already men∣tioned, viz. the Cubit-bone, the Shank, the two Pasterns, and the Cof∣fin-joint.

First, the Cubit is either bended, or extended. Of the Benders there are two; the first of which is called Biceps, from its double beginning; for it hath two heads, the first being outward, tendinous and round, ari∣seth

from the upper brim of the hollowness of the Shoulder-blade; the second head is broader, and is framed partly of a Tendon and partly of Flesh: this arises from the Processus Anchoriformis or Anchor-like Process of the Scapula; then descending by the inner head of the Shoulder-bone, it meeteth with the former head, and becometh a strong fleshy Muscle, running down the inside of the Cubit-bone to the Knee, where it is inser∣ted. This bends the Cubit forwards and somewhat inwards.

The second Bender is from its situation in Humane Bodies (being pla∣ced as the former is, upon the inside of the Arm in them, and of the Leg in Horses; I say from its situation it is) called Brachiaeus Internus. This lies inwardly under the Biceps, and is something shorter than it, but of a fleshy substance like it. It takes its beginning near the end of that Mus∣cle of the Shoulder called Deltoides, about the middle of the Shoulder-bone, to which it is firmly fastned: after which it runs its course as the former, and is inserted into the foreside of the Cubit-bone a little above the Knee, assisting the motion of the former.

There are also two Muscles to extend the Cubit,which lie on its outer and hinder side. The first of them from its length is called Longus. This arises with a strong and broad original, partly nervous and partly fleshy (which some make to be two heads) from the lower Rib of the Blade-bone, after which it descends on the hinder side of the Shoulder-bone, and also of the Cubit-bone, and is inserted into its outside just at the Knee. This draws the Cubit backwards and somewhat outwards, and thereby extends it or stretches it out streight.

The second Extender of the Cubit is called Brevis from its shortness.It arises from the hinder-part of the neck of the Shoulder-bone, and hold∣ing the same course as the former, is inserted into the lower end of the Cubit-bone at the same place with the former, and assists its motion.

Besides these there are said by some Anatomists to be two more Exten∣ding Muscles, viz. one called Brachiaeus Externus from its being placed on the outside of the Arm in Men. But this is by Spigelius looked upon to be the second head of the Long Muscle, because it grows into one Mus∣cle with it, and has the same insertion with both it and the Short one.

The other is called Anconaeus, being a small-bodied Muscle, arising from the lower and back-part of the Shoulder-bone, and is inserted into the Cubit an inch or two below the Elbow. But some make this to be but a part of the Short Muscle.

As for the other Bone of this Joint in Men, called Radius, that also has its Muscles, which serve to turn the Arm and Hand round: But see∣ing there is no such Bone in an Horse, as neither any such motion of an Horse's Leg, it cannot be expected there should be found any Muscles in him answerable to the other, as to this part.

Pass we on therefore to the next Joint commonly called the Shank, but which truly answers to the Metacarp, or back of the hand in Men. And this like the Cubit is either bended or extended.

To bend it there are two Muscles; of which the first is called Cubitaeus internus. This ariseth from the inner knob of the Shoulder-bone, and de∣scending along the inside of the Cubit, is implanted into the inner and hinder sides of the top of the Shank.

The second is called Radiaeus internus in Men, though very improperly in an Horse, seeing he has no Radius. This has the same rise, progress and insertion with the former.

There are also two Muscles to extend it; the first of which is called Cubitaeus externus. This springs from the outer knob of the Shoulder-bone, and descending down the Cubit, is inserted into the outer and fore∣side of the head of the Shank.

The second of the Extenders is called Radiaeus externus (improperly as to an Horse, as was noted before.) This has the same rise, progress and insertion with its fellow.

The next Joint is the great Pastern which answers to the first Joint of the Finger in a Man's Hand, as the little Pastern answers to the second Joint, and the Coffin-joint to the last on which the Nail grows. All these are either bended or extended as the former Joints were. But before we describe those Muscles that perform these actions, there is one other to be treated of that is called in Man Palmaris, from its being spread over the Palm of the Hand; but in an Horse its Tendon is spread over the Sole of the Foot, whence the name of Plantaris would better agree to it. This springs fleshy from the inner knob of the Shoulder-bone, but presently grows into a slender Tendon which descends to the Sole of the Foot as aforesaid.

The Pasterns and Coffin-joint are bended by two Muscles; the first of which is called Sublimis, (I suppose because it rises high up.) It springs from the inner knob of the Shoulder-bone, and is inserted into the Pasterns.

The second is named Profundus. This arises from the upper part of the Cubit-bone, and is inserted into the Coffin-joint.

They are extended by one very considerable Muscle, called Extensor magnus. This springs from the outer knob of the Shoulder-bone, and its Tendon is inserted into the fore and outer side of the Pasterns and Coffin-joint. Some reckon this to be two Muscles.

There are several other proper Muscles that belong to the Fingers in Men, some to one and some to another, as also others that move them laterally, or to and from one another, which it were from our purpose here to mention, as not being to be found in an Horse. Though I dare not affirm positively that there are no more than I have here described; for I am apt to suspect the contrary from the multitude of Tendons that descend into the Coffin-joint: however these that I have mention'd are the most considerable and plainly discoverable; and rather than encrease their number at a venture, I will be content that this Chapter be reputed imperfect.

Table XXXIII. (Book 33)

Represents an Horse with the Side towards you, that you may have a sight of as many of his Muscles at one view as is possible.

• AA Shew the oblique descendent Muscle of the Abdomen or Paunch.
• B The oblique ascendent Muscle of the same part, at its original from the Hip-bone.
• C Its membranous Tendon reaching to the White-line.
• D The transverse Muscle of the Paunch.
• E The right or streight Muscle of the same part.
• F The Pectoral Muscle.
• G The Serratus major Anticus.
• H The Deltoides of the Shoulder.

• H The Serratus Posticus.
• K The Cucullaris.
• L The Sacrolumbus.
• M The Longissimus Dorsi.
• N The Semispinatus.
• OOOOO The Intercostal Muscles.
• PPP The Ribs laid bare.
• Q The end or gristly part of the Shoulder-blade.
• ...R Glutaeus minor or lesser Buttock-muscle.
• ...S Glutaeus medius or middle Buttock-muscle.
• ...T Glutaeus major or greater Buttock-muscle.
• V The Deltoides of the Thigh, having its Tendon broken off it.
• XX The Musculus Biceps.
• Y The Vastus Externus.
• Z The Musculus Rectus.
• a One of the proper Muscles of the Cheek called Lateralis.
• b A Muscle of the Nostrils called Philtrum.
• c The external Adducent Muscle or closing Muscle of the Nose.
• d The orbicularis or constringens, which draws the Lips together, being common to both Lips.
• e The Muscles of the Eye-lids.
• f The Temporal Muscle.
• g The Buccinator or Trumpeter.
• h One of the Muscles of the Neck called Longus, seated under the Gullet, but to be seen in this Figure by reason of the posture of it.
• ii One of the proper Muscles of the Head called Mastoides.
• k The Muscle of the Head called Splenius or Triangularis.
• l The Frontal or Fore-head Muscle.
• m The Spinatus, being one of the Muscles that move the Neck.
• n The Complexus or Trigeminus so called from its threefold beginning.
• o The Subclavius pulled a little outward from under the other Muscles.
• p The Infraspinatus or Subscapularis inferior.
• q The Supraspinatus or Superscapularis superior.
• r The Scalenus.
• s The Rotundus major or Humerum deprimens a little out of its place at its lower end.
• ...t Musculus Biceps.
• ...u Longus.
• ...w Brachiaeus externus.
• ...x Cubitaeus externus.
• ...y Radiaeus externus.
• ...z Extensor magnus.
• ...α Radiaeus internus.
• ...β Cubitaeus internus.
• 11 The Gastrocnemius internus of both the Hind-legs.
• 22 The Gastrocnemius externus of the like.
• 3 The Tendon of the Muscle Plantaris coming out as out of a Pully.
• 4 The Tibiaeus Anticus.
• 55 The Extensor tertii internodii digitorum aut Longus, so called by Mr. Brown.

[illustration] anatomical view of the muscles of a horse's side

TAB XXXIII p. 183.

CHAP. XX. Of the Muscles of the Thigh.

1. The Benders of the Thigh are three. Psoas. 2. Iliacus in∣ternus. 3. Pectineus. 1. The Exten∣ders are also three. Glutaeus major. 2. Glutaeus medius. 3. Glutaeus minor. One Mover of the Thigh in∣ward, viz. Triceps or Quadriceps. Four Muscles move the Thigh out∣ward, called Quadrige∣mini. Also the Del∣toides of the Thigh. 1 The Thigh is turned a lit∣tle about by two Muscles. viz. Ob∣turator in∣ternus. 2. Obturator externus.

BY the Thigh we mean that part which is betwixt the Joint of the Huckle or Whirle-bone, and that which is called the Stifle; which consisteth of one large and long Bone, going by the name of the Thigh-bone, or Femur. This Bone hath a round head which is jointed into the round Cavity of the Hip-bone, so that it admits of all kinds of mo∣tions, whence it hath a multitude of Muscles to perform these motions; some of which move the Thigh forwards, whereby it is bended; some move it backwards, and thereby extend it: a third sort bend it inward, as when a Horse rubs the contrary Leg with his Foot, which is often seen upon any itching or pricking humour affecting that Part: a fourth sort move it outwards; and a fifth obliquely about. But first of the Benders forwards, which are accounted to be three in number.

The first of which is called Psoas or Lumbaris. This is almost round,thick and livid, and lieth in the inner part of the Abdomen, upon the Ver∣tebrae of the Loins. It arises fleshy from the transverse Processes of the two lowest Vertebrae of the Chest and two or three uppermost of the Loins; from whence descending by the inside of Os ileum, at length it ends in a strong and round Tendon, which is inserted on the foreside of the upper part of the lesser head of the Thigh-bone. The use of this is, strongly to draw the Thigh upward, and somewhat inward. Upon this Muscle the Kidneys are placed, near that part of it where its Nerve enters into it; which in Men is the cause of that stupor or numbness that is felt in the Thigh by those that are troubled with the Stone in the Kid∣neys, on that side that the Stone is on.

The second Bender forward is called Iliacus internus, or the inward Haunch Muscle. It springeth with a slender and fleshy beginning from the inside of the Haunch-bone, and being joined by its Tendon to the former Muscle, is inserted with a round Tendon into the lesser head or Rotator of the Thigh-bone. The use of this is the same with the first, which is, to lift the Thigh up and so to bend it forward; yet it doth not move it so much inward as the Psoas doth.

The third is called Pectineus, arising broad and fleshy from the line of the Share-bone near its Gristle, and is implanted into the inside of the lower end of the Thigh-bone with a broad and large Tendon. Its use is to draw the Thigh upward and inward. This is the Muscle that in Men helps to lay one Thigh over the other in sitting.

Note, that both this last foregoing, and all the following Muscles save the two last, are inserted at the lower end of the Thigh-bone, just above the Stifle; whereas in Men they are most of them if not all inserted into its upper part, viz. either into its neck, or into one or other of the two knobs jetting out at the lower end of the neck, (called the great and lit∣tle Trochanters.) What may be the reason of this different insertion is not easie to guess, unless it be the shortness of the Thigh-bone, which in an Horse is not half so long as it is in a tall Man: so that an Horse's Mus∣cles

being so plump and bulky upon his Buttocks, it was necessary they should have some considerable space to grow slenderer in and to become tendinous; and therefore they are extended as far as the Stifle which an∣swers to the Knee in Man.

Next come we to the Muscles that bend back and so extend the Thigh,(as when an Horse stretches himself) which motion is also performed by three Muscles. The first of which is called Glutaeus externus, or the out∣wardmost Buttock Muscle; in Men it is also called Glutaeus major, the greatest Buttock Muscle; but in an Horse it is not so, for in them the mid∣dlemost is the largest. This springeth with a very fleshy beginning from the Crupper, from the Spine or ridge of the Haunch-bone, and from the Os sacrum. Afterward descending a little obliquely and riding over the Joint of the Huckle-bone, it at length grows narrower and more slender, and so endeth into a strong and broad Tendon, which is inserted into the inner part of the Thigh-bone just above the Stifle, yea it seems to reach as far as to the top of the Tibia. Its use is to draw the Thigh backward and so to extend it, as also to enable the Horse to go backward.

The next or second is called Glutaeus medius, or the middle Buttock Muscle. This in Man (because of his going erect) lieth quite under the former, and is so hid by it, that unless the former be first removed, it can∣not be seen. But in Horses it is larger than the former, and lieth side by side with it, as doth the next also, and they are both to be seen without removing the first, as may be plainly observed by the following Figure. It arises with a fleshy and broad beginning, a little higher than the first, from the Spine of the Haunch-bone on the fore-part of it, and from thence descends somewhat obliquely over the Joint of the Hip as far as to the lower end of the Thigh-bone, into the outer side of which it is in∣serted with a broad, strong and membranous Tendon. Its use is to ex∣tend the Thigh and to draw it outward and backward, as when the Horse stands to stale.

The third and last of the Extenders is called Glutaeus minor, or lesser Buttock Muscle. This in a Horse arises equal in height with the former at the Spine of the Haunch-bone. At its beginning it is round, sharp and fleshy; but in its course it becomes more broad, descending with an oblique line by the side of the second Muscle, and is inserted at the lower end of the Thigh-bone, rather towards its fore-side. This assists the ac∣tion of the former, drawing the Thigh outward and backward.

The Thigh is drawn to the inside by the Muscle Triceps, or Quadri∣ceps, for it goes by both names, because some affirm it to have four, and others but three beginnings. This Muscle is looked upon to be the thickest of all the Muscles of the whole Body, being furnished with great va∣riety of Fibres.

The first of its beginnings is from the upper part of the Share-bone, where it arises with a nervous head, and descending is inserted into the inside of the lower end of the Thigh-bone.

The second part of it arises from the lower side of the same Bone, being fleshy and broad, and is inserted into the inside of the Thigh-bone, a lit∣tle higher up than the former.

The third head of this Muscle arises with a fleshy and sometimes ner∣vous beginning from the whole lower part of the Coxendix, round about the circumference of its wide hole; and is inserted near the last.

The fourth head springs with a nervous and fleshy beginning from the tip of the Coxendix, and afterward running along the inside of the Thigh, endeth into a round Tendon, which joining with the Tendon of the first part of this Muscle is inserted into the lower end of the Thigh-bone with it.

The Thigh is also turned outward, which motion is performed by four small Muscles called Quadrigemini, all which are placed one by another upon the outside of the articulation of the Thigh. The first of them is from its situation called Iliacus externus, and from its figure, Pyriformis or Pear-like Muscle. This is longer than any of the rest of them, arising round from the lower and outer part of Os sacrum; thence it runneth downward upon the backside of the great Rotator, and is implanted into the outside of the lower end of the Thigh-bone.

The second and third of these Muscles do want particular names; but both of them arise from the knob of Os ischium, near one another, and are inserted with the first.

The fourth and last is called Quadrigeminus quadratus. It is more fleshy and broad than the rest, arising from the inner part of the knob of the Ischium, lying some two or three inches distant from the third, and endeth with the former.

To these must be added that Muscle which we have named the Del∣toides of the Thigh, not finding any in Humane Bodies to answer to it,so as to borrow a name from thence. It springs (as you may see plain in the foregoing Figure) from the outside of the tip of the Ileum, with a sharp beginning; but presently enlarging it self, becomes three-square, and is inserted with a broad membranous Tendon into the outside of the Thigh-bone, from which insertion it appears torn off in the Figure. By its situation it seems to assist the action of the Quadrigemini.

The Thigh is turned about obliquely by two Muscles called Obturato∣res,or Stoppers, because they fill up the wide hole between the Os pubis and Hip-bone. The first is called Obturator internus. This ariseth from the inner circumference of the hole before spoken of, and passing over-thwart the end of the Hip-bone, is inserted into the Cavity of the great Rotator.

The other is called Obturator externus, the outward Filler. This ari∣ses out of the external circumference of the above-named hole with a fleshy and broad beginning, and winding about the neck of the Thigh-bone turneth into a strong and large Tendon which is implanted into the Cavity of the great Rotator with the former.

And thus much for the Muscles of the Thigh, which for order sake I have according to the custom of Anatomists first treated of; but it is ne∣cessary that we make our dissection in the Leg first, to remove those Muscles; for we cannot so easily nor conveniently raise nor shew these of the Thigh, untill those of the Leg be removed, because the heads of some of them lie upon the Muscles of the Thigh.

CHAP. XXI. Of the Muscles of the Tibia or Leg.

1. The Leg is extended by sive Muscles. Membra∣nosus. 2. Longus. 3. Rectus. 4. Vastus externus. 5. Vastus in∣ternus. 1. Four Muscles bend the Leg. Biceps. 2. Semimem∣branosus. 3. Seminer∣vosus. 4. Gracilis. 1 One moves it obliquely, viz. Poplitaeus.

THE Muscles of the Tibia or Leg are of the same number in Horses as in Men, (like as the Muscles of most other Parts are) the inser∣tion of some of them onely excepted. Which difference springs from hence, that this Bone of the Leg which in a Horse is but one main Bone supported on each side with another slender immoveable one for strength, as also for the safer passage of the Tendons of the Muscles between them, (which I suppose to be the onely use of them, as not being moveable; I say this Bone which in a Horse is but one) is in a Man two, going by two different names, viz. the one by that of Tibia, and the other, by that of Fibula, and some of the Tendons of the Muscles are inserted into one of them, and some into the other. But otherwise so far as I have had opportunity to examine them, I have found them to have the same original, substance, figure and course in a Horse as in Man; and there∣fore I shall proceed to treat of them after the same method as I have done of all the rest, forbearing to speak any further of the difference (in a Man and an Horse) between the Parts that are moved by the Muscles to be treated of in this and the following Chapter, untill I come to the Book of the Bones, where I shall shew at large the similitude between them, and that the difference is not so much as it may be believed to be.

The Leg hath three motions allowed it, viz. bended, extended, and moved obliquely outwards. All the Extenders are placed on the fore-part of the Thigh, of which the first is called Membranosus. This Muscle is by Bartholin called the Abductor, as if its use were to move the Leg oblique∣ly outwards; but that office is by other Anatomists since him ascribed to the Poplitaeus, and this said to extend the Leg. It ariseth fleshy from the upper part of Os ileum on the outside, and near the great Process of the Thigh-bone it becomes broad and nervously membranous, where∣fore it is called Fascia lata, the broad Swadling-band, for it enwrappeth almost all the Muscles of the Thigh within it self; and being come as low as the Knee in Humane Bodies, and that Joint we call the Stifle in Horses, (which exactly answers to the other, even as far as to the little round Bone between the two Bones of the Femur and Tibia, called the Patella or Knee-pan) I say when it is come as low as the Stifle (over which it crosses) it is at last inserted into the fore-side of the Tibia or Bone of the Leg. Its use is, as hath been said, to extend the Leg direct∣ly; or as some Authours will have it, somewhat to abduce it or draw it obliquely outwards.

The second Extender is called Longus, and Sartorius or Sutorius, from its use in those Men that sit cross-legg'd at work, as Shoomakers and Tai∣lors. It arises sharp and nervous from the upper and fore-part of the ap∣pendix of Os ileum, and as it passes obliquely down the inside of the Thigh, it becomes more fleshy and broad, continuing so till it come to the inside of the Leg a little below the Stifle, where it ends in a broad Tendon, and is inserted into the Bone of the Leg or Tibia. The use of this

Muscle is not onely to extend the Leg, but also to draw it inwards, wherefore it is by some Authours reckoned for one of the Benders of the Leg.

The third, from its streight course, is called Rectus, the Streight Mus∣cle. This takes its beginning from the lower brim of the Haunch-bone, and passing with a fleshy and round belly streight down the fore-side of the Thigh untill it come to the Stifle, it there turns into a strong and broad Tendon, which adhering to the Patella descends over it, and is im∣planted into the fore-side of the upper part of the Shank.

The fourth is called Vastus externus, because of its great fleshy bulk,and because it descends on the outside of the Streight Muscle. It arises broad and nervous from the root of the great Rotator or Trochanter, cleaving close to the outward part of the Thigh-bone all along its course, untill it come to the Stifle, where it becomes membranous and broad, and uniting with the Tendon of the Streight Muscle or Rectus, is inserted into the same place with it, but on its outside.

The fifth is called Vastus internus, running on the inside of the Rectus.It arises from the root of the lesser Trochanter and from the neck of the Thigh-bone with a nervous beginning, and afterwards growing fleshy descends down the Thigh-bone, sticking close to it, till it come to the Stifle, over which it passeth, and afterward unites its self with the for∣mer two, and takes its insertion in the same place of the Tibia as they do.

It is worth the Dissectour's taking notice of these three last Muscles, how they be joined all in one just at their crossing the Stifle, where they make one broad and very strong Tendon, which spreads over and involves the Patella or little Bone of the Stifle, and ties it so fast in its place upon the jointing of the Thigh-bone with the Tibia, that it is very seldom dis∣placed, or indeed never. For although by distentions or strains we often have this Part affected; yet never did I see an absolute dislocation in it. The Patella indeed may be (and often is) wrenched either to one side or the other as the accident may happen, but it is immediately reduced to its place again by this compound ligamentous Tendon, which like a Spring retracts it self into its former Station, and the Bone to which it is knit, also. So that, that malady which is commonly taken for a dislo∣cation of this Bone, seems rather to be from Bloud extravasated out of the Capillary Vessels, which by great distentions many times may be broken; which Bloud lieth congealing and putrifying in the spaces be∣tween the Membranes and Muscles, affecting the sensible neighbouring Parts, which puts the Horse to that great pain we observe him to have on such accidents. Now the means we use to remove this pain is by cha∣fing the Part with penetrating Oils, which commonly effect the cure, if they be used presently before the Bloud be too much congealed: But if the pain be not removed by this means, we are fain to open the Skin by way of an Issue, blowing in wind to separate the several Skins one from another, and so make way for the congealed Matter the better to come forth; which done, the pain is removed, and the affection quite taken away, and the Horse most times goes again as well as ever. Whereas should this Bone be displac'd, as it is by many Farriers thought to be, this way of proceeding seems so far from contributing to the cure, that by laying the Skins open there is rather given more liberty for the Bone to remove out of its place, than any assistance afforded toward the restoring it again. But

so much by way of digression to inform our Professours in this point; I shall now proceed to describe the remaining Muscles, the next of which are the Benders of the Leg.

These are in number four; the first of which (according to Bartholin) is called Biceps, though by other Authours it is reckoned the last and fifth, supposing that there are five of these Muscles. It arises sharp and ner∣vous from the appendix of the Coxendix, and being carried on the outside of the Thigh, it doth about its middle become fleshy, as if it begun there with a second head; from whence descending it groweth in its course more thick and outwardly nervous, untill it becomes a strong Tendon, which is inserted into the outer side, (but somewhat backward) of the appendix of the Tibia. The use of this Muscle is to bend the Leg by pulling it backward.

The next, according to the before-named Bartholin, is the Semimem∣branosus, which by others is reputed the fourth Bender. It takes its be∣ginning from the knob of the Coxendix as the former doth, with a small, membranous head, from whence it runneth down the back-part of the Thigh, till it come to the Leg-bone, into which it is inserted with a round Tendon behind, in that place which in Man is called the Ham.

The third (according to the same Authour) is the Seminervosus, so called from its substance, it being partly nervous and partly fleshy, as the former was partly fleshy and partly membranous. This arises small and nervous from the same knob of the Coxendix as the former two did; from whence descending obliquely by the back and inner part of the Thigh (in which course it becomes fleshy) its Tendon reaches towards the middle of the Leg-bone, into whose inner and backer part it is in∣serted.

The fourth is called Gracilis, the slender Muscle. This by some Au∣thours is accounted for the second Bender of the Leg, but I shall after the method of the before-named Authour rank it for the fourth and last. It arises with a large and nervous beginning from the middle of the Share-bone just at its jointing, from whence it runs down the inside of the Thigh untill it comes to the Tibia or Leg-bone, into whose inside it is in∣serted with a round Tendon near the former.

Note, that some of these Muscles being placed more outward and o∣thers more inward; if they all work together, they draw the Leg direct∣ly backward; but if one be contracted alone, then it doth bend the Leg a little either to this or that side, according as the Muscle is placed, as well as draw it backward.

There is another Muscle whose use is to move the Leg obliquely; its name is Poplitaeus. It takes its rise broad and nervous from the outer head of the Thigh-bone, and afterward becoming fleshy runs with a slan∣ting line down the Thigh to the back and inward part of the upper knob of the Tibia, where it is inserted.

CHAP. XXII. Of the Muscles that move the lower part of the Leg, and the Foot.

The Instep-bone is ben∣ded by two Muscles. 1. Tibiaeus anticus. 2. Peronaeus anticus. It is extended by three. 1. Gastro∣cnemius ex∣ternus. 2. Gastro∣cnemius in∣ternus. 3. Plantaris. The Tendons of these three Muscles make the magna Chorda. 1. It is moved sideways by two. Tibialis posticus. 2. Peronaeus posticus. 1. The Pasterns and Coffin-joint are ben∣ded by two Muscles. Flexor longus. 2. Flexor brevis. 1. They are ex∣tended also by two. Extensor longus. 2. Extensor brevis.

BY the lower part of the Leg is to be understood that Bone which is below the Hock or Hough, reaching from thence to the great Pa∣stern; which Bone answers to those five in Humane Bodies that make the Instep. Likewise the great Pastern and little Pastern answer to the first and second Joints of the Toes in Men; and lastly that which is called the Coffin-joint on which the Hoof grows, is answerable to the last joint of the Toes on which the Nails are placed. Onely the difference is, that a Man because of his going upright, treadeth upon the whole space from the Heel to the Toes; and his Foot is also divided into five Toes, each consisting of several Joints, that by spreading themselves and grasping closely on what he treads upon, they may keep him the more firmly erect. Whereas a Horse and other four-footed Beasts having four Feet upon the ground, have no need of so broad nor large a Foot, and do therefore go as it were upon Tip-toes, their Heels reaching as high up the Leg as to the Hock, which indeed is the Heel of the Horse, as a very eminent and learned Physician who did me the honour to take a view of my Skeleton, intimated to me. For make but any Quadruped, as a Dog or the like, stand upright, lifting up his Fore-feet, and you may observe all that part of his Leg from the Hough downwards to lie upon the ground as a Man's Foot does; yea some, as Coneys, &c. in their ordinary gate tread upon all that space: onely such Creatures have their Feet cleft into Toes, whereas a Horse is whole-footed, and thence arises a difference as to the number of the Muscles of the Foot.

Note, that the Muscles which move each Bone have onely their Insertions into that Bone they are to move, and that they take their rise from the Bone or some other Part (immediately or mediately) above it, as may be ob∣served by the foregoing discourse of the Muscles of the Thigh and Leg. Thus those Muscles that move the Thigh, take their original from either the Hip-bone, Share-bone, or Os sacrum, all of which are above it; like∣wise those that move the Leg, arise from the Hip or Share-bones, or else from the Head or some other part of the Thigh-bone which is the Joint above it; and thus lastly do the Muscles that are to move all that part of the Leg or Foot which is below the Hock, spring from and lie upon the Parts above the Hock, save the Flexor brevis and Tensor brevis, and the Plantaris which is at the Sole of the Foot (which cannot properly be cal∣led a Muscle neither, for it is very little or not at all carnous, but rather ligamentous) for otherwise onely the Tendons of the Muscles reach hi∣ther, and are inserted some into one Joint, some into another.

The Foot is bended, extended, and moved (a little) to either side,ac∣cording to the motion of the Instep-bone (for so we shall call it for di∣stinctions sake.) First, it is bended when it is drawn upwards and for∣ward. To perform which motion there are two Muscles assisting: the first of which is called Tibiaeus anticus or the forward Leg-muscle, so

named from the situation of it, which is upon the fore-part of the Leg-bone towards its outer side. It arises sharp and fleshy from the upper ap∣pendix of the Leg-bone, cleaving close to it all along as it descends, and towards the bottom of it, it turneth by degrees to a Tendon, which pas∣sing under the Gristle that compasseth about the next Joint or Hock, is divided into two or more Tendons that are inserted into the foreside of the Instep-bone, which (together with the rest of the Foot) it moves forward and upward.

The next is called Peronaeus anticus, because it arises in Man from that Bone of the Leg that is called Perone or Fibula, and therefore it is im∣properly so called in an Horse that wants that Bone, and in whom it springs from the upper appendix of the Tibia, and descending downwards with a fleshy body till it come almost to the bottom of this Bone, it turneth into a Tendon as the former did, which Tendon passeth down by the outside of the Hock, and is inserted into the outside of the Instep-bone, which with the rest of the Foot it moves forward and somewhat outward.

The Foot is also Extended, that is, when the Instep-bone is drawn backwards, which motion is performed by three Muscles: of which the first is called Gemellus externus, or Gastrocnemius externus. This in Men makes the greatest part of the Calf of the Leg. It takes its rise broad and fleshy from the inner head of the Thigh-bone at the lower end of it, and also from the outward head of the same Bone, for it hath a double be∣ginning; which two heads descending for a while apart, they begin to be united into one about the middle of the Leg-bone, after which they both turn into one entire, broad, strong and nervous Tendon, which unites with the Tendon of the following Muscle called Gastrocnemius in∣ternus, and both are inserted into the Heel-bone.

The second Extender of the Foot is called Gastrocnemius internus. This Muscle lyeth something under the former, arising from the hinder-part of the upper end of the Leg-bone with a strong, nervous beginning, and growing tendinous toward the lower end of the Bone unites with the Tendon of the foregoing, and is inserted into the Heel-bone with it as aforesaid.

The third and last is called Plantaris, or the Muscle of the Soal or Tread. This arises fleshy, round and slender between the former two, taking its beginning from the back-part of the lower head of the Thigh-bone. After it hath descended a little way down the Leg-bone it becomes a slender round Tendon, which running between the Tendons of the former two and joining very closely with them descends down to the Heel-bone, where it leaves them and proceeds along the back-part of the Instep-bone and the two Pasterns, and terminates within the Foot, spread∣ing all about the bottom of it, making that Part which is called the Soal of the Foot in Men, and in Horses that Part that lieth next under the Soal, and is plain to be seen when we have drawn the Soal of the Foot out.

It is the Tendons of these three Muscles that make that strong and thick Tendon by which Butchers hang up their Meat,which by reason of its greatness and singular strength is called Chorda magna. It is also this Tendon running down the back-part of the Leg, which we call the back Sinew, which being affected either by a strain or bruise or other ac∣cident, causes so great a pain, by reason of the sensibleness of the Tendon. When it is hurt, the Horse many times falls exceeding lame, though such

accidents are not so dangerous to life in Horses as they are said to be in Men; for we make no difficulty in curing them, especially if presently taken in hand, but Chirurgeons do most times conclude Wounds of this Part in Men to be very dangerous by reason of their frequent falling into convulsions thereupon.

The Foot is also moved somewhat sideways, viz. inward and outward,by two Muscles. The first of which is called Tibialis posticus. This springeth from the upper end of the Leg-bone, from whence it descends among the before-named hinder Muscles till it come to the Instep-joint, where it becomes tendinous, and from thence runs down the inner side of the Instep-bone and Pasterns, till it come to the Soal of the Foot, into which it is inserted. Its use is to move the Foot obliquely inward.

The second is called Peronaeus posticus (improperly in an Horse.) It arises from the upper and hinder-part of the Leg-bone by a nervous and strong beginning, from whence it descends all along the outside of the Bone cleaving firmly to it, untill it reach its middle, where it becomes tendinous, and descends with the Tendon of the Peronaeus anticus on the outside of the Instep-joint or Hock, but is not joined with it; for it con∣tinues its course further untill it reach the Foot, into the bottom of which it is implanted. This moves the Foot contrary to the former, viz. obliquely outward.

The Pasterns and Coffin-joint are likewise bended, or extended by their proper Muscles. The Benders are two, of which the first is called Flexor longus, or the Long Bender. This arises from the upper and hinder-part of the Leg-bone, about the middle whereof it becometh tendinous, and descends on the inner side of the Hough down the Instep-bone and Pa∣sterns into the Coffin-joint.

The second is called Flexor brevis, the Short Bender. It springs from the inside of the Heel-bone a little below the Hock, and has the same in∣sertion with the former. These bend the Pasterns and Coffin-joint by drawing them backward.

The Extenders are also two. The first is called Longus Tensor, or the Long Extender. It arises from the fore and inner side of the Shank just under the Stifle, and descends on the fore-side of that Bone, the In∣step-bone and the Pasterns, and is inserted into the fore and upper part of the Coffin-joint.

The second ariseth from the fore-part of the annular Ligament that binds about the Instep-joint, and descending under the former has the same insertion. These two extend the Pasterns and Coffin-joint by draw∣ing them forward.

Thus I am come to the end of the Treatise of the Muscles, in describing of any of which if I have erred, I hope the Apology with which I prefa∣ced this fourth Book will obtain my excuse with all ingenuous Men: and as for the morose and carping, I shall take it as a favour from them, if instead of railing at random, they will take the pains to demonstrate my mistakes.

Table XXXIV. (Book 34)

Represents an Horse with his hinder-part toward you, that the Mus∣cles of his Buttocks, &c. may be the plainer seen.

• AA Shew the Cucullaris or Monk's Hood.
• B The edge of the Deltoides of the Thigh.

• C The Glutaeus minor or lesser Buttock Muscle.
• DDD The Glutaeus medius or middle Buttock Muscle.
• EE The Glutaeus major or greater Buttock Muscle.
• F The Biceps.
• GG The Seminervosus of both Legs.
• HHH The Lividus or Pectinalis of both Hind-legs.
• I The Semimembranosus.
• K The Orbicularis or orbicular Muscle of the Lips.
• L A portion of the Longissimus dorsi.
• M The circular Muscle of the Nose.
• N The sphincter Muscle of the Fundament.
• O The Mastoides on the other side the Neck.
• P The Musculus lateralis or Mansorius, being one of the Muscles of the Cheeks.
• Q The Musculus scalenus or Triangularis.
• R The Complexus or Trigeminus.
• S The Transversalis Colli or transverse Muscle of the Neck.
• T The Spinatus Colli being one of the Extenders of the Neck.
• ...V Vastus externus.
• ...WW Gastrocnemius externus.
• ...X Peronaeus anticus.
• ...Y Peronaeus posticus.

[illustration] the muscles of a horse's buttocks

TAB XXXIV p. 193.

The End of the Fourth Book.

THE ANATOMY OF AN HORSE. BOOK V. Of the Bones.

CHAP. I. Of the nature, definition, differences and parts of Bones.

The definition of a Bone. The material and efficient causes of a Bone. Their diffe∣rences. Their Parts. How many Bones of the Head.

THE Bones are by a learned and ancient Philosopher com∣pared to the Carkase of a Ship, to which the rest of the Parts are fastned and whereupon they are sustained. These afford stability, streightness and form to each Part and to the whole. The knowledge of them is most necessary; for without it we must needs be ignorant of the originals and insertions of the Muscles; and upon fractures or dislocations of them, it were very unlikely that any should set them right again without the knowledge of their shapes, and the manner of their jointing one with another.

A Bone is said to be a similar Part, the driest and coldest of all the rest, made of the most earthy and tartareous part of the Seed in the Womb, (i. e. of the Humour in the Ovum or Conception) and is nou∣rished with the like particles of Bloud after the birth, and moistned with the Marrow contained in it.

In which description the word [Seed] is to be interpreted as we have in∣timated,and not of the Male and Female's Seed mixed together in the Womb, as the Ancients conceived; for it is certain that the Female hath no true Seed, and that the Male's being onely an active principle of generation, affords nothing of matter to the Parts of the Foetus, but onely impregnates the Ovum, as shall be shewed more at large when I come to speak to the Generation of Animals. Thus the Male's Seed is no material cause at all of the Bones, but onely a remote efficient cause of them as it is of other Parts of the Body; of all which the plastick or formative power that is seated in the Ovum it self, is the immediate efficient.

As to the differences of Bones, they are many, as being divided or di∣stinguished several ways. And first from their hardness, or softness: thus the lower parts of the Temple-bones are called Petrosa, stony Bones, and such are also the Bones of the Teeth. Others are in respect to these, soft; such are the spongy Bones of the Nose, and those which are called appendices to any Bone. And lastly of a mean substance between these may be reckoned all the rest of the Bones.

They are again divided or distinguished by their magnitude; thus some are esteemed great, some little, and some of a moderate size betwixt both.

Also they are divided by their figure; some being plain, some round; some have three sides, others four; some are like a Boat, some a Cup; some like a Hammer, an Anvil, or a Stirrop, such are the Auditory Bones.

They are also distinguished from their situation, connexion, cavity, sense, and upon several other considerations, which it would be tedious further to prosecute.

Again, the Bones are many of them divided into three parts; first, that part whereof the body of the Bone consisteth; secondly, the part that groweth to the Bone; thirdly, the bunching part of the Bone: of which the first hath no proper name belonging to it, but is called by the name of the whole Bone; the second being that part that groweth to the Bone is properly called Epiphysis, the Appendage; and that part that bunches out beyond the plain surface, is called Apophysis, or the Process.

In relation to this discourse of the Bones we shall divide the Body into three Parts, viz. the Head, the Trunk and the Limbs. By the Head is implied both Head and Neck. The first and uppermost Part of the Head is the Skull, called Cranium, because it is as it were Cranos an Hel∣met to the Brain. It is compounded of several Bones to the number of fifteen or seventeen in Humane Bodies, say most Anatomists, that is, in all, as well little as big; for of the large ones there are but nine, three of which are common to the Skull with the upper Jaw-bone, which are the Wedge-like Bone or cuneiforme, the Yoke-bone, and spongiosum, the spongy or Sieve-like Bone. The other six are proper Bones and make up the Skull it self; and those are the Fore-head Bone, the Noll-bone, the two Bones of the Synciput, and the two Temple-bones, in which last are contained (in each of them) three small Bones, of which we have alrea∣dy treated where we spoke of the Parts of the Ear in the third Book at Chap. 14. namely the Hammer, the Anvil and the Stirrup, all which make up the said number of fifteen Bones of the Skull; to which if we add the lately found-out Bone of the Ear, called the orbicular Bone, there will be seventeen. Now the larger Bones are divided or distinguished by

several Seams called Sutures, and both Bones and Sutures are of the same number in this Animal we are treating of as in Men, as may be seen by the following Figure.

Table XXXV. (Book 35)

Represents the Sutures or Seams of the Skull of a young Foal newly foaled, which in a grown Horse are not so discernible.

Figure I.

Shews the Sutures of the top and sides of the Skull.

• AAA The first Suture called Coronalis, or the Coronal Suture.
• BB The second proper Suture called the Lambdoidal or Lambdoides.
• CCC The third proper and true Suture called the Sagittal or Sagittalis.
• DD The first counterfeit proper Suture, so called because it is not Saw-like as the other three are; it is also called Squamosa.
• EE The first common Suture by which the lower Process of Os frontis is joined with the first Bone of the upper Jaw.
• F The second common Suture by which the Wedge-like Bone is joined with the said first Bone of the upper Jaw. This is called Cuneisormis.
• G The third common Suture called Cribrosa, which is common to the Wedge-like Bone and the septum of the Nose.
• H The common Suture that divides the Os jugale into two, or by which it is joined together.

Figure II.

Shews the Sutures of the bottom of the Skull.

• AA The common Suture that joins the bottom of Os occipitis to the Os sphenoides.
• BBBB Some other Sutures that belong to the bottom of the Skull.

[illustration] the sutures of the top, sides, and bottom of a horse's skull

TAB. XXXV. pag. 197.

[illustration]

I

[illustration]

II

CHAP. II. Of the Sutures or Seams of the Head.

A Suture what, and of how many kinds. The Sutures are proper or common. The proper are true or false. 1. True Sutures are The Coro∣nal. 2. The Lamb∣doidal. 3. The Sa∣gittal. The false Su∣tures are two. The common Sutures are 1. Frontalis. 2. Cuncifor∣mis. 3. Cribrosa. The use of the Sutures.

A Suture is the connexion of one Bone of the Head to another, of which there are two sorts: the one is plain and linear, like two boards glewed or stones cemented together; the other indented like the teeth of two Saws put tooth within tooth.

Of these Sutures some are proper to the Skull alone, and some are com∣mon to it with the upper Jaw. The proper Sutures are again double, that is to say, true or false. Of the former sort are those Saw-like ones before-named, which are three in number, viz. Coronal, Lambdoidal and Sagittal; and of the latter are the plain ones, which some reckon to be more, some fewer.

The first of the Saw-like ones is called in Humane Skulls Coronalis or the Crown-Suture, because the Ancients were wont to wear their Crowns or Garlands in that place. This Suture, as in Men, so likewise in a Horse runs overthwart the Skull above the Fore-head, reaching from the Temple-bone of one side to the Temple-bone on the other, joining the Os frontis or Fore-head-bone to the Synciput or Bone of the fore-part of the Head.

The second is called Lambdoides or Lambdoidal Suture, as resembling in its dimension the Greek letter Λ lambda. This is seated on the back-part of the Head, being opposite to the former, beginning at the bottom of the Occiput, from whence it ascends obliquely to either Ear in Men, but in a Horse something above the Ear, running with a more slanting line. It joins the Bone of the Occiput to the Bones of the Synciput and Temples.

The third runs not overthwart the Head as the two former, but lengthways of it, reaching in Humane Skulls from the top or middle of the Lambdoidal to the middle of the Coronal Suture onely; but in Horses it reaches further (as it does in Children) crossing the Coronal Suture, and runs afterward down the Fore-head-bone to the Nose. This is not so Saw-like in Horses Skulls as the other two are, as may be seen by the foregoing Figure. It is the last of the true or Saw-like Sutures, and hath the name of Sagittal, from its streightness, its course being streight like an Arrow.

Next come we to the false, counterfeit or bastard proper Sutures, which are those that resemble a Line onely, and are not Saw-like at all. These are in number two; the first of which passeth from the Root of the Processus mammillaris upwards with a circular Duct, and passeth downwards again towards the bottom of the Ear, after it hath compassed in the Temple-bone. By this Seam are the Bones of the Synciput, Occiput and Sphenoi∣des joined with the Temple-bones.

The second of the bastard proper Sutures runs obliquely downwards, arising from the side or rather top of the former, and runs down toward the Socket of the Eye, to the beginning of the first common Suture.

The common Sutures are those that belong not to the Skull alone, but are common to it with the Wedge-like Bone and the upper Jaw. Of which these that follow are the most remarkable.

First, the Frontalis, by which the outer Process of the Fore-head-bone is joined with the first Bone of the upper Jaw.

The second is that which is called Cuneiformis or Wedge-like, by which the Wedge-like-bone is joined with the first Bone of the upper Jaw.

The third is called Cribrosa, which is common to the Wedge-like-bone, and the septum or partition of the Nose.

Now the uses of these Sutures or Seams are, first, to be vents of the Brain, through which the impure and sooty excrements might exhale or evaporate; secondly, to help to stay the Brain from tottering, and its parts from being misplaced in violent motions, by giving way to the Fi∣bres that pass through them from the Dura mater within, to the Pericra∣nium without the Skull, by which Fibres the said dura mater and also the Brain it self (which is wrapt within it) is kept suspended as it were, that so the hardness of the Skull might not offend it by pressing against it, nor the Brains own weight bear too hard upon the bottom of the Skull, which it would be apt to do were it not for its being thus born up or suspended by these Fibres that tie the Dura mater to the outside of the Skull.

These Sutures were also made for the ingress and egress of the Vessels, for the life and nourishment of the Parts contained within the Skull.

Lastly, that if at any time the Head should happen to be broken, the fracture might not run through the whole Skull, but stay at the end of the fractured Bone; whereas were it not for these Seams, it would like an earthen Pot with one knock or fall be in danger of being shivered all in pieces, which it is not now so apt to do, for the crack will not so easily pass over a Seam as it would run along an intire bone.

CHAP. III. Of the proper Bones of the Skull.

The Bones of the Skull are proper or com∣mon. The proper are six. 1. The Fore-head-bone. Its Cavities. Its Holes. Its Processes. 2 The Bones of the Synciput. Their con∣nexion. Their shape, substance, sur∣face and holes. 3 The Os occi∣pitis. Its shape and connexion. Its Sinus. Its Processes and Holes. 4 The Temple-bones. Their con∣nexion. Their figure. Their sub∣stance. Their Sinus. Their Pro∣cesses. 5 Os petro∣sum. Its Holes, and Cavities.

THE Bones of the Skull are of two sorts, proper and common. Of the first in this Chapter; and of the latter in the next.

The proper are in number six; one of the Fore-head, another of the hinder-part of the Head or Occiput, two of the Crown, and two of the Temples, all which are divided or distinguished from one another by the before-named Sutures.

The Fore-head-bone, called Os frontis, is seated before, and maketh the fore-part of the Skull, both above and a little below the Orbit of the Eyes. It is bounded before by the Coronal and first common Suture, on the sides by the Temporal Bones, and on the inside by the spongy Bones.

Betwixt the Laminae or Scales of this Bone at the top of the Nose there is a large (or rather double) Cavity, from whence two holes pass to the Nostrils, distinguished by many bony Fibres and small Scales, which are encompassed with a green Membrane, and contain a soft medullar, or as it were an oylie body.

The uses ascribed to these Cavities are various: as first, to prepare the air that is drawn in by the Nostrils, for the generation of animal Spirits; secondly, to keep for some time the odoriferous air whereby smells may be more leisurably perceived; thirdly, some think that they serve for the collection of flegmatick Excrements; and others, lastly, that they assist or promote the shrilness or echo of the Voice. I will not determine of the truth of any of these opinions; but shall onely observe this further, that these Cavities are much larger in an Horse than they are in a Man, even the difference of the bulk of their Bodies considered.

Besides these Cavities there is also a Den or Sinus made of a double Scale; one of which being outermost maketh the upper (inward) part of the Orbit of the Eye, and is plain; the other maketh the Cavity above the Eyes on either side, and is not plain, but hath inscriptions answerable to the winding convolutions of the Brain, whose bunching∣out portions it receives.

This Fore-head-bone hath also two Holes in the middle part of the Eye-brow, which go to the Orbit of the Eye, by which the first branch of the Nerve of the fifth conjugation of the Brain goeth to the Muscle of the Fore-head.

It hath also four Processes, two of which are seated at the greater cor∣ner of the Eye, and other two at its lesser, all helping to make the upper part of the Orbit.

Next come we to the Bones of the Synciput or fore-part of the Head, which are in number two, being joined before with the Bone of the Fore∣head by the Coronal Suture, with the Os occipitis behind, by the Lamb∣doidal Suture, on each side to the Temple-bones by the scaly Sutures, and to the Wedge-like-bone by one of the common Sutures. They are also joyned together, or one to another, in the middle or top of the Head (lengthways) by a Suture common to them both, called the Sagittal Suture.

Their figure is almost four-square; their substance thinner than that of the other Bones, yet consist of two plates, save in their lower edges, where they are joined to the Temple-bones. On the outside they are smooth, but on the inside uneven, having several shallow Cavities or Dens by the sides of the Sagittal Suture, to which the Dura mater firmly grows; as also many long and winding inscriptions or furrows for the Vessels which run from the internal Jugulars through the said Dura mater to the Brain. They have likewise several perforations or little holes, some of which indeed penetrate but one Plate, which are for the entrance and exit of the Vessels that run between the Plates; but most run quite through them, and are made for small Veins and Arteries to pass both from within outwards, and from without inwards.

Next is the Os occipitis, or Noll-bone, which makes the hinder and lower part of the Head, and the middle part also of the basis of the Skull. It is of a very hard substance, harder than any Bone of the Skull besides, (except the Os petrosum of the Temple-bones) being thicker at the bot∣tom where it is without flesh, and where the two Sinus of the Dura

mater are joined. At the sides of the great perforation (through which the Spinal Marrow descends) it is somewhat thin and without any Cavi∣ties or small Dens in it; but that its thinness here might be no prejudice to it, from the edge of this perforation there ascends on the inside a large Process or Prominence running along to its top, to strengthen it and arm it against any accidents that might happen by blows, &c. This Promi∣nence it is that distinguishes the two Protuberances of the Cerebellum.

This Bone is in shape five-corner'd, by two of which corners it is joined in its upper part to the Bones of the Synciput by the Lambdoidal Suture; by two other in its fore-sides to the Temple-bones by one of the coun∣terfeit Sutures; and by its fifth corner to the Os cuneiforme, or Wedge∣like Bone.

It hath in it several Sinus's or Chanels, of which some are on the in∣side,and others on the outside of it. Of those on the inside there are two which are pretty large, ordained for the receiving the protuberances or bunchings out of the Cerebellum or After-brain. The others on the in∣side are some to receive the protuberances of the Brain it self; others to receive the two Sinus's of the Dura mater, that they might not be com∣pressed by the Bones of the Skull; and the rest are for the like uses. The two that are on the outside of this Bone, are in its lower part by the sides of the great perforation, of a semicircular shape.

This Bone hath also several Processes, four of which being clad with a glib Gristle are received into so many Sinus's of the first Vertebra of the Neck. But that is the most considerable which I mentioned before, and serves to strengthen the Bone. It has Holes to the number of five; the first is in the midst of the bottom of the Noll, which is the largest of all the inward holes of the Head, being in shape round and somewhat long, through which the Medulla oblongata or Spinal Marrow passeth out of the Skull into the Cavity of the Vertebrae of the Neck. The other four are less by far, and are made for the transition of several Vessels.

The Temple-bones come next to be treated of, which are seated on the sides of the Skull and reach to the bottom of the Ears. They are joyned on their upper part to the outside of the Bones of the Crown by the Suture cal∣led Squamosa, or Scale-like. In their fore-part they are joined to the first Bone of the upper Jaw, by its first Process; and their hinder-part is joined to the Os occipitis, by one of the counterfeit Sutures.

The figure of the Temple-bone is in its upper part ample, equal and semicircular; but below, it is very shapeless, like to a rude, rugged and unequal Rock, from whence as also from its hardness it hath its name of Petrosum, or the Rocky-bone.

The substance of this Bone is also full of variety; for at its bottom it is thick and rugged; but as it ascends, by degrees it grows much thinner, and at its top is so thin that it is almost transparent, (especially where it gives way to the Temporal Muscle) and like a Scale lies upon the lower edge of the Bone of the Synciput, which Bone in its descent under the Temple-bone is also attenuated.

The Temple-bones have each of them two Sinus or Cavities. The outer of these is much larger than the other, being lined with a Cartilage or Gristle, seated betwixt the Auditory passage and the Process of the Yoke-bone. It is of an indifferent length, running as it were transversly or overthwart, and has the longer Process or the head of the lower Jaw inserted or articulated into it. The other Cavity is inward at the back∣side

of the Process of the Yoke-bone, and is common to the Temple-bone with the Noll-bone.

By these Sinus or Cavities there stands a sharp and longish, and (in Horses) pretty thick (but in Men far more long and slender) Appendix, from its shape in Humane Bodies called Os styloides, the Pen-like Bone. Besides which there are also three Processes; two of which are external, and one internal.

The first external is blunt, thick and short, (said to be somewhat hol∣low within) tending downwards, in shape something like to the Nipple of a Cow, from whence it is called Mammillaris.

The second of the outward Processes runs forward from the hole of the Ear to the Process of the first Bone of the upper Jaw, both of them fra∣ming the Os jugale, or Yoke-bone. For these two Processes, one of the Temple-bone and the other of the first Bone of the upper Jaw, being join∣ed by an oblong Suture do make the fashion (as it were) of a Bridge, or of an Oxes Yoke, from whence that Bone hath its name, and of which we shall treat further in the next Chapter.

The third Process, which is internal, is that which is called the Rocky-bone. It is pretty long, jetting out to the inside of the bottom of the Skull, within which it hath two holes, through one of which an Artery, and through the other the Auditory Nerve pass to the inner Ca∣vities of the Ear, which are three in number, namely the Tympanum or Drum, the Labyrinthus or Labyrinth, and the Cochlea, or Snail-shell. On the outside of the Skull this Process has three perforations or holes. The first and largest of which is called meatus Auditorius, or the hole of hearing. The second is narrow, short and oblique, near to the first, by the first hole of the Wedge-like Bone. Through this the Jugular Vein enters into the inner Cavities of the Skull. The third hole is seated be∣twixt the Processus mammillaris and the Styloides or Pen-like Appendix, ending into that passage that goes from the Ear to the Mouth. As to the little Bones that lie hid in the Cavities of this Process, by ancient Anato∣mists they were reckoned to be but three, but there is by modern Au∣thours added a fourth; and they are commonly known by these follow∣ing names, viz. Incus, Malleus, Stapes, and Os orbiculare, of all which I have already treated in the fourteenth Chapter of the Third Book, where they are also lively represented in Figures, to which place I refer the Reader for his further satisfaction; having not mentioned them in this place, but that they make up the number of the proper Bones of the Skull.

Table XXXVI. (Book 36)

Shews the several Bones of the Skull both proper and common, toge∣ther with the several perforations for the outgate and ingate of the Vessels, as many as can be shewed in two Figures, one shewing the top and the other the bottom of the Skull.

Figure I.

Shews the uppermost Bones of the Skull, of the Nose, and of the upper Jaw.

• AA The Bones of the Synciput or fore-part of the Head.
• BB The Temple-bones, on which the Temporal Muscles rest.
• MM The Os jugale.
• OO The common Suture that joins the Fore-head-bone and the Bones of the upper Jaw together.
• DDD The six Fore-teeth of the upper Jaw.
• X A hole a little above the upper Gumm, through which do pass the Palate∣vein and Artery, which branch afterward about the upper Lip.

Figure II.

Shews the hinder and lower Bones of the Head, with their perforations.

• AA The Os occipitis or Noll-bone.
• BB The holes through which the sixth pair of Nerves (formerly so reckon∣ed) do pass out of the Skull.
• CC The two holes through which the seventh conjugation of Nerves (of the same reckoning) do pass out of the Skull.
• DD The holes through which the tasting Nerves do pass, which are disper∣sed about the Tongue, the Muscles of the Os hyoides and several other parts within the Mouth.
• EE The holes by which the external Jugular Veins and Arteries pass into the Skull.
• FF A hole in the Process of the Wedge-like Bone called Pterygoides, seated at the bottom of the Skull.
• HH Two holes in the Bones of the Palate.
• M The hole of the Palate through which the Palate-vein and Artery pass out of the Mouth to the upper Lip.
• OO The holes through which do pass the Veins, Arteries and Nerves to the roots of all the Teeth.
• PP The holes through which the Optick Nerves do pass to the Orbit of the Eyes.
• YY The Six Fore-teeth or Shearing-teeth of the upper Jaw.
• XX The Tushes, or Dog-teeth.
• AEAE The holes through which the fifth pair of Nerves do pass forth of the Skull.

[illustration] the upper bones of a horse's nose and skull

TAB. XXXVI. pag. 203.

[illustration]

I

[illustration]

II

CHAP. IV. Of the Bones common to the Skull and upper Jaw.

1 The Wedge∣like Bone. Its situation. Its Processes. Its Cavities. Its Holes. 2 The Sieve∣like Bone. Its situation and con∣nexion. Its Parts. Its Ʋse. 3 Os jugale.

HAving hitherto treated of the Bones proper to the Skull onely, I come now to treat of those which are common to it with the upper Jaw; and these are in number three, namely, the Os sphenoides or cunei∣forme, the Os cribriforme, and the Os jugale.

The first of these is the Sphenoides, or Wedge-like Bone, so called from its situation, which is betwixt the Bones of the Skull and the upper Jaw, and not from the likeness of its figure to that of a Wedge, as some do believe. It is joined before to the Fore-head-bone, and behind to the Os occipitis. At the sides it doth a good part of it join to the Os petrosum. Above, it is joined to the first, fourth and sixth Bones of the upper Jaw; and below, to the Bones of the Palate of the Mouth.

It hath several Processes, of which some are external, and some inter∣nal. The internal are four, standing out like four feet of a Table or Chair, which (taking in the space between them) form the Sella Tur∣cica. The external are also four, of which the two formost are contigu∣ous to the upper Jaw, and are called the Wing-like Processes, from the resemblance they have to Bats-wings; for they are thick in some places, and yet end into a notable thinness, almost as thin and sharp as the edge of a Knife. The two hinder are stretched out toward the Styloides Proces∣ses of the Temple-bones.

This Bone hath several Cavities or hollownesses; two of which are common with it and the Temple-bones, and the Bones of the Synciput.

It hath also many perforations or little Holes to the number of seven on each side. One of which being round gives a passage to the Optick Nerve toward the Eye. The rest are penetrated some by one, some by several pairs of Nerves; others by the Carotid Arteries and Jugular Veins; and others again by both Nerves and Bloud-vessels.

The next common Bone of the Head and upper Jaw is the Os cribri∣forme, so called from the several or indeed innumerable little holes in it, which make it like a Sieve, through which holes the smells do pass to the Mammillary Processes, or Olfactory Nerves. It is situated in the fore-part of the Skull, between or a little below the Sockets of the Eyes, under the middle basis of the Fore-head-bone, and at the upper part of the Nostrils. It is joined by a plain or simple line to the Fore-head-bone, the second Bone of the upper Jaw, and to the Os cuneiforme.

This Bone is by some divided into four parts; of which the first is a Process in the upper and middle part of it, which is long and triangular, ending in a sharp point, whence it is called Crista galli, or the Cock's Comb. This runs in betwixt the Mammillary Processes dividing them one from the other. To its sharp point the Sinus of the Falx ad∣hereth.

The second part of this Bone is that which most properly is called Os cribriforme, being perforated all over like a Sieve, some of which holes are streight and some oblique. They are observed to be much larger in

Dogs than in any other Animal (allowing for the proportion of their Bo∣dies) which is supposed the reason why their smell is more exquisite than that of any other Creature.

The third part is a Process in its lower or under side opposite to the upper Process; which part divideth the upper part of the Nose into two Nostrils, whence it is called septum Nasi, the Partition-bone of the Nose.

The fourth and last part of this Bone is compared to a Sponge or Pu∣mice-stone, being porous and full of small cavities, which are filled with a spongie flesh; and from this part the whole Bone is by some called Os spongiosum. For the names of cribriforme and spongiosum are confounded one with the other, being either of them given indifferently to the whole Bone. But if we will consider the spongiosum onely as a part of the cri∣briforme, then we must say, that it is that part of it that is seated just at the top of the Nostrils. Some make two Bones of it, affixing one at the top of each Nostril, and call them in the plural number Ossa spon∣giosa.

The use ascribed to the Os cribriforme by most Anatomists hath been to discharge through its pores or holes flegmatick excrements from the Brain into the Nose, but he that shall examine them, will find that its holes are so filled either with the spongie flesh before-named, or else with the Fibres of the smelling Nerves passing through them to the inside of the Nostrils, that there is no passage left for any humour by them. What we therefore account their true use to be, the Reader may be in∣formed, if he please to turn back to the fifteenth Chapter of the Third Book, where we treated of the Nose, and described its uses: adding to what is there said of it, that it makes up the inner corner of the Orbit of the Eye.

The third and last Bone common to the Skull and upper Jaw is called Os jugale, or the Yoke-bone. This is seated on each side of the Horse's Face between the meatus of the Ear or Auditory passage, and the first Bone of the upper Jaw; being framed of two Bones, one of which is a Process of the Temple-bone that is carried from the meatus Auditorius, and is the hinder of them; and the other Bone being the foremore is a Process of the first Bone of the upper Jaw, and which maketh the lower side of the lesser or outer corner of the Eye. These two are joined by a slanting or oblique Suture, and being so joined do constitute this Bone called Os ju∣gale. Over this Bone runs the Tendon of the Temporal-muscle, and also the Tendon of the Masseter or Chewing-muscle, as they pass to the low∣er Jaw.

Some make but two common Bones of the Skull and upper Jaw, not reckoning this for any particular Bone, seeing (as has been said) it is formed onely of the two Processes of the Temple and upper Jaw-bone. But seeing it is distinguished from the others by a particular name (though not of any peculiar substance) I thought it not absurd to reckon it for a third common Bone.

CHAP. V. Of the Jaw-bones and their Parts.

The Bones of the upper Jaw. 1. Zygoma∣ticum. 2. Lachry∣male. 3. Innomi∣natum. 4. Os malae, or Cheek-bone. Its connexion. Its Holes. 5. The Nose∣bone. Its connexion. 6. The Pa∣late-bone. The lower Jaw-bone. Its Processes and Sinus's. Its Cavities and Holes. The Sockets of the Teeth.

THE Bones of the upper and lower Jaws come next to be spoken to, with the first of which we will begin.

This Jaw hath Bones of two sorts, the one proper to it self, and the other common to it and the Skull. The common Bones are the Wedge-like and Sieve-like Bones, and the Os jugale, of which we have already treated in the foregoing Chapter. I shall therefore proceed to treat of the Bones proper to the upper Jaw onely, which make the lower side of the Orbit of the Eye, the Nose, Cheeks and Roof of the Mouth.

The Bones that constitute all these Parts are twelve in number, on each side of the Face six; the first of which is called Zygomaticum, because by its Process it makes up the greatest part of the Os jugale. This is seated at, and maketh, the lower part of the outer corner of the Eye.

The next is a round, little, brittle and thin Bone, seated in the inner corner of the Eye, called Os lachrymale, because it has a hole in it through which the serous humour that makes the tears in Men doth issue. Upon this hole the little Kernel called caruncula Lachrymalis resteth, that hin∣dreth the continual gleeting of the foresaid humour. There is also in the lower part of this Bone another hole which goes to the cavity of the No∣stril, through which doth pass a branch of the fifth pair of Nerves to the inner Skin of the Nose.

The third is seated in the inner side of the Eye, and within is conti∣nued with the fungous Bones of the Nostrils. It is broad, and some∣what quadrangular or four-corner'd, also thin and transparent, like the Scale of a Fish. On its outside it is smooth, but within rugged and une∣qual, because of the Scales that cleave unto it. It is joined to four Bones, viz. to the Fore-head-bone, to the Wedge-like Bone, to the second Bone of the Jaw, (viz. the next foregoing) and also to the fourth, or next fol∣lowing. It is not known by any peculiar name; I have therefore made bold to call it Os innominatum.

The fourth Bone is called Os malae, the Cheek-bone, because it maketh up the greatest part of the Cheek, as also of the Palate. It likewise con∣tains the upper Teeth in its cavities or caverns. It is much larger than any other Bone of the upper Jaw, and is circumscribed with many Su∣tures; for not to mention the Teeth that are inarticulated into it, it abut∣teth upon or is joined to several Bones. In the first place it is joined above, on the side next the Nose, to the Bone of the Fore-head; below, to the Wedge-like Bone, and the Bone of the Palate of the Mouth; before, to the Os lachrymale, and to the fifth Bone that makes the upper part of the Nose, (which is next to be described;) and lastly to its own companion, viz. the Cheek-bone of one side to that of the other.

This Bone hath three perforations or holes, two of which are under the Orbit of the Eye; that is, on each side one, running from the lower part of the Eye outward. Their use is to transmit or let pass two branches of the fifth pair of Nerves out of the Orbit of the Eye to the Face, on the Parts whereof they are bestowed.

The third of these holes is in the Palate, at the backside of the Grind∣ing-teeth where both Bones of the Jaw meet. It is presently divided into two, one of which runneth on one side of the septum of the Nose, and the other on the other, to the Nostrils, to which there pass through these holes a small Vein and a small Artery.

It hath also a den or cavity on each side, by the side of the Nose un∣der the Orbit of the Eye, which is covered with a very fine Membrane. This is often full of a mucous or slimy phlegm.

The fifth Bone of the upper Jaw doth with his companion make the bony prominence of the Nose. It is a small Bone, in figure almost four-square. It is hard, solid, and reasonable thick, having sundry small per∣forations in it. It is joined above to the Fore-head-bone, viz. to its in∣ternal Process. In the sides above it is joined to the first Bone, and a lit∣tle lower to the fourth Bone of this Jaw. In the middle it is joined to its companion, and below to the Gristles that make the lower part of the Nose.

The sixth is that which makes up the Roof of the Mouth, with its companion; for you must reckon every one of these Bones double, one on one side of the Face, and another on the other. It is a broad Bone, thin and solid, and in the end, where it is rough, it resembleth a semi∣circle. It is joined behind to the Wing-like Processes of the Wedge-like Bone, and on the inside, to the Partition-bone of the Nostrils. It is like∣wise joined to the fourth Bone of this Jaw or Cheek-bone, and lastly to his companion or fellow in its back-part.

This Bone hath also two perforations, on either side one, running up∣ward and backward to two of the holes of the Wedge-like Bone.

The lower Jaw comes next to be treated of, which makes the lower part of the capacity of the Mouth. This differs from the former in that it is moveable, whereas the upper is not. In shape it is long and promi∣nent. At both the ends of it, there are two Processes, which are by some called Horns. The foremost of them runs upward, and from a broad ba∣sis grows sharp, ending into a cone or point. This point receives the Tendon of the Temporal Muscle, which Tendon compasseth it round about, and is strongly implanted into it: from whence it is that a luxa∣tion of the lower Jaw, because of the distention of this Tendon that hap∣pens thereupon, is very dangerous, and hard to cure.

The other being the backward Process, is called Articularis, because it serves for articulation. This hath a neck and a longish head, (called Con∣dylus) that is covered with a Cartilage for its easier motion: By this head it is articulated into the Sinus of Os petrosum, that is also lined with a Cartilage, and is knit thereto strongly by a membranous Ligament. At the sides and roots of these Processes it hath shallow Sinus's or Cavities in its surface, but they are deeper on the inside than on the outside. The principal use of both seemeth to be for the passage or insertion of the Muscles.

This Bone of the lower Jaw is very hard, and for the most part very solid, to make it the stronger. Yet on each side (more backward than in Men) it hath a Cavity within it, which contains a marrowy juice for its nourishment. It hath also four perforations or holes, of which two are at the roots of the Processes, by which a branch of the fifth pair of Nerves, as also a Vein and Artery do pass to the Teeth. The two other

holes are in its fore-part by the sides of the Chin, through which two twigs of the said fifth branch of Nerves do pass out again to the lower Lip, and its Muscles and Skin.

This lower Jaw as well as the upper hath Sockets for the Teeth to stand in, in number equall to the Teeth, which Sockets are called by the La∣tins Alveoli or little Pits. These are digged deep, that the Teeth like so many Nails might be the firmlier fastned in them. When any of the Teeth fall out of them, (as the Foal-teeth, &c.) in a short time they are obliterated, the Jaw becoming smooth without any pit in it in that place.

Table XXXVII. (Book 37)

Represents an Horse's Head and Jaws as much of them as can be seen by the Head standing with one side towards us; and shews those Bones which could not so well be seen in the foregoing Table, where the Head is represented in one Figure with the top, and in the other, with the bottom of it towards us.

Figure I.

• A The Temple-bone on which the Temporal Muscle is placed.
• B A hole in the Skull through which doth pass forth from the Brain a small Nerve, which is dispersed about the top of the Skull.
• DD The Bones which make the top of the Nose.
• HH The Os jugale.
• F The hole through which doth pass a branch of the Nerve of the fifth con∣jugation, which furnisheth the Muscles of the upper Lip and also the Muscles of the Nostrils with Nerves.
• L The round production of the upper Jaw, which production is called cervix.
• M The Auditory Passage or hole of the Ear.
• N The Mammillary Process of the Temple-bone.
• OOO The lower Jaw-bone.
• P The hole where the Nerve of the fifth pair comes forth, which Nerve furnisheth the Muscles of the lower Lips with twigs from it.
• Q The Production of the lower Jaw, which doth articulate into the upper.
• K The Noll-bone.

Figure II.

Represents the Skull and upper Jaw onely, the lower Jaw being remo∣ved, the better to shew the several perforations in the side of the bot∣tom of the Skull, which perforations or holes in the other Figure are hid by the articulation of the lower Jaw.

• A The hole by which the Nerve passes from the Brain to the upper Jaw.
• E A hole whereby a small Nerve doth pass from the Brain, which is distri∣buted upon the bottom of the Occiput, and other Parts at the bottom of the Skull.

• F A hole by which a branch of the external Jugular Vein and Artery doth pass to the Brain.
• G A hole through which do pass the sixth pair of Nerves, according to Doctor Willis.
• H The hole through which the Optick Nerves do pass from the Brain to the Eyes.
• I A hole through which do pass another pair of Nerves, which branch into the Muscles of the Tongue, and also send twigs to the Muscles of the Ears.
• K The hole where the Palate-vein comes forth.
• M Another hole through which doth pass a small twig of the external Ju∣gular Vein and Artery up to the Brain.
• O The Auditory Passage.
• Q A hole through which a small Nerve doth pass from the Brain to be di∣stributed about the top of the Skull.
• S The hole where the Nerve of the fifth pair comes forth of the upper Jaw after it hath furnished the roots of the Grinding-teeth with Nerves; from whence it marches towards the lower Lip, where it is dispersed amongst the Muscles thereof.
• XX Two other holes in the bottom of the Skull through which do pass other conjugations of Nerves, which are dispersed about the Head, Face and Mouth.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's head and jaws

TAB XXXVII. pag. 208.

[illustration]

I

[illustration]

II

CHAP. VI. Of the Figure, Magnitude, Number and Articulation of the Teeth.

The Teeth. Their sub∣stance and Vessels. 1. Three sorts of them. Incisores. 2. Canini. 3. Molares. How to know the age of an Horse by his Teeth.

THE Teeth are called in Latin Dentes, quasi Edentes, from eating.They are of a very hard substance, yea, harder than any of the other Bones in the whole Body. That part of them that stands out above the Gumm, is smooth and free from any covering; but that part that is within the Sockets of the Jaws is more rough and covered with a thin Membrane or Periosteum, which Membrane is of exquisite sense. Those sort of them which we call the Grinding teeth, have a manifest Cavity within, but the Incisores (or Fore-teeth) and Dog-teeth have but very ob∣scure ones. Into these Cavities by the very small holes that are in the roots of the Teeth, are received (into each Tooth) a Capillary Artery from the Ca∣rotides, also a small Vein from the Jugulars, and a twig of a Nerve from the fifth pair; which Nerve being expanded through the thin Membrane that invests the said Cavity, gives it a most acute sense; whereas the bo∣ny part of the Tooth is of it self insensible. These Vessels before-mentio∣ned, namely, the Vein, Artery and Nerve, are united together and cloathed with a common Coat when they enter the Jaw, within which they have a proper chanel to run along in under the roots of the Teeth, to each of which roots they send small twigs as they pass by, as aforesaid.

As in Men, so in Horses, there are three kinds of Teeth, namely, Inci∣sores, Canini and Molares. The Incisores, Cutters or Shredders are those we call the Fore-teeth from their being seated in the fore-part of the Jaw. They are sharp-edged like a Knife, and broad also, that they may the better bite off or crop the Grass, &c. They are in number twelve, that is to say, in each Jaw six. They have each but one root or phang, though that root is indifferent large, most times larger than any one of the phangs of the great or Grinding-teeth.

The next to these are those which in Horses we call the Tushes, but in Men they are called the Dog-teeth or Canini, not onely because in fi∣gure they are like the Teeth of a Dog, and stand out of the Gumms as Dog's-teeth do; but from their use also, which is to gnaw upon and break (with their sharp points) what is too hard for the Fore-teeth to cut or shear in sunder. The roots of these as of the former are single, having but one phang.

Those of the third rank, are the double Teeth, which are called Mo∣lares, or Grinders, because the Meat is broken or ground by them, even as Corn is ground by the Mill-stone. These are in Horses twenty four in number, in each Jaw twelve. Their seat is in the inner part of the Mouth, being environed in their outside by the Cheeks, lest the bro∣ken or shredded Meat, being rowled by the Tongue upon the Teeth, should slip over them out of the Mouth, before it be sufficiently ground.

The two foremost of these Teeth, standing next to the Dog-teeth or Tushes, are those by which the age of an Horse is known till after seven years old, and that by their unevenness at the top, having several little thin shells or scales as it were sticking up round the outside of the top of them, whereby their middle part is made to appear hollow; which hol∣lowness where it is found, is a certain sign of the Horse's being under seven years of age. And it is also to be observed, that the nearer the Horse comes to that age, the more doth that hollowness grow out by de∣grees: so that when he comes to be full seven years old it is quite obli∣terated, and so the Horse's age to be no more known by that sign, being past the mark in the Mouth as we say: for by the perpetual use that the Horse makes of his Teeth, the before-mentioned Shells at the top of them, which cause their hollowness, are worn down even with the other parts of the Teeth, so that the whole top of the Tooth becomes even, smooth and plain.

Neither are the rest of the Grinding-teeth without some hollowness or at least roughness in their tops; but this is of a different nature from the other: which roughness or unevenness is very necessary, for by it they are made more fit for the comminution of the Meat: For as Millers when their Milstones are grown smooth, do pick them anew, to make them grind the better; so hath Nature made the upper part of these Grinding-teeth, elegantly to imitate the rough superficies of a Mil∣stone, having here and there formed little pits in them. We shall not need to shew the uses of these, or of either the foregoing sorts of Teeth, that being intimated sufficiently in the description of them.

Table XXXVIII. (Book 38)

Shews the upper and lower Jaw separated from one another and pla∣ced sideways, with so much of each Jaw broken off as till one come to the roots of the Teeth, to shew how the Nerves branch into the ends of the roots of each Tooth.

Figure I.

• AA The Shearers or Fore-teeth.
• BB The two Productions of the lower Jaw which articulate into the up∣per Jaw.
• CC The Process into which the Temporal Muscle is inserted.
• D A hole through which doth pass a branch of the external Jugular Vein and Artery.
• E A hole through which doth pass the Nerve that furnisheth the Teeth with twigs from it as it passeth along, (being a branch of the fifth pair) which trunk doth afterwards lose it self about the Lips, fur∣nishing all the Muscles of the Lips and Nose with Nerves.
• ☞ (Note that this Nerve in the upper Lip is that which Farriers do improperly (and by a mistake) call the Cord, which they many times take up with a Cornet and cut insunder to prevent a Horse from stumbling; believing that the said Cord reaches from the tip of the Nose where they cut it, down to the Fore-legs and so to the Feet, by which they imagine that the Horse's Head is so bound down, that he cannot have the freedom of it, which causes him to stumble. This fancy how ridiculous soever, is common amongst Farriers, and is owing merely to their ignorance of the Parts; for it reaches no farther than from the Brain to the Lips: so that the cutting of it is likelier to hinder the motion of the Lips than to remedy stumbling.)
• R A little hole through which doth pass a Nerve from the Brain to the Pericranium.
• T The same hole in the upper Jaw, as the letter E points to in the lower, through which the Nerve which they call the Cord, doth pass to the Lips.
• S The Tushes or Dog-teeth of the lower Jaw.
• V The Auditory Passage or hole of the Ear.
• Y One of the Tushes of the upper Jaw.
• 1 2 3 4 5 6 The Grinding-teeth.
• OOOO The Nerve that sends twigs to the roots of the Teeth of the lower Jaw, being the first branch of Doctour Willis his fifth pair.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's upper and lower jaw

TAB. XXXVIII. pag. 211.

CHAP. VII. Of the Bone of the Tongue called Os hyoides.

Os hyoides. Its figure and parts. Its Ʋse.

THAT Bone which is called Os hyoides, is of the shape of a Greek v (ypsilon) and is seated under (or at the root of) the Tongue, being as it were the foundation and supporter of it. It is compounded of three Bones, viz. one in the middle, (being larger than the other two) which is gibbous forwards (or outwards) and somewhat hollowed in∣wards; by its gibbous side it is joined to the basis or bottom of the Tongue: The other two Bones are lateral, and are called Cornua, or Horns. To the first Bone there are affixed two Gristles, and to each of these one. They are all tied to the adjacent parts, partly by a fleshy, partly by a nervous substance. It hath three Sinus or Cavities; above, a transverse depressed Sinus, to admit the second pair of Muscles proper to it; and in the sides of this Sinus there are two other, which give way unto the first pair of Muscles that are implanted into the sides of this Bone.

The use of this Bone (although it be but a little one) is very great;for most if not all the Muscles that move the Tongue either are inserted into it or arise from it. It serves also to keep the Throat open, admitting the Epiglottis or Throat-flap into its bosom, when it is lifted up in breath∣ing. And lastly some of the Muscles of the Larynx or Throttle arise from it.

CHAP. VIII. Of the Bones of the Neck.

The Collar-bones, their substance and use. The Verte∣brae of the Neck, their number and holes. 1 The first de∣scribed. 2 The second, &c. descri∣bed.

HAving treated of the Bones of the Head, we come in the next place to speak to those of the Neck, which, in dividing the Body into three Parts at the beginning of this Fifth Book, (viz. the Head, Trunk and Limbs) we considered as annext to the Head. Its Bones are of two sorts, viz. the Collar or Chanel-bones, and the Vertebrae. But first of the Collar-bones.

These are in number two, one on each side. They are called Clavi∣culae, either from their resembling the shape of old-fashioned Keys, which were of the shape of an Italick s; or because they lock up as it were and close the Chest; for by some they are accounted as belonging to it. Their substance is spongy and thick, especially about their heads; but in their middle they are thin and flat. By one end they are joined to the top of the Breast-bone, and by the other to the first Rack-bone of the Back, wherein they differ from those in Man, which are jointed into

the Process of the Shoulder-bone. Their use is to uphold the Shoulder-blades, that they should not slide down upon the Breast together with the Shoulder-bone, which upon a dislocation or fracture of these Collar-bones doth often come to pass.

The number of the Vertebrae or Rack-bones of the Neck is seven, and they are reckoned from the Head downward; that next the Head being the first. They have in each of them a large Cavity as those of the Back and Loins have, to give way to the Spinal Marrow to descend by. Be∣sides this large hole which is common to these with those others, they have also each of them two other smaller holes in their transverse Proces∣ses, through which the Cervical Veins and Arteries do pass to the Head. And betwixt their jointing one with another there is a third hole, or ra∣ther half of one, for one half is formed out of the lower side of the upper, and the other out of the upper side of the lower Vertebra: By these the Nerves pass out from the Spinal Marrow.

The first of these Bones is called Atlas, because in Men the Head stands upon it like the Globe of the World, as the Poets feigned Atlas to bear the Celestial Globe upon his Shoulders. The body of this Bone is more slender, but solider than the rest, and it wanteth its hinder Process or Spine, having onely a kind of a semicircular knob jetting out instead of it: the reason of which seems to be, lest the greater streight pair of Mus∣cles of the Head that spring from the second Vertebra of the Neck, and march over the back-side of this, should be hurt in bending the Head for∣wards. But it has all its other Processes, viz. ascending, descending and transverse. Within on the fore-side of its great Foramen, it has a Sinus, in shape semicircular, which is lined with a Cartilage or Gristle, and which receiveth the Tooth-like Process of the second Vertebra.

The second Vertebra is called Dentata, because out of its upper side, between its two ascending Processes, there springs an Appendix or Pro∣cess, round and long, like the Dog-tooth in Man (or Tush in a Horse.) This Tooth is covered with a Cartilage, and is jointed into the foresaid Sinus of the first Vertebra, and upon it, as upon an Axle-tree, the head turns round, from whence the whole Bone is called by some Axis. That part of the Tooth which enters not into the said Sinus (viz. its ba∣sis) is encompassed with a Ligament, which knits it to the Occiput. This and the four following have Spines or hinder Processes, each of which are divided into two for the better connexion of the Ligaments and Muscles to them. We shall not need to describe particularly any more of them, seeing they are in all things like to the second, saving that their lateral Processes are larger, and divided into two as well as the hinder: yea the seventh it self differs not from the rest, though in Man it do.

The bodies of these Vertebrae of the Neck are longer than those of the Back or Loins; for though the Neck of an Horse be of so considerable length, yet as hath been said its Vertebrae are but seven (as they are in Man) whereas those of the Back and Loins are twenty four in all, which space notwithstanding is not so long again as the Neck is; whereas were the Vertebrae of a proportionable length, it should be more than three times the length.

Table XXXIX. (Book 39)

Represents the seven Vertebrae of the Neck all joined together in one Figure. They are placed so, as that the first Figure shews their sides, the second their back-parts, and the third their fore-parts.

Figure I.

• A Shews a hole through which a branch of the internal Jugular Vein and Carotid Artery comes forth of the first Vertebra, having entred the same Vertebra at the hole marked with the letter F.
• B A hole in the said Vertebra out of which doth pass the first Nerve from the Spinal Marrow without the Skull, which Nerve marches streight to the beforesaid Vein and Artery and joins it self with them, and runs their course both up to the Head and down to the Body, there being an ascending and a descending branch of it for that purpose.
• C D E The ends of the said Vein, Artery and Nerve where they were cut off with the seventh Vertebra from the Trunk of the Body.
• F The hole in the first Vertebra by which the Vein and Artery entred the said Bone, and come out again at the letter A.
• P The hole betwixt the first and second Vertebra through which doth pass the second pair of Nerves of the Spinal Marrow.
• HH Q R S T The rest of the holes in the other six Vertebrae, through which the Jugular Vein and Artery, and the Spinal Nerves do pass in and out.
• 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The seven Vertebrae of the Neck.

Figure II. Shews the back-side, and Figure III. the fore-side of the said Vertebrae.

[illustration] the top, side, and bottom views of a horse's vertebrae

TAB. XXXIX pag. 214.

[illustration]

I

[illustration]

II

[illustration]

III

The Back hath seven∣teen Verte∣brae. Their Bodies and Processes described. The Loins have seven. Their Bodies, Processes and connexion. The Ribs are seventeen. Nine true. Eight ba∣stard. Their figure. Their surface. Their uses.

CHAP. IX. Of the Vertebrae of the Back and Loins; and of the Ribs.

THE Back consisteth of seventeen Vertebrae or Rack-bones, just so many as there be Ribs on a side, for on each side of every Rack∣bone is there a Rib articulated. But seeing, as we have said, the Col∣lar-bone is inserted into the first Vertebra of the Back, it will so fall out that the last Rib will be articulated into that Vertebra which we reckon for the first of the Loins: into which the Rib indeed is so jointed, that it is not easy to say whether it be into the top of this, or into the lower end of the seventeenth of the Back The Bodies of the Racks as well as their Processes do differ somewhat from the Bodies and Processes of the Racks of the Neck; for the Bodies of the Racks of the Neck are longer than these, and more flat on their inside, that the Gullet might rest the more securely on them: and as for their Processes, the hinder are not cleft into two as those of the Neck are, and the transverse ones are more short and blunt, having (instead of the holes that are in those of the Neck) each a shallow Sinus, into which the Ribs are partly articulated. But the Pro∣cesses are in both of an equal number, namely four oblique ones, (that is, two tending obliquely upwards, and two obliquely downwards) two transverse or lateral ones, and one acute or hinder one, which is called the Spine.

The Bodies of these Vertebrae are not so solid as those of the Neck, but they are more bulky or thicker about, and are full of small perforations for the admission of the Bloud-vessels to the Spinal Marrow, and besides have two at each Joint for the egress of the Nerves from the Spinal Mar∣row. They have each of them on each side a Sinus or Cavity for the inarticulation of the head of the Rib, which Sinus those of the Neck want, as having no Bones to joint into them.

Note that the transverse Processes of two or three of the lowest of these Racks begin to grow shorter and shorter, and their Spines are more blunt, and stand evener out, declining not so much downwards as those before-going. As for the great Cavity or Perforation in the middle of the Bodies, it is proportionable to the Marrow which it contains.

Next to the Bones of the Neck we come to those of the Loins, which make the third part of the Spine. They are in number seven, and are bigger than any of the fore-going either of the Neck or Back. Their hinder Processes or Spines are shorter, but broader and thicker than those of the Back, somewhat bending upwards as most of those decline down∣wards; but as for the lateral or transverse Processes, they exceed those of the Back in length. These Vertebrae are joined one to another by a clammy Gristle, and likewise the uppermost of them to the last of the Back, and the lowest to the first of Os sacrum in like manner.

Besides their lateral Perforations betwixt their jointings for the trans∣mission or letting forth of the Nerves, they have also several other little holes for the intromission of the Bloud-vessels. As for their middle Per∣foration, nothing need be said particularly of it, seeing it differs not from

that of those of the Back, being of capacity equal to the thickness of the Marrow that it contains.

The Ribs (in Latin Costae) are in number thirty four, that is to say, on each side seventeen. Their substance is partly bony, and partly car∣tilaginous or gristly; the first serving for firmness, and the latter for ar∣ticulation, that upon occasion they might yield a little without breaking. They are divided into two sorts, the one called true, and the other the Bastard-ribs. The true are the nine uppermost, so called because each with its fellow makes a compleat circle, being joined together by the me∣diation of the Spondyls of the Back behind, and the Breast-bone before. I say the Ribs are articulated into the Back-bones behind, something of a cartilaginous substance coming between: (the manner whereof is well exprest in the following Figure.) At this articulation into the Vertebrae each Rib has two knobs, one of which is received into the Sinus of the Body of the Vertebra, and the other which is less, into that of the trans∣verse Process. And they are joined before to the Breast-bone by way of articulation also; for their Cartilages end into little heads which are re∣ceived into the smooth Sinus's of the Breast-bone.

The Bastard-ribs are the eight lower, being of a more soft and gristly substance than the other; because being articulated onely at one end, it was necessary they should be of a more yielding and pliable nature, other∣wise they would have been very apt to break. Yea their yielding is not onely a security to themselves, but very convenient in respect to the parts that are contained under or within them. For seeing the Stomach lies in this region which uses to be distended with Meat or Water, these Ribs ought to give way to it when it or the intermediate parts, as the Li∣ver and Spleen, bear against them.

The figure of the Ribs is (as you may also see in the following Figure) semicircular, like a Bow when it is drawn; which Nature hath so orde∣red to make the Chest stronger and more capacious.

They are on the outside rough and unequal, especially near the Verte∣brae, that the Ligaments might take the firmer hold on them, by which they are tied to the Rack-bones: but on their inside they are smoother (being covered with the Pleura) lest they should hurt the Lungs and other Parts that bear against them. They are all of them narrower and roundish toward the Back, and broader and flatter toward the Breast. In their lower and inner part they have a furrow that runs along them, in which a Nerve and the Bloud-vessels are conducted.

The uses of the Ribs are, first, to be a defence to the Bowels within the Breast, and to the Stomach, Liver and Spleen in the Lower Belly; and secondly, to support the Muscles which serve for respiration, and to be moved by them: for which cause the Breast ought not to consist of one Bone, for then it would have been immoveable; whereas now it easily admits of dilatation and contraction.

CHAP. X. Of the Sternum or Breast-bone, and of the Scapula or Shoulder-blade.

The Ster∣num, its fi∣gure and sub∣stance. What parts articulate in∣to it. Its Ʋse. The Scapula, its situation, figure and connexion. Its Processes. Its Appen∣dixes. Its Cavities.

THE Breast-bone in an Horse is not flat on the outside as it is in Men, but stands out with a ridge, and is something like the keel or bottom of a Boat, jetting out with its middle on the outside, and is hollow on the inside. It is of a spongy substance, neither so solid nor so white as most of the other Bones of the Body. In Foals it is rather grist∣ly than bony, and does then consist of more parts than it does in grown Horses; for as by age the Gristles grow into a bony substance, so they do unite so one to another in time, that no footsteps are left of their first division.

In its upper part towards the Throat it is rather pointed and sharp, than horned as it is in Men; however on the inside it is hollowed, for t he more convenient descent of the Wind-pipe. Without on each side of its upper end there is a little Sinus into which the heads of the Collar-bones are received or articulated. Betwixt which articulation of the Collar∣bones into it, and its lower end, there are several Sinus on each side of it, to the number of nine, into which the gristly ends of so many true Ribs are jointed. Its lower end terminates in a Gristle even in old Horses, whose end is of a more obtuse or blunt shape than in Men, in whom it is called Cartilago ensiformis, or the Sword-point-like Gristle.

Its use is for the articulation of one end of the Collar-bones and true Ribs into it, and to serve as a Breast-plate for the safeguard and defence of the noble Bowels (viz. the Heart and Lungs) that are lodged with∣in it.

The Shoulder-blade is called in Latin Scapula. There are two of them (viz. on each side of the upper part of the Chest one) as there are of all the sorts of Bones in the fore and also in the hinder Legs; but we shall for brevity's sake speak of the Bones onely of one Leg before and another be∣hind, because the other two are in all things like unto these, wherefore it is not any way necessary to repeat the description of them, nor yet to speak of them in the plural number.

The Shoulder-blade is seated upon the side of the true Ribs, (like a Target) reaching from the Vertebrae of the Back almost to the bottom of the Collar-bone. It is in figure after a sort triangular, on the inside concave or hollow, and on the outside prominent or arched. It is jointed to no Bone but by its lower end to the Shoulder-bone; but yet it is knit to several Parts by the Muscles that are inserted into it, or rise from it; as to the hinder-part of the Head by the Cucullar Muscles, being the first of its movers; also to the Vertebrae of the Neck by its second pair; and to the Back by the Muscle Rhomboides, &c.

It hath three Processes. The first being the shortest, is called its Neck, which neck ends into a sinuated or hollow cup or head, which receiveth the head of the Shoulder-bone, and its brim is compassed with a thick

Gristle, whereby its Cavity is made the deeper that the head of the Shoulder-bone that is jointed into it should not so easily slip out. The se∣cond Process, which by some is accounted the first, is extended along its middle on the outside, and is called its Spine; and that end of this Spine that by a shallow Sinus receives one of the Heads of the Shoulder-bone, is cal∣led Acromium, that is to say, its point or tip. The third and last of these Processes is toward the lower and inside of the Bone, and from the likeness it hath with an Anchor is called Ancyroides, Anchor-like; some also who compare it to a Crows Bill, do give it the name of Coracoides: This Pro∣cess doth somewhat help to hold the Shoulder-bone in its place, entring a little into a shallow Sinus of the said Bone.

It hath five Appendixes about its Neck, three of which do afford an original to some Muscles, and from the other two do spring Ligaments which join the Shoulder-bone to the head of the Blade.

By means of the second Process that runs like a Ridge or Spine along the middle of its back there are formed on its outside two long Furrows or Cavities, in which several Muscles lie, especially the Suprascapularis and Subscapularis, which are otherwise called Supraspinatus and Infraspi∣natus, from their being placed the first above this Spine or on that side next the Neck, and the latter below it or on that side next the Ribs.

Table XL. (Book 40)

Represents all the Bones of the Chest, the Vertebrae of the Back and the Shoulder-blades.

Figure I.

• A B Shew the length of the Breast-bone, (the Bones of the Chest being placed in a supine posture.)
• CC The upper end of the same Bone.
• DD That Gristle which in Men is called Cartilago ensiformis or the Sword∣fashioned Gristle, at its lower end.
• 1. The Collar-bone, (imitating a Rib.)
• 2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15.16.17.18. The seventeen Ribs.
• EEE The several Vertebrae of the Thorax into which the Ribs are ar∣ticulated.
• FFFF The cartilaginous or gristly part of the Ribs.

Figure II.

Shews the seventeen Vertebrae of the Thorax or Chest on one side, the better to shew how the Ribs are articulated into the sides of the said Vertebrae.

• AAB The two Productions of the first Vertebra of the Chest, which were articulated into or with the seventh Vertebra of the Neck.
• CCCC Several of the small Ligaments which did bind in the heads of the Ribs into the articulations of the Vertebrae.
• I. II. III. IV. V. VI. VII. VIII. to XVII. The seventeen backward Processes or Spines of the Spondyls or Rack-bones of the Chest.

Figure III.

Shews the Scapula or Shoulder-blade with that side that is next the Body outermost.

• H The Cup into which the great round head of the Shoulder-bone is articu∣lated.
• N The Process which is inserted into the Shoulder-bone.
• M Q The under-side of the Blade-bone.

Figure IV.

Shews the Scapula with its outer or right side uppermost.

• H The Cavity or Cup into which the Shoulder-bone is articulated.
• N The Process which is inserted into the Shoulder-bone.
• O P The upper end of the Scapula, its Cartilage being taken off.
• S That Process of the Scapula which is called its Spine or Ridge.

[illustration] anatomical views of the bones of a horse's chest, back, and shoulder

TAB. XL. pag. 218.

[illustration]

I

[illustration]

II

[illustration]

III

[illustration]

IIII

CHAP. XI. Of the Os humeri or Shoulder-bone, and the next Bone under it called the Cubit.

The Bones of the Fore-leg. 1 The Shoul∣der-bone. What Bones it articulates with. 2 The Cubit-bone, its Ar∣ticulations.

THE Bones of the Fore-leg under the Scapula or Shoulder-blade are the Shoulder-bone, the Cubit-bone, the Seven Osselets or little Bones that make the Knee, answering to the eight little Bones that make the Carpus or Wrist in Humane Bodies, the Shank-bone answering to the Bones of the Metacarpus or back of the Hand, the great Pastern answe∣ring to the first Joint of the Fingers, the little Pastern to the second Joint, and the Coffin-bone to the last Joint, on which the Nail grows, as doth the Hoof of the Horse on the Coffin-bone. Of the similitude there is be∣twixt these several Joints in a Horse's Fore-leg, and those in the Arm and Hand of a Man, I have already discoursed pretty fully in the Book of the Muscles, where I treated of the Muscles of these Parts: wherefore I shall in this place speak no more of that, but proceed to the description of the before-named Bones in their order.

The Shoulder-bone is that which reaches from the Shoulder-blade to the Elbow. Both its ends are called Heads, being thicker than the rest of the Bone, the upper of which that is inserted into the cup of the Blade-bone, is naturally an appendix to the Bone, but in time grows to be a part or process of the Bone it self.

This Head is large and orbicular, covered over with a Gristle, that it might be turned more glibly within the cavity of the Cup of the Blade. On the outside of this Head there bunch out two rough and uneven Pro∣cesses, into which two Ligaments are inserted for the strengthning of the Joint; (one of which is like a second Head, and is articulated into the shallow cavity of the acromium, or end of the Spine of the Shoulder-bone;) and betwixt these two Processes there is a long and round chink

through which the nervous Head of the Muscle Biceps doth pass. There is also on the inside another round Cavity in the side of the Head, out of which the strong Ligament springs that ties this Head in the cup of the Scapula.

The lower Head of this Bone which in Men is articulated with two Bones, viz. the Ʋlna and Radius, in a Horse is jointed but with one, (which I call the Cubit-bone) yet is so jointed to that one, that it re∣ceives it and is received by it, having three Processes, and two Sinus be∣twixt them, much like the same Processes and Sinus in the same Bone of a Man.

Besides these Processes already mentioned, it hath on its inside another notable one, from which arise the Muscles that lie on the inside of the Leg upon the Cubit-bone: and on its outside it hath yet another Pro∣cess, but something less than the former, from whence do arise the Mus∣cles that lie on the outside of the Leg upon the Cubit-bone. About the middle of this Bone, on its inside, may be perceived a hole, through which both Veins and Arteries pass to the Marrow contained in this Bone, for its nourishment.

The next part of the Leg is called the Cubit, consisting, as hath been said, in Men of two Bones, but in a Horse onely of one: The two Bones in Men reach from the Elbow to the Wrist; and this one in Horses from the Elbow to that Joint commonly called the Knee, but which might properly enough have the same name as in Men, seeing it is of a like fabrick. This Cubit-bone in its hinder and upper part hath a nota∣ble Process, long and round, onely something flattish, which entreth in∣to the larger Sinus or Cavity of the lower Head of the Shoulder-bone, and maketh that bunching-out which we call the Elbow. This Process is something rough and uneven, partly that the Ligaments might be the more strongly knit to it that encompass the Joint; and partly for the in∣sertion of some Muscles of the Cubit, as also to give original unto the Muscles that bend the lower part of the Leg and Foot; for which cause also the Bone it self is rough at the root of the Process. The circumfe∣rence of the Sinus into which it is inserted, is also rough, that from thence Ligaments might issue. Its lesser and inner Process is received by the les∣ser Sinus of the Head of the Shoulder-bone. There are three cavities in this upper Head, for the reception of as many Processes of the lower end of the Shoulder-bone. Its lower end articulates with the three upper lit∣tle-Bones of the Knee (that make the first range) as shall be shewed in the next Chapter.

CHAP. XII. Of the seven Osseletts or little Bones of the Knee, of the Shank-bones which reach from the Knee to the great Pastern, and also of the two Pastern-bones and the Coffin-bone.

The number of the little Bones of the Knee. 1 The upper rank. 2 The lower. The Shank-bone, its Ar∣ticulation. The Splent-bones. The great Pastern. The little Pastern. The Coffin-bone. Its figure, substance and Sinus's. The cause and cure of a Founder.

BEtween the Cubit-bone and the Shank-bone there are two ranges of little Bones, one above another, being in number seven, that is to say, three in the first and four in the second range: all which are joined one to another so firmly, that they are not easily to be separated. The upper range are articulated with the lower end of the Cubit-bone, and the lower range with the upper end of the Shank-bone.

These Bones do differ one from another in their magnitude, form and situation, and are said in their first generation to be all Gristles and not Bones, but in process of time they become hard and grow bony. Their substance is spongy, as are all the rest of the Bones which of Gristles be∣come bony, of which kind are all the Appendices of Bones, the Bones of the Breast and such like. They are all covered over with both a mem∣branous and gristly Ligament, whereby they are so compacted together, that without dividing the said Ligaments, and separating the Membranes or Skins, it is a hard matter to distinguish them one from another, so that at the first view they may be thought to be all of them but one Bone.

They have a double Superficies, one outer, which is gibbous or bunch∣ing, and another inward which is concavous or hollow; and in their up∣per part where they join to the Cubit-bone, they are smooth and crusted over with the before-mentioned Gristle.

These Bones I will not undertake to give proper names to, but shall di∣stinguish them by their order and number, calling that the first that is placed on the inside of the upper rank. This is something longish and curved inward, articulated with the Cubit-bone above, and below with the second Bone of the lower rank, yea it toucheth both the third and fourth of the same rank. Its inside joineth closely to the inside of the se∣cond Bone of its own rank.

The second of these Bones is close knit to the former, being something less than it. It is joined to the Cubit-bone in its upper part, which part is hollowed to receive the Appendix of the said Bone. It is also joined with the first Bone by one side, and by the other or rather hinder part to the third Bone, and lastly by its bottom to the seventh Bone or fourth of the lower rank.

The third is also joined above with a plain Supersicies to the Cubit-bone, by its inside to the second Bone of its own rank, and by its lower part to the fourth Bone of the next rank.

The fourth Bone or first of the lower rank, is something smaller than any of the before-mentioned three, and is in shape almost round. It is smooth, not being hollow nor protuberated as the rest are. It is joined

above to the outside of the lower-part of the first Bone, below to the Shank-bone, and on its inside to the fifth Bone or second of its own rank.

The fifth (or second of the lower rank) hath several little Sinus's; It hath one notable one above into which the first Bone of the upper rank is articulated, and another below for the reception of part of the Head of the Shank-bone.

The sixth (or third of the lower rank) is joined with a plain Superfi∣cies on each side to the seventh (or fourth) and to the foregoing; above, to the second, and below to the Shank-bone.

The seventh (or fourth of the lower rank) is not much unlike the former, on its inside being joined to the foregoing, on its upper side to the third of the upper rank, and on its lower to the head or top of the Shank-bone.

The next part of the Leg which answers to the After-wrist or back of the Hand in a Man, is made of three Bones, one of which is long and round and much larger than the other two. It reaches from the Knee to the great Pastern, being articulated above with every one of the lower rank of the little Bones of the Knee; and below it is joined to the great Pastern by a mutual articulation, having two round heads and three small Cavities at that end of it for that purpose. This we call the Shank-bone.

To each side of this Bone is fastned another long thin Bone, in figure something like a Bodkin, being somewhat thick and round at their up∣per part, and from thence as they run down towards the Foot, becoming thinner and sharper, till at last they end in a sharp point, a little above the joining of the Shank-bone with the great Pastern. Between these two Bones do run the Tendons of the Muscles that move the Foot, as they descend down the Shank-bone. These two we may call the Splent-bones, standing on each side of the Shank-bone like two Splents, such as Bone∣setters use for broken Bones.

The next is the Bone which answereth to the first joint of the Fingers in Man, in whom they are five in number, by the wonderfull wisedom of the Creator so ordained as was fittest for that variety of motions to which they are design'd. But an Horse being Solidipes or a whole-foot∣ed Creature, hath all his Foot necessarily moved together, and the Bones thereof in each Joint being single, answer but to the Bones of one Finger.

The form of this Bone, which is called the great Pastern, is gibbous and crooked. At its top, where it is articulated with the Shank-bone, it has three small Processes and two Cavities betwixt them: also two small tri∣angular Bones fastned to its back-part. Its outside is plain and smooth, and without any roughness at all. Its lower end consists of two heads which are round and bunching and are articulated into the Sinus of the lesser Pastern which is under it.

The next is the little Pastern, answering to the second Joint of the Fingers. This is not much unlike the former, onely it differs in the length, for it is not much above half so long. Its upper end (as was said) is articulated with the great Pastern, and its lower end is received by the Coffin-bone in the same manner as it self received the lower end of the great Pastern by its own upper end.

The next and last Bone of the Foot is the Coffin-bone, so called (I sup∣pose) from its hollowness on its under-side. Its figure is semilunary or Half-moon-fashioned. It is thick at its top, (where it has cavities to receive the heads of the lower end of the little Pastern) but thin and broad at its bottom and toward its edges, for its more firm fixing upon the ground. Its substance is fungous or spongy, having innumerable little holes piercing through its sides for the passage of the Vessels; as also very many small Sinus's whereinto are implanted the ends of the Tendons of the Muscles that move the lower part of the Leg, and the Foot: whose Fibres being at any time affected either by bruises, ill shooing, or by standing in the water after hard riding whilst the Horse is hot, or but by standing still in the Stable for several days without having the Feet stopt up, and the like; I say the tendinous Fibres being affected by these or other means, cause the Horse to have such great pain in his Feet, that he can scarce endure to tread upon them; which lameness we call a Founder. Now this distemper is so much the harder to cure by reason these Fibres lie so far out of reach, most of them running on the upper side of the Bone (betwixt it and the Hoof) and not to its bottom; so that the Hoof growing upon the sides as the Soal doth at the bottom, there is great hazard but we shall miss of effecting a cure, if we onely pull the Soal out, and do not cut part of the Hoof off also. This is not my bare opinion, but the experience of those that have had good success in curing foundred Horses, who by rasing the Hoof from the Coronet or top of it to the ve∣ry bottom, in five or six places, untill they have made the Bloud come, and then applying their remedies to those places, have made those Horses sound, whom the drawing out of their Soals would not cure.

Table XLI. (Book 41)

Represents all the Bones of the Fore-legs as well joined one to another as separate.

Figure I.

Shews the Bones of the near Leg before, all joined together, (the Blade-bone being taken off.)

• A B The heads of the Shoulder-bone which were articulated into the ca∣vities of the Shoulder-blade.
• C A production in the side of the said Bone, from whence some Muscles of the Leg do take their rise.
• D Its lower head which is jointed with the top of the Cubit-bone.
• E The outer part of the first Osselet or little Bone of the upper range or rank that make the Knee.
• F The Process of the Cubit-bone called the Elbow.
• G The top of the Cubit-bone joined with the lower end of the Humerus or Shoulder-bone.
• H The bottom of the said Bone.
• I The first range of Osselets or little Bones of the Knee.
• L The second range or rank of the said Bones.

• M The little Bodkin-like (or Splent-) Bones on each side of the Shank-bone.
• N The top of the Shank-bone, where it is articulated into the second range of the little Bones of the Knee.
• O The bottom or lower end of the said Shank-bone.
• Q The great Pastern.
• Y The two little triangular Bones which are joined to the back-part of the great Pastern near the top of it.
• R The little Pastern.
• T The Coffin-bone.

Figure II.

Shews the Bones of the Off-leg or right Leg, all of them in situ.

• A B The heads of the Shoulder-bone that articulate with the Scapula.
• C The production in the side of the said Bone.
• D Its lower head with which the Cubit-bone is articulated.
• E The first Osselet of the first range of the Knee.
• F The production of the Cubit-bone called the Elbow.
• G The top or head of the Cubit-bone.
• H The bottom or lower end of the said Bone.
• I The first range of the little Bones of the Knee.
• L The second range of the said Bones.
• M The Bodkin-like (or Splent-) bone that is on the side of the Shank-bone.
• N The top of the Shank-bone.
• O The lower end of the said Bone.
• P The great Pastern.
• S The little Pastern.
• Y The two little triangular Bones fastned to the top of the great Pa∣stern-bone.
• V The Coffin-bone.

Figure III.

Shews the fore-part of the Shoulder-bone separated from the other Bones.

• A N The heads of the Shoulder-bone that are articulated with the Scapula.
• B The production in the side of the same Bone.
• E The heads at the bottom of the said Bone, which are articulated into the cavities of the upper end of the Cubit-bone.
• D The cavity into which the long production of the Cubit-bone is arti∣culated.
• OO The body of the Shoulder-bone.

Figure IV.

Shews the hinder-part of the Shoulder-bone by it self.

• A The great round head at the top of the Shoulder-bone.
• B The great production of the same Bone.
• C D The division of the head at the lower end of the Shoulder-bone.
• O The little eminence in the side of the said Bone.

Figure V.

Shews the fore-side of the Cubit-bone.

• A The top of the long production at the upper end of the Cubit-bone, called the Elbow.
• B The middle of the said production.
• C The cavities at the upper end of the Cubit-bone, into which the lower heads of the Shoulder-bone are articulated.
• G The body of the Cubit-bone.
• P H The round heads at the bottom of the Cubit-bone.

Figure VI.

Shews the back-side of the Cubit-bone.

• A The top of the long production of the Cubit-bone.
• BB The upper heads of the said Bone which are articulated with the lower end of the Shoulder-bone.
• CC The lower heads of the said Bone which do articulate with the upper range of little Bones of the Knee.
• F A cavity of the lower end of the said Bone, into which one of the little Bones of the upper range doth articulate.
• H The body of the said Bone.

Figure VII.

Shews the fore-side of the Shank-bone.

• DD The upper head of the said Bone, as also of the two Bodkin-like Bones on each side of it, where they were articulated with the lower range of the little Bones of the Knee.
• C The two lower heads of the said Bone, whereby it was articulated into the cavities of the upper part of the great Pastern.
• M The body of the said Bone.
• NN The two cavities or dens at the sides of the lower heads of this Bone, into which cavities the heads of the great Pastern were implanted or articulated.

Figure VIII.

Shews the back-side or hinder-part of the Shank-bone, on which the back Sinews lie.

• OO The heads of the Shank-bone and of the two Bodkin-like Bones on each side of it.
• PP The two heads at the lower end of this Bone which were articulated with the great Pastern.
• C The cavity between these two heads, in which is articulated a Process of the upper end of the great Pastern.

Figure IX.

Shews the fore-part of the great Pastern.

• A The dens or cavities in its upper part which receive the heads of the lower end of the Shank-bone.
• B The heads at the lower end of this Bone which were articulated into the Sinus or cavities of the upper end of the little Pastern.

Figure X.

Shews the back-part of the great Pastern.

• A The Sinus or cavity into which the heads of the two little triangular Bones were articulated.
• BB The two heads at the lower end of the great Pastern, which were joined with the little Pastern.
• V The cavities at the upper end of this Bone which did receive the heads of the lower end of the Shank-bone.

Figure XI.

Shews the fore-part of the great Pastern with the two triangular Bones fastned to the back-part of it.

• RR The two triangular little Bones.
• VV The cavities into which the two heads of the lower end of the Shank-bone were articulated.
• Z The body of the great Pastern.

Figure XII.

Shews the little Pastern on its fore-side.

Figure XIII.

Shews the back-side of the little Pastern.

Figure XIV.

Shews the bottom of the Coffin-bone.

• Q The circumference of the said Bone which gives the round shape to the Foot.
• S The cavities or hollownesses whereinto the heads of the little Pastern were articulated.

Figure XV.

Shews the sides and top of the Coffin-bone.

• A Shews all the outside of the said Bone.

Figure XVI.

Shews the fore-side of the two little triangular Bones separated from the upper part of the great Pastern-bone. Figure XVII. Shews the back-side of the said Bones.

[illustration] anatomical views of the bones of a horse's fore-legs

TAB. XLI. pag. 223.

[illustration]

I

[illustration]

II

[illustration]

III

[illustration]

IV

[illustration]

V

[illustration]

VI

[illustration]

VII

[illustration]

VIII

[illustration]

IX

[illustration]

X

[illustration]

XI

[illustration]

XII

[illustration]

XIII

[illustration]

XIV

[illustration]

XV

[illustration]

XVI

[illustration]

XVII

CHAP. XIII. Of the Os sacrum or holy Bone, together with the Coccy∣ges or Rump-bones, otherwise called the Bones of the Dock or Tail.

Os sacrum, its seat, connexion, si∣gure and sur∣face. Its Verte∣brae. Its Holes. The Rump-bones.

THE Os sacrum or holy Bone, is seated at the lower end of the Back, at the end of the Vertebrae of the Loins, to the last of which one end of it is articulated, and the other end to the first of the Bones of the Dock or Rump-bones. It is much the broadest and largest of all the Bones of the Back. Its figure is almost triangular, having a broad beginning, and ending by degrees into a narrowness. On the in∣side it is smooth and hollow, but something unequal; behind or on its outside it is gibbous and also rough, because of the Muscles of the Back and their Ligaments cleaving unto it. Its acute Processes or Spines are very small; and the transverse ones but obscure: as for the oblique, there is no appearance of them, save in the first Vertebra. On its outer side near its edges there are certain Sinus's or hollownesses, to which the Haunch-bones do cleave firmly by an intervening Cartilage.

Its Vertebrae are in number six, whose Spines are much less than the Spines of the Vertebrae of the Loins, and the lower or nearer to the Rump-bones, the lesser they are still.

This holy Bone is perforated in several places; as first, quite through its length it hath a large hole or cavity to receive the Spinal Marrow; out from which there go many other lesser for the egress of the Nerves;

and these are not in the sides of the Vertebrae as those are that be in the Vertebrae of the Neck, Back and Loins, but on the inside and outside or and above, of which those below are much the larger.

To this Bone at its lower end are joined the Rump-bones, which in this Animal we are treating of are in number eighteen. These are joined to each other by a Cartilage or Gristle, but so loosely, that the Horse can bend his Rump which way he will. Those of these Bones that are next to the holy Bone, are something thicker and broader, than those further from it; for as they descend down, they each grow less and less, so that the lowest grows into a cartilaginous or gristly point, as you may see in the figure of the Skeleton, where they are all lively represented in situ. These Bones are not so hard as most of the other Bones are, but more soft and spongy; neither have they any Process, or any hollowness, ex∣cept the first of them, which hath a small cavity or den to receive the last Vertebra of the Os sacrum, which Vertebra, is the furthest part whi∣ther the Spinal Marrow reaches.

Table XLII. (Book 42)

Represents the Os sacrum and Rump-bones joined together; also the Os sacrum joined with the Vertebrae of the Loins; and several other figures of these Bones.

Figure IV. and V.

Shew the Vertebrae of the Loins joined with the upper end of Os sacrum.

• 1.2.3.4.5.6.7. Shew the seven Spines or backward Processes of the Ver∣tebrae of the Loins.
• 1.2.3.4.5.6. The six Spines of the holy Bone.
• 1.2.3.4.5. Holes in the Os sacrum for the egress of the Nerves from the Spinal Marrow out of that Bone.
• G The hole of Os sacrum which contains the Spinal Marrow.
• DDD The long and flat Productions or transverse Processes at the sides of the Vertebrae of the Loins.
• VVV The little Productions in the sides of the Vertebrae of the Loins whereby they are articulated into each other.

Figure VI.

Shews the last Vertebra of the Loins removed from the rest and turned on one side.

Figure VII.

Shews the last Vertebra of the Loins with that side forwards whereby it was join'd with the last but one, in which Vertebra is to be seen the hole where the Spinal Marrow did pass through it.

Figure VIII.

Shews the same Bone with that side uppermost that respects the cavity of the Body.

Figure IX.

Shews the lower side or inside of Os sacrum, as also the Rump-bones joined to it.

• AA The foremost Productions of the said Bone, which were articulated with the last Bone of the Loins.
• BB The two long and wide Productions of the Os sacrum, which were joined with the Haunch-bone or Os ilium.
• C A cavity at the upper end of Os sacrum which did receive the head of the last Vertebra of the Loins, and was articulated with it.
• D The hole in which the Spinal Marrow was contained.
• GG Other Productions of the Os sacrum which were articulated with the Os pubis.
• HH The holes in the Os sacrum out of which did pass the conjugations or pairs of Nerves that are distributed about all the hinder parts.
• 1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15.16.17.18. The eighteen Rump-bones or Bones of the Tail.

Figure X.

Represents the upper part of Os sacrum that joins to the Loins, as also partly its inside turned upward.

• A The round cavity into which the head of the last Vertebra is ar∣ticulated.
• BB The lower side of the broad Productions of the Os sacrum, which join with the Os ilium.
• C The cavity in the said Bone wherein the Spinal Marrow is contained.
• FF The two little foremost Productions with which the hindmost of the last Vertebra of the Loins are articulated.

Figure XI.

Shews that side of the Os sacrum which looks to within the Body, as also its several perforations through which the Nerves do issue forth from the Spinal Marrow.

• A The cavity that receives the round head of the last Vertebra of the Loins.
• CC The two Productions that are articulated with the hinder ones of the lowest Vertebra of the Loins.
• DD The lower side of the two broad Productions of the said Os sacrum.
• EEE Its holes through which the Nerves do pass from the Spinal Marrow contained in it.

[illustration] anatomical views of a horse's lower vertebrae and rump bones

TAB. XLII. pag.228.

[illustration]

IV

[illustration]

V

[illustration]

VI

[illustration]

VII

[illustration]

VIII

[illustration]

IX

[illustration]

X

[illustration]

XI

CHAP. XIV. Of the nameless Bone, commonly divided into the Hip, Haunch and Share-bones.

Os innomi∣natum, or nameless Bone. 1 Os ilium or Haunch-bone. Its Spine. 2 Coxendix or Hip-bone. 3 Os pubis or Share-bone. Pelvis or the Bason.

THE Hip-bone (commonly so called) is by Anatomists divided in∣to three parts. First, Os ilium, so named because the Gut Ilium lieth under it. The next is called Os coxendicis, or Ischium, which is the lower and outer part of the nameless Bone, (or Os innominatum) which is the name of these three Bones as joined all together, for they are truly but one Bone in old Horses, though in Colts they are divided one from another by Cartilages, from whence this distinction is made, and they come to be discoursed of by three several names. The third part of this Bone is called Os pubis, also Pectinis, or the Share-bone.

That part that is called Os ilium, is the uppermost and broadest, which is joined to the holy Bone. In figure it is semicircular, and its semicircu∣lar circumference is called its Spine. On its outside it is something arched, but within hollow; the arched part is called dorsum, its Back, the hollow part costa, or its Rib.

That part which is called its Spine, is in many places unequal, that some Muscles might take their original from it, viz. the Oblique ascen∣dent Muscle of the Abdomen or Paunch, the Deltoides of the Thigh, the first Extender of the Leg called Membranosus, &c. And on the back of this Bone there are unequal inscriptions or lines for the rise of the three Muscles of the Thigh that help to make the Buttocks (called Glutaei;) and also for other Muscles that lie under these.

The second of the parts of this nameless Bone is called Os coxendicis.This is the lower and outer part of it, in which there is a great Sinus, called Acetabulum, the Cup or Sawcer, into which the head of the Thigh-bone is exceeding strongly articulated. This Cup has its edges environed with a Gristle, called Supercilium, its brow; in whose circumference there are observed three Sinus, two Protuberations and an acute Process, and lastly an Appendix that is very thick: all which were ordained for the production partly of Ligaments and partly of Muscles.

The third and last part of this nameless Bone is called Os pubis, or the Share-bone. This is originally two Bones, parted one from another in the middle with a Gristle, but in continuance of time the Gristle it self becomes bony, and so unites them into one Bone. It is placed at the bottom of the Paunch, betwixt the two hinder Legs as the Horse stands. On its outside it has on each side a Sinus for the descent of the crural Ves∣sels. On the same side also it is rough to give the firmer original to the streight Muscles of the Abdomen and to the second Bender of the Leg. It is but a thin Bone, being hollow within, and perforated with the greatest hole of any such-like Bone in the whole Body. On its hinder and inner side it has two Processes, from whence the nervous bodies of the Yard, and some Muscles take their original.

These Bones with the holy Bone do make that cavity which is called the Bason, which is the place wherein are contained part of the Guts, and the Bladder in a Horse; and in a Mare part of the Guts, the Bladder and the Womb.

Table XLIII. (Book 43)

Represents the three Bones that make the Os innominatum or nameless Bone.

Figure I.

Shews the said Bone with the right side upward.

• BB Shew the upper part of Os ilium.
• CC The two Productions of the said Bone which are fastened by very strong Ligaments to the Processes of Os sacrum.
• DD The Spines or Ridges of the said Bone.
• EEEE The Os coxendicis or lower and outer part of the nameless Bone.
• FF The two holes in the Os pubis or Share-bone made for the ingate and outgate of Vessels.
• G The Seam which divides the Share-bone in the middle.
• HH The extremities or ends of the said Bone.

Figure II.

Shews the Os innominatum turned the upside downward.

• II Shew the Cup of the Os coxendicis, into which the head of the Thigh-bone is inserted.
• MM The extremities or ends of the Share-bone.
• NN The two large holes in the bottom of the said Bone.
• OO PP The inside of Os ilium.
• QQ The Spines or Ridges of the said Bone.
• R The Seam of the Share-bone which divides it into two parts.

[illustration] anatomical views of a horse's hip, haunch, and share bones

TAB. XLIII. pag. 231.

[illustration]

I

[illustration]

II

CHAP. XV. Of the Thigh-bone and Patella or little Bone of the Stifle.

The Thigh-bone. Its upper Head. Its Neck Its lower Head is di∣vided into two. Their Cavi∣ties. The Patella.

THE Thigh is called by the Latins Femur à ferendo to bear, because the Creature is born up or sustained by it. This Bone (like the Bone of the Shoulder) is but one, reaching from the Hip-bone to the Stifle. The figure of it is long, round and streight, except where its Heads and Protuberances bunch out; of which it hath, above, one Head, one Neck, and two Processes; and below, it determins into a Head which hath two Productions and a Cavity between them.

The upper Head is an orbicular Appendix standing upon the Neck, and is the thickest and largest Head of any Bone in the whole Body. It is round and long the better to enter into the Cup of the Hip-bone, which is not onely deep of it self, but rendred deeper by a large Gristle that com∣passeth the edges thereof. For it was necessary that a very firm articu∣lation should be in this place, because of the huge weight which the Thigh was to sustain. And besides, to strengthen it the more, and to fasten the

two Bones the firmer together, there ariseth out of the Cup of the Hip-bone an exceeding strong and round Ligament, which is implanted into a little Sinus that is in the Head of the Thigh-bone. This Head is smooth and crusted over with a Gristle, that it might move the more glibly with∣in the Cup.

The slender part under this Head is called the Neck of the Thigh-bone.This is pretty long and oblique, reaching upward but inclining inward, and is a Process of the Bone. At its lower end, where the Bone grows broader, do arise two other Processes, called Trochanters or Rotatores, from the Muscles of that name that are inserted into them. The upper of these Processes is greater than the lower, nay greater indeed than any Process in the whole Body which is not joined to another Bone; It bends upward and outward; but the other which is much less than this, bend∣eth backward and somewhat inward.

The Thigh-bone below its middle becometh thicker, and its lower end terminateth into an ample and broad Head; out of the backside of which are produced two Processes, as it were two other Heads, betwixt which there is a large space left about two inches wide, which receiveth a pro∣tuberation or swelling of the Head of the Leg-bone.

These two Heads at the lower end of the Thigh-bone are on their out∣sides rough, but their insides are covered with a Gristle, and thereby are made smooth and slippery for the more easy motion of the Joint. One of these Heads is thicker, and is seated inward; the other is thinner but broader, and is seated outward. From them do some of the Muscles that move the Leg arise; and into them are some that move the Thigh inser∣ted. The sides of these Heads are full of little holes, out of which do issue the roots of the Ligaments which strengthen the Stifle-joint.

These Heads have also four Cavities, two of which are in the middle between the two Heads, and one on the outside of either of them. One of the middle Cavities, being the foremost, is made to receive the protu∣beration of the Patella or Pan, and is therefore crusted over with a Gristle for that purpose. The second of the middle Cavities being more back∣ward, is deeper than the other, also rough and unequal, made to receive the protuberation of the Leg-bone. The third is at the outside of the outer head, and the fourth at the outside of the inner, through both which the Tendons of several Muscles of the Leg descend.

At the lower end of this Thigh-bone, betwixt it and the Head of the Leg-bone, on the fore-side, is placed a small roundish Bone, (called the Patella or Stifle-pan) about three inches broad, being plain without, but within bunching, bored through with many small holes. It is co∣vered over on its inside with a Gristle, and is made firm in its place by the broad Tendons of the second, third and fourth Muscles that extend the Leg, to which the Patella is very firmly knit. This Bone strengthen∣eth the jointing of the Thigh-bone with the Leg-bone, and hindreth their dislocation forwards.

CHAP. XVI. Of the Leg-bone and Ranges of Osselets which make that part we call the Hock, answering to the Heel of a Man.

The Shank-bone is but one. Its figure. Its upper Head. Its lower Head. Its Sinus's and Appen∣dices. Its Cavity. The seven little Bones of the Hock. The Instep∣bones. The Pastern∣bones and Coffin-bone.

THERE is the same difference between the hinder Legs of an Horse and a Man's Legs, as we shew'd above to be between the Fore-legs of an Horse and a Man's Arm. For as in Man there are two Bones which reach from the Elbow to the Wrist, and but one Bone in that Joint of an Horse's Fore-leg that answers to this (reaching from his Elbow to that Joint we commonly call the Knee;) so whereas in a Man's Leg there are two Bones, called Tibia and Fibula; in the same Joint of an Horse that reaches from the Stifle to the Heel, there is but one, which we shall call by the name of Tibia, or the Shin or Shank-bone, because the Bone of a Man's Leg that goes by that name, is the more considerable of the two.

The figure of this Bone is long, and round in an Horse, but in a Man it is three-square. The upper part of it which joins with the Thigh-bone, is broader and thicker than the lower.

Its upper Head in which are two cavities and a prominence betwixt them, is crusted over with a Gristle, and both receives and is received by the two Heads and cavity of the Thigh-bone; which Gristle is fastned to it by Ligaments. This Gristle is slippery and smooth, and the cavi∣ties which it lines are full of an unctuous or oily matter or humour, which serves to further the motion of the Joint by rendring it moist and slippery.

The lower part of this Bone, or its lower Head, is round and likewise covered with a Gristle, with which it is made something broad, but not∣withstanding equals not the largeness of the upper Head.

This Bone hath several Sinus's and Appendices, as well as the Thigh-bone hath; the former for conveniency of the Tendons of some Mus∣cles to descend by, and the latter for the rise or original of other Muscles which are to move the Foot.

This Bone as well as the Thigh-bone (and most other Bones) is nota∣bly hollowed within, having its cavity filled with Marrow. It is also perforated in several places, admitting through its perforations several Vessels to the said Marrow.

Next come we to the little Bones of the Hock, which Joint answereth to the Instep and Heel of a Man. These are of the same number as those of the Knee in the Fore-legs were, and do also lie in two ranges, the one above the other, viz. three in the upper, and four in the lower. These Bones, as those in the Knee, are so closely articulated one with another, and so closely wrapt up and bound together with membranous Ligaments, that it is not easie for the Dissector to discover where all of them are di∣vided: so that without diligent inspection they may be taken to be not above half the number they are truly of.

To treat of every particular Bone of them and of their connexion one with another, or lastly of their jointing with the Shank-bone above, or with the three Bones of the Metatarsus below, would be in a manner the

repeating of the same description over again that we gave above of the seven little Bones of the Knee. Onely that which is the hindmost and largest of them deserves to have particular notice taken of it, and that is it which is truly, and ought to be called the Heel-bone, whose shape and posture you may see in the following Figure. Into this Bone it is that several of the Tendons of the Muscles that bend the Leg are inserted. On its inside it has a large Sinus by which the Tendons of those Muscles that move the lower Parts of the Foot do descend, as also the larger Vessels thereof.

The next Bones to these are the three that answer to those five that make that part of the Foot in Humane Bodies which is called the Meta∣tarsus or Instep. These I say are but three in a Horse, though in a Man they are five, to answer to the number of the five Toes. They reach from the lower range of the little Bones of the Hock before-mentioned, down to the great Pastern. One of them is a large, long and round Bone; the other two are much more slender, and shorter, being the one of them placed on the inside and the other on the outside of it, adhering so closely thereunto, that they are not easily to be separated from it. These little Bones answer in all things to the like Bones which run down by the sides of the Shank-bone of the Fore-legs, which from their shape I called the Bodkin-like Bones, (as likewise the Splent-bones, because they stand by the sides of the middle great Bone, like the Splents that Bone∣setters make use of for strengthning broken Bones till they are knit again;) I say these are like those, and therefore may be called by the same names.

The remaining part of the Bones of the hinder Leg and Foot are the great Pastern (with the two little triangular Bones adhering to the top of it,) the little Pastern, and the Coffin-bone; of all which having already treated where I described the Bones of the Fore-legs, (with which these of the Hinder-legs agree in every particular) I shall for brevitie's sake omit speaking particularly of them, and here conclude my discourse of the Bones.

Table XLIV. (Book 44)

Represents the Skeleton of an Horse, (drawn exactly by one that I keep standing in a Press.)

• AA The Shoulder-blade.
• B The Breast-bone.
• CC The Shoulder-bone.
• DDDD The Leg-bones both before and behind.
• EEEE The little Bones that make the Knee and the Hock.
• FF The Shank-bones.
• ff The Instep-bones.
• GGGG The Bodkin-like or Splent-bones.
• HHHH The great Pasterns.
• IIII The little Pasterns.
• KKKK The Coffin-bones.
• LLLL The little triangular Bones that cleave to the upper end of the great Pastern.
• MM The Os ilium or Haunch-bone.

• N The Os coxendicis or Hip-bone.
• OO The Os pubis or Share-bone.
• PP The Thigh-bones.
• QQ The little Bone of the Stifle, called Patella.
• RRRRRR The Cartilages at the end of the Ribs.
• SSSSSS The seventeen Ribs.
• TTTTTT The upper end of the Ribs where they are articulated into the Vertebrae of the Chest.
• V The Os hyoides, in situ.
• W The lower Jaw.
• X The upper Jaw.
• Y The Os occipitis or Noll-bone.
• 1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15.16.17. Are the seventeen Verte∣brae of the Chest.
• 1.2.3.4.5.6.7. The seven Vertebrae of the Loins.
• 1.2.3.4.5.6. The six upper Productions or Processes of the holy Bone. From the Cypher 1. to 18. are represented the eighteen Bones of the Rump or Dock.
• I.II.III.IV.V.VI.VII. Shew the seven Vertebrae or Rack-bones of the Neck.

[illustration] anatomical view of a horse's skeleton

TAB. XLIV. pag. 234.

CHAP. XVII. Of the Hoofs of an Horse answering to the Nails of a Man's Fingers or Toes.

How the Hoofs are nourished, and how fa∣stened upon the Foot.

COncerning the Nails of a Man's Fingers and Toes (to which the Hoofs of Horses bear a resemblance) learned Men are divided into several opinions about their generation. Hippocrates is affirmed to be of opinion, that they are made of a glutinous matter or moisture parch∣ed and dried by heat, and driven to the extreme parts. Empedocles thinks them to be made of the extremities of the Nerves, calling them Nervo∣rum clausulas summas, the utmost terminations or boundaries of the Nerves; and that therefore when these fall off, it is a sign of great weak∣ness. Aristotle in lib. 2. cap. 6. de generatione Animal. saith, that the Nails, Hairs, Beaks of Birds, Hoofs of Beasts, and such like, are ingen∣dred of adventitious aliment. And lastly, Columbus thinks they take their original partly from the Skin, and partly from the Tendons of the Muscles which move the Fingers and Toes, and that they are encreased like the Teeth by an apposition of aliment to their root.

As for the Hoofs of Horses, whatever be their original matter, out of which they are formed, their growth seems to be (according to the opi∣nion of the last mentioned Authour) from the addition of new particles to their roots, which drive down successively those before them. They are of a middle substance betwixt Bones and Gristles: not so hard as Bones, for then they would be apt to splinter and break; nor so soft as Gristles, for if they were, they could not support so great a bulk as

the Body of an Horse, much less endure to travel amongst stones, &c. But they are of a horney substance, without sense, growing pretty firmly to the parts included within them, and fastened to the Coffin-bone by a Ligament that proceeds from their top or root, which root the Skin also somewhat encompasseth.

Under them lie many twigs of Nerves, and Tendons of Muscles, which run even to the very bottom of the Hoof or Soal of the Foot, up∣on pricking of which with a Nail or the like, or when they are but bruised with riding in hard way, the Horse presently bemoans himself, as was more at large shewed before in the twelfth Chapter of this Book.

CHAP. XVIII. Of a Cartilage or Gristle.

A Gristle what. Their uses.

AS an Appendix to the history or doctrine of the Bones, it will not be unnecessary to speak somewhat of the Cartilages or Gristles: es∣pecially seeing through the whole discourse of this Fifth Book we have had occasion ever and anon to mention them, but have not as yet given any particular account of them; as neither of a Ligament, which we have also often mentioned: but of this latter in the next Chapter, and onely of the Gristles in this, because they come nearest to the nature of Bones.

A Cartilage is a similar part, cold and dry, made (as some Authours affirm) out of the most glutinous part of the Seed. They are slexible and without sense, and are much softer than a Bone, though the nature of the one is not so much distant from the other, but that several Gristles in tract of time, and as the Creatures grow old, harden into Bones.

The uses of the Gristles are many. For first they help the motion of the Bones at their jointings one with another. For which end in the Joints that are subject to great motions, the edges of the Sinus, or Cups and Cavities of the Bones that articulate one with another, are generally lined with a Gristle, to make the motion more glib and secure; such are the articulation of the Shoulder-bone with the Shoulder-blade, of the Thigh-bone with the Hip-bone, and several others.

A second use of the Gristles is by yielding, a little to give way to the violence of outward injuries; whereas if Bones had been in their places, they would have been in danger of breaking, from their hardness and stiffness: for which end the ends of many Bones which are exposed to external injuries are furnished with Gristles, as the Nose and Ears, and the like.

Another use of the Gristles is, that by their mediation, as it were by a glue, some Bones might be conjoined; as the Share-bones in particular are by this means united to one another.

There are many other peculiar uses of particular Gristles, some belong∣ing to the Sight, some to the Hearing, some to Smelling, some to Respi∣ration or breathing, and the like; all which have their several denomi∣nations:

But of these we have already treated as they fell in our way, when we discoursed of the parts to which each did belong. I shall not therefore need to inlarge any further upon them in this place.

CHAP. XIX. Of a Ligament.

A Ligament what. Their diffe∣rences. Their uses.

AS the lubricity or slipperiness of Gristles makes the motion of the Bones more easie and glib; so the Ligaments do secure that motion by strengthning the articulation of one Bone with another.

A Ligament is a similar part, cold and dry, of a middle nature betwixt a Gristle and a Membrane; harder than Membranes, lest in vehement motions they should be broken; and softer than Gristles, that they might the more easily follow and obey the Muscles which move the Bones. Those that tie one Bone to another are generally insensible, as well be∣cause they receive no Nerves into them, as also lest being perpetually moved they should breed perpetual pain. But such as tie other parts, as the Ligaments of the Liver, of the Womb, the bridle of the Tongue, &c. these are endued with sense.

The differences of Ligaments are many, being taken first from their substance, whence some are said to be hard, others soft, the former of which are called cartilaginous, and the latter membranous Ligaments. The epithet of membranous is likewise given to some from their breadth, in opposition whereto others are called nervous, because they are round like Nerves.

They are also distinguished from their original and insertion; for some arise from Bones, some from Gristles, and some from Membranes; and are accordingly diversly inserted. And lastly they are differenced from their strength and figure. To give particular instances of all which, would be a needless curiosity: I shall therefore break off when I have added a word of their use.

The uses of the Ligaments, as well as Gristles, are many: for first they confirm and strengthen the articulations of the Bones: they also bind and fasten the Bones to one another where there is no true articulation. Third∣ly, they serve as an outward garment to the Tendons of the Muscles, ma∣ny of which are throughout their whole length covered with Ligaments and Membranes. Fourthly, they interpose like a Pillow betwixt the Bones and the Tendons of the Muscles. Fifthly and lastly, some of them do serve to suspend the Bowels, that they should not fall with their great weight, such are the Ligaments of the Liver, &c.

The End of the Fifth Book.

Notes

• * 13.1

  See Bartho∣lin, lib. 2. chap. 5.
• * 16.1

  See Willis Part 2. Sect. 1. cap. 1. of his Pharmaceu∣tice ratio∣nalis.
• * 17.1

  Willis Phar∣maceut. Ra∣tion. Part. 2. sect. 1. cap. 1.